ΑΠΟΚΑΛΥΨΙΣΙΩΑΝΝΟΥ — — — — — — Chap. 1:1-3. Superscription: in which the contents and Writer of the book are declared, and the importance of its subject indicated by a blessing on those who shall read and hear it. The Revelation (ἀποκάλυψίςἐστινἡτῶνἱερῶνμυστηρίωνδήλωσις , καταυγαζομένουτοῦἡγεμονικοῦτῆςψυχῆς , εἴτεδιὰθείωνὀνειράτων , εἴτεκαθ ʼ ὕπαρἐκθείαςἐλλάμψεως . Arethas. Here, the word need not be taken in any but this its general sense, as in 2 Corinthians 12:1, where it is plural; the particular purpose of this revelation follows, with the inf. δεῖξαι below, ἀποκάλυψις is one of those words which have passed, in their later usage, from indicating the act, to signify that with which the act is concerned: so καύχησις , 2 Corinthians 1:12, 2 Corinthians 7:14. Jerome on Galatians 1:11, Galatians 1:12, vol. vii. p. 387, says: “ Verbum ipsum ἀποκαλύψεως , id est, revelationis, proprie scripturarum est, et a nullo sapientum sæ culi apud Græ cos usurpatum.” But Plutarch, de placit. philos. i. 7, τίςἐστινὁθεός , says that Euripides was an atheist, but ἀποκαλύψασθαιοὐκἠθέλησε , δεδοικωςτὸνἄρειονπάγον . Porphyry’ s use of the word, vit. Plotin. c. 16, is no exception. It is said to be later Greek for ἀνακαλ .) of Jesus Christ (how is this genitive to be understood? Is our Lord the subject or the object? Clearly here the former: for it is not Christ who is here revealed, except in a remote sense: but Christ who reveals, as is plain in what follows: see also ref. Ebrard makes the gen. possessive, which comes to the same thing. Heinrichs understands ἀποκ . Ἰ . χρ . of the appearance of our Lord which is related below, after St. Paul’ s manner (but not in 2 Corinthians 12:1), and St. Peter’ s (reff.: and 1 Peter 4:13, 1 Peter 5:1), see also Luke 17:30. But see below. The not very important distinctions between ἀποκάλυψις and its result προφητεία are laid down at great length in Hengstenberg, h. 1.), which God (the Father) gave to Him (Stern asks, “ How are we to understand this? Is not Christ very God, of one essence with the Father from eternity? Did He not, by virtue of the omniscience of His divine nature, know as exactly as the Father, what should be the process of the world’ s history, what the fate of the Church? What purpose was served by a revelation from God to Jesus?” He proceeds to say that the words cannot refer merely to the revelation as made to us, but are clearly against such an interpretation: and gives, at some length and very well, that which in one form or other all will accept as the true explanation, in accordance with John 7:16, John 7:14:10, John 7:17:7, John 7:8. The man Christ Jesus, even in his glorified state, receives from the Father, by his hypostatic union with Him, that revelation which by His Spirit He imparts to His Church. For, Acts 1:7, the times and seasons are kept by the Father in his own power: and of the day and the hour knoweth no man, not the angels in heaven, nor even the Son, but the Father only, Mark 13:32. I may observe, that the coincidence in statement of this deep point of doctrine between the Gospel of St. John and the Apocalypse, is at least remarkable), to shew (is this infinitive of the purpose dependent on ἔδωκεν , or on the subst. ἀποκάλυψις Is it the purpose of God in giving, or the purpose of the revelation in revealing, that is asserted? At all events, Heinrichs is wrong, who takes ἣνἔδωκενδεῖξαι together, “ which God gave (empowered) Him to shew.” But of the others, the construction with ἔδωκεν is the more probable, as being the more usual: “ that He might shew,” &c. δεῖξαι must not here be confined to its stricter meaning of shewing in vision, as Hengst.; for then, as De W. remarks, we must confine τοῖςδούλοιςαὐτ . to the Apocalyptic Seer alone: but must be taken in its wider sense of exhibiting as knowledge, informing of. So in Matthew 16:21: where however Hengst. strangely denies this meaning, and upholds that of prove, demonstrate: which our Lord did not do till after His resurrection) to His (Christ’ s, most probably, as below in this verse, and in ref.: for thus the αὐτός is kept to the same subject throughout) servants (here meaning all Christians, not, as Hengst., prophets only: indeed his sense of δεῖξαι , which necessitates this, brings confusion into the whole sentence. That John himself is one of these δοῦλοι below, does not affect this general meaning) what things must (by the necessity of the divine decree: see besides reff., Matthew 17:10, al.) come to pass shortly (i. e. ‘ before long:’ see reff. especially Luke. The context, the repetition below, ὁγὰρκαιρὸςἐγγύς , and the parallel ch. 22:6, followed ib. 7 by ἰδοὺἔρχομαιταχύ , fix this meaning here, as distinguished from the other of ‘ swiftly,’ which indeed would be hardly intelligible with the historic aorist γενέσθαι . This expression, as De W. well remarks, must not be urged to signify that the events of apocalyptic prophecy were to be close at hand: for we have a key to its meaning in Luke 18:7, Luke 18:8, where our Lord says, ὁδὲθεὸςοὐμὴποιήσειτὴνἐκδίκησιντῶνἐκλεκτῶναὐτοῦτῶνβοώντωναὐτῷἡμέραςκ . νυκτός , καὶμακροθυμεῖἐπ ʼ αὐτοῖς ; λέγωὑμῖνὅτιποιήσειτὴνἐκδίκησιναὐτῶνἐντάχει : where long delay is evidently implied. Hengstenberg repudiates this, and says it is self-evident that these words can only be adduced here “ nach unrichtigen Auslegung.” But surely the two cases are exactly parallel: and Hengst.’ s strong language, here as elsewhere, proves nothing. His own interpretation of the words, natural as he seems to think it, is forced and unwarrantable. He (in common with many others) takes them to mean that the events spoken of would very soon begin to take place. The axe, he says, lay at the root of the Roman Empire when John wrote this, as it did at the root of the Persian Empire when Daniel wrote. But this interpretation is not borne out by the Greek, ἃδεῖγενέσθαιἐντάχει is not “ which must soon begin to come to pass,” but, in the well-known sense of the aorist, “ which, in their entirety, must soon come to pass:” γενέσθαι being in fact, a past tense, “ must have come to pass,” “ be fulfilled:” so Bengel most truly, “ Totus liber tanquam unum verbum uno momento pronunciatione debet accipi.” So that we are driven to the very same sense of ἐντάχει as that in Luk_18 above, viz. to God’ s speedy time, though He seem to delay: in spite of the scorn which Hengst. pours on this meaning. His maxim, that a Prophet, speaking to men, must speak according to men’ s ideas, is quite worthless, and may be confuted by any similar prophetic saying, even by the one which he brings in its favour, Haggai 2:7: and his complaint, that thus we make the Seer and even the Lord Himself like bad physicians who delude their patients with false hopes (so, in the main, Stern also), is unworthy of a Christian Expositor, after our Lord’ s own plain use of the same method of speech again and again in His prophecies in the Gospels and in this book. It remains to observe, that these words cannot with any fairness be used as furnishing a guide to the interpretation of the prophecy. They are far rather to be regarded as a prophetic formula (see Beza), common with him to whom a thousand years are as one day, and used in order to teach us how short our time, and the time of this our world, is. See, on the whole, Ebrard’ s able note, and his remarks on the absurdity of Hengstenberg’ s pressing the words in favour of his præ terist scheme. τὴνἔκβασινδὲτῶνχρηματιζομένωνἐντάχειὑπισχνεῖταιπροβῆναι , οὐχὡςἔτυχεν , ἀλλὰπαραμετρῶντὰἀνθρώπινατοῖςθείοις , οἷςκαὶτἀπολυχρονίωςκαὶχιλιαστῶςἐκτελούμεναὡςἡχθὲςἡμέρα , καὶἡἐννυκτὶφυλακὴκρίνεται . Arethas. There is a profitable and consolatory exegesis of the words in Ambrose Ansbert, B. P. M. ix. pt. 2, p. 310. Dionysius of Alexandria, as cited in H. E. vii. 25, omits the words ἃδεῖγενέσθαι , joining δεῖξαι with ἐντάχει ); and He (Ἰησοῦςχριστός , not ὁθεός , see ch. 22:16: the subject is changed, and the relative construction abandoned. So almost all Commentators) signified (it) (it is remarkable (see reff.), that with one exception, this prophetic use of σημαίνω is confined in the N. T. to the Evangelist St. John) sending by His angel (the aor. part. is contemporary with the aor. verb, not necessarily antecedent to it. ἀποστ . διὰ , as in reff. No word, as τὴνἀποκάλυψιν , need be supplied, the verb being used absolutely after the manner of the Heb. ש ׁ ָ ל ַ ח ב ּ ְ י ָ ד of Exodus 4:13 and ref. 2 Kings. Still less must διὰ be taken with ἐσήμανεν , as Hengst. The Angel mentioned is perhaps the same who informs the Seer in ch. 17:1, 7, 15, 19:9, 21:9, 22:1, 6, which latter place takes up this; ib. 8 ff.; and who is spoken of by our Lord ib. 16. It is remarkable that this angel does not appear as the imparter of the visions until ch. 17. Some indeed, as Ewald, have fancied that they trace his presence in ch. 4:1 and throughout: but ch. 17:1 is too manifestly the introduction to a new appearance for this to be the case; and previously to that the Seer receives his information from different persons. Our Lord Himself opens the Apocalyptic vision. It is another voice which calls John up to the place of heavenly vision, ch. 4:1. In 7:13, one of the four and twenty elders speaks to him; in 10:8, it is the former voice again which addresses him, and in ib. 9, it is the angel who stands on the earth and the sea that gives him the book. Only in the great close of the prophecy, opening with ch. 17, does one angel stand by him; referred to, as here, under the name ὁἄγγελος . In the visions of Daniel and Zechariah an angel mediated: Daniel 8:16, Daniel 9:20, Daniel 10:10 ff., Zechariah 1:1, Zechariah 1:19, al.) to His servant John (on the whole question of the writer of the book, see prolegomena), 2. who testified of the word of God and the testimony of Jesus Christ, whatsoever things he saw (these words must, in all fairness of construction, be referred to this present book, and not, as by some of the older Expositors, and recently by Ebrard, to the Gospel of St. John. The reasons given by Ebrard for such reference will not hold. He objects to ἐμαρτύρησεν being taken of this book, that such a use of the aor. would be peculiar to the Epistolary style, whereas this book, though containing Epistles, is not itself an Epistle. Even were the usage thus confined, it might be answered from verse 4, that the whole is in an Epistolary form. But the usage is not thus confined, as every scholar knows. Witness Thucyd. i. 1, ΘουκυδίδηςἈθηναῖοςξυνέγραψετὸνπόλεμονκ .τ .λ . Again, Ebrard objects that the sense thus obtained would be a strange one: “ God gave the Revelation to Christ; He signified it by His angel to John, which last hereby makes it known.” But I own I am unable to see any strangeness in it. It seems to me the obvious way in which a faithful account of this Revelation would be prefaced by its Writer. On the other side, the objections to Ebrard’ s reference are to me insuperable. First, as to its introduction with the simple relative ὅς . We may safely say that had any previous writing or act been intended, we should have had ὃςκαί , or in St. John’ s simple style, even more than this, ὃςκαὶτὸπρότερον , or ὃςκαὶἐνἄλλῳβιβλίῳ . The ὅς as it stands, I submit, carries on the action, and does not identify John as the same who at a previous time did some other action. Next, as to the things witnessed. The words ὁλόγοςτοῦθεοῦκ . ἡμαρτυρίαἸ . χρ . cannot with any likelihood be taken to mean “ the (personal) Word of God, and the testimony of Jesus Christ;” for why, if the former term refer to Christ personally, should He be introduced in the second member under a different name? Besides, the words occur again below, ver. 9, as indicating the reason why John was in the island Patmos; and there surely they cannot refer to his written Gospel, but must be understood of his testimony for Christ in life and words: moreover, ἡμαρτυρίαἸησοῦ is itself otherwise explained in this very book, ch. 19:10. But there is yet another objection to the supposed reference to the Gospel, arising from the last words, ὅσαεἶδεν . First, the very adjective ὅσα refutes it. For the Evangelist distinctly tells us, John 20:30, that in writing his Gospel, he did not set down ὅσαεἶδεν , but only a portion of the things which Jesus did in the presence of His disciples, whereas in the case of this Revelation it was otherwise: he set down all which he saw, as a faithful transmitter of the Apocalyptic vision to the churches. But still more does the verb εἶδεν carry this refutation. In no place in the Gospel does St. John use this verb of his eye-witnessing as the foundation of his testimony; indeed he only uses it of himself at all on two occasions, John 1:40, and 20:8. But in this book, it is the word in regular and constant use, of the seeing of the Apocalyptic visions; being thus used in it no less than 55 times. And some of these usages are such that there can be no doubt this place is connected with them; e. g., ver. 19, γράψονοὖνἃεἶδες , and the repetition itself so frequently occurring καὶεἶδονκαὶἰδού . Taken then as representing the present book, τὸνλόγον here will be the aggregate of οἱλόγοι ver. 3: ἡμαρτυρίαἸης . χρ . will be the πνεῦματῆςπροφητείας , embodied in writing for the Church in all ages). 3. Blessed is (or be, in the ordinary meaning of μακάριος : not necessarily referring on to eternal blessedness, as Hengst.) he that readeth, and they that hear the words of the prophecy and observe the things written in it; for the time is near (it can hardly be reasonably denied that in the ὁἀναγινώσκων and the οἱἀκούοντες , the Apostle had in his mind the one public reader and the many hearers. Ebrard attempts to deny this, but it seems to me unsuccessfully. His instance of St. John’ s passing from a singular to a plural, πᾶςὀφθαλμός , καὶοἵτινεςαὐτὸνἐξεκέντησαν , ver. 7, would be applicable only if we had here πᾶςὁἀναγινώσκων . Considering that no such transition is elsewhere found, we can hardly escape the inference that it was intended. And so the great majority of Commentators: so Andreas (“ plures uno legente possunt audire,” Gloss. ord.), , Lyra , &c.: Bengel , Ewald, Hengst., De Wette, Stern, Grä ber, &c. Others have explained the change of number variously: e. g., Beza, ex Hebraismo; Cotter (in Pool), “ quia soli legimus, audimus conjuncti:” Ribera, “ quoniam multo plures audiunt, quam legunt:” &c. If the words are to be understood as above, they form at least a solemn rebuke to the practice of the Church of England, which omits with one or two exceptions the whole of this book from her public readings. Not one word of the precious messages of the Spirit to the Churches is ever heard in the public services of a Church never weary of appealing to her Scriptural liturgies. Surely it is high time, that such an omission should be supplied. Notice that not three classes of persons, but two only, are here indicated: he that reads, and they that hear and do. Had there been an article before τηροῦντες , these latter would have formed a separate class from the ἀκούοντες . The E. V. is right in the sense, in rendering τῆςπροφ ., ‘ this prophecy:’ it = τῆςπροφ . τοῦβιβλίουτούτου , ch. 22:7. τὰἐναὐτῇγεγραμμένα are the several exhortations to repentance, faith, patience, obedience, prayer, watchfulness, stedfastness, which are scattered up and down in the prophecy. The time being near makes the book of the more importance, and the blessedness of reading and observing it greater. The nearness spoken of is to be understood as the ἐντάχει , ver. 1, which see. We know little now of relative nearness and distance in point of time: when the day of the Lord shall have opened our eyes to the true measure, we shall see, how near it always was). Ch. 1:4-3:22. Introduction to the prophecy, in the form of a sevenfold Epistle to the seven churches of Asia. And herein, vv. 4-6, address and greeting, ending with doxology. (Ebrard, who seems to love singularity for its own sake, objects to the above arrangement, because the sevenfold epistle has not yet begun, and prefers calling this a dedicatory title to the whole book. But the other view is far simpler and better. The sevenfold Epistle is clearly before St. John’ s mind, and, full of the images of the vision which he had seen, he only interrupts it by solemn ejaculatory references to the glories of that vision and the sublime announcement of the Lord’ s coming, and then hastens on to introduce it by a prefatory account of his own circumstances when the Epistles were entrusted to him and of the appearance of the Lord who thus entrusted them.) John to the seven churches which are in Asia (the form of address is exactly that in the Epistles of St. Paul: see Romans 1:1 ff., 1 Corinthians 1:1 ff., &c. That St. Paul in Rom. and elsewhere is careful to designate himself and his office, and St. John introduces himself without any such designation, belongs doubtless in part to the individual character of the two Apostles, but is besides a strong testimony that the John who here writes needed no such designation in the eyes of those to whom he was writing. See this, and other evidence as to the authorship, urged in the prolegomena. See on the seven churches prolegg. § iii. 7 ff. Ἀσία , as always in the N. T., is the proconsular province so called. “ Constabat,— ut a Cicerone alicubi dicitur illa proconsularis Asia, quæ inter præ cipuas Romani orbis provincias olim habita,— ex Phrygia, Mysia, Caria, Lydia; sub quibus insuper, sub Mysia nempe et Lydia, intelligi debent Ionia et Æ olis, ac addi præ terea vicinæ maris Æ gæ i insulæ . Qui amplissimus terrarum tractus, præ aliis Romani orbis provinciis, ingenti imprimis urbium, et multarum ex iis insignium et magnarum, numero gaudebat. Dicebatur Proconsularis, quod eadem a viro consulari sub Proconsulis nomine regebatur.” Spanheim de usu numismatum, p. 610 (from Hengstenb.)); grace be to you and peace (so St. Paul in all his Epistles except the two to Timothy) from Him who is and who was and who is to come , and ὁἐρχόμενος : and it follows from what is remarked above that the meaning of ἐρχόμενος is not here to be pressed as referring to any future coming, any more than in its English representative, “ He that is to come.” By doing so we should confuse the meaning of the compound appellation which evidently is all to be applied to the Father, ὡςαὐτοῦπεριέχοντοςἐνἑαυτῷπάντωντῶνὄντωντὴνἀρχὴνκαὶτὰμέσακαὶτὰτελευταῖα , as the second alternative in the Catena. In the first (Arethas?) ὁὤν is supposed to mean the Father (ἐγὼεἰμὶὁὤν , as said to Moses), ὁἦν the Son , and ὁἐρχόμενος the Spirit, as ever proceeding forth and descending on the Church. Hengstenb., who presses the literal sense of ἐρχόμενος , avoids this confusion, but falls into that of making the covenant Jehovah, Father, Son, and Spirit, come to judge the world and the Church. At least so it would seem: for when he comes to this the weak part of his exegesis, he obscures his meaning by raising a cloud of rhetorical description of what shall take place at that coming. He connects ἐρχόμενος with ἰδοὺἔρχεταιμετὰτῶννεφ . below, in spite of the καὶἀπὸ … καὶἀπό intervening. It is needless to say, that that ἔρχεται is to be referred to the last subject only, viz. to Ἰησοῦςχριστός . And wherever the ἔρχομαιταχύ , with which he also connects it, occurs, it is distinctly said of the glorified Saviour), and from the seven spirits which (are) before His throne (Andreas, in catena, takes these for the seven principal angels (ch. 8:2): so , Beza, Lyra, Ribera, Hammond, Bossuet, Wetst., al. But this is highly improbable, as these angels are never called πνεύματα , and as surely mere creatures, however exalted, would not be equalized with the Father and the Son as fountains of grace. The common view is doubtless right, which regards the seven as τὰςἐνεργείαςτοῦἁγίουπνεύματος (so τινές in catena: , , , al.):— “ Thou the anointing Spirit art, Who dost thy sevenfold gifts impart:” but rather perhaps to be regarded as expressing His plenitude and perfection, than to be separately assigned as (but qu.?) in the following lines of the hymn Veni Creator Spiritus. The key to this expression, which is an anticipation of the visions afterwards to be related, is ch. 5:6, where see notes: as also on ch. 4:5. The ἑπτά can hardly be entirely without allusion to the ἑπτὰἐκκλησίαι , and to the sevenfold imagery throughout. The number seven denotes completeness, and, as Schö ttgen shews h. 1., was much noted by the Jewish Commentators as occurring in the O. T. The seven spirits betoken the completeness and universality of working of God’ s Holy Spirit, as the seven churches typify and indicate the whole church. The reference to Isaiah 11:2 is but lamely made out, there being there but six energies of the Spirit mentioned. That to Zechariah 4:2, Zechariah 4:10 is more to the point: see notes as above. The ἅ , without its verb, is solœ cistic), and from Jesus Christ (as we have before had the Father and the Holy Spirit mentioned as the sources of grace and peace; so now the Son, coming last, on account of that which is to follow respecting Him: “ quia de illo continuanda erat oratio,” Vitr., who also notices that what follows has respect to His threefold office of Prophet, King, and Priest: see however below), the faithful witness (see John 18:37, εἰςτοῦτοἐλήλυθαεἰςτὸνκόσμον , ἵναμαρτυρήσωτῇἀληθείᾳ . It is to the general mission of the Redeemer to bear witness to the truth, and not merely to the apocalyptic portion of His testimony which is to follow (De W.), that this title must be referred. This book (ver. 2) is ἡμαρτυρίαἸησοῦχρ .: but the title reaches far wider. Embracing as it does that μαρτυρία before Pontius Pilate, and indeed that of His whole life of witnessing to the truth, we can perhaps hardly say that it marks out his prophetic office with sufficient distinctness for us to believe it indicated here), the first-born of the dead (death is regarded as the womb of the earth, from which the resurrection is the birth: see note on ref. Col.: and Acts 2:24 note. πρωτότοκος must not with Hengst. be diluted into πρῶτος . The ἀπαρχὴτῶνκεκοιμημένων , 1 Corinthians 15:20, is quite a different figure), and the Ruler of the kings of the earth (this kingly office of Christ is reached through his death and resurrection. In Ps. 88:27, the combination of titles is much as here, κἀγὼπρωτότοκονθήσομαιαὐτόν , ὑψηλὸνπαρὰτοῖςβασιλεῦσιτῆςγῆς . See also Isaiah 55:4, ἰδοὺμαρτύριονἐνἔθνεσινἔδωκααὐτόν , ἄρχοντακαὶπροστάσσονταἔθνεσιν . “ That which the Tempter held forth to Jesus, Matthew 4:8, on condition of worshipping him, He has now attained by the way of his humiliation unto death: viz. victory over the world, John 16:33.” De Wette). Now follows, consequent upon the glorious titles of Christ which have been enumerated, an ascription of praise to Him for His inestimable love to us. Unto Him that loveth us (ἀγαπῶντι ,— present part., not imperf. as Bengel,— includes in itself ἀγαπήσαντι , which is the feebler, as it is the more obvious reading. It is His ever-abiding character, that He loveth His own, John 13:1: out of that love sprang the mighty act of love which follows: but it did not exhaust its infinite depth: it endures now, as then. The waiting till He become, in the unfolding of the Father’ s purposes, the acknowledged Head over his Church, is in reality as great a proof of that love now, as the Cross was then) and washed (or, loosed) us from our sins in His blood (the aor. points to a definite event, viz. his sacrifice of Himself. In such an image as this, which occurs again ch. 7:14 we have enwrapped together the double virtue of the atoning blood of Christ in justification, the deliverance from the guilt of sin, and sanctification, the deliverance from the power of sin: the forensic and the inherent purity, of both which it is the efficient medium: of the former by its application in faith, of the latter by such faith, in its power, uniting us to Him who is filled with the Spirit of holiness. See 1 John 1:7 and note), 6. and He made (the breaking up of the participial into the direct construction is Hebraistic: so De W., al. “ It belongs to the delicacy of the Hebrew diction, to follow up the participle which gives the tone to the sentence by finite verbs, which, through the influence of the relative notion embodied in the participle, are themselves to be taken as conditioning clauses.” Delitzsch on Habak. (in Hengst.)) as a kingdom (viz. the kingdom of God or of heaven, so much spoken of by our Lord Himself and his Apostles: consisting of those who are His, and consummated at His glorious coming. This kingdom is one in which his saints will themselves reign, see the parallel place ch. 5:10, where καὶβασιλεύσουσινἐπὶτῆςγῆς is added: and Daniel 7:27: but above all the place which is here referred to, Exodus 19:6, ὑμεῖςδὲἔσεσθέμοιβασίλειονἱεράτευμακαὶἔθνοςἅγιον (1 Peter 2:9)), priests (the βασιλείαν was the collective description: ἱερεῖς is the individual designation. See on the union of the two characters in the individual Christian, the note on 1 Peter 2:9) to (as belonging to; the Father being the ultimate object of reference, as His will is the origin, and His glory the result, of all that is brought about by the mediatorial work of Christ) God and His Father (to Him who is God and His Father: or, to His God and Father. The former is the more probable here, Ebr. remarks, on account of St. John’ s habit of repeating the possessive genitive after words of possession: e. g. ch. 6:11, οἱσύνδουλοιαὐτῶνκ . οἱἀδελφοὶαὐτῶν : 9:21, ἐκτῶνφόνωναὐτῶνοὔτεἐκτ . φαρμάκωναὐτῶνοὔτεἐκ , &c.: John 2:12, which is more to the point here,— ἡμήτηραὐτοῦκ . οἱἀδελφοὶ [αὐτοῦ ] κ . οἱμαθηταὶαὐτοῦ . See notes on the places where the expression occurs in St. Paul (reff. Rom. Eph.), where I have taken the other rendering), to Him be (or, is, belongs: the like ambiguity is found in all doxological sentences) the glory and the might unto the ages (i. e. for ever. See note on Galatians 1:5): Amen. 7, 8. A solemn announcement of the coming of Christ, and declaration, by way of ratification, of the majesty and omnipotence of God (see below). Behold He (the Person last spoken of: the subject being continued from the preceding verses) cometh with the clouds (τῶν , viz. of heaven: so expressed in reff. Dan., and Mark: cf. ἐντῇνεφέλῃ , ch. 11:12), and every eye shall see Him (by a well-known figure, not merely Hebraistic but common to all tongues, the acting member is said to do that which the man does by its means. This is to be understood of the whole human race, risen and summoned before Him), and (among them: the καί does not couple a separate class, but selects a prominent one) they which pierced Him (see John 19:36 f. and note. As there St. John evidently shews what a deep impression the whole circumstance here referred to produced on his own mind, so it is remarkable here that he should again take up the prophecy of Zechariah (ref.) which he there cites, and speak of it as fulfilled. That this should be so, and that it should be done with the same word ἐξεκέντησαν , not found in the LXX of the passage, is a strong presumption that the Gospel and the Apocalypse were written by the same person. It is true, that Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion have used the verb ἐκκεντεῖν ; but this hardly comes into consideration as affecting this presumption. The persons intended in this expression are beyond doubt those to whom our Lord prophesied in like terms, Matthew 26:64; viz. those who were His murderers, whether the Jews who delivered Him to be crucified, or the Romans, who actually inflicted His death. That the meaning must not here be generalized to signify all who have by their sins crucified the Son of God afresh, is plain from the consideration that this class, οἵτινες , are taken out from among the πᾶςὀφθαλμός which precedes, whereas on that supposition they would be identical with it; for we all have pierced Him in this sense), and all the tribes of the earth shall mourn at Him (i. e. their mourning shall be directed towards Him as its object: in fear for themselves in regard to the consequences of his coming: similarly πρόςτι , John 13:28. The account to be given of the meaning in ref. 2 Kings, ἐκόψατοἐπὶτὸνἄνδρααὐτῆς , is in fact the same, the circumstances only making the difference. In Zechariah 12:10, both meanings are united. The prophecy is in allusion to Matthew 24:30; and its sense, that all, even the holiest of men, shall mourn at the visible approach of that day. But as Bengel well remarks, there will be then two kinds of mourning: “ præ terrore hostili,” and “ præ terrore pœ nitentiali.” The former will prevail in the impenitent and careless world; the latter even in the comforted and rejoicing church. The holiest saint when that Presence is manifested, in the midst of his “ Lo, this is our God; we have waited for Him, and He will save us,” will personally feel with St. Peter, “ Depart from me, for I am a sinful man, O Lord.” The whole is an adaptation and amplification of the words of Zechariah, l. c. See Vitringa’ s note. But we must not adopt his notion, taken up also by Hengst., “ Venire dicitur Christus to nubibus cœ li, quoties gloriam majestatemque suam in singularibus gratiæ , severitatis et potentiæ suæ effectis demonstrat, et se ecclesiæ quasi præ sentem exhibet:” for thus we confuse and indeed stultify the whole of this solemn announcement. The certainty of Christ’ s revealing Himself to his Church in mercies and judgments needed no such asseveration as is here used: but the certainty of His great personal second coming did and still does; being the one fact which the world and the church alike are disposed to lose sight of). Yea, Amen (both these words are used in ref. 2 Cor. as forms of ratification. The former is Greek, the latter Hebrew: and both together answer to the “ Thus saith the Lord” of the prophets: τούτοιςδὲτοῖςεἰρημένοιςτὸβέβαιονἐπιμαρτυρῶν , ἐπεσφράγισεδιὰτοῦεἰπεῖνναὶκαὶἀμήν . τοῦναὶμὲνἐξἙλληνικῆςσυνηθείαςτὸἀμετάστατοντῶνεἰρηένωνἐξακριβοῦντος , τοῦδὲἀμὴνπαρ ʼ Ἑβραίοις , εἰςτὸμηδὲνἂνγενέσθαιἐμποδὼνμὴἐκβῆναιτὰἠπειλημέναἐπαγομένου . Andr. in Catena). I am the Alpha and the Omega, saith the Lord God, He that is and that was and that is to come, the Almighty (by whom are these words spoken? Certainly as they here stand, with κύριοςὁθεός , and ὁπαντοκράτωρ , they must be understood as uttered by the Eternal Father. And similarly we find Him that sitteth on the throne speaking in ch. 21:5 ff. In our ver. 17, and in ch. 22:13, it is our Lord who speaks. Nor need we be surprised, that He who is of one essence with the Father should assert of Himself the same eternal being as the Father. This need not lead us to force the reference of any passage, but each must be ruled by considerations of its own context. Schö ttgen gives examples of the Rabbinical usage of “ ab Aleph usque ad Tau,” to signify “ completely,” “ entirely:” and of the word א ת being a name of the Shechinah, because it comprehends all the letters. The ἀρχὴκ . τέλος was a correct gloss, from ch. 21:6, 22:13). ὁπαντοκράτωρ answers in the LXX to the Hebr. צ ְ ב ָ א ו ֹ ת also to ש ׁ ַ ד ּ ַ י . See note on Romans 9:29. 9-20. Introduction to the Epistles. Appearance of our Lord to St. John, and command to write what he saw, and to send it to the seven churches. 9. Description of the Writer, and of the place where the Revelation was seen. I John (so again ch. 22:8: so Daniel 8:1, 9:2, 10:2) your brother (no inference can be drawn against the apostleship of the Writer from this his designation of himself. Indeed from his entire silence respecting himself in his Gospel, we may well believe that here, where mention of his name was absolutely required, it would be introduced thus humbly and unobtrusively), and fellow-partaker in the tribulation and kingdom and endurance in Jesus (the construction and arrangement are peculiar. The conjunction of these terms seems to be made to express, a partaker, as in the kingdom, so in the tribulation and endurance which are in and by Christ: but the insertion of βασιλείᾳ between θλίψει and ὑπομονῇ is startling, and the effect of it must be to make the construction zeugmatic, ἐνχρ . Ἰ . not properly belonging to βασιλείᾳ . It can hardly be that the words are, as De W., “ ordnungslos neben einander gestellt.” More probably, the tribulation brings in the kingdom (Acts 14:22), and then as a corrective to the idea that the kingdom in its blessed fulness was yet present, the ὑπομονή is subjoined. “ Tres hæ reditatum uncias introducit Johannes, quibus se participem ostendit. Sed media harum, i. e. regnum, possideri non potest, nisi et hic tribulatio exercuerit, et illic patientia defenderit.” Ansbert), was (“ befand mich:” not = ἦν , which announces the simple fact. When an event is notified with ἐγένετο , we express the meaning by “ came to pass:” when a person, we have no word which will do it) in the island which is called Patmos (see Prolegomena, § ii. par. 4) on account of the word of God and the testimony of Jesus (the substantives form the same expression as occurred before ver. 2, where see note. There they indicated this portion of the divine word and testimony, of which John was a faithful reporter. Whether their meaning is the same here, will depend partly on what sense we assign to the prep. διά . In St. Paul’ s usage, as in reff., it would here signify for the sake of, i. e. for the purpose of receiving: so that the Apostle would thus have gone to Patmos by special revelation in order to receive this ἀποκάλυψις . Again, keeping to this meaning of διὰ , these words may mean, that he had visited Patmos in pursuance of, for the purposes of, his ordinary apostolic employment, which might well be designated by these substantives. And such perhaps would have been our acceptation of the words, but that three objections intervene. 1) From what has preceded in this verse, a strong impression remains on the mind that St. John wrote this in a season of tribulation and persecution. Why should he throw over his address this tinge of suffering given by the θλῖψις and ὑπομονή , if this were not the case? De W. will not allow this: but to my mind Hofmann is quite right in pressing it (Weiss. u. Erfull. ii. 308). 2) The usage of our Writer himself in two passages where he speaks of death by persecution (reff.) shews that with him διὰ in this connexion is “ because of,” “ in consequence of.” De W. naively says that had it not been for these parallel places, such a meaning would never have been thought of here. We may as simply reply, that owing to those parallel places, it must be accepted here. St. John’ s own usage is a better guide in St. John’ s writings than that of St. Paul. And Origen’ s ear found no offence in this usage, for he incorporated it into his own sentence, … κατεδίκασετὸνἸωάννηνμαρτυροῦνταδιὰτὸντῆςἀληθείαςλόγονεἰςΠάτμοντὴννῆσον . See the passage, Prolegg. § i. par. 12. 3) An early patristic tradition relates that St. John was banished to Patmos. See the authorities in the Prolegg. ut supra, and the question discussed, whether we are justified in ascribing this tradition solely to our present passage. These considerations, mainly those arising from the passage itself, compel us, I believe, to understand the words of an exile in Patmos). 10, 11. I was in the Spirit (i. e. in a state of spiritual ecstasy or trance, becoming thereby receptive of the vision or revelation to follow. That this is the meaning is distinctly shewn by the same phrase occurring in ch. 4:2: where after seeing the door open in heaven, and hearing the ἀνάβαὧδε , he adds, εὐθέωςἐγενόμηνἐνπνεύματι . See also ch. 21:10. Ebrard well says, “ Der Rapport mit der Umgebung durch die Sinne ist unterbrochen, und ein Rapport mit der unsichtbaren Welt tritt ein:” “ connexion with surrounding objects through the senses is suspended, and a connexion with the invisible world established.” On the attempt made by some to give the words a different meaning, see below) on the Lord’ s day (i. e. on the first day of the week, kept by the Christian church as the weekly festival of the Lord’ s resurrection. On any probable hypothesis of the date of this book, this is the earliest mention of the day by this name. This circumstance, coupled with an exegetical bias, has led certain modern interpreters, of whom as far as I know, Wetstein was the first, to interpret the words of the day of the Lord’ s coming, ἡἡμέρατοῦκυρίου . So Zü llig, and in our own country, Drs. S. R. Maitland and Todd. But 1) the difficulty, of the thus early occurrence of this term, is no real one. Dr. Maitland says (see Todd’ s Lectures on the Apoc., Note B, p. 295), “ I know of nothing in the Scripture or in the works of the ante-Nicene Fathers on which to ground such an assumption.” To this we may answer, that the extent of Dr. Maitland’ s knowledge of the ante-Nicene Fathers does not, happily for us, decide the question. For, while he repudiates passages “ professedly (?) brought forward from Ignatius, Irenæ us, &c.,” those of Tertullian (“ die dominico jejunium nefas ducimus,” de coron. c. 3, vol. ii. p. 70: “ quomodo dominica solennia celebrabimus,” de fug. pers. c. 14, p. 119), Dionysius of Corinth (τὴνσήμερονοὖνκυριακὴνἁγίανἡμέρανδιηγάγομεν , ἐνᾗἀνέγνωμενὑμῶντὴνἐπιστολήν , Eus. iv. 23), Julius Africanus (τάχατεσημαίνειτὸπολυχρόνιοναὐτοῦδιὰτὴνὑπερκόσμωνὀγδοάδα , κυριακὴνἡμέραν , de temp. 5), Epiphanius (πῶςτεἀπολύεινεἰςἐπιφώσκουσανκυριακήν , φανερόνἐστι ; Hæ r. lxxv. 7, p. 910), Clem.-Alex. (οὗτοςἐντολὴντὴνκατὰτὸεὐαγγέλιονδιαπραξάμενοςκυριακὴνἐκείνηντὴνἡμέρανποιεῖ , Strom. vii. 12 (76), p. 877 P.), are apparently unknown to him. Indeed he confesses (Todd, ut supra p. 301) to have found the word in Origen against Celsus viii. 22, vol. i. p. 758 , and concedes that there may be many more places, but this does not modify his opinion, nor its adoption by his successor Dr. Todd. It may be well to cite the testimonies from Ignatius and Irenæ us : whence it is hardly possible but that the word should have occurred in Irenæ us. Mr. Elliott, Hor. Apoc. iv. 367 note, has pointed out that the Peschito renders οὐκἔστινκυριακὸνδεῖπνονφαγεῖν , 1 Corinthians 11:20, “ not as befitteth the day of the Lord ye eat and drink” (Etheridge), which is an interesting proof of the early usage. This chronological objection being disposed of, and the matter 2) taken on its own merits, it really is astonishing how any even moderate Greek scholars can persuade themselves that the words can mean that which these Commentators maintain. They must be bold indeed who can render ἐγενόμηνἐνπνεύματιἐν , “ I was transported by the Spirit (or, in spirit) into,” — in the face of ch. 4:2: and κυριακὴἡμέρα , “ the day of the Lord’ s coming,” in the face of the absence of a single precedent, and of the universal usage of the early Church. No such rendering would ever have been thought of, nor would it now be worth even a passing mention, were it not that an apocalyptic system has been built upon it. What Drs. M. and T. say of the art. τῇ as making for their sense, is really past comprehension! as it is, that Dr. T. should call it the emphatic article. I need hardly remind students that it is in this connexion any thing but emphatic, being merely designative, as in ἐντῇσήμερονἡμέρᾳ , Acts 20:26; τῇἐχομένῃἡμέρᾳ , ib. 21:26; τῇἐσχάτῃἡμέρᾳ , so often used by St. John in his Gospel. One day being known by the name κυριακή , any thing happening on it would be designated ordinarily as happening ἐντῇκυριακῇἡμέρᾳ , ἐντῇἡμέρᾳτῇκυριακῇ , or, as ἡμέρα is one of those nouns which frequently lose the article, ἐνἡμέρᾳκυριακῇ . In either case, the meaning, as far as the sense of κυριακή is concerned, is precisely the same. Nor does either the art., or the use of the word κυριακή by Chrys. in that sense (? I have not been able to find it), make it probable that Easter Sunday is meant): and I heard behind me (cf. Isaiah 30:21) a voice (ref. Ezek.), great as of a trumpet, saying (the trumpet is the instrument of festal proclamation, Numbers 10:10; Joe 2:15, &c.: accompanies divine manifestations, Exodus 19:19 f.; Joe 2:1; Matthew 24:31; 1 Thessalonians 4:16. The similarity to the sound of the trumpet here was in the loudness and clearness of the voice: see also ch. 4:1. From this latter it appears that this voice was not that of our Lord, but of one who there also spoke to the Apostle. Dü sterd. remarks that the ὀπίσωμου leaves an indefiniteness as to the speaker), What thou seest write (forthwith: aor.) into a book (the prep. of motion gives the transference from the writer to the document), and send to the seven churches, to Ephesus, and to Smyrna, and to Pergamum, and to Thyatira, and to Sardis, and to Philadelphia, and to Laodicea (for all particulars respecting these churches see the Prolegomena, § iii.). 12-20. The Vision, in which our Lord appears to St. John, and the command is repeated. This vision is the introduction, not only to the messages to the churches, but to the whole book: see further on ver. 19. 12. And I turned about to see the voice which was speaking with me (the voice, the acting energy, being used for the person whose voice it was. ἥτις , giving the force of qualis; of what sort it was which was speaking, &c.): and when I had turned about I saw seven golden candlesticks part of the furniture of the tabernacle, Exodus 25:31 ff. Again, in ref. Zech., we have the λυχνίαχρυσῆὅλη with its seven λύχνοι . Here there are seven separate candlesticks, typifying, as that one, the entire church, but now no longer bound together in one out-ward unity and one place. Each local church has now its candlestick, to be retained or removed from its place according to its own works): 13. and in the midst of the [seven] candlesticks one like to the Son of Man (i. e. to Christ: see John 5:27. I will not deny that the anarthrous use of this title may mark out less sharply our Lord himself than the use with the articles; but in N. T. Greek we should be no more justified in rendering υἱὸςἀνθρώπου in such a connexion as this, “ a son of man,” than πνεῦμαθεοῦ , “ a spirit of God.” That meaning would doubtless have been here expressed by τοιςυἱοῖςτῶνἀνθρώπων . The same remarks apply to ref. Dan.), clothed in a garment reaching to the feet (see the reff. in Dan. and Ezek., which the description and even the diction closely resemble. The χιτὼνποδήρης , vestis talaris, was a sign of high rank or office: “ sunt enim vestes pendulæ et laxæ , apud Persas imprimis, regum nobilium et sacerdotum insigne, cf. Ephesians 6:1, Ezekiel 10:2:” Ewald. Arethas, in the catena, supposes the dress to be that of the Melchisedek-priesthood (see also Andreas and Vitr.); but without reason, as De W. shews. Cf. ref. Sir., ἐὰνδιώκῃςτὸδίκαιον , καταλήψῃκαὶἐνδύσῃαὐτὸὡςποδήρηδόξης ), and girt round at the breasts with a golden girdle (in ref. Dan., Gabriel has his loins girt with gold of Uphaz. Bengel, and after him Zü llig and De Wette, suppose a distinction— the girding round the loins betokening activity, while that round the breast is a sign of repose. But Hengst. well observes that this would hardly apply: for Christ is here in fulness of energy as ruler and orderer of His Church. Ebrard seems nearer the truth in regarding the higher girding as a sign of majesty. But perhaps after all the point is not to be pressed; for the angels in ch. 15:6 are also girt περὶτὰστήθη . Nor is the golden girdle distinctive of regal majesty: for this they also bear, ibid. In 1 Macc. 10:89, 11:58, the πόρπηχρυσῆ is the privilege of the συγγενεῖς , or φίλοιτῶνβασιλέων , not, as is commonly cited, of kings themselves): 14. and his head and his hairs (were) white like white wool, as snow , Vitr., Stern, al., eternity, either here or in Daniel 7:9), and his eyes as a flame of fire (so Daniel 10:6: representing perhaps, as Vitr., “ perspicaciam divinæ et puræ mentis, omnia arcana pervadentis.” This may be, notwithstanding that Gabriel has eyes like lamps of fire in Daniel. Though omniscience could not be ascribed to him, the figure might be relatively consistent. But it is perhaps better to consider these physical details rather as in themselves characteristic, than as emblematic of attributes lying “ beneath” them. The “ fiery eye,” among the sons of men, is indicative of energy and power of command: so also in the Son of man Himself): 15. and his feet were like to chalcolibanus (this word has defeated all the ingenuity of Commentators hitherto. The Vulg. has aurichalcum (or ori- see Cic de Off. iii. 23. 12, Hor. de Art. poet. 202), the Syriac and Arethas, “ brass from Lebanon” , the Arabic “ Greek brass,” — Andreas, and most of the German editions of the Bible, a kind of incense so called (2nd altern. in catena,— εἴτεκαὶτὸνχαλκοειδῆλιβάνωτοννοητέον , ὃνἰατρῶνπαῖδεςἄῤῥενακαλοῦσιν , εὐώδειςκαὶαὐτὸνπυρὶὁμιλοῦνταἀτμοὺςἀποπέμποντα : Germ., Erzmeihrauch), on the authority of Antonius of Nebrissa (in Salmasius (Wetst.), ὁλίβανοςἔχειτρίαεἴδηδένδρων , καὶὁμὲνἄῤῥηνὀνομάζεταιχαλκολίβανος , ἡλιοείδηςκαὶπυῤῥός , ἤγουνξανθός ), who understands by the word some superior species of frankincense, the so-called ‘ thus masculum:’ for in Greek frankincense is called λίβανος , after the Heb. ל ְ ב ָ נ ָ ה or ל ְ ב ו ֹ נ ָ ה , from the root ל ָ ב ַ ן , albus fuit. This writer refers to hymns of Orpheus in honour of Apollo and of Artemis, in which χαλκολίβ . occurs in the sense of a costly kind of incense (but all we find in the titles of hymns 7, 19, 21, 65, is λιβανόμαννα , possibly a mixture of frankincense and manna), and to Virg. Ecl. viii. 65,— ‘ Verbenasque adole pingues et mascula thura.’ Still it appears somewhat strained to refer χαλκολίβανος or -ον to ‘ thus masculum:’ for, granted that ‘ masculum’ may betoken its purity and clearness, how is χάλκος accounted for, which looks more like a hint at hardness? Besides, incense is not burnt ἐνκαμίνῳ , in a smelting furnace, but in a censer or shallow vessel, and its colour while burning is no way observable. The interpretation, “ brass from Lebanon,” does not appear to be tenable, as there is no notice of Lebanon ever having produced brass of superior quality, such as this from the context must be. Suidas interprets it thus: χαλκολίβανον , εἶδος , ἠλέκτρουτιμιώτερονχρυσοῦ . ἔστιδὲτὸἤλεκτρονἀλλότυπονχρυσίονμεμιγμένονὑελῷκαὶλιθείᾳ . And this, considering that in the similar and model passage, Daniel 10:6 LXX, we have χάλκοςἐξαστράπτων (as also in Ezekiel 1:7), ib. Theod. χάλκοςστίλβων (as also in Ezekiel 40:3), and in Ezekiel 1:4, Ezekiel 1:27, and 8:2, ἤλεκτρον ,— seems the most likely direction in which to find the meaning. Still, as almost all Commentators confess, it must remain enigmatical, of what the word is compounded, and to what it precisely applies. According to usual analogy, not χάλκος but λίβανος is the central idea, and χάλκος the qualifying one, as in χαλκάνθη , χαλκόλιθος , χαλκοθήκη , &c. But this makes the difficulty greater; for we can assign no meaning to λίβανος which would fit this requirement. If conjecture were admissible (which it is not), I should, in despair of any way out of the difficulty, suggest whether the word might not have been χαλκολιβαδίῳ , a stream of melted brass: ΔΙ having been read ΛΙ or Ν . At all events this may rank with Hitzig’ s conjecture, χαλχοκλιβάνῳ ), as if they had been burnt in a furnace (and so red-hot and glowing): and his voice as the voice of many waters (Ebrard sees an allusion to the quiet and majestic sound of the sea, appealing to ch. 17:1 and 13:1; but, as Dü sterdieck remarks, there seems to be no such allusion here, but only to the power of the voice as resembling the rushing of many waters. So Daniel 10:6 Theod., ἡφωνὴαὐτοῦὡςφωνὴὄχλου : Ezekiel 43:2, where the same expression is found (in the Heb., with which agree Vulg., Syr., &c., but not LXX), 1:24, where the sound of the wings of the creatures is ὡςφωνὴὕδατοςπολλοῦ ). 16. And having (ἔχων , not = καὶεἶχεν , but as in ref. St. John takes up the description from time to time irrespective of the construction, as if (De W.) with separate strokes of the pencil) in his right hand seven stars (not, as Heinr., on his right hand, as a number of jewelled rings, but in his right hand, as a wreath or garland held in it. De W. well remarks that this, which is the more natural rendering, is also required by the symbolism. If the seven churches which the seven stars symbolize, were on the Lord’ s hand as rings, they would seem to be serving (adorning?) Him, and not to be the objects of his action: but now that He holds them in his hand, He appears as their Guardian, their Provider, their Nourisher: and, we may add, their Possessor, who brings them out and puts them forth to be seen when He pleases. His universal Church would hardly be thus represented, but only a portion of it which it pleases Him to take in his hand and hold forth as representing the rest): and out of his mouth a two-edged sharp sword going forth : also our ch. 2:16, and Wisd. 18:15, 16. The same figure occurs with reference to men in Psalms 55:21, Psalms 57:4, Psalms 59:7: and Wetst. and Schö ttg. give examples of it from the Rabbinical writings. The thing signified may perhaps be as in 2 Thessalonians 2:8, ὁἄνομοςὃνὁκύριοςἸησοῦςἀνελεῖτῷπνεύματιτοῦστόματοςαὐτοῦ … : and in ch. 19:21; but clearly we must not exclude (as Dü sterd.) the attributes of the word of God, Hebrews 4:12, Ephesians 6:17. And this all the more, inasmuch as 1) here the Lord is represented not as taking vengeance on his enemies, but as speaking with his own, both in the way of comforting and of threatening: and 2) in ch. 19:21, where this very sword is again alluded to as slaying the Lord’ s enemies, His title as καθήμενοςἐπὶτοῦἵππου is ὁλόγοςτοῦθεοῦ ): and his countenance (not, as Dü sterd., who wrongly quotes De W. as supporting him, general appearance: so also Ewald, al. Had this been so, how should the Apostle have noted the details just mentioned? for the whole figure of our Lord would have been too dazzling for him to contemplate. It is natural that after describing the eyes, and that which proceeded from the mouth, he should give the general effect of the countenance. And as matter of usage, John 11:44 is decided, being spoken of a person, which ib. 7:24 is not) as the sun shineth in his strength (see ref. Judges:— that is, when unclouded and in full power: not necessarily at midday, but at any time. The construction is again broken: ὡςὁἥλ . φαίνων would be the regular connexion). 17, 18. And when I saw Him, I fell at his feet as dead (the effect of the divine appearance: see Exodus 33:20; Job 42:6; Isaiah 6:5; Ezekiel 1:28; Daniel 8:17 ff., Daniel 10:7 ff. There is no discrepancy in this bodily action with the spiritual nature of the vision, as De W. thinks, either here or in the places where similar physical effects are described, ch. 5:4, 19:10, 22:8 (Daniel 7:15). Dü sterd. well remarks in reply, that the ἐνπν . of ver. 10 does not supersede existence in the body. Just as dreamers express their bodily feelings by physical acts, e. g. by starting or weeping, so might St. John while in this ecstasy: cf. Acts 9:3). And he placed his right hand upon me, saying, Fear not (see, besides reff., Luke 2:10, Matthew 17:7, Mark 16:6. These places, and the whole character of our Lord’ s words, shew that the Apostle’ s falling down as dead was purely from fear, not, as Ebrard imagines, as an expression of ecstatic love); I am the first and the last (reff.: = α and ω above: not as the semi-Socinian Commentators, Grot., Wetst., “ summus dignitate … contemtissimus:” it is the eternity of God which is expressed— of Him who is before all and after all, from and to everlasting), and the living One (not = ὁζωοποιῶν , however true the fact may be; nor here signifying alive from the dead: but is the well-known attribute of God, the Eternal, not in bare duration, but in personal Life, The ζωοποιεῖν is included, but the word expresses far more. The E. V. is wrong in connecting these words with those that follow); and I was (not ἦν , but ἐγενόμην ,— I became: it was a state which I passed into) dead, and behold I am alive for evermore (see Romans 6:9, Acts 13:34. ζῶνεἰμί expresses, more emphatically than would the simple verb, the residence and effluence of life. By this mention of His own death and revival, the Lord reassures his Apostle. He is not only the living One in His majesty, but He has passed through death as one of us, and is come to confer life even in and through death), and I have the keys of death and of Hades (I can bring up from death, yea even from the mysterious place of the spirits of the departed. The figure of the keys is often used in this book; see reff. Wetst. quotes from the Targum of Jonathan on Deuteronomy 28:12, “ Quatuor sunt claves in manu Domini, … clavis vitæ et sepulchrorum et ciborum et pluviæ ;” and other testimonies of the same kind. We have the gates of death as opposed to the gates of the daughter of Zion, Psalms 9:14; cf. also Job 38:17; and the gates of Hades, Matthew 16:18. Isaiah 38:10). 19. Write therefore (‘ because I have vouchsafed thee this vision,— I whose majesty is such, and whose manifested loving-kindness to thee.’ The connexion is better thus than with ver. 11, as some: “ Now that thy fear is over, write what I bade thee,” Hengst. So Aret., who remarks, “ ἔκστασις memoriam læ dit.” But it is very doubtful whether ver. 11 is spoken by our Lord at all: see there) the things which thou sawest (just now: the vision which was but now vouchsafed thee), and what things they signify (two meanings of ἃεἰσίν are possible. 1) ‘ the things which are,’ viz. which exist at the present time. This has been taken by Arethas, Lyra, Corn.-a-lap., Grot., Calov., Vitr., Beng., Wolf, Zü ll., Hengst., Ebrard, Lü cke, Dü sterd., Rev_2) as above, ‘ what things they signify:’ so Alcas., Aretius, Eichhorn, Heinr., Ewald, De W. In deciding between these, we have the following considerations: a) the use of the plural εἰσίν , as marking off this clause in meaning from the next, which has ἃμέλλειγενέσθαι . If this latter is sing., why not this? Is it not because the μέλλειγενέσθαι merely signifies the future time, in which this latter class, en masse, were to happen, whereas this ἃεἰσί imports, what these things, each of them, severally, mean? And b) this seems to be borne out by the double repetition of εἰσιν in the next verse, both times unquestionably in this meaning. So that I have no hesitation in taking the meaning given above), and the things which are about to happen after these (viz. after ἃεἶδες : the next vision, beginning with ch. 4., which itself opens with μετὰταῦταεἶδον . I would take γενέσθαι in the sense of happening, not in the wide ages of history, but in apocalyptic vision: seeing that, ταῦτα meaning ἃεἶδες , a present vision, ἃμέλλειγενέσθαι will by analogy mean the things which shall succeed these, i. e. a future vision. Notice, it is not ἃδεῖγενέσθαι as in ver. 1: not the necessity of prophecy, but only the sequence of things seen); 20. the mystery of the seven stars which thou sawest upon (held in, and so standing over, as a wreath) my right hand (τὸμυστ . is in apposition with ἃεἶδεςκ .τ .λ ., and governed by γράψον . Lyra interprets the word well, “ sacramentum stellarum,” i. e. “ sacrum secretum per ipsas significatum:” see reff.), and the seven candlesticks of gold (elliptic construction for ‘ and the mystery of the seven candlesticks,’ &c.). The seven stars are (the) (the prefixed predicate ἄγγελοι , though on that account wanting the article, is rendered definite by the definite gen., τῶνἑπτ . ἐκκ ., which follows) angels of the seven churches: and the seven candlesticks are seven churches (the import of the ἄγγελοι has been much disputed. Very many Commentators take them for the presiding presbyters, or bishops, of the churches. So Primas., Bede, Joach., Lyra, Alcas., Corn.-a-lap., Ribera, Bossuet, Beza, Grot., Calov., al. m. So also Vitr., Whitby, and with some modification, Hengst. This view is variously supported. It derives probability from the analogy of the vision itself, in which, seeing that the candelabra represent the churches themselves, existing vessels containing much light, the stars, concentrated sparks of light, should represent some actually existing persons in or connected with the churches. Again it is supported by our finding that throughout the seven Epistles the angel is treated as representing and responsible for the particular church. But before we pass on to the other great section of interpretation, we may at once dismiss those forms of this one which make ἄγγελος the ideal representative of the governing body (as Hengst.), or an ideal messenger from the church (as Ebrard), or a proleptic idea of the office of Bishop, not yet instituted, as Rothe, or, in short, any idealism at all. As the ἐκκλησία is an objective reality, so must the ἄγγελος be, of whatever kind. This consideration will also affect the current of interpretation which takes the angels to be the churches themselves. So Andreas and Arethas (in Cat.,— ἄγγελοντῆςἘφέσου , τὴνἐναὐτῇἐκκλησίανλέγει . οὐγὰρὁπροστατῶνἄγγελοςἡμαρτήκει , ὥστεδεῖνἀκοῦσαιμετανόησον , ὁδι ʼ ἁγιότηταἐντῇδεξιᾷτοῦκυρίουὑπάρχωνἀστὴρὢν … τίςδὲκαὶχρείαγράφειντῷἐντῇδεξιᾷτοῦδιαλεγομένουπαρόντι ; κ .τ .λ .). The second line of interpretation is that which regards the ἄγγελοι as angels, in some way representing the churches. This entry is longer than a Bible module can hold. The rest is at https://www.sermonindex.net/commentary/alfordgnt/ Ch. 2:1-3:22. The Epistles to the seven churches. Views have considerably differed respecting the character of these Epistles, whether they are to be regarded as simply historical, or historico-prophetical, or simply prophetical. The point on which all, I presume, will be agreed is, that the words contained in these Epistles are applicable to and intended for the guidance, warning, and encouragement of the whole Church Catholic, and its several parts, throughout all time. The differing interpretations will here be only briefly alluded to. An account of them will be found in Vitringa, Apocalypsis Johannis, &c. pp. 27-58: and (but scantily, as most interpreters pass over them but slightly) in the introductions to the principal Commentaries. Before commenting on each individual Epistle, I would notice the similar construction of all. This may be thus described. Each Epistle contains, 1. A command to write to the angel of the particular church. 2. A sublime title of our Lord taken for the most part from the imagery of the preceding vision. 3. An address to the angel of the church, always commencing with οῖδα , introducing a statement of its present circumstances: continuing with an exhortation either to repentance or to constancy: and ending with a prophetic announcement, mostly respecting what shall be at the Lord’ s coming. 4. A promise made to ὁνικῶν , generally accompanied with a solemn call to earnest attention, ὁἔχωνοὖςκ .τ .λ . 1-7. The Epistle to the church at Ephesus. See Prolegg. § iii. 7. To the angel of the church in Ephesus write: These things saith he that holdeth fast (cf. ver. 25, ch. 3:11) the seven stars in his right hand (cf. John 10:28), He that walketh in the midst of the seven candlesticks of gold (assertions of Christ’ s being the Lord, the Governor and the Upholder of His Church, agreeably to the vision of ch. 1.: coming in suitably in this first Epistle, as beginning the complete number): I know (am aware of: not as Lyra, “ id est, approbo.” The context determines this to be the fact here, but not this word. The ἔργα might be bad ones, see John 3:19) thy works (so in all the Epistles, except those to Smyrna and Pergamum) and thy labour (reff.) and endurance (κόπος and ὑπομονή form the active and the passive sides of the energizing Christian life. The omission of the σου after τὸνκόπον serves to bind the two together in one. They are epexegetic, in fact, of ἔργα ; cf. 1 Corinthians 15:58: these being the resulting fruits of κόπος and ὑπομονή , see ch, 14:13), and that thou canst not bear (reff.) evil men (on κακός and πονηρός , see note, ch. 16:2. These are here regarded as a burden, an incubus, which the Ephesian church had thrown off. The assertion is as yet general: it is particularized in the next clause) and didst try (make experiment of, rather than put to the test, which is δοκιμάζειν , 1 John 4:1) those who call themselves apostles and are not, and didst find them false (this is deeply interesting in connexion with St. Paul’ s prophetic caution, Acts 20:28-30. That which he foretold had come to pass, but they had profited by his apostolic warning): and hast endurance, and didst bear (them, while trying them; or perhaps the verb is used absolutely) for my Name, and hast not been weary (there is a seeming inconsistency in οἶδατὸνκόπονσου … καὶοὐκεκοπίακες , which caused those who were not aware of St. John’ s use of the last word (reff.) to alter the sentence as in var. readd. “ Novi laborem tuum, nec tamen laboras, i. e. labore non frangeris.” Beng. ἀντὶτοῦοὐκἀπεκαρτέρησας , οἱονεί , οὐκἀπηγόρευσας , οὐπροδέδωκας , οὐκἐλιποτάκτησαςδιὰτὸὄνομάμου , in Catena). Howbeit I have against thee (reff.) that thou hast left (deserted; or let go: see reff.) thy love which was at first , Vitringa, Zü llig, Hengstenb., Dü sterd., Stern (but applying it all to the bishop personally), al., the first fervent chaste and pure love of the newly-wedded bride: cf. Jeremiah 2:2. τὴνπρώτην must not be taken as if it were comparative (priorem), but literally. In what particular the Ephesian church had left her first love, is not stated. Perhaps, as Ansbert, “ dilectione sæ culi æ stuabat:” or, seeing that it is negative, rather than positive delinquency which is blamed, the love of first conversion had waxed cold, and given place to a lifeless and formal orthodoxy). Remember therefore whence thou hast fallen , and repent (quickly and effectually, aor.) and do the first works (the works which sprung from that thy first love: those resume); but if not, I (will) come to thee (a strong ‘ dativus incommodi:’ = ἐπίσε , ch. 3:3. Not Christ’ s final coming, but his coming in special judgment is here indicated), and will move thy candle-stick out of its place (i. e. as Aretius, “ efficiam ut ecclesia esse desinas:” see the fulfilment noticed in Prolegg. § iii. par. 7. Some take it too vaguely,as Ewald, “ gratiam et benevolentiam meam tibi detraham:” others, as Grot., misled by their acceptation of the first love (see above), “ efficiam ut plebs tua alio diffugiat, nempe ad ea loca ubi major habetur cura pauperum:” others again, going quite wrong, owing to a fancy that the Epistle is addressed to the bishop, “ tollam a te ecclesiam, ne illi ultra præ sideas;” so Zeger, al. Koppe and Heinrichs give a modification of the true meaning which is hardly justified: “ primariam episcopatus sedem Epheso aliorsum transferam” ), if thou do not repent (shalt not have repented; i. e. by the speedy time indicated in the previous aorist). 6. Notwithstanding, this thou hast (this one thing: there is no need to supply ἀγαθόν or the like: of what sort the τοῦτο is, is explained by what follows. We may notice the tender compassion of our blessed Lord, who, in his blame of a falling church, yet selects for praise one particular in which His mind is yet retained. This is for our comfort: but let us not forget that it is for our imitation also. μεταξὺτῶνλυπηρῶντίθησικαὶτὰπρὸςεὐθυμίανἄγοντα , ἵναμὴτῇπερισσοτέρᾳλύπῃκαταποθῇτὰτῆςἐκκλησίας . Areth. in Cat.) that thou hatest the works (“ non dixit Nicolaitas, sed facta: quia personæ sunt ex charitate diligendæ , sed eorum vitia odio sunt habenda.” Lyra. It would have been well with the church, had this always been remembered. τὰἔργα , see below, must be referred to the moral delinquencies of this sect) of the Nicolaitans (there has been much dispute who these were. The prevailing opinion among the fathers was, that they were a sect founded by Nicolaus the proselyte of Antioch, one of the seven deacons. So Irenæ us (Hæ r. i. 26. 3(27), p. 105, “ Nicolaitæ autem magistrum quidem habent Nicolaum, unum ex vii., qui primi ad diaconium ab apostolis ordinati sunt: qui indiscrete vivunt” ), Tertullian (Præ scr. Hæ r. 46, vol. ii. p. 63, “ alter hæ reticus Nicolaus emersit. Hic de septem diaconis qui in Actis App. allecti sunt, fuit.” He then describes his execrable impurities), (in two passages, which are worth citing, as I shall presently have to comment on them: 1) Strom, ii.20 (118), p. 490 P.,— τοιοῦτοιδὲκαὶοἱφάσκοντεςἐαυτοὺςΝικολάῳἓπεσθαιἀπομνημόνευμάτιτἀνδρὸςφέροντεςἐκπαρατροπῆςτὸδεῖνπαραχρήσασθαιτῇσαρκί . ἀλλ ʼ ὁμὲνγενναῖοςκολούεινδεῖνἐδήλουτάςτεἡδονὰςτάςτεἐπιθυμίας , καὶτῇἀσκήσειταύτῃκαταμαραίνειντὰςτῆςσαρκὸςὁρμάςτεκαὶἐπιθέσεις . οἱδὲεἰςἡδονὴντράγωνδίκηνἐκχυθέντεςοἷονἐφυβρίζοντεςτῷσώματικαθηδυπαθοῦσιν : 2) ib. iii. 4 (25), p. 522 P.: περὶτῆςΝικολάουῥήσεωςδιαλεχθέντεςἐκεῖνοπαρελείπομεν · ὡραίαν , φησί , γυναῖκαἔχωνοὗτοςμετὰτὴνἀνάληψιντὴντοῦσωτῆροςπρὸςτῶνἀποστόλωνὀνειδισθεὶςζηλοτυπίανεἰςμέσονἀγαγὼντὴνγυναῖκαγῆμαιτῷβουλομένῳἐπέτρεψεν · ἀκόλουθονγὰρεἶναίφασιτὴνπρᾶξινταύτηνἐκείνῃτῇφωνῇτῇὅτιπαραχρήσασθαιτῇσαρκὶδεῖ ), Euseb. (H. E. iii. 29, citing Clem.-Alex., as above), Epiphanius (Hæ r. xxv. pp. 76 ff., where he gives a long account of Nicolaus and his depravation and his followers): so also Jerome (dial. adv. Lucif. 23, vol. ii. p. 197) and (de hæ res. 5, vol. viii. p. 26), and many other fathers, citations from whom may be seen in Stern’ s notes, h. 1.: also Areth. in Catena, referring to Epiph. We have already seen, in Clem.-Alex., symptoms of a desire to vindicate Nicolaus the deacon from the opprobrium of having been the founder of such a sect; and we find accordingly in the apostolical constitutions, οἱνῦνψευδώνυμοιΝικολαΐται are spoken of: and Victorinus of Pettau, in our earliest extant commentary on the Apocalypse, says, “ Nicolaitæ autem erant illo tempore ficti homines et pestiferi, qui sub nomine Nicolai ministri fecerunt sibi hæ resin,” &c. Thence we advance a step farther, and find another Nicolaus substituted for the deacon of that name. So in Dorotheus (cited in Stern) we find him described as a bishop of Samaria . And an apocryphal Acts of the Apostles in Fabricius, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. p. 498 (Stern), speaks of a Corinthian of this name, infamous for licentious practices. We come now to the second principal view with regard to this sect, which supposes their name to be symbolic, and Nicolaus to be the Greek rendering of Balaam, ב ּ ָ ל ַ ע ע ָ ם , or, Chald., ב ּ ְ ל ַ ע ע ָ ם , ‘ perdidit vel absorpsit populum.’ Consequently the name Nicolaitans = Balaamites, as is also inferred from ver. 14. This view seems first to have been broached by Chr. A. Heumann in the Acta Eruditorum for 1712, and since then has been the prevailing one. (There is a trace in ancient times of a mystical interpretation, e. g. in , gloss. ord., who says, “ Nicolaus, stultus populus, id est, Gentiles Deum ignorantes:” and Ambrose Ansbert, “ si a proprietate ad figuram, ut solet, sermo recurrit, omnes hæ retici Nicolaitæ esse probantur: Nicolaus enim interpretatur stultus populus.” What this means, I am as unable to say as was Vitringa: it perhaps arises from thus understanding ב ּ ַ ל ע ָ ם , ‘ non-populus:’ cf. Deuteronomy 32:21.) But this is very forced, and is properly repudiated by some of the best modern Commentators: e. g. by De Wette, Ebrard, and Stern. (See also Winer, Realw. sub voce: Neander, Kirchengesch. i. 2. 774 ff.: Gieseler, Kirchengesch. i. 1. 113 note.) In the first place, the names are by no means parallel, even were we to make Balaam, as some have done, into ב ּ ַ ע ַ ל ע ָ ם , lord of the people : and next, the view derives no support from ver. 14 f., where the followers of Balaam are distinct from the Nicolaitans: see note there. And besides, there is no sort of reason for interpreting the name otherwise than historically. It occurs in a passage indicating simple matters of historical fact, just as the name Antipas does in ver. 13. If we do not gain trustworthy accounts of the sect from elsewhere, why not allow for the gulf which separates the history of the apostolic from that of the post-apostolic period, and be content with what we know of them from these two passages? There is nothing repugnant to verisimilitude in what Clem.-Alex. relates of the error of Nicolaus; nor need all of those, who were chosen to aid the Apostles in distributing alms, have been, even to the end of their lives, spotless and infallible. At least it may be enough for us to believe that possible of one of them, which the post-apostolic Fathers did not hesitate to receive), which I also hate (this strong expression in the mouth of our Lord unquestionably points at deeds of abomination and impurity: cf. Isaiah 59:8; Jeremiah 44:4; Amos 5:21; Zechariah 8:17). 7. Solemn conclusion of the Epistle. He that hath an ear (no fanciful distinction must be imagined between the singular, and the plural which is found in the Gospels (reff.): nor must we imagine with Hengst. that οὖς denotes the spiritual hearing or apprehension. We have precisely the same use of the sing. in Matthew 10:27, ὃεἰςτὸοὖςἀκούετεκηρύξατεἐπὶτῶνδωμάτων : where the distinction will hardly be maintained), let him hear what the Spirit (τὸπνεῦμα , speaking in its fulness, through Him to whom it is given without measure, to John who was ἐνπνεύματι , in a state of spiritual ecstasy and receptivity: cf. John 16:13) saith to the churches (Ebrard well notices that not a colon, but a full stop must be put here, as indeed might be shewn from the way in which the proclamation is repeated in ver. 29 and in ch. 3:6, 13, 22. It directs attention, not to that which follows only, but to the whole contents of the seven Epistles). To him that conquereth (the verb is absolute, without any object expressed as in reff. John and 1 John. So of Christ Himself in ch. 3:21), I will give to him (the personal pronoun is repeated both idiomatically and for emphasis) to eat (i. e. I will permit him to eat: not in the ordinary sense of giving to eat: see ch. 3:21, δώσωαὐτῷ .… καθίσαι of (the fruit of) the tree of life, which is in the paradise of (my) God (the way to which tree was closed up after man’ s sin, Genesis 3:24. The promise, and its expression, are in the closest connexion with our Lord’ s discourse in Joh_6, as will be seen by comparing Genesis 3:22, μήποτεἐκτείνῃτὴνχεῖρααὐτοῦ , καὶλάβῃἀπὸτοῦξύλουτῆςζωῆς , καὶφάγῃ , καὶζήσεταιεἰςτὸναἰῶνα ,— with John 6:51, ἐάντιςφάγῃἐκτούτουτοῦἄρτου , ζήσεταιεἰςτὸναἰῶνα . But we need not therefore say (as Ebrard: so also Calov.) that Christ is the tree of life here, nor confuse the figure by introducing one which in its character is distinct from it. Still less, as Grot., is the tree to be interpreted as being the Holy Spirit. See, for the imagery, ch. 22:2, 14, 19. There is meaning in τοῦθεοῦ . The two former words as following παραδείσῳ , come from Ezekiel 28:13, and set forth the holiness and glory of that paradise as consisting in God’ s dwelling and delighting in it: and the adjunct μου (John 20:17), if read, connects this holiness and glory with Him who is ours, and who has every right to make the promise in virtue of his own peculiar part in God. On the whole image and expression, see Schö ttgen, h. 1., who adduces many parallels from the rabbinical writings). 8-11.The Epistle to the church at Smyrna. See Prolegg., § iii. 8. And to the angel of the church in Smyrna (in accordance with the idea of the angel representing the bishop, many of the ancient Commentators have inferred that Polycarp must have been here addressed. Whether this were chronologically possible, must depend on the date which we assign to the writing of the Apocalypse. He was martyred in a.d. 168, 86 years after his conversion, H. E. iv. 15) write: These things saith the first and the last, who was (became) dead and revived (see ch. 1:17, 18, and for this sense of ζῇν , reff. The words here seem to point on to the promise in vv. 10, 11): I know thy tribulation and thy poverty (in outward wealth, arising probably from the θλῖψις , by the despoiling of the goods of the Christians); nevertheless thou art rich (spiritually; see reff. To suppose an allusion to the name πολύκαρπος (Hengst.), is in the highest degree fanciful and improbable): and (I know) thy calumny from (arising from) those who profess themselves to be Jews, and they are not, but (are) Satan’ s synagogue (these slanderers were in all probability actually Jews by birth, but not (see Romans 2:28; Matthew 3:9; John 8:33; 2 Corinthians 11:22; Philippians 3:4 ff.) in spiritual reality; the same who ever where, in St. Paul’ s time and afterwards, were the most active enemies of the Christians. When Polycarp was martyred, we read ἅπαντὸπλῆθοςἐθνῶντεκαὶἸουδαίωντῶντὴνΣμύρνανκατοικούντωνἀκατασχέτῳθυμῷκαὶμεγάλῃφωνῇἐπεβόα : and afterwards when faggots were collecting for the pile, μάλισταἸουδαίωνπροθύμως , ὡςἔθοςαὐτοῖς , εἰςτοῦτοὑπουργούντων , Mart. Polyc. c. 12, 13, pp. 1032, 1042. This view is strengthened by the context. Had they been, as some have supposed, e. g. Vitringa, Christians, called Ἰουδαῖοι in a mystical sense, they would hardly have been spoken of as the principal source of calumny against the Church, nor would the collective epithet of Satan’ s synagogue be given to them. Respecting the latter appellation, see some interesting remarks by Trench, N. T. Synonyms, § i. He brings out there, how ἐκκλησία , the nobler word, was chosen by our Lord and His Apostles for the assembly of the called in Christ, while συναγωγή , which is only once found (James 2:2) of a Christian assembly , was gradually abandoned entirely to the Jews, so that in this, the last book of the canon, such an expression as this can be used. See also his Comm. on the Epistles to the Seven Churches, p. 95. See the opposite in Numbers 16:3, Numbers 20:4, Numbers 31:16,— συναγωγὴκυρίου ). 10. Fear not the things which thou art about to suffer (in the ways mentioned below. ἅ indicates manifold tribulation, as there): behold [for certain (δή gives the tone of present certainty and actuality: see reff. It is in fact originally no more than a shortened form of ἤδη : see Hartung, Partikellehre, i. 245 ff.) ], the devil (Hengstb. after Zü llig, would lay stress here on the import of the name of the great adversary, as connected with the βλασφημία above. But this again would be forced and unnatural, especially after the recent mention of σατανᾶ . Of course it is understood from the context, that the devil would act through the hostility of human agents, and among them eminently these Jewish enemies. Trench, in loc., remarks on the reference to the devil, as the primary author of all assaults on the Church, found in the Acts of the ancient martyrs: e. g. the Ep. from the Churches of Lyons and Vienne: the Martyrdom of Polycarp, 3, 17, pp. 1032, 1041: Martyr. Ignat.) is about to oast (some) of you into prison (literally: the constant accompaniment of persecution, Acts 12:4; Acts 16:23: not, as Heinr., put for all kinds of misery), that ye may be tried : and ye shall have tribulation ten days (the expression is probably used to signify a short and limited time: so in Genesis 24:55; Numbers 11:19; Daniel 1:12: see also Numbers 14:22; 1 Samuel 1:8; Job 19:3; Acts 25:6. Wetst. quotes Ter. Adelph. v. 1. 36, “ decem dierum vix mihi est familia.” So Arethas in Catena, εἰςὀλίγονχρόνοντούτωνἡθλῖψις , καὶοὐδ ʼ ὅσονδέκαἡμέραιςπαραμετρεῖσθαιἀξία . And so, recently, Trench. All kinds of fanciful interpretations have been given: so in Gloss. ord.,— “ Deus suos ad bella mittens Decalogo armat” (another variety of which is, “ tribulatio ecclesiæ durabit quamdiu observatio præ ceptorum Decalogi, quod est usque ad finem mundi:” so Lyra, altern.):— “ x. diebus, i. e. toto hoc tempore in quo per septem dies contra tria principalia vitia pugnatur, avaritiam, cupiditatem, vanam gloriam.” Similarly Ansbert. And again, “ significatur totum tempus usque ad finem sæ culi, eo quod omnes numeri sequentes denarium sunt replicationes ipsius et partium suarum.” Lyra introduces “ the year-day principle:” — “ posset etiam aliter salvo meliori judicio exponi, ut per decern dies intelligantur decem anni, secundum illud, Ezech. 4:6, ‘ Diem pro anno dedi;’ forte tantum duravit persecutio Smyrnensis ecclesiæ .” This has been taken up by Cluver. in Calov., Brightmann, al. , Haymo, and Joachim understand it of the ten persecutions from Nero to Diocletian: Perer., Ribera, and Corn.-a-lap., “ decem, id est, multis, diebus:” , “ quia, licet ista tribulatio pluribus diebus et mensibus duret, decem tamen diebus erit atrocissima:” and recently Ebrard understands the ten days of ten divisions, or periods, in the persecution). Be (γίνου , not ἴσθι , see reff.: new circumstances of trial requiring new kinds and degrees of fidelity; which does not remain as it is, but takes accession) thou (it is quite futile to attempt to distinguish in these Epistles between what is said to the Angel in the singular, and what is said to the Church in the plural. This is shewn by the former part of this verse,— ἃμέλλειςπάσχειν .… followed by ἐξὑμῶν . Only where there is occasion to discriminate, is the plural used: cf. ver. 24 f.: but wherever the whole church is spoken of it is in the singular, under the person of its representative angel) faithful unto (reff. not, “ until:” but “ even unto,” i. e. up to the point or measure of: Let not thy faithfulness stop short of enduring death itself. Cf. Philippians 2:8) death, and (reff.) I will give thee the crown (τὸνστ ., as being the well-known prize promised to the faithful: as in reff. Trench, in loc., has an interesting note on the question whether this is a diadem of royalty, or a garland of victory: and decides for the former, seeing that the στέφανοι of ch. 5 can only be royal crowns,— that the word is employed by all the Evangelists of the “ Crown of thorns,” — and that the imagery of this book is not any where drawn from Gentile antiquity, but is Jewish throughout) of life (gen. of apposition: the life itself being the crown: see note, and distinction, on 2 Timothy 4:8). 11. Conclusion: see above, ver. 7. He that conquereth shall not be injured that he should be .… See Winer, edn. 6, § 56. 3 note) by (ἐκ as proceeding out of as the source or origin) the second death (defined to be, in ch. 20:14, ἡλίμνητοῦπυρός . In this he shall have no part, nor it any power over him). 12-17. The Epistle to the church at Pergamum (see Prolegg. § iii. 9; Trench, p. 106). And to the angel of the church in Pergamum write: These things saith He that hath the sharp two-edged sword (this is the logical order in English of the epithet-predicates, τὴνδίστομοντὴνὀξεῖαν . ἡῥ . ἡδίστομος is the sword with two edges: and to the whole of this is added ἡὀξεῖα . The designation of our Lord is made with reference to ver. 16 below): I know where thou dwellest; (viz.) where is the throne of Satan (it is not easy to say, what these words import. and Areth. say in the Catena, θρόνοντοῦσ . τὸνΠεργ . καλεῖ , ὡςκατείδωλονοὖσανὑπὲρτὴνἈσίανπᾶσαν . And so Vitringa and Bengel. But Vitr. himself asks, “ an Satanas in illa superstitione (Æ sculapii cultu) se magis prodidit Pergami, quam in Dianæ cultu Ephesi?” Grot. Wetst. al. fancy that σατανᾶς was the serpent form under which the god Æ sculapius was worshipped at Pergamum. But even the fact itself is doubtful; and the interpretation halts, in that the text is not ὁθρόνοςτοῦδράκοντος , instead of τ . σατανᾶ . Zornius, mentioned in Wolf, h. l., explains it of the famous Pergamene library, and the writings of the Sophists therein contained. A more likely direction in which to find the solution is that taken by Lyra, “ id est, ejus potestas, infideles inclinando ad persecutionem ecclesiæ :” for above, ver. 10, the act of persecution is ascribed to the devil: and here we learn by what follows, that he had carried it at Pergamum to the extent of putting Antipas to death; which seems not to have been reached elsewhere at this time. Whether this may have been owing to the fact of the residence of the supreme magistracy at Pergamum, or to some fanatical zeal of the inhabitants for the worship of Æ sculapius, or to some particular person or persons dwelling there especially hostile to the followers of Christ (Hengst., Ewald), must remain uncertain. The above view, with unimportant modifications, is adopted by De Wette, Ebrard, Stern (who combines the others with it), Grä ber, Dü sterd., al.— I may remark, that it is plainly out of the question to attempt, as has been done by some, to connect such an expression as this with the prophecies of the latter portion of the book, and to anticipate for the insignificant Pergamum a leading place in their fulfilment. The expression is relevant, as the context shews, merely to the then existing state of the city (ὅπουκατοικεῖ below), and not to any future part which it should take in the fulfilment of prophecy), and thou holdest last (reff.) my name (the profession of thy faith in Me) and didst not deny the faith of me in the days of Antipas (or, taking the other form of the text, ‘ in which Antipas:’ see var. readd. As the shorter text runs, and probably also if we read the ταῖς of the Codex Sinaiticus, Ἀντίπας is regarded as indeclinable, which circumstance has apparently led to all the perplexing varieties of reading) my witness, my faithful one (or, if we omit the second μου , my faithful witness: the appositional nominative, see above, ch. 1:5. A motive for its use here may have been the nominatival form of the gen. Ἀντίπας . This consideration of itself would obviate the untenable objection which Dü sterd. brings against the above account of the construction, viz. that there is no reason to suppose it to have been used except in the case of the Sacred Name, as in ch. 1:5: but see Dü sterd.’ s own text in ver. 20: and reff. there), who was slain among you, where Satan dwelleth (of Antipas = Antipater (Jos. Antt. xiv. 1. 3),— after the analogy of Hermas for Hermodorus, Lucas and Silas for Lucanus and Silvanus,— nothing is known to us with certainty, except from this passage. Andreas says that he had read the account of his martyrdom: ἈντίπαςδέτιςτοὔνομαμάρτυςἐνΠεργάμῳγέγονενἀνδρειότατος , οὗπερἀνέγνωντὸμαρτύριον : and Areth. in Cat. says, οὗκαὶτὸμαρτύριονεἰςἔτισώζεται . Ribera gives the following account from Simeon Metaphrastes: “ Pergami episcopum hunc fuisse tradunt, et ejus martyrium Metaphrastes Simeon scripsit, qui ad extremam eum senectutem pervenisse dicit, et cum res Christianorum propter Domitiani persecutionem magno in discrimine versarentur, nullo timore captum sæ pius in publicum prodiisse et inter crudelissimorum tortorum minas intrepide sinceram fidei doctrinam ac Christi laudes præ dicasse. Ita Christianis præ sidio, dæ monibus terrori erat, qui ab ipso se fugari et sacrificiis suis privari fatebantur. Quare a præ fecto urbis captus et in Christi confessione generose persistens ad Dianæ templum tractus et in bovem æ neum, quem multo ante igne inflammayerant, conjectus, vitam in gratiarum actione precibusque finivit. Et tanta (inquit Simeon) præ stitit virtute, ut locus hic ubi martyrium pertulit, in hodiernum usque diem miraculis excellat, et magnæ in eo fiant curationes.” The Greek and Roman menologies contain similar accounts at his day, April 11th. It is hardly possible to withhold indignation at the many childish symbolic meanings which have been imagined for the name, in defiance of philology and of sobriety alike. First is that of Aretius, ἀντὶ -πᾶς , the enemy of all, i. e. the child of God and enemy of the world; which has been taken up by Hengstenherg, who ought to have known better, and Antipas identified with the historic Timotheus. Such folly would hardly be credited, were it not before our eyes:— “ Ist man big hieher gefolgt, so wird man es nicht zu kü hn finden, wenn wir die Beramtlung ausstellen, das durch Antipas Timotheus bezeichnet werde. Die beiden namen ‘ Furchtegott’ und ‘ Gegenall’ stehen in inniger Correspondenz mit einander,” &c., Hengst. p. 190. This Commentator also finds remarkable meaning in the way in which the name is written in , Ἀντείπας . Then that of E. Schmidt and others, who hold Ἀντεὶπας to be = Ἀντὶπαπα : that of Cocceius, who makes Antipas represent the Athanasians, seeing that ἀντίπατρος = ἰσόπατρος = ὁμοούσιος . I mention such interpretations, to shew how far men may go wrong when once they surrender their judgment to their fancy in search of a mystic sense for plain history, On ὅπουὁσατ . κατοικ ., see above). 14, 15. Nevertheless I have against thee a few things (not “ a little matter,” as Luth., Hengstb.; nor does ὀλίγα imply that more than one matter is blamed, as Beng.: nor is it used by litotes, to mean “ graviter de te conqueror,” as Heinr. and Ebrard; nor is any reference to be thought of to the sins of Christ’ s people having been removed by His atonement, and thus spoken of lightly by Him, as Aretius: but is used as a word of comparison with the far greater number of approved things which remained, and is plural, inasmuch as ὀλίγον would refer, not to the objective fewness, but to the subjective unimportance, of the grounds of complaint; which latter was not so. This use of the plural comes under the case treated by Winer (§ 27. 2), where only one thing is really meant, but the writer speaks of that one generically; e. g. τεθνήκασινοἱζητοῦντεςτὴνψυχ . τοῦπαιδίου , Matthew 2:20, where Herod only is meant. And so De Wette and Dü sterd.): thou hast there (in Pergamum: the locality is specified probably on account of the description which has been just given of it as the place where a faithful martyr had suffered unto death) men holding (cf. κρατεῖςτὸὄν . μου above) the teaching of Balaam (διδαχήν : not simply as De W., “ doctrine corresponding to the character of the advice of Balaam,” but used in strict correspondence with ὃςἐδίδασκεν following: that which a man teaches being his doctrine. And κρατεῖν this διδαχήν , is to follow the teaching), who taught Balak (the dat. seems to be a Hebraism, ל ִ מ ּ ֵ ד ל ִ , Job 21:22: so Ewald, De W., Ebrard, Dü sterd.: not a dat. commodi, “ for Balak” to serve his purpose, understanding “ men” as an object after ἐδίδασκεν , as Hengstb. Certainly it is not expressly asserted in Numbers 31:16 that it was Balak whom Balaam advised to use this agency against Israel: but the narrative almost implies it: Balak was in power, and was the most likely person to authorize and put in force the scheme. And so Josephus, Antt. iv. 6. 6, makes Balaam on departing call to him τόντεΒάλακονκαὶτοὺςἄρχονταςτῶνΜαδιανιτῶν , and give them the advice) to put a stumbling-block (properly σκανδάληθρον : see reff., and a minute investigation of the word by Trench in loc.: an occasion of sin) before (in the way, or before the face of) the sons of Israel, to eat (i. e. inducing them to eat. See var. readd.) things offered to idols (from Numbers 25:1, Numbers 25:2, it was not only participation in things offered to idols, but the actual offering sacrifices to them, of which the children of Israel were guilty. But seeing that the participation was that which was common to both, our Lord takes that as the point to be brought forward: “ satis hic habuit Christus id dicere, quod illi Israelitæ cum Nicolaitis habebant commune.” Grot.) and to commit fornication. 15. Thus thou also hast (as well as those of old: not, as the Church at Ephesus, ver. 6 (De W.). “ Sicut Balac tenuit doctrinam pestiferam Balaam, sic apud te sunt aliqui tenentes doctrinam Nicolai erroneam.” Lyra) men holding (see above) the teaching of the Nicolaitans (the art. though not expressed, is in fact, in this later usage, contained in the proper name) in like manner (viz. in eating things offered to idols, and fornication. We may remark, 1) that it is most according to the sense of the passage to understand these sins in the case of the Nicolaitans, as in that of those whom Balaam tempted, literally, and not mystically. So , Andr., Areth., Ribera, Calov., Beng., Heinr. (doubtfully), Ewald, De W., Hengst., Ebrard, Dü sterd., Trench, al.: 2) that the whole sense of the passage is against the idea of the identity of the Balaamites and the Nicolaitans; and would be in fact destroyed by it. The mere existence of the etymological relation is extremely doubtful (see above on ver. 6): and even granting it,— to suppose the two identical, would be to destroy the historical illustration by which the present existing sect is described). 16. Repent [therefore] (Lyra, a-Lapide, Tirinus, Bengel, al., join the preceding ὁμοίως to this clause, understanding it, as well as the church at Ephesus, ver. 5. The command is addressed not only to the Nicolaitans, but to the church, which did not, like that of Ephesus, hate them, but apparently tolerated them): but if not, I (will) come to thee (dat. incommodi, see above on ver. 5) quickly , and will make war with them (the Nicolaitans. This making war must not be understood as Grotius, “ Prophetas excitabo in Ecclesia, qui id faciant quod Episcopus negligit, et fortiter se opponant Nicolaitis” (similarly Calov.)) with (ἐν , in, as armed with or arrayed in: but sometimes in the Rev. it is difficult to trace the proper meaning of ἐν , and it seems almost purely instrumental: cf. Winer, edn. 6, § 48, d) the sword of my mouth (many expositors (e. g., Grot., Wetst., Vitr., Beng., Stern, Hengst., Trench, al.) suppose an allusion to the sword of the angel, armed with which he withstood Balaam in the way (Numbers 22:23, Numbers 22:31), or to that and the sword by which those who sinned in the matter of Baal-peor (Numbers 25:5), and eventually Balaam himself (Numbers 31:8), were slain: but seeing that the connexion with ch. 1:16 is so plainly asserted by our ver. 12, it seems better to confine the allusion to that sword, and not to stretch it to what after all is a very doubtful analogy). 17. Conclusion. For the former clause see on ver. 7. We may notice that in these three first Epistles, the proclamation precedes the promise to him that conquereth: in the four last, it follows the promise. To him that conquereth I will give to him (see above on ver. 7) of the manna which is hidden (on the partitive gen. see ref., and Winer, edn. 6, § 30. 7, b. In this manna, there is unmistakably an allusion to the proper and heavenly food of the children of Israel, as contrasted with the unhallowed idolofferings; but beyond that, there is an allusion again (see above on ver. 7) to our Lord’ s discourse in Joh_6, where He describes Himself as the true bread from heaven: not that we need here, any more than in ver. 7 (see note there), confuse the present figure by literally pressing the symbolism of that chapter. Christ’ s gifts may all be summed up in the gift of Himself: on the other hand, He may describe any of the manifold proprieties of his own Person and office as His gift. This manna is κεκρυμμένον , in allusion partly perhaps to the fact of the pot of manna laid up in the ark in the holy of holies (Exodus 16:33: cf. our ch. 11:19: not to the Jewish fable, “ Hæ c est arca quam … Josias abscondit ante vastationem templi nostri, et hæ c area futuro tempore, adveniente Messia nostra … manifestabitur.” Abarbanel on 1 Samuel 4:4, cited by Dü sterd.), but principally to the fact that our spiritual life, with its springs and nourishments, κέκρυπταισὺντῷχριστῷἐντῷθεῷ , Colossians 3:3. See also Psalms 78:24; Psalms 105:40. The distinction between κεκρυμμένον , reconditum, and κρυπτόν , occultum, pressed here by Trench after Cocceius, does not appear to be warranted, further than that the participle represents more the objective fact, while the verbal adjective sets forth the subjective quality), and I will give to him a white stone (see, below), and on the stone (the prep. of motion betokens the act of inscribing) a new name written, which none knoweth except he that receiveth it (the views concerning this stone have been very various. Bede interprets it “ corpus nunc baptismo candidatum, tunc incorruptionis gloria refulgens.” And similarly Lyra, “ corpus dote charitatis decoratum, quod dicitur calculus sive lapillus, quia est extractum de terra, sicut et lapis,” adding, “ nomen novum, quia tunc quilibet beatus manifeste et corporaliter per dotes corporis gloriosi erit ascriptus civitati cœ lestium.” But both these are surely out of the question. Some have connected this with the mention of the manna, and cited (as Wetst., who gives it merely among others and expresses no opinion) the Rabbinical tradition, Joma 8, “ cadebant Israelitis una cum manna lapides pretiosi et margaritæ .” Others again think of the precious stones bearing the names of the twelve tribes on the breastplate of the High-priest, the order for which was contemporary with the giving of the manna, Exodus 28:17; Exodus 39:10, and regard this as indicating the priestly dignity of the victorious Christian. So Ewald, Zü llig, Ebrard: the last remarks, that as the hidden manna was the reward for abstaining from idol-meat, so this for abstinence from fornication. But, as Dü sterd. observes, these are never called ψῆφοι . Again some, as Arethas, Grot., Hamm., Eichhorn, Heinr., have reminded us of the Gentile custom of presenting the victors at the games with a ψῆφος or ticket which entitled them to nourishment at the public expense, and to admission to royal festivals. Titus, they quote from Xiphilinus, Epit. Dion. p. 228, used to cast small pieces of wood down into the arena, σύμβολονἔχοντα , τὰμὲνἐδωδίμουτινός , κ .τ .λ ., which whoever got was to bring καὶλαβεῖντὸἐπιγεγραμμένον . Hence they regard the white stone as the ticket of admission to the heavenly feast. But it may be replied, 1) the feast is mentioned separately under the name of the hidden manna: and 2) the description of the writing on the stone, which follows, will not suit this view. Again, others, regarding the connexion of the white stone with the manna, refer to the use of the lot cast among the priests, which should offer the sacrifice (so Schö ttg., quoting the Rabbis): or to the writing a name, at election by ballot, on a stone or a bean : or to the “ mos erat antiquis niveis atrisque lapillis, His damnare reos, illis absolvere culpa,” Ov. Met. xv. 41. So Erasm., Zeger, a-Lap., Aretius, Calov., Vitr., Wolf, al. Some expositors combine two or more of these expositions: as De Wette, understanding it as typical of justification and election; Bengel; Stern, who also notices the white stone as the mark of felicity, “ Hunc, Macrine, diem numera meliore lapillo, Qui tibi labentes apponit candidus annos,” Pers. Sat. ii., and “ O diem læ tum notandumque mihi candidissimo calculo,” Plin. Ep. vi. 11. 3. But, as Dü sterd. well observes, it is against all these interpretations, that no one of them fits the conditions of this description. Each one halts in the explanation either of the stone itself, or of that which is written on it. Least of all, perhaps, does the last apply: the verdict of acquittal would be a strange reward indeed to one who has fought and overcome in the strength of an acquittal long ago obtained, ὁκύριοςἐχαρίσατοὑμῖν Colossians 3:13. The most probable view is that which Bengel gives a hint of , and which Hengst. and Dü sterd. hold, that the figure is derived from the practice of using small stones, inscribed with writing, for various purposes, and that, further than this, the imagery belongs to the occasion itself only. Taking it thus, the colour is that of victory, see ch. 3:4; 6:2; 4:4; 19:14. The name inscribed yet remains for consideration. It is in this, as it would be in every case, the inscription which gives the stone its real value, being, as it is, a token of reward and approval from the Son of God. But what name is this? not what name in each case, for an answer to this question is precluded by the very terms, ὃοὐδεὶςοἶδεν , κ .τ .λ .: but of what kind? Is it the name of Christ Himself, or of God in Christ? This supposition is precluded also by the game terms: for any mysterious name of God or of Christ would either be hidden from all , or known to all who were similarly victorious through grace. These very terms seem to require that it should be the recipient’ s own name, a new name however; a revelation of his everlasting title, as a son of God, to glory in Christ, but consisting of, and revealed in, those personal marks and signs of God’ s peculiar adoption of himself, which he and none else is acquainted with. “ If the heart knoweth its own bitterness, and a stranger intermeddleth not with its joy” (Proverbs 14:10), then the deep secret dealings of God with each of us during those times, by which our sonship is assured and our spiritual strife carried onward to victory, can, when revealed to us in the other blessed state, be known thoroughly to ourselves only. Bengel beautifully says, “ Mochtest Du wissen, was Du fur einen neuen Namen bekommen wirst? Uberwinde! Borher fragst Du vergeblich: und hernach wirst Du ihn bald auf dem weissen Stein geschrieben lesen.” Trench, in loc., after Zü llig, suggests that the white, or glistering stone, may be the Urim, in which the most precious stone of all was covered by the twelve on which the names of the tribes were engraved; the writing on which no one knew. The suggestion is one well worth consideration). 18-29. The Epistle to the church at Thyatira. See Prolegg. § iii. 9. And to the angel of the church in Thyatira write: These things saith the Son of God , who hath his eyes as a flame of fire and his feet are like to chalcolibanus (for χαλκολ ., see on ch. 1:15. There is here probably a connexion with ver. 27, ὡςτὰσκεύητὰκεραμικὰσυντρίβεται , the work of the strongly shod feet): I know thy works, and (the four which follow are subordinated to the ἔργα preceding, as is shown by σου placed after the four, not after each one. The καί then is the subordinating or epexegetic copula, as in καὶχάρινἀντὶχάριτος , John 1:16. See Winer, edn. 6, § 53. 3, c) the love (ἀγάπη , standing first, is probably quite general, to God and man) and the faith (general again: not = faithfulness, but in its ordinary sense) and the ministration (viz., to the sick and poor, and all that need it: the natural proof of ἀγάπη and πίστις — πίστιςδι ʼ ἀγάπηςἐνεργουμένη , Galatians 5:6) and the endurance (in tribulation: or perhaps the ὑπομονὴἔργουἀγαθοῦ of Romans 2:7) of thee, and (that) thy last works (are) more (in number, or importance, or both) than the first (this praise is the opposite of the blame conveyed by ver. 5 to the Ephesian church). 20. Notwithstanding I have against thee that thou sufferest (ἀφεῖς from ἀφέω , see ref. Ex. and Winer, edn. 6, § 14. 3) thy wife (or, the woman) Jezebel (on the whole, the evidence for σου being inserted in the text seems to me to preponderate. It could not well have been inserted: and was sure to have been erased, from its difficulty, and possibly from other reasons, considering what was the common interpretation of the ἄγγελος . It does not create any real difficulty: finding its meaning not in the matter of fact at Thyatira, but in the history from which the appellation Ἰεζαβέλ is taken. In 3 Kings 20:25 (1 Kings 21:25) we read Ἀχαάβ , ὃςἐπράθηποιῆσαιτὸπονηρὸνἐνώπιονκυρίου , ὡςμετέθηκεναὐτὸνἸεζαβὲλἡγυνὴαὐτοῦ : from which text the phrase is transferred entire, importing that this Jezebel was to the church at Thyatira what that other was to Ahab. It is not so easy to determine who is, or who are, imported by the term. The very fact of the name Jezebel being chosen (for it is impossible, even were this the actual name of a woman, that it should be used here with any other than the symbolic meaning), coupled with τὴνγυναῖκάσου above explained, takes us out of the realms of simple fact into those of symbolism. The figure of “ Jezebel thy wife” being once recognized in its historical import, it would not be needful that an individual woman should be found to answer to it: the conscience of the Thyatiran church could not fail to apply the severe reproof to whatever influence was being exerted in the direction here indicated. So that I should rate at very little the speculations of many Commentators on the supposed woman here pointed out. Dü sterd., recently, remarks that ἡλέγουσα has something individual about it. So it has: but may not this individuality belong just as well to the figure, as to the thing signified by it? The sect or individuals being once concentrated as Jezebel, ἡλέγουσα would follow of course, in the propriety of the figure. On the whole, however, I should feel it more probable that some individual teacher, high in repute and influence at the time, is pointed at. The denunciation of such a teacher under such a title would be at once startling and decisive. Nor would probability be violated by the other supposition, that a favoured and influential party In the Thyatiran church is designated. The church herself is represented by a woman: why may not a party (compare the Jews, who are the συναγωγὴτοῦσατανᾶ of ver. 9) within the church be similarly symbolized? However this may be, the real solution must lie hidden until all that is hidden shall be known. See more below), who calleth herself a prophetess (the appositional nom. again: see reff.: and again with an indeclinable proper name, as in ver. 13. This clause perhaps points at an individual: but there is on the other hand no reason why a sect claiming prophetic gifts should not be indicated: the feminine belonging as before to the historical symbol), and she teacheth and deceiveth my servants, to commit fornication and eat things sacrificed to idols (hence the propriety of the name Jezebel: for both these were the abominations of the historic Jezebel: 2 Kings 9:22, 2 Kings 9:30 (cf. Jeremiah 4:30; Nahum 3:4): the latter indeed in its more aggravated form of actual idolatry, 1 Kings 18:19. This specification of the mischief done shews us that this influence at Thyatira was in the same direction as the evil works of the Nicolaitans at Pergamum, ver. 14. The fact that this was the prevalent direction of the false teaching of the day, is important in a chronological point of view: see Prolegg., § iii. par. 6). And I gave her time (not, “ in my pre-ordination of what is to be,” as the aor. in Mark 13:20, but denoting historically that which the Lord had actually done, in vain. Notice that the ἀφεῖναι , on which depended the time given her for repentance, is yet blamed in the church of Thyatira as a sin) that she should repent, and she willeth not to repent of (lit. “ out of:” constr. præ gn., so as to come out of: or the μεταν . itself is regarded as an escape. The construction (reff.) is confined to this book: we have the verb once with ἀπό , Acts 8:22; and the subst. μετάνοια , Hebrews 6:1) her fornication (πορνεία is here to be taken, as in all these passages, in its literal sense. Otherwise, if taken figuratively, it would be only a repetition of the other particular, idolatry). 22. Behold (arrests attention, and prepares the way for something unexpected and terrible), I cast her (evidently against her will: but there is not necessarily violence in the word: it is the ordinary verb for being “ cast” on a bed of sickness: see reff. and Matthew 8:6, Matthew 8:14) into a bed (ἀντὶτοῦ , εἰςἀῤῥωστίαν , Areth.: will change her bed of whoredom into a bed of anguish: see Psalms 41:3. So most Commentators. Perhaps the threat has reference to a future pestilence. Bede, Lyra, al., understand the bed to be “ infernalis pœ na,” the latter referring to Isaiah 14:11. Ansbert, curiously enough, “ severitatis vel audaciæ lectum,” into which God casts his enemies before their destruction), and those who commit adultery (not now πορνεύοντας , but a more general term, embracing in its wide meaning both the πορνεῦσαι and εἰδωλόθυταφαγεῖν , and well known as the word used of rebellious and idolatrous Israel, cf. Jeremiah 3:8, Jeremiah 3:5:7; Ezekiel 16:32 al.) together with her μετ ʼ αὐτῆς is not = αὐτήν , so that she should be the ‘ conjux adulterii,’ but implies merely participation— those who share with her in her adulteries. These μοιχεύοντεςμετ ʼ αὐτῆς , as interpreted by the tone with which the rebuke began, will mean, those who by suffering and encouraging her, make themselves partakers of her sin. And this rather favours the idea that not one individual, but a dominant party, is intended. See below) into great tribulation (this clause forms a kind of parallelism with the former, so that εἰςθλίψινμεγ . is parallel with εἰςκλίνην . But it is not to be regarded as interpreting κλίνη . Her punishment and that of her children (see below) is one thing; that of the partakers in her adulteries, those in the church who tolerated and encouraged her, another, viz. great tribulation. This is forcibly shewn by the ἔργωναὐτῆς following), if they do not (aor.: speedily and effectually, shall not have done so by the time which I have in my thoughts) repent of her (not their: they are Christ’ s servants who are tampering with her temptations and allowing themselves in her works, which are alien from their own spiritual life) works. And her children (emphatically put forward as distinguished from the last mentioned: q. d., “ And as to her children, &c.” These are her proper adherents: not those who suffer her, but those who are begotten of her, and go to constitute her. Some Commentators have vainly dreamt of the slaughter of Ahab’ s 70 sons, 2Ki_10: but they were not Jezebel’ s children. The historical figure is obviously dropped here) I will slay with (in, but perhaps merely instrumental: see above, on ver. 16) death : and all the churches (this remarkable expression, meaning not, all the Asiatic churches, but all the churches in the world till the end of time, lifts the whole of this threatening and its accompanying encouragements out of proconsular Asia, and gives us a glimpse into the œ cumenical character of these messages) shall know (the fanciful Hengst. imagines a reference in γνώσονται to the false γνῶσις : but in so common and solemn a formula of the O. T., this must surely be out of the question) that I am he that searcheth the reins and the hearts (which, see reff. is the attribute of God: and therefore of the Son of God. Cf. ver. 18 above, and note. Grotius says, “ Per renes intelliguntur desideria, ut et Psalms 139:13, Jeremiah 12:2, Proverbs 23:16: per cor, cogitata, 1 Samuel 16:7, 1 Samuel 16:1 Reg. 8:39 al.” But it seems doubtful whether so minute a distinctionis in the words; whether they are not rather a general designation for the whole inward parts of a man): and I will give to you (‘ will render, in My doom of judgment.’ The strain of the Lord’ s message is Suddenly changed into a direct address to those threatened) to each according to your works (ἔργα , not the mere outward products of the visible life, but the real acts and verities of the inward man, discerned by the piercing eye of the Son of God). 24. But (contrast to those addressed before) to you I say, the rest who are in Thyatira, as many as have not (not only do not hold, but are free from any contact with) this teaching, such as (οἵτινες , as usual, classifies) have not known the depths (deep places, in the resolved form) of Satan, as they call them (it was the characteristic of the falsely named γνῶσις , to boast of its βάθεα , or depths, of divine things. Iren. ii. 22. 1, p. 146, speaks of those “ qui profunda bythi adinvenisse se dicunt:” and ib. 3, p. 147, “ profunda Dei adinvenisse se dicentes.” And adv. Valent. 1, vol. ii. p. 538 ff., should by all means be read, as admirably illustrating this expression. He there says, “ Elcusinia Valentiniana fecerunt lenocinia, sancta silentio magno, sola taciturnitate cœ lestia. Si bona fide quæ ris, concrete vultu, suspenso supercilio Altum est, aiunt.” We may safely therefore refer the expression οὐκἔγνωσαντὰβάθεα to the heretics spoken of. But it is not so clear to whom as their subject the words ὡςλέγουσιν are to be appropriated, and again whose word τοῦσατανᾶ is, whether that 1) of our Lord, 2) of the heretics, or 3) of the Christians addressed. If ὡςλέγουσιν belong to the Christians, then the sense will be, that they, the Christians, called the βάθεα of the heretics, the βάθεατοῦσατανᾶ , and were content to profess their ignorance of them. So Andr., Areth., Heinr., Zü llig, Ebrard: and so far would be true enough; but the sentence would thus be left very flat and pointless, and altogether inconsistent in its tone with the solemn and pregnant words of the rest of the message. If ὡςλέγουσιν belong to the heretics, we have our choice between two views of τοῦσατανᾶ : either 1) that the heretics themselves called their own mysteries τὰβ . τοῦσατανᾶ . But this, though held by Hengst.,— and even by Neander, Pfl. u. L. edn. 4, p. 619 note, as a possible alternative, and recently by Trench,— can hardly be so, seeing that the words surely would not bear the sense thus assigned to them, viz. that they could go deeper than and outwit Satan in his own kingdom: and seeing moreover, that no such formula, or any resembling it, is found as used by the ancient Gnostic heretics: or 2) that the ὡςλέγουσιν applies only to the word βάθεα , and that, when, according to their way of speaking, τοῦθεοῦ should have followed (cf. ref. 1 Cor.), the Lord in indignation substitutes τοῦσατανᾶ . This has been the sense taken by most Commentators, e. g., Corn.-a-lap., Ribera, Grot., Calov., Wetst., Vitr., Bengel, Wolf, Eichhorn, Ewald, De W., Stern, Dü sterd. And it appears to me that this alone comes in any measure up to the requirements of the passage, in intensity of meaning and solemnity, as well as in verisimilitude. I need hardly remark that the rendering which I am sorry to see in Tre-gelles’ s very useful little English version of the purer text of the Apoc., “ how they speak,” is quite untenable. In the E.V., “ as they speak,” is meant to = “ as they say:” but for “ how they speak” (absol.), λαλοῦσιν would be required), I cast not upon yon any other burden (it is better, seeing that no τοῦτο or τό follows after πλήν below, not to carry on the sentence as if ἄλλο , πλήν … were closely joined, but to break it off at βάρος : leaving however the πλήν to take it up (see below) by and by. And this being so, to what do the words refer? There can, I imagine, be little doubt as to the answer, if we remember some of the expressions used in the apostolic decree in which these very matters here in question, fornication and abstaining from unholy meats, were the only things forbidden to the Gentile converts. For our Lord here takes up and refers to those very words. In Acts 15:28, we read ἔδοξενγὰρτῷἁγίῳπνεύματικ . ἡμῖνμηδὲνπλέονἐπιτίθεσθαιὑμῖνβάροςπλὴντῶνἐπάναγκες , ἀπέχεσθαιεἰδωλοθύτωνκ . αἵματοςκ . πνικτῶνκ . πορνείας . This act of simple obedience, and no deep matters beyond their reach, was what the Lord required of them. And this βάρος resolved itself into keeping the faith once delivered to the saints, as enjoined in the next sentence. This view is taken by Bede (2) (in substance: “ non ego vobis novam mitto doctrinam: sed quam accepistis, servate in finem;” but he does not mention the allusion), , Lyra, Corn.-a-lap., Stern, Hengst., Dü sterd. Grot. al. give a more general meaning, true in part: “ jactant illi se rerum multarum cognitione; eam a vobis non exigo.” Bengel understands by βάρος the trouble given them by Jezebel and her followers: Ewald, the punishments about to befall the heretics, which were not to be feared by the Christians: Ebrard similarly,— they had had enough trouble already in enduring Jezebel, &c, and should not have any share in her punishment: De Wette, the burden of previous suffering implied in ὑπομονή ; and so Bede (1), “ non patiar vos tentari supra quod potestis,” and Beza, understanding βάρος in the sense of “ burden,” so often occurring in the prophets when they denounce the divine threatenings. But to my mind the allusion to the apostolic decree is too clear and prominent to allow of any other meaning coming into question: at least any other which sets that entirely aside. Others may be deduced and flow from that one, which have meaning for the church now that those former subjects of controversy have passed away): but (though not (see above) directly and in the same sentence connected with ἄλλο , πλήν distinctly looks back to it and takes it up. It is, “ only:” q. d., forget not that the licence just accorded involves this sacred obligation) that which ye have (cf. ch. 3:11: not to be restricted in its sense to their steadfastness in resisting Jezebel and hers, but representing the sum total of Christian doctrine and hope and privilege; the ἅπαξπαραδοθεῖσατοῖςἁγίοιςπίστις of Jude 1:3), hold fast (the aor. is more vivid and imperative than would be the present; it sets forth not so much the continuing habit, as the renewed and determined grasp of every intervening moment of the space prescribed) until the time when I shall come (the ἄν gives an uncertainty when the time shall be, which we cannot convey in our language). 26. And (the announcement of reward to the conqueror now first precedes the proclamation to hear what the Spirit saith to the churches: and is joined, here alone, by καί (to the preceding portion of the Epistle; being indeed more closely connected with it in this case than in any of the others; see below) he that conquereth and he that keepeth to the end my works (contrast to τὰἔργααὐτῆς , ver. 22: but extending beyond that contrast to a general and blessed truth. μου , gen. possess, which belong to Me, are the attributes of Myself and of mine), I will give to him authority over the nations , and he shall govern (lit. “ shepherd.” It is the LXX rendering of the Heb. ת ּ ְ ר ֹ ע ֵ ם , break in pieces, which they have taken as ת ּ ִ ר ְ ע ֵ ם , shepherd, in ref. Ps. The saying, as rendered by them, is sanctioned by being thrice quoted in this book, see reff.) them with (see 1 Corinthians 4:21) a rod of iron (a sceptre of severity: “ inflexibili justitia,” as Lyra), as the vessels of pottery are broken up (συντρίβεται , are crushed, or shivered, or broken up: the συν gives the idea of the multitudinous fragments collapsing into an heap: the “ broken to shivers” of the E.V. is very good), as I also have received from my Father (viz. in Psalms 2:9, in which Psalm it is said υἱόςμουεἶσύ , ver. 7. The power there conferred on Me, I will delegate to my victorious servant; see Luke 22:29). And I will give to him the star of the morning (it is not easy to say what, in strict exactness, these words import. The interpretations given, even in the Catena, are very various and inconsistent. Andr. and Areth. understand it of the Lucifer of Isa 14:12, i. e. the devil, whom our Lord saw as lightning fall from heaven,— or, as there imported, the King of Babylon, the most powerful monarch on earth; so Zü llig. Another meaning in the Catena is τὸνὑπὸτοῦΠέτρουλεχθένταφώσφορονἐνταῖςκαρδίαιςτῶνπιστῶνἀνατέλλοντα , 2 Peter 1:19. Victorinus says, “ Primam resurrectionem scilicet promittit.” Primas., Bede, Alcas., Corn.-a-lap., Calov., Vitr., Wolf, Beng., Stern, Ebrard, understand Christ Himself, who, ch. 22:16, declares Himself to be ὁἀστὴρὁλαμπρός , ὁπρωϊνός : and doubtless, as has been before remarked on the fruit of the tree of life, ver. 7, and on the hidden manna, ver. 17, in the mystical sense, Christ Himself is the sum and inclusion of all Christ’ s gifts: this truth serves to connect the symbolism of all these passages, but does not justify us in disturbing that of one by introducing that of another. Here the morning star clearly is not Christ Himself, the very terms of the sentence separating the two. Then again, we have Lyra,— “ id est, corpus gloriosum dote claritatis refulgens,” — nearly the same words in which he before explained the white stone, ver. 17, only that there it was “ charitatis:” Grot., “ dabo et fulgorem, non qualis cuique stellæ , sed Luciferi, qui cæ teras stellas multum vincit.” And this interpretation is probably near the mark. In Daniel 12:3 we read that the righteous shall shine ὡςοἱἀστέρες , and in Matthew 13:43 that they ἐκλάμψουσινὡςὁἥλιοςἐντῇβασιλείᾳτοῦπατρὸςαὐτῶν . And in Proverbs 4:18 we read that “ the path of the just is as the shining light that shineth more and more unto the perfect day.” Still, this interpretation does not quite satisfy the words δώσωαὐτῷ : unless indeed the poetic imagery be, that he is imagined as clad in the glory of that star, putting it on as a jewel, or as a glittering robe. De Wette supposes it is to be given to him as its ruler: but such an interpretation would lead into a wide field of speculation which does not seem to have been opened by Scripture, and is hardly required by the passage itself). 29. See above, ver. 7. Ch. 3:1-6. The Epistle to the church at Sardis. The Spirit of this Epistle is one of rebuke and solemn denunciation. Even the promise, ver. 5, is tinged with the same hue. For the history, see Prolegg., § iii. 10. And to the angel of the church in Sardis write: These things saith He that hath the seven spirits of God (this designation of our Lord has not before occurred: but as Dü sterd. observes, it is new rather in form than in substance. We have mention in ch. 1:4 of the seven spirits which are before God’ s throne: and we there found occasion to interpret them of the plenitude of the Godhead in its attributes and energies. See, for further elucidation, ch. 4:5, 5:6. These spirits, this plenitude, Christ, the Lord of the church, possesses, is clothed and invested with, in all fulness. From Him the spiritual life of his churches comes as its source, in all its elements of vitality. He searches all the depths both of our depravity and of His own applications of grace. He has in his hand all the Spirit’ s power of conviction. He wields the fire of purification and the fire of destruction. Whether the Spirit informs, or rebukes, or warns, or comforts, or promises, whether He softens or hardens men’ s hearts, it is Christ who, searching the hearts as Son of God and feeling their feelings as Son of man, wields and applies the one and manifold Spirit. The designation here has its appropriateness in the whole character of this solemn Epistle. The Lord of the church comes, armed with all the powers of the Spirit; searching the depths of hypocrisy, judging of the worthlessness of works not done in faith. The difficulty of this general attribute of Christ, and not any one selected specially as applying to Sardis being here introduced, seems to be best accounted for, not, as Ebrard, by the general prophetic import of the Epistle, but by the fact that the minatory strain of the Epistle justifies the alleging the whole weight and majesty of the divine character of our Lord, to create alarm and bring about repentance) and the seven stars (the former symbolism (reff.) still holds in all its strictness. Nor have we the least right here, as some (e. g. Arethas in Catena, and Wetst.), to suppose that the stars and the spirits are identical. The motive mentioned above would fully account for this designation also: The Lord of all the churches: He who appoints them their ministering angels, and has them, and all that is theirs, in His hand): I know thy works, that thou hast a name that thon livest (I need only mention for warning the childish fancy, that the Bishop of Sardis was named Zosimus or Vitalis: so some blamed by Corn.-a-lap.: so, with approval, Bengel and Hengst. The expression explains itself: see ref. Herodot.: thou hast a repute that thou livest: art nominally, as we commonly now say, Christian), and (the mere copula carries the contrast far more vividly and pathetically than when it is made rhetorically complete by inserting “ yet.” The καί is not as Ebrard, “ hebraifirend fü r ἀλλά ” but is common in classical Greek, and indeed in all languages, in this sense) art dead (spiritually dead: void of vitality and fruitfulness: sunk in that deep deadly sleep which, if not broken in upon and roused up, is death itself: so St. Paul, Ephesians 5:14, ἔγειρεὁκαθεύδωνκ . ἀνάσταἀπὸτῶννεκρῶν , κ . ἐπιφαύσεισοιὁχριστός : see reff.). Be (γίνου , because a change is involved: become what thou art not) watchful (we can hardly help in English substituting the adj. for the participle “ watching;” thereby losing the objective vividness of the pres. part., and getting instead a subjective attribute of character. “ Awake and watch” would be, in paraphrase, tantamount to the text), and strengthen the remaining things, which were (the time is transferred to that indicated by στήρισον : which were, when thou shalt apply thyself to strengthen them) about to die (there is a question whether these λοιπά are to be understood as things, matters in which the Sardian church was not yet totally without spiritual vitality, or as persons, who were not yet passed into the almost universal death-slumber of hypocrisy. The latter view is taken by (, , as reported in Dü sterd.: but not in Catena, see below) Calov., Vitr., Eichh., De Wette, Stern, Ebrard, Dü sterd., Trench, al. And there is nothing in the construction to preclude the view. But if I mistake not, there is in the context. For to assume that the λοιποί could be thus described, would surely be to leave no room for those mentioned with so much praise below in ver. 4. Had τὰλοιπά not occurred, we might have well understood στήρισονἃἔμελλονἀποθανεῖν of confirming those thy weak members who on account of the general deadness were near losing their spiritual life altogether: but with τὰλοιπά this can hardly stand. We must therefore take the other view,— “ strengthen those thy remaining few graces, which in thy spiritual deadly slumber are not yet quite extinct.” And so Andr. and Areth. in Catena (I transcribe the whole, by which it appears that μέλη has been carelessly taken to mean personal members: see under the other view above),— τὸνὕπνοντῆςῥᾳθυμίαςἀποτιναξάμενος , καὶτὰμέλησουτὰἀποθνήσκειντελέωςμέλλονταδι ʼ ἀπιστίανστήριξον · οὐγὰρἡἀρχὴτῶνἀγαθῶνἔργωντὸνἐργάτηνστεφανοῖτὸνδόκιμονἀλλ ʼ ἡἑπιμονὴἄχριτέλους . τὸστήριξονδὲοὐχἁπλῶςεἴρηται , ἀλλὰτὸοἱονεὶστεῤῥοποίησονκαὶἐνδυνάμωσονχαλαράτεὄντακαὶπρὸςπτῶσινἑτοιμότατα . ἐφ ʼ ὅσονοὖνπεριλείπεταίσοι , βραχέαἐπιτηδεύματά , φησι , πρόσθες , ἵναμὴτέλεονἀποσπάσῃςθάνατον . ταῦταγοῦνφύλαξοντὰἤδηζῶντα , ἐκεῖναδὲστήριξοντὰπρὸςθάνατονἤδηῥέποντα · οὐδὲνγάρσουτῶνσπουδασμάτωνπληρέςἐστιν · ἀλλὰτὰμὲντέθνηκενἤδη , τὰδὲμέλλει :— so also Grot., Beng., Ewald, al.): for I have not found thy works (or, without the τά I have not found (any) works of thine) complete in the sight of my God (up to the mark and measure of being acceptable to Him: i. e. not wrought in that living faith which alone renders human works acceptable to God, by uniting them to Him on whom the Father looks with perfect approval. Dü sterd. well observes, “ The express reference to the absolute rule of all Christian morality is here put the more strongly and strikingly, because this church had among men a name that she lived.” The μου binds on the judgment of Him who speaks to that of God). Remember [therefore] how (not subjective, “ with what manner of reception,” as even Dü sterd., after many others, but objective, “ after what sort,” “ quomodo institutes fueris,” as Castalio: as οὕτως , Ephesians 4:20; 1 Corinthians 15:11. Trench would unite both) thou hast received (perf.: of the permanent deposit of doctrine entrusted) and heardest (aor., of the act of hearing, when it took place), and keep (what thou hast received and heardest: pres., of an abiding habit) and repent (not pres. now, as the command is of a quick and decisive act of amendment). If therefore (the οὖν is hardly, as De Wette, because it is assumed, in the present evil state of the Sardian church, that the exhortation will be in vain: far rather, as Dü sterd. (alt.), Hengst., al., because repentance is so grievously needed. And it follows on the plain declaration which has been made of that present evil state; coming forcibly and unexpectedly, where we should rather have looked for δέ ) thou dost not watch (aor.: shalt not have awaked and become watchful, before the time about to be indicated in the threat which is coming), I will come as a thief (these words do not here refer to our Lord’ s final coming, but to some signal judgment in which He would overtake the Sardian church. Just as the formula derived from the great eschatological truth of the suddenness of His second coming is frequently applied to His final judgment in Jerusalem, so is it to other His partial and special advents to judgment in the case of individuals and churches), and thou shalt not know (οὐμή , see on ch. 2:11) at what hour (the accus. of the time when has been called a Hebraism: so even De Wette from Gesenius: or an Aramaism, according to Ewald. But it is common enough in later Greek, and is only, in its first form, a particular case of the accusative of measure, whether of space or time: see Krü ger, § 46, anm. 1, where he cites such common expressions, as ἐξήλθομενἔτοςτουτίτρίτονεἰςΠάνακτον , Demosth.: Πρωταγόραςτρίτηνἤδηἡμέρανἐπιδεδήμηκεν . The change which the construction underwent seems to have been that which was usual in such cases; it lost its own peculiar significance of measure and duration, and became used where a mere point of time was in question. But even thus it finds abundant justification in good Greek in such expressions as that in Homer, Ι l. φ . 111, ἀλλ ʼ ἔπιτοικαὶἐμοὶθάνατοςκαὶμοῖρακραταιὴἜσσεταιἢἡώς , ἢδείλης , ἢμέσονἦμαρ : in Herod, ii. 2, τὴνὥρηνἐπαγινέεινσφίσιαἶγας : and in such accusatives as ἦμαρ , νύκτα , ἀρχήν , τέλος , πυκνά , and the like. See also Matthiæ , Gr. Gr. § 424, a) I will come upon thee. Nevertheless (notwithstanding this state of apathy even to spiritual death) thou hast (belonging to thee as members. Notice, as Bengel remarks, that these few had not separated themselves from the church in Sardis, notwithstanding its degraded state) a few names (“ homines nominatim recensiti,” as Vatabl. in Dü sterd. See reff. The gloss. interim. is good: “ quasi paucos nominates, i. e., bonos qui nominatione digni sunt.” The term would hardly be used except of a limited number. Hengstenb., with his usual fancifulness, in which he is here followed by Ebrard, finds an allusion in the ἔχειςὀλίγαὀνόματα to the ὄνομαἔχειςὅτι … above. It hardly needs remark, that the whole sense and connexion is different, the stress there on ὄνομα , here on ἔχεις . Besides which, in my judgment nothing can be further from the solemnity of the passage than the existence of such mere verbal allusions) in Sardis, which have not defiled their garments (the aor. is from the standing-point of the future day presently introduced, as so commonly when life is looked back on from the great time of retribution. The meaning of the figure (which occurs also in Jude 1:23) has been variously given. There can be little doubt that the simpler and more general explanation is the right one: viz., who have not sullied the purity of their Christian life by falling into sin. So the gloss. interlin., Lyra, al. m. It seems unnecessary, and introducing confusion, to specify further; either the garments as importing their flesh (Areth., al.), their consciences (Alcas., Tirinus, Grot., Peiræ us), the robe of Christ’ s righteousness put on by faith (Calov.), the robe of baptismal purity (Ansbert, , Ribera, Corn.-a-lap., Hengst.), or again the keeping undefiled as consisting in abstinence from contact with the dead body of the rest of the church. This last view Ebrard attributes to Hengst., but it is not in his exposition here. He characteristically finds in ἐμόλυναν an allusion to Sardes = Sordes): and they shall walk with me in white (so, not filling up λευκοῖς , E. V. admirably. The supply, ἱματίοις , comes below, ver. 5: where see note. The white here is not to be identified with the undefiled garments which they now wear: it is a new and glorious hue of victory: see ch. 6:11; 7:9; 19:8. The allusion which Schö ttg., Vitringa, al., have imagined, to their priesthood,— because when a judgment was held by the Sanhedrim on the priests, those who were condemned were clothed in black, while the blameless wore a white robe— seems, like so many of these rabbinical illustrations, to be farfetched, and to spoil the simplicity of the passage. An allusion to Zechariah 3:3 ff. is far more obvious. μετ ʼ ἐμοῦ , in remarkable accord with our Lord’ s prayer in John 17:24, πάτερ , ὃδέδωκάςμοι , θέλωἵναὅπουεἰμὶἐγὼκἀκεῖνοιὦσινμετ ʼ ἐμοῦ : see also Luke 23:43) because they are worthy . He that conquereth, he shall be clad in white garments (the concluding promise takes the hue of what had gone before, and identifies those just spoken of with these victorious ones): and I will not wipe out his name out of the book of life (this again takes its colour from the preceding. Those who have a name that they live, and are dead, are necessarily wiped out from the book of life: only he whose name is a living name, can remain on those pages. Here again the Rabbinical expositors have gone wrong in imagining that the genealogical tables of the priests are alluded to. Far rather is the reference to the ordinary lists of citizens, or of living members of any body or society, from which the dead are struck out. So Wetst., citing Dio Chrys. Rhod. xxxi. p. 336 c, ὅτανδημοσίᾳτινὰδέῃτῶνπολιτῶνἀποθανεῖνἐπ ʼ ἀδικήματι , πρότεροντὸὄνομααὐτοῦἐξαλείφεται . And Aristoph. 1180, τοὺςμὲνἐγγράφοντεςἡμῶν , τοὺςδ ʼ ἄνωτεκαὶκάτωἐξαλείφοντεςδὶςἢτρίς . Thus they whose names have been once inscribed in this book, whether by their outward admission into Christ’ s church in baptism, or by their becoming living members of Him by faith, if they endure to the end as His soldiers and servants, and obtain the victory, shall not, as all His mere professed members shall, have their names erased from it. The figure itself, of the book of life, is found as early as Exodus 32:32 f. See reff. for other places): and I will confess his name in the presence of my Father and in the presence of his angels (see Matthew 10:32; Luke 12:8, both of which are here combined, cf. Luke 9:26, Mark. The promise implies that in the great day the Judge will expressly acknowledge the name thus written in the book of life, as belonging to one of His. Cf. ch. 20:15; 21:27; also Matthew 7:23 (25:12), where He repudiates those whom He knows not). 6. See above, ch. 2:7. 7-13. The Epistle to the church at Philadelphia. It has been remarked, that this Epistle hears a tinge throughout of O. T. language and imagery, correspondent to the circumstances of the church as connected with the Jews dwelling there. For the history, &c., see Prolegomena. And to the angel of the church in Philadelphia write: These things saith the true One (it is doubtful whether the distinction between ἀληθινός and ἀληθής , which lies on the surface in ordinary usage, can be held firmly, on thorough examination of the places where the word occurs in the N. T. It is not easy for instance to justify the meaning “ genuine,” “ answering fully to its name,” in passages like John 7:28: and more experience in the habit of later Greek to break down the distinctions of derivative nouns has shaken me in the assertion of this meaning wherever the word occurs. Here, it would certainly appear as if it were chosen to declare an attribute of our Lord opposed to the λεγόντ . καὶοὐκεἰσὶνἀλλὰψεύδονται below. Not that the meaning genuine would be out of place in such a connexion: but that where ἀληθινός is used absolutely, of a person, the two meanings, genuine and truthful, running up into one head of truth, we must not in later diction press the one subordinate meaning as against the other. See for the distinction, which, however, is too exclusively pressed, Trench, N. T. Synonyms, § viii. The senses here to be avoided are,— ὁἀληθῶςἅγιος , as Corn.-a-lap. and Grot., thus losing the word altogether;— the real Messiah, in reference to the rejection of Him by the Jews, as Hengst. and Dü sterd.; He that bears the truth, as the High-priest the Urim and Thummim, δήλωσινκ . ἀλήθειαν , LXX, Exodus 28:26 (30); so Vitringa: “ promissis suis stans,” as Ewald and Zü llig), the Holy One (as opposed to the συναγωγὴτοῦσατανᾶ below; not with reference to Christ’ s High-priesthood, as Vitr.: nor as Eichhorn and Heinr., “ legatus divinus:” but expressive of moral attribute), He that hath the key of David (i. e. He that is the Heir and Lord of the abiding theocracy, as Dü sterd. In Isaiah 22:22, it is said of Eliakim son of Hilkiah, δώσωαὐτῷτὴνκλεῖδαοἴκουΔαυεὶδἐπὶτῷὤμῳαὐτοῦ , καὶἀνοίξεικαὶοὐκἔσταιὁἀποκλείωνκαὶκλείσεικαὶοὐκἔσταιὁἀνοίγων : which is manifestly the passage here incorporated into the Lord’ s message: and the sense is, that whatever inferior degrees there may be of this power of opening and shutting the church (= the house of David, with reference to the false Jews below), the supreme power, the one true key, belongs to the Lord Christ alone. It is hardly justified, and serves but little purpose, to attempt to set up a distinction between τὴνκλεῖντοῦΔαυείδ here, and τὴνκλεῖδαοἴκουΔαυείδ in l. c. (so Hengst., Ebr., Dü sterd.: see the idea well refuted in Vitringa.) The key is the same in both cases: but the One possesses it as his own by right, the other has it merely entrusted to him; laid on his shoulder. Some mistaken views have been: “ potestatem aperiendi intellectum Scripturarum,” Lyra, so also , Bede, Zega, al.: that Δαυείδ should be Τάφεθ , or Τώφεθ , and that our words mean the same as ch. 1:18, ἔχωτὰςκλεῖςτοῦθανάτουκαὶτοῦᾅδου (Wolf). This idea is quite distinct from that, and is closely connected with ver. 8, where the reference is entirely to the Church of God and success in God’ s work. The same Lord of all has the keys both of the prison and of the palace; but these words refer to the latter alone. Cf. on the whole sense, Matthew 16:19), who openeth and no one shall shut, and shutteth (the construction is altered to the direct from the participial: as in Amos 5:7, ὁποιῶνεἰςὕψοςκρίμα , καὶδικαιοσύνηνεἰςγῆνἔθηκεν . This is said to be Hebraistic (De W.): but such irregularities are not confined to any particular language) and no one shall open (these words are to be taken not merely of the power of Christ to forgive sins, but generally, as indeed the next verse requires. Christ only has power to admit into and exclude from His kingdom; to enlarge the work and opportunities of His Church, and to contract them): I know thy works (these words stand by themselves; not, as De W. (so also Ewald and Bengel), as connected with ὅτιμικρὰνκ .τ .λ . below, the intervening sentence, ἰδοὺ … αὐτήν , being considered parenthetical. They are words of comfort and support to the Philadelphian Church): behold I have given before thee a door opened (i. e. hare granted, in my possession and administration of the key of David, that a door should stand opened. For the construction, see ref. The door is variously understood: by Lyra, al. (see above on ver. 7) as “ ostium apertum ad scriptures intelligendas:” by Areth., as τὴνεἴσοδονπρὸςἀπόλαυσιν : by Bengel, as an entrance into the joy of thy Lord and so to an uninterrupted progress in all good; Eichhorn and Heinrichs, “ aditus ad me tibi patet,” in the merely superficial sense of “ bene tibi cupio:” most expositors take it to mean, as in reff. 1 Cor.; 2 Cor.; Col. (otherwise in ref. Acts), an opportunity for the mission work of the church. And this appears to be the true sense here, by what follows in ver. 9, promising conversion of those who were now foes. This connexion, which lies in the context itself, is made yet plainer by the ἰδοὺδέδωκα … ἰδοὺδιδῶ … ἰδοὺποιήσω . ἐνώπιόνσου , because the course is naturally forward), which no one is able to shut (it, redundant: see reff.): because thou hast little power (not as E. V. “ a little strength,” thereby virtually reversing the sense of the words: μικρὰνἔχειςδύν . importing “ thy strength is but small,” and the E. V. importing “ thou hast some strength,” the fact of its smallness vanishing under the indefinite term “ a little.” The meaning of this μικράν must not be assigned as Lyra, “ quia non dedi tibi gratiam miraculorum, sicut multis aliis episcopis illius temporis, recompensavi tibi intellectu sacrarum scripturarum excellenti” (see above), but it must be understood, as most Commentators, to have consisted in the fewness of the congregation of Christians there: possibly also, as Hengst., in their poverty as contrasted with the wealth of their Jewish adversaries), and (using that little well) didst keep my word and didst not deny my name (the aorr. perhaps refer to some time of especial trial when both these temptations, to break Christ’ s word and deny His name, were put before the church). Behold, I give (not, to thee, as Hengst., nor can we render it by “ patiar “ as Wolf: the sense is broken off in the following clause, and the διδῶ resumed by ἰδοὺποιήσωαὐτοὺςἵνα : see reff. in both places) of the synagogue of Satan (see on ch. 2:9, where the same expression occurs of outward Jews who were not real Jews), who profess themselves to be Jews and they are not, but do lie,— behold I will make them (this αὐτούς is put as the object of the preceding verb rather than as the subject of the following, as in οἴδαμεντοῦτον , πόθενἐστίν , not by a mere attraction of grammar, as usually represented (even in Winer, edn. 6, § 66. 5, a), but in the strictest logical propriety, αὐτούς being the object on which the action indicated by the preceding verb is exercised) that they shall come (for ἵνα aft. ποι ., and for the fut. indic, after ἵνα , see reff.), and shall worship before thy feet , and that they may know that I loved thee . Because thou didst keep the word of my endurance (the λόγος preached to thee, enjoining that ὑπομονή which belongs to Me and mine, see ch. 1:9. μου belongs to ὑπομονῆς alone, not to the whole τὸνλ . τῆςὑπ . as Dü sterd., Winer (edn. 6, § 34. 3, b), al. Such a construction would, I conceive, be indefensible: certainly all the places which are quoted as for it, are against it: viz. ch. 13:3; Colossians 1:13; Hebrews 1:3. Had it been so here, I should have expected τὸνλόγονμουτῆςὑπομονῆς ), I also (I on my side: the καί expressing reciprocity. And this reciprocity depends, in its form, on the close juxtaposition of the ὑπομονῆςμου and κἀγώ , which is materially interfered with by referring μου to the whole sentence and resolving τῆςὑπομονῆς into a mere epithet: see above) will keep thee (σε emphatic and prominent) from the hour of temptation (the appointed season of sore trial, τοῦπειρασμοῦ , of the well-known and signal temptation. But the article cannot be expressed in English, because it would unavoidably become the antecedent to “ which” following) which is about to come upon the whole world (the time imported is that prophesied of in Matthew 24:21 ff., viz. the great time of trouble which shall be before the Lord’ s second coming. As such, it is immediately connected with ἔρχομαιταχύ following), to try them that dwell upon the earth . 11. I come quickly (these words, which in different senses and with varying references form the burden of this whole book, are here manifestly to be taken as an encouragement and comfort to the Philadelphian church, arising from the nearness of the Lord’ s coming to reward her; cf. τὸνστέφανόνσου below): hold fast that which thou hast (ὃἔχεις , in the language of these Epistles, imports any advantage, or progress in grace, already possessed; cf. ch. 2:6, τοῦτοἔχεις , ὅτι … This is regarded as a treasure, to be firmly grasped, as against those who are ever ready to snatch it away. In this case the ὃἔχεις was a rich treasure indeed: cf. vv. 8, 10), that no one take thy crown (ref.). 12. The reward of the conqueror. He that conquereth (for the pendent nom., see ref.), I will make him a pillar in the temple of my God (i. e. he shall have a fixed and important place in the glorified church hereafter. That this, and nothing referring to any honour or dignity in the church militant (so Lyra, Aretius, Grot., “ Wetst., Schö ttg., al.), or in that as leading on to the church triumphant (so Vitr., Corn.-a-lap., Stern, al.) is intended, is manifest from the whole diction of this passage, as well as from comparing the corresponding promises, which all refer to the blessings of the future state of glory. It is no objection to this view, that in the heavenly Jerusalem there is no temple, ch. 21:22: but rather a corroboration of it. That glorious city is all temple, and Christ’ s victorious ones are its living stones and pillars. Thus as Dü sterd. well remarks, the imagery of the church militant, 1 Corinthians 3:16 ff.; Ephesians 2:19 ff.; 1 Peter 2:5 ff., is transferred to the church triumphant, but with this difference, that the saints are no longer the stones merely, but now the pillars themselves, standing in their immovable firmness. On θεοῦμου , see note on ch. 2:7), and out of it he shall never more go out (the subject is not the στύλος , but ὁνικῶν ; and the sense, that he who is thus fixed in his eternal place as a pillar in the heavenly temple, will never more, from any cause, depart from it. Those Commentators who have understood the promise of the church militant, have been obliged to take ἐξέλθῃ as a passive,” non ejicietur,” justifying this by such expressions as μήτιὁλύχνοςἔρχεται Mark 4:21. Lyra takes it in both senses— “ nec per apostasin, nec per excommunicationem.” And thus, except that the latter word will have no place, we may well understand the general word ἐξέλθῃ : none shall thrust him out, nor shall he be any more in danger of falling, and thus thrusting himself out. It is well worth noticing, as Wetst. has done, the recorded fact, that Philadelphia was notorious for calamities by earthquake. The language in which Strabo describes this is remarkable in connexion with this promise of the pillar which should not be moved; ἥτεΦιλαδέλφεια … οὐδὲτοὺςτοίχουςἔχειπιστούς , ἀλλὰκαθ ʼ ἡμέραντρόποντινὰσαλεύονταικαὶδιΐστανται · διατελοῦσιδὲπροσέχοντεςτῆςγῆςτοῖςπάθεσι , καὶἀρχιτεκτονοῦτεςπρὸςαὐτήν , xii. p. 868 b: and still more so in xiii. p. 936 b,— πόλιςΦιλαδέλφειασεισμῶνπληρής . οὐγὰρδιαλείπουσινοἱτοῖχοιδιϊστάμενοι , καὶἄλλοτ ʼ ἄλλομέροςτῆςπόλεωςκακοπαθοῦν · οἰκοῦσινοὖνὀλίγοιτὴνπόλινδιὰτοῦτο · … ἀλλὰκαὶτῶνὀλίγωνθαυμάζεινἐστὶνὅτιοὕτωφιλοχωροῦσινἐπισφαλεῖςτὰςοἰκήσειςἔχοντες · ἔτιδ ʼ ἄντιςμᾶλλονθαυμάσειετῶνκτισάντωναὐτήν . See also Tacit. Ann. ii. 47, where among the twelve cities of proconsular Asia which were overthrown by an earthquake, Philadelphia suffered, and was in consequence excused its taxes, and in common with the others entrusted to a senatorian commissioner to repair): and I will write upon him (the conqueror; not as Grot., the pillar) the name of my God (Wetst. quotes from the Rabbinical book Bava Bathra 75. 2, “ R. Samuel filius Nachmanni ait, R. Jochananem dixisse, tres appellari nomine Dei S. B.,— justos (Isaiah 43:7), Messiam (Jeremiah 23:6), Hierosolyma (Ezekiel 48:35).” Some think of the mitre frontlet of the high-priests, on which was inscribed “ Holiness to the Lord,” Exodus 28:36: so Schö ttg., Ewald, al. But this does not seem applicable here, where, from this and the following particulars, it is rather a blessed belonging to God and the holy city and Christ, that is imported, than the priestly office of the glorified Christian) and the name of the city of my God, the new Jerusalem, which descendeth (the appositive nom., see reff.) out of heaven from my God (on the whole, see ch. 21:2, 3, and notes. It is possible, that the name Jehovah Shammah, Ezekiel 48:35, may be meant; but hardly probable, seeing that the Holy Name itself has before been mentioned as inscribed on him. The inscription of the name of the city would betoken citizenship), and mine own new name (not the name mentioned ch. 19:16, which is known and patent, but that indicated ch. 19:12, ὃοὐδεὶςοἶδενεἰμὴαὐτός : for this is clearly pointed at by the word καινόν . By the inscription of this new name of the glorified Saviour is declared, that he belongs to Him in His new and glorious state of eternal rest and triumph). 13. See above, ch. 2:7. 14-22. The Epistle to the church in Laodicea. And to the angel (not, the bishop or ruler, see on ch. 1:20) of the church in Laodicea write: These things saith the Amen (see ref. Isa. Christ is the Amen, inasmuch as His words shall never pass away, but shall find certain ratification. This, and not the particular case which is treated in ref. 2 Cor., seems to be the reference here, where not the ratification of promises merely, but general fidelity and certainty are concerned: as Areth., in Catena, ἰσοδυναμεῖτοῦτο , τάδελέγειὁἁληθινὸς … ἀμὴνγάρἐστιτὸναί · ναὶοὖνἐστινἐνπᾶσιτοῖςπερὶαὐτοῦλεγομένοις , ἤτοιἀλήθειακαὶοὐδὲνψεῦδος . That expression is illustrative of this, but this takes the wider range. Zü llig has imagined that the title here owes its occurrence to this being the last among the Seven Epistles: but this probably is mere fancy), the faithful and true (on ἀληθινός , see above, ver. 7) witness (there does not seem in this title to be any allusion to the prophecies which are about to follow in ch. 4 ff. as some (Grot., De Wette) have imagined. Far rather does it substantiate the witness borne in the Epistle itself, as we have seen in the case of the other introductions. See a lengthened notice of the title in Trench, p. 181 f.), the beginning of the creation of God , Lyra, Vitr., Wolf, Stern, Hengst., De Wette, Ebrard, Dü sterd., al. The latter asks the questions, “ How could Christ write if it were only this present Epistle, if he were himself a creature? How could every creature in heaven and earth adore him, if he were one of themselves (cf. ch. 19:10)? We need only think of the appellation of our Lord as the Α and Ω (ch. 22:13: cf. 1:8) in its necessary fulness of import, and we shall see that in the Α lies the necessity of his being the ἀρχή of the Creation, as in the Ω that of his coming to bring the visible creation to an end” ): I know thy works, that thou art neither cold nor hot (the peculiar use of the similitude of physical cold and heat here, makes it necessary to interpret the former of the two somewhat differently to its common acceptation: so that while ζεστός , from ζέω (cf. τῷπνεύματιζέοντες , Romans 12:11), keeps its meaning of fervent, warm, and earnest in the life of faith and love, ψυχρός cannot here mean “ dead and cold,” as we say of the listless and careless professor of religion: for this is just what these Laodiceans were, and what is expressed by χλιαρός below. So that we must, so to speak, go farther into coldness for ψυχρός , and take it as meaning, not only entirely without the spark of spiritual life, but also and chiefly, by consequence, openly belonging to the world without, and having no part nor lot in Christ’ s church, and actively opposed to it. This, as well as the opposite state of spiritual fervour, would be an intelligible and plainly-marked condition: at all events, free from that danger of mixed motive and disregarded principle which belongs to the lukewarm state inasmuch as a man in earnest, be he right or wrong, is ever a better man than one professing what he does not feel. This necessity of interpretation here has been much and properly pressed by some of the later Commentators (De Wette, and more clearly still, Dü sterd.), but was by the older ones very generally missed, and the coldness interpreted of the mere negative absence of spiritual life. So Andr., Areth. in Catena, ψυχρός , ὁἐστερημένοςτῆςτοῦἁγίουπνεύματοςἐνεργείαςκαὶἐπιφοιτήσεως : Grot., “ qui nullam habet evangelii notitiam ac proinde nec ullos motus christianos:” so Bengel, Ebrard, and many others. There have been some singular interpretations, e. g. that of Lyra, “ frigidus, devitans transgressiones pœ næ timore:” of Ansbert, “ quia nimirum ille eos glaciali quodammodo more constringit, qui dixit, ‘ Sedebo in monte testamenti, in lateribus aquilonis.’ Aquilo itaque valde frigidissimus ventus,” &c.: of Hengstenberg, who regards both hot and cold as spoken of Christ’ s servants in relation to Christ, and cold as equivalent to poor in spirit, conscious of one’ s own coldness and desire for warmth. Any thing more opposed to the context cannot be imagined): would that (reff., for both indic. and opt. usages) thou wert cold or hot: so because thou art lukewarm (τοῦμηδέπωθερμαίνοντος , ὃχλιαρὸνκαλεῖται , Galen. It is one of the many derivatives from χλίω , to melt), and neither hot nor cold, I shall soon spue thee out of my mouth (τῇμεταφορᾷτοῦχλιαροῦδεόντωςἐχρήσατο , ὃκαὶἰατρῶνπαῖδεςπλάδονἐργαζόμενονεἰςἔμετονἐρεθίζεινπαραλαμβάνουσιν . Areth. in Catena. The μέλλω is a mild expression, carrying with it a possibility of the determination being changed, dependently on a change in the state of the church). 17, 18. In these verses, the χλιαρότης is further expanded, as inducing miserable unconsciousness of defect and need, and empty self-sufficiency. And the charge comes in the form of solemn and affectionate counsel. Because (this ὅτι forms the reason of συμβουλεύω below: = seeing that … Cf. a similar construction in ch. 18:7, 8) thou sayest [that] I am rich, and am become wealthy, and have need in nothing (the three expressions form a climax: the first giving the fact of being rich, the second the process of having become so (in which there is not merely outward fact, but some self-laudation: cf. ref. Hosea), the third the result, self-sufficingness. From the whole context it is evident that not outward worldly wealth, but imagined spiritual riches, are in question. The former is held to be meant by Andr., Areth., Aretius, Corn.-a-lap., Bengel, Ewald, Zü llig, al., the latter by Bede, Lyra, Ribera, Alcas., Grot., Calov., Vitringa, Eich., De W., Hengst., Ebrard, Dü sterd., Trench. Stern thinks the wealth is partly worldly (Cicero, Epist. ad div. ii. 17, iii. 5; Strabo xii. 16: see on the wealth of Laodicea the Prolegg.), and partly spiritual. But thus the correspondence in our sentence would be confused. Stern is doubtless so far right, that the imagined spiritual self-sufficingness was the natural growth of an outwardly prosperous condition: but the great self-deceit of which the Lord here complains was not concerning worldly wealth, which was a patent fact, but concerning spiritual, which was a baseless fiction), and knowest not that thou (σύ , emphatic; “ thou, of all others:” corresponding to the use of the article below) art the wretched and [the] pitiable one , as the person to whom above all others the epithets belong. And these epithets are especially opposed to οὐδὲνχρείανἔχω ), and poor and blind and naked (are these adjectives all subordinate to ὁ preceding, or are they new predicates dependent on εἶ Better the latter, if only for the reason that the counsel which follows takes up these three points in order, thereby bringing them out as distinct from and not subordinate to the two preceding), I advise thee (there is a deep irony in this word. One who has need of nothing, yet needs counsel on the vital points of self-preservation) to buy (at the cost only of thy good self-opinion. That a πτωχός should be advised to buy gold and raiment, and ointment, might of itself shew what kind of buying is meant, even if Isaiah 55:1, ἀγοράσατε … ἄνευἀργυρίουκ . τιμῆς , had not clearly defined it. Yet notwithstanding such clear warning not to go wrong, the Roman-Catholic expositors have here again handled the word of God deceitfully, and explained, as Lyra, “ Emere, operibus bonis:” Corn.-a-lap., “ verbum ergo emendi significat, quod multa debet homo facere, et multa conferre, ut idoneus sit a Deo accipere ista dona.” Bede and Ribera, somewhat better, “ derelictis omnibus,” Bede: “ etiam cum voluptatum dispendio,” Rib. (which however is travelling out of the context, making the wealth to be earthly riches): Estius, better still, but curiously characteristic, “ Emere significat aliquod studium præ cedens, quo ambiat charitatem (his interpretation of χρυσίονπεπυρ .): quod tamen etiam ex Deo est. Unde statui potest meritum congruum, respectu justificationis.” Far better again Ansbert, though missing the point of ἀγοράσαι : “ Numquid is qui miser et miserabilis et pauper et cæ cus et nudus redarguitur, aliquid boni habet, quod pro tanto bono largitori suo tribuat, nisi forte prius ab ipso accipiat quod pro accipiendis aliis illi tribuat? Sic certe invenit quod det, qui nisi desuper acceperit, non habet quod det.” Augustine seems to be on the right track for the meaning of ἀγοράσαι when he says, “ contende ut pro nomine Christi aliquid patiaris.” The term continues the irony. “ All this lofty self-sufficiency must be expended in the labour of getting from Me these absolute necessaries.” So most of the later expositors. So even the R.-Cath. Stern, but disguising the truth under an appearance of a ‘ quid pro quo;’ “ Welches ist der Kaufpreis? Hat nicht der Herr selbst gesagt, dass sie arm seien und elend, nakt und jammerlich? Ihr Herz sollen sie Christo hingeben, ihr Fuhlen, Denken, Wollen, und thatkraftiges Handeln; sich selbst ganz und gar dem Herrn zur Leibeigenschaft opfern, Matthew 13:45, Matthew 13:46” ) from me (who am the source of all true spiritual wealth, Ephesians 3:8) gold (fresh) burnt from the fire (the ἐκ gives the sense of being just fresh from the burning or smelting, and thus not only tried by the process, but bright and new from the furnace. This is better than, with many Commentators, to make the ἐκ almost = ὑπό , signifying the source from which the πύρωσις comes, as ch. 8:11. In the interpretation, this gold represents all spiritual πλοῦτος , in its sterling reality, as contrasted with that merely imaginary sort on which the Laodiceans prided themselves. It is narrowing it too much to interpret it as caritas (cf. Estius above), or fides, as Aret., Vitringa, Hengstb., al., or indeed any one spiritual grace, as distinguished from the sum total of them all), that thou mayest be (aor., literally, mayest have become, viz., by the purchase) rich: and white garments (Dü sterd. rightly remarks that the white garments are distinct from the gold only in constituting a different image in the form of expression, not really in the thing signified. On the meaning, see ver. 4, ch. 7:14, 19:8. The lack of righteousness, which can be only bought from Christ, and that at the price of all fancied righteousness of our own, is just as much a πτωχεία as the other), that thou mayest be clothed, and that the shame of thy nakedness be not made manifest (the choice of the word φανερωθῇ seems as if some particular time were in view when such manifestation would take place. If we are to assign one, it will naturally be that of the Lord’ s coming, when τοὺςπάνταςἡμᾶςφανερωθῆναιδεῖἔμπροσθεντοῦβήματοςτοῦχριστοῦ , 2 Corinthians 5:10: when the Lord of the Church will come to see his guests, and all not clad in the wedding robe will be cast out, Matthew 22:11 ff.), and collyrium (the use of which is apparent from what follows. The κολλύριον was so called from its shape, being a stick or roll of ointment for the eyes, in the shape of a bread-cake, κόλλυρα or -ρις , 2 Kings 6:19, LXX) to anoint (from reff. Tobit, ἐγχρίειν appears to have been the common technical word for anointing the eyes) thine eyes, that thou mayest see , 14 ; Acts 2:33 , and also at the price of the surrender of our own fancied wisdom. The analogy of 1 John 2:20, 1 John 2:27 is not to be overlooked: see notes at those places). 19. Importing that these rich proofs of Christ’ s love are only to be sought by such as the Laodiceans in the way of rebuke and chastisement: and reciprocally, as tending not to despair, but to encouragement, that rebuke and chastisement are no signs of rejection from Christ, but of His abiding and pleading love, even to the lukewarm and careless. I (emphatically prefixed: I, for my part: it is one of My ways, which are unlike men’ s ways)— as many as (ἐάν = ἄν , the common particle after the relative: see reff.) I love (not as Grot., “ non absolute sed comparate, i. e. quos non plane ob diuturna peccata abjicere et objurare constitui:” but in its fullest and most blessed sense. Nor is the assertion addressed, as Vitr., only “ ad meliorem ecclesiæ partem,” but to all, as a gracious call to repentance; as is evident from the words next following), I rebuke and chasten (ἐλέγχειν , the convincing of sin, producing conviction, is a portion of παιδεύειν , the Lord’ s chastening: the latter may extend very much wider than the former, even to judgments and personal infliction, which, however they may subserve the purpose of ἐλέγχειν , are not, properly speaking, part of it. “ Redargutio sane ad verba, castigatio vero pertinet ad flagella,” Ansbert); be zealous then (ζήλευε , pres., of a habit of Christian life), and repent (begin that life of zeal by an act, decisive and effective (aor.), of change of purpose. There is not in the words any ὑστερονπρότερον , as De Wette, but the logical connexion is made plain by the tenses. Dü sterd. (following Grot., Beng., Hengstb., Ebrard) is clearly wrong in saying that “ the Lord requires of the church a burning zeal, kindled by the love shewn by Him (but where is this in the context?), and as the practical putting forth of this zeal, true change of purpose.” This goes directly against both the grammatical propriety and the facts of the case, in which change of purpose must precede zeal, which is the effectual working in a man’ s life of that change of purpose). 20. Behold, I stand at the door (the construction with the prep. of motion after ἕστηκα , is perhaps owing to the idea of motion conveyed in the verb,— “ I have placed myself.” See reff., especially ref. Luke) and knock , partly by every interference in judgment and in mercy. Whenever His hand is heard, He is knocking at the door. But it is not His hand only that may be heard: see below): if any man hear my voice , and open the door (ἀκούσῃ , ἀνοίξῃ , aorists, because prior in time to the futures which follow: “ shall have heard,” “ shall have opened:” but it would be pedantry thus to render them in our language. On the sense, cf. Son 5:6. Our verse is a striking and decisive testimony to the practical freedom of our will to receive or reject the heavenly Guest: without the recognition of which, the love and tenderness of the saying become a hideous mockery. We then open the door to Christ, when we admit Him, His voice, His commands, His example, to a share in our inner counsels and sources of action. To say that this can be done without His grace, is ignorance: to say it is done only by that grace irresistibly exerted, is far worse— it is, to deprive His gracious pleadings of all meaning), [and] (this καί is superfluous in the sense, merely expressing the sequence: and may on that account have been omitted) I will enter in to him, and I will sup with him, and he with me (the imagery is taken from the usages of intimate hospitality. But whereas in these it would be merely the guest who would sup with the host who lets him in, here the guest becomes himself the host, because He is the bread of life, and the Giver of the great feast of fat things and of the great marriage supper (Matthew 8:11, Matthew 8:25:1 ff.; ch. 19:7, 9). St. John is especially fond of reporting these sayings of reciprocity which our Lord uttered: cf. John 6:56 (10:38), 14:20, 15:4, 5, 17:21, 26. This blessed admission of Christ into our hearts will lead to His becoming our guest, ever present with us, and sharing in all our blessings— and, which is even more, to our being ever in close union with Him, partaking ever of His fulness, until we sit down at His table in his Kingdom). 21. He that conquereth (see above, ch. 2:26, and ver. 12, for the construction), I will give to him to sit with me on my throne (have a share in My kingly power, as ch. 2:27, 20:6), as I also conquered and sat down with my Father on His throne (the aorr. refer to the historical facts of the Resurrection and Ascension. By the latter, Christ sat down at the right hand of God, or of the throne of God, as Hebrews 12:2. No distinction must be made between the throne of the Father, on which Christ sits, and that of Christ, on which the victorious believer is to sit with Him: they are one and the same, cf. ἐκτοῦθρόνουτοῦθεοῦκαὶτοῦἀρνίου , ch. 22:1; and the glory of the redeemed will be a participation in that of the Father and the Son, John 17:22). Doubtless the occurrence of this, the highest and most glorious of all the promises, in this place, is to be explained not entirely from any especial aptness to the circumstances of the Laodicean church, though such has been attempted to be assigned (e. g. by Ebrard— because the victory over luke-warmness would be so much more difficult than that in any other case), but also from the fact of its occurring at the end of all the Epistles, and as it were gathering them all into one. It must not be forgotten too, that the ἐκάθισαμετὰτοῦπατρόςμουἐντῷθρόνῳαὐτοῦ forms a link to the next part of the book where we so soon, ch. 5:6, read καὶεἶδονἐντῷμέσῳτοῦθρόνου .… ἀρνίονἑστηκὸςὡςἐσφαγμένον . 22. See on ch. 2:7. From this point begins the Revelation proper, extending to the end of the book. And herein we have a first great portion, embracing chapp. 4-11., the opening of the seals and the sounding of the trumpets. But preparatory to both these series of revelations, we have described to us in chapp. 4:5, the heavenly scenery which furnishes the local ground for these visions. Of these, chap. 4 is properly the scene itself: chap. 5 being a further unfolding of its details with a view to the vision of the seals which is to follow. So that we have,— Ch. 4:1-11. The vision of God’ s presence in heaven. “ Decrees respecting the fortunes of the future rest with God, and from Him comes the revelation of them through Jesus Christ. Hence the Revelation begins with the imparting to the Apostle, through Christ, of the vision of God’ s presence.” De Wette. 1. After these things is a formula frequently occurring in this book, and no where indicating a break in the ecstatic state of the Seer, but only the succession of separate visions. Those are mistaken, e. g. Bengel, Hengstb., who imagine an interval, here and in the other places, during which the Seer wrote down that which had been previously revealed to him. The whole is conceived as imparted in one continuous revelation consisting of many parts. See below on ver. 2) I saw (not with the bodily eye, but with the eye of ecstatic vision, as throughout the book. He is throughout ἐνπνεύματι . It is not I looked, as in E. V.: not the directing of the Seer’ s attention which discovers the door to him, but the simple reception of the vision which is recorded), and behold, a door set open as E. V., which gives the idea that the Seer witnessed the act of opening. For the same reason the word “ opened” is objectionable, as it may be mistaken for the aor. neuter) in heaven (notice the difference between this vision and that in Ezekiel 1:1; Matthew 3:16; Acts 7:56, Acts 10:11. In those, the heaven itself parts asunder, and discloses the vision to those below on earth: here the heaven, the house or palace of God (Psalms 11:4, Psalms 18:6, Psalms 29:9), remains firmly shut to those on earth, but a door is opened, and the Seer is rapt in the Spirit through it. Henceforth usually he looks from the heaven down on the earth, seeing however both alike, and being present in either, as the localities of his various visions require), and the former voice (much confusion has been introduced here by rendering, as E. V., “ the first voice which,” &c., giving the idea that ἡπρώτη means, first after the door was seen set open; whereas ἡφωνὴἡπρώτη is the voice which I heard at first, viz. in ch. 1:10) which I heard (aor. at the beginning) as of a trumpet speaking with me (viz. ch. 1:10. ὡςσάλπ . κ .τ .λ ., is not predicative, “ was as … ” as E. V. and Treg. The construction simply is— “ behold, a door … and the voice … ,” both θύρα and φωνή dependent on ἰδού . The voice is not that of Christ (as Stier, Reden Jesu viii. 93, 207 ff.: Reden der Engel, p. 242,— and al.), but of some undefined heavenly being or angel. As Dü sterd. observes, all we can say of it is that it is the same voice as that in ch. 1:10, which there, ver. 17, is followed by that of our Lord, not ὡςσάλπιγγος , but ὡςὑδάτωνπολλῶν , as stated by anticipation in ver, 15), saying (Heb. ל ֵ א מ ֹ ר . The gender is placed, regardless of the ordinary concord, with reference to the thing signified: so in reff., and even sometimes in the classics; cf. Xen. Cyr. i. 2. 12, αἱπόλεις … ὡςπαύσοντες . See more examples in Winer), Come up hither (viz. through the opened door), and I will shew thee (it is surprising how Stier can allege the δείξω as a proof that the Lord Himself only can be speaking: cf. ch. 21:9, 10, 22:8, 9, which latter place is decisive against him) the things which must (of prophetic necessity: see reff.) take place after these things (ταῦτα , the things now present: as in ch. 1:19, but the ταῦτα not being the same in the two cases. So that μετὰταῦτα has very much the general meaning given by the “ hereafter” of the E. V.). 2. Immediately I was (became) in the Spirit (i. e. I experienced a new accession of the Spirit’ s powerful influence, which transported me thither: qu. d. “ I was in a trance or ecstasy:” see on ch. 1:10. It is hardly credible that any scholar should have proposed to understand ἐκεῖ after ἐγενόμην , “ immediately I was there in the Spirit:” but this was done by Zü llig, and has found an advocate in England in Dr. Maitland: cf. Todd on the Apoc., Note B, p. 297): and behold, a throne stood (the E.V. “ was set,” gives too much the idea that the placing of the throne formed part of the vision: “ lay” would be our best word, but we do not use it of any thing so lofty as a throne. ἔκειτο is wrongly taken by Bengel as importing breadth; and by Hengstb. as representing the resting on the cherubim. But it is St. John’ s word for mere local position: see reff.) in heaven, and upon the throne (the accus. is perhaps not to be pressed; it may be loosely used as equivalent to the gen. or dat. The variations of the case in this expression throughout the book are remarkable, and hardly to be accounted for. Thus we have the gen. in ver. 10, ch. 5:1, 7 (13?), 7:15, 9:17, 14:15, 16, 17:1, 9, 19:18, 19, 21: the dat. in ver. 9, ch. (5:13?), 6:16, 7:10, 19:4, 21:5: the accus. in ver. 4, ch. 6:2, 4, 5, 11:16, 14:14, 17:3, 19:11, 20:4, 11. The only rule that seems to be at all observed is, that always at the first mention of the fact of sitting, the accus. seems to be used, e. g. here, and ver. 4, ch. 6:2, 4, 5, 14:14, 17:3, 19:11, 20:4 (11 seems hardly a case in point), thus bearing a trace of its proper import, that of motion towards, of which the first mention partakes. But the accus. is not confined to the first mention, witness ch. 11:16, and no rule at all seems to prevail as regards the gen. and dat.) one sitting (called henceforward throughout the book, ὁκαθήμενοςἐπὶτ . θρ .: and being the Eternal Father (not as Lyra, “ Deus trinus et unus,” — so also Corn.-a-lap., Calov.; for He that sitteth on the throne is distinguished in ch. 6:16, 7:10 from the Son, and in ver. 5 from the Holy Spirit): see ch. 7:10, 19:4, where we read expressly, τῷθεῷτῷκαθηένῳἐπὶτ . θρ . So that it is not for the reasons sometimes suggested, that the Name is not expressed: e. g. that by Eich. and Ewald, on account of the Jewish unwillingness to express the sacred Name: that by Herder (see also De W. al.], that the mind has no figure and the tongue no word by which to express it: still less that of Heinr., “ Nonnisi ex negligentia scribendi videtur omissum.” The simple reason seems to be, as assigned by Hengstb. and Dü sterd., that St. John would describe simply that which he saw, as he saw it. For the same reason he does not name Christ expressly in the first vision, ch. 1:13): and he that sat like in appearance (lit., “ in vision,” “ in sight,” as E. V. in the next clause: dat. of form or manner, cf. Winer, edn. 6, § 31. 6, and see 1 Corinthians 14:20; Philippians 2:8, Philippians 3:5) to a jasper and sardine stone (Epiphanius, in his treatise on the twelve stones in Aaron’ s breastplate says, λίθοςἴασπις , οὗτόςἐστιτῷεἴδεισμαραγδίζων (see below). παρὰδὲτὰχείλητοῦΘερμώδοντοςποταμοῦεὑρίσκεται … ἀλλ ʼ ἔστιγένοςπολὺκαλούμενονἈμαθούσιον , τὸεἶδοςδὲτοιόνδεἐστὶτοῦλίθου · κατὰτὴνσμάραγδόνἐστιχλωρίζουσα , ἀλλὰἀμβλυτέρακαὶἀμαυροτέρα . καὶἔνδοθενχλωρὸνἔχειτὸσῶμα , ἐοικυῖαἰῷχαλκοῦ , ἔχουσαφλέβαςτετραστίχουςκ .τ .λ . He then describes several other kinds, a purple, a yellow, &c. One kind appears to be that meant in our ch. 21:11, where we have the glory of God like ὡςλίθῳἰάσπιδικρυσταλλίζοντι : for he describes it as ἄλληκρυστάλλουὕδατιὁμοία . It is true that Epiphanius may have put in this species merely to satisfy ch. 21:11. From this latter passage, where it is described as τιμιώτατος ,— which jasper, as commonly known, never was,— Ebrard argues that by ἴασπις the diamond. is meant. ἴασπις , Heb. י ָ ש ׁ ְ פ ָ ה , a beautiful stone of various wavy colours, semi-opaque, granulous in texture, used in ancient times for gems and ornaments, but in more modern ones on a larger scale for pavements and tables. Even Pliny wrote, xxxvii. (8.) 37, “ viret, et sæ pe translucet iaspis, etiamsi victa a multis, antiquitatis tamen gloriam retinens.” The altar in Canterbury Cathedral stands on a platform of yellow Sicilian jasper pavement, 30 feet by 14 feet. σάρδιος , Heb. א ֹ ד ֶ ם , is, as this name shews, a red stone, commonly supposed to answer to our cornelian. But Epiphanius, in his treatise on the twelve stones in Aaron’ s breastplate, says of it, λίθοςσάρδιοςὁΒαβυλώνιος , οὕτωκαλούμενος . ἔστιδὲπυρωπὸςτῷεἴδεικαὶαἱματοειδής , σαρδίῳτῷἰχθΰιτεταριχευμένῳἐοικώς . διὸκαὶσάρδιοςλέγεται , ἀπὸτοῦεἴδουςλαβὼντὸἐπώνυμον . ἐνΒαβύλωνιδὲτῇπρὸςἈσσυρίανγίνεται . ἔστιδὲδιαυγὴςὁλίθος . Several of the Commentators, e. g. , , Lyra, Ansbert, Joachim, &c., Bengel, Hengst., Dü sterd., have said much on the symbolic significance of these stones as representing the glory of God. Thus much only seems, in the great uncertainty and variety of views, to stand firm for us: that if ἴασπις is to be taken as in ch. 21:11, as, by the reference there to τὴνδόξαντοῦθεοῦ , it certainly seems it must, then it represents a watery crystalline brightness, whereas σάρδιος is on all hands acknowledged to be fiery red. Thus we shall have ample material for symbolic meaning: whether, as Victorinus, Tichon., , , al., of the one great judgment by water (or of baptism) and the other by fire,— as , Areth., Lyra, al., of the goodness of God in nature (ἴασπις being green) and His severity in judgment,— as Ansbert, of the divinity and humanity , &c., or as the moderns mostly, e. g. Bengel, Stern, Hengstb., of the holiness of God and His justice. This last seems to me the more probable, especially as the same mixture of white light with fire seems to pervade the Old Testament and Apocalyptic visions of the divine majesty. Cf. Ezekiel 1:4, Ezekiel 1:8:2; Daniel 7:9: and our ch. 1:14, 10:1. But nothing can be confidently asserted, in our ignorance of the precise import of ἴασπις ), and a rainbow (cf. Genesis 9:12-17; Ezekiel 1:28) round about the throne (i. e. in all probability surrounding the throne vertically, as a nimbus; not, as Beng. and Hengstb., horizontally) like to the appearance (ὅμοιος is here an adj. with two terminations, as those in -ιος frequently in Attic Greek: see Winer (reff.): the construction of ὁράσει is not as above, but the dat. is here after ὅμοιος ) of an emerald (on σμάραγδος (-δινος is the possess. adj. of two terminations) all seem agreed, that it represents the stone so well known among us as the emerald, of a lovely green colour:— Pliny says of it, ut supra, “ quin et ab intentione alia obscurata aspectu smaragdi recreatur acies, scalpentibusque gemmas non alia gratior oculorum refectio est; ita viridi lenitate lassitudinem mulcent.” Almost all the Commentators think of the gracious and federal character of the bow of God, Genesis 9:12-17. Nor is it any objection to this (as Ebrard) that the bow or glory here is green, instead of prismatic: the form is that of the covenant bow, the colour even more refreshing and more directly symbolizing grace and mercy. “ Deus in judiciis semper fœ deris sui meminit:” Grot. So far at least we may be sure of as to the symbolism of this appearance of Him that sitteth on the throne: that the brightness of His glory and fire of His judgment is ever girded by, and found within, the refreshment and surety of His mercy and goodness. So that, as Dü sterd. says well, “ This fundamental vision contains all that may serve for terror to the enemies, and consolation to the friends, of Him that sitteth on the throne … ” ). 4. The assessors of the enthroned One. The construction with ἰδού , partly in the nom., partly in the accus., still continues. And round the throne twenty-four thrones , and upon the twenty-four thrones elders sitting , clothed in white garments, and on their heads golden crowns (these 24 elders are not angels, as maintained by Rinck and Hofmann (Weiss. u. Erfü ll. p. 325 f.), as is shewn (not by ch. 5:9, as generally argued,— even by Elliott, vol. i. p. 81 f.: see text there: but) by their white robes and crowns, the rewards of endurance, ch. 3:5, 2:10,— but representatives of the Church, as generally understood. But if so, what sort of representatives, and why 24 in number? This has been variously answered. The usual understanding has been that of our earliest Commentator, Victorinus; who says, “ Sunt autem viginti quatuor, patres: duodecim Apostoli, totidem Patriarchæ .” And this is in all probability right in the main: the key to the interpretation being the analogy with the sayings of our Lord to the Apostles, Matthew 19:28; Luke 22:30. That those sayings do not regard the same session as this, is no argument against the inference from analogy. Joachim brings against this view that the twelve patriarchs were not personally holy men, and never are held up as distinguished in the Old Testament. But this obviously is no valid objection. It is not the personal characters, but the symbolical, that are here in question. It might be said with equal justice that the number of the actual Apostles is not definitely twelve. It is no small confirmation of the view, that in ch. 15:3, we find the double idea of the church, as made up of Old Testament and New Testament saints, plainly revealed to St. John; for he heard the victorious saints sing the song of Moses, and the song of the Lamb. See also ch. 21:12, 14, where the twelve gates of the New Jerusalem are inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes, and its twelve foundations with those of the twelve Apostles. Various other interpretations have been: that of Lyra, “ designantur universæ cathedrales ecclesiæ : quæ licet sint multæ , tamen sub tali numero designantur propter concordantiam novi Testamenti ad vetus, in quo legitur, 1 Paralip. xxv., quod sanctus David volens augmentare cultum divinum, statuit viginti quatuor sacerdotes templo per hebdomadas successive ministrantes, in sacra enim scriptura frequenter ponitur determinatus numerus pro indeterminato:” that of Alcas., Calov., Vitringa, Zeger, Ewald, al., who explain the number similarly by the 24 courses of priests and their heads,— the objection to which is, that these elders are not priests, their occupation in ch. 5:8 being simply connected with their representative character:— that of Grot., that the number is that of the presiding elders of the Jerusalem church (a pure assumption): that of Joachim, Heinrichs, Bleek, De Wette, that the number 12, that of the tribes of Israel, is doubled, to signify the accession of the Gentiles to the church: that of Primasius and Ansbert, that the doubling is “ propter geminum Testamentum, quin et in veteri et in novo eadem formatur Ecclesia.” Besides these, there have been many fanciful reasons, deduced from numerical considerations: as e. g. that of Arethas in Catena, that 21 Isa_3 × 7, the combination of the number of perfection with that of the Holy Trinity, and then 3 is added; &c. &c.). 5. And out of the throne go forth (the tense is changed, and the narrative assumes the direct form, which, however, is immediately dropped again, and the accumulation of details resumed) lightnings and voices and thunders (the imagery seems to be in analogy with that in the Old Testament, where God’ s presence to give His law was thus accompanied: cf. Exodus 19:16; where ἀστραπαί and φωναί occur in juxtaposition as here. If this idea be correct, then we have here represented the sovereignty and almightiness of God. And nearly so Vitr., Hengstb., Dü sterd., al. De Wette and Ebrard understand God’ s power over nature, De W. uniting it with what follows: see below. Grot. says, “ Fulgura et tonitrua significant minas Dei contra impios: voces sunt in ipsis tonitrubus, infra x. 3, i. e. non generaliter tantum minatur, sed et speciales pœ nas præ dicit.” But there seems no ground for this): and seven lamps (the former construction is resumed) of fire burning before the throne [itself] , which are the seven spirits of God (see notes on ch. 1:4, 5:6. These seem to represent the Holy Spirit in his sevenfold working: in his enlightening and cheering as well as his purifying and consuming agency. So most Commentators. De W. and Ebrard regard the representation as that of the Holy Spirit, the principle of physical and spiritual life, which appears only wrong by being too limited. Hengstenb. is quite beside the mark in confidently (as usual) confining the interpretation of the lamps of fire to the consuming power of the Spirit in judgment. The fact of the parallel ch. 5:6 speaking of ἑπτὰὀφθαλμοί , and such texts as ch. 21:23; Psalms 119:105, should have kept him from this mistake. The whole of this glorious vision is of a composite and twofold nature: comfort is mingled with terror, the fire of love with the fire of judgment): and before the throne as it were a sea (the ὡς belongs to θάλ . ὑαλ ., not to ὑαλ . alone as Bengel: so also in the parallel place, ch. 15:2) of glass (not, “ glassy,” as rendered by Elliott: ὑαλίνη describes not the appearance, but the material, of the sea: it appeared like a sea of glass— so clear, and so calm) like to crystal , Tichonius, Primas., Bede, Lyra, Calov., al.,— of Joachim ,— of Alcas. (repentance), of Ribera , Paræ us, al.,— of Vitringa certa et constans Dei voluntas, qua constituit regnum gratiæ habere inter homines.… β ) jus certum et liquidum ejusmodi regnum gratiæ inter homines erigendi … ” ), Herder, al.,— of Bengel and Hengstb., that the sea of glass, on account of its being described as mixed with fire in ch. 15:2, is “ das Product der sieben Feuerlampen,” and betokens the great and wonderful works of God, His righteous and holy ways. But as Dü sterd. remarks, the parallel place, ch. 5:6, where the seven lamps are seven eyes, precludes this:— of Aretius, Grot., and Ebrard, who, because the sea, in its stormy and agitated state, represents (ch. 17:15) the nations of the earth in their godless state, therefore the pure and calm sea represents (Ebr.) the creatures in their proper relation to their Creator, or (Aret.) “ cœ tum ecclesiæ triumphantis,” or as Grot. strangely, and as De W. remarks, most unfelicitously, “ summa puritas plebis Hierosolymitanæ ejus quæ Christo nomen dederat: quæ puritas describitur Act. ii. et iv.” Dü sterd. connects it, and in fact identifies it, with the river of the water of life, λαμπρ . ὡςκρύσταλλον , which, ch. 22:1, proceeded out of the throne of God and the Lamb. But the whole vision there is quite distinct from this, and each one has its own propriety in detail. To identify the two, is to confound them: nor does ch. 15:2 at all justify this interpretation. There, as here, it is the purity, calmness, and majesty of God’ s rule which are signified by the figure). And in the midst of the throne (not, as Hengstb., under the throne: their movements are free, cf. ch. 15:7. See below), and round about the throne (i. e. so that in the Apostle’ s view they partly hid the throne, partly overlapped the throne, being symmetrically arranged with regard to it, i. e. as the number necessitates, one in the midst of each side), four living-beings , of a close relation which is not found in the Greek. I have therefore preferred living-beings) full of eyes before and behind (this, from their respective positions, could be seen by St. John: their faces being naturally towards the throne. On the symbolism, see below). And the first living-being like to a lion, and the second living-being like to a steer (μόσχος is not necessarily to be pressed to its proper primary meaning, as indicating the young calf in distinction from the grown bullock: the LXX use it for an ox generally, in Exodus 22:1; Leviticus 22:23: also Exodus 29:10, and Genesis 12:16), and the third living-being having its face as of a man (or, the face of a man), and the fourth living-being like to a flying eagle. And the four living-beings, each (reff.) of them having (ἔχων , the gender being conformed to that of the thing signified, see on φωνὴ … λέγων , ver. 1) six wings apiece (for the distributive ἀνά , see reff.). All round and within (I prefer much putting a period at ἕξ , to carrying on the construction; as more in accord with the general style of this description. Understand, after both κυκλόθεν , and ἔσωθεν ,— τῶνπτερύγων : the object of St. John being to shew, that the six wings in each case did not interfere with that which he had before declared, viz. that they were full of eyes before and behind. Round the outside of each wing, and up the inside of each (half-expanded) wing, and of the part of the body also which was in that inside recess) they are full of eyes: and they have no rest by day and by night (ἡμέραςκαὶνυκτός may belong either to ἀνάπ . οὐκἔλ ., or to λέγοντες . Partly on account of the καί , partly as a matter of the mere judgment of the ear, I prefer joining it with the latter) saying (the gender, see as above), Holy Holy Holy Lord God Almighty (so far is identical with the seraphim’ s ascription of praise in Isaiah 6:3: παντοκράτωρ answering usually in the LXX to צ ְ ב ָ א ו ֹ ת , though not in that place. See Bengel’ s remarks in note on Romans 9:29), which was, and which is, and which is to come (see on reff.). These four living-beings are in the main identical with the cherubim of the O. T. (compare Ezekiel 1:5-10, Ezekiel 10:20), which are called by the same name of living creatures , and are similarly described. We may trace however some differences. In Ezekiel’ s vision, each living-being has all four faces, Ezekiel 1:6, whereas here the four belong severally, one to each. Again in Ezekiel’ s vision, it is apparently the wheels which are full of eyes, Ezekiel 1:18; though in id. 10:12, it would appear as if the animals also were included. Again, the having six wings apiece is not found in the cherubim of Ezekiel, which have four, Ezekiel 1:6,— but belongs to the seraphim described in Isaiah 6:2, to whom also (see above) belongs the ascription of praise here given. So that these are forms compounded out of the most significant particulars of more than one O. T. vision. In enquiring after their symbolic import, we are met by the most remarkable diversity of interpretation. 1) Our earliest Commentator, Victorinus, may serve as the type of those who have understood them to symbolize the Four Evangelists, or rather, Gospels:— “ Simile leoni animal, Evangelium secundum Marcum, in quo vox leonis in eremo rugientis auditur, vox clamantis in deserto, Parate viam Domini. Hominis autem figura Matthæ us enititur enunciare nobis genus Mariæ unde carnem accepit Christus. Ergo dum enumerat ab Abraham usque ad David et usque ad Joseph, tanquam de homine locutus est. Ideo præ dicatio ejus hominis effigiem ostendit. Lucas sacerdotium Zachariæ offerentis hostiam pro populo, et apparentem sibi angelum dum enarrat, propter sacerdotium, et hostiæ conscriptionem, vituli imaginationem tenet. Joannes Evangelista aquilæ similis, assumptis pennis ad altiora festinans, de verbo Dei disputat.” I have cited this comment at length, to shew on what fanciful and untenable ground it rests. For with perhaps the one exception of the last of the four, not one of the Evangelists has any inner or substantial accordance with the character thus assigned. Consequently these characteristics are found varied, and that in the earliest writer in whom the view can be traced, viz. Irenæ us, who (iii. 11. 8, p. 190) makes the lion to be the gospel of St. John, which τὴνἀπὸτοῦπατρὸςἡγεμονικὴναὐτοῦ .… καὶἔνδοξονγενεὰνδιηγεῖται : the steer that of St. Luke, as above: the man, that of St. Matthew: the eagle, that of St. Mark, who ἀπὸτοῦπροφητικοῦπνεύματοςτοῦἐξὕψουςἐπιόντοςτοῖςἀνθρώποιςτὴνἀρχὴνἐποιήσατο . So also Andreas in Catena. But again Augustine, de cons. evv. i. 6, vol. iii. p. 1046, attributes the lion to St. Matthew, the man to St. Mark, the steer to St. Luke, and the eagle to St. John. These notices may again serve to shew with what uncertainty the whole view is beset. It has nevertheless been adopted by Jerome (Prolog. ad ev. Matth., vol. vii. p. 5, 6), Primas., Bede, and many others of old, and among the moderns by Williams (on the Study of the Gospels, pp. 1-92), Scott (Interpretation of the Apocalypse, p. 132, but making, as above, the lion = St. Matthew, the man = St. Mark, the ox = St. Luke, and the eagle = St. John), Wordsworth (Lectures on the Apoc. p. 116, see also his note here, who, as in his statements on the other details, so here, ascribes unanimity (but see below) to the ancients: “ in them the ancient church beheld a figure of the four gospels” ), &c. The principal of the other interpretations have been: 2) the 4 elements; so some mentioned in the Catena; 3) the 4 cardinal virtues: so Arethas, as cited by Corn.-a-lap., and generally: but not in the Catena: 4) the 4 faculties and powers of the human soul; “ homo est vis rationalis, leo irascibilis, bos concupiscibilis, aquila est conscientia, sive spiritus;” — so Corn.-a-lap. refers to Sixtus Senensis as citing Greg. from Hom. 1 on Ezekiel, vol. iii. p. 361 f.: 5) Our Lord in the fourfold great events of Redemption: so a conjecture in the Catena , Aretius, Ansbert (inter alia: for he tries to combine all possible interpretations which can relate to Christ and the Church); 6) the 4 patriarchal-churches: so Lyra, explaining the lion = Jerusalem, “ propter constantiam ibi existentium,” citing Acts 5:29: the ox = Antioch, “ quia fuit parata obedire mandatis Apostolorum in Judæ a existentium, et quia (?) primo in ea vocati sunt discipuli Christiani:” the man = Alexandria, “ nam in ea a principio fuerunt doctores docti non solum in literis divinis sed etiam humanis:” the eagle = Constantinople, “ nam in ea fuerunt viri per contemplationem elevati, ut Gregorius Naz. et plures alii.” This is referred to by Corn.-a-lap., who ends characteristically, “ Hæ quatuor sunt in circuitu throni Dei, id est, Cathedræ Romanæ , in qua sedet vicarius Dei:” 7) the 4 great Apostles, Peter, “ fervens animo et in hoc leoni similis:” James the Lord’ s brother, because “ bos patientiam significat:” Matthew, “ bonitate homo antecedit animantia cæ tera. Puto designari Matthæ um qui diu dicitur mansisse in Judæ a” (?): Paul, because the eagle “ celeritatem ministerii significat, quod certe Paulo proprium qui sæ pius Hierosolymis fuit. Et bene πετομένῳ , quia semper erat in cursu:” so Grotius: 8) all the doctors of the church: so Vitringa, al.: 9) “ in quatuor animalibus istis quatuor speciales ordines designati sunt, quorum primus pastorum est, secundus diaconorum, tertius doctorum, quartus contemplantium,” Joachim: 10) the 4 representatives of the N. T. church, as the four standards of the tribes Reuben, Judah, Ephraim, and Dan, which are traditionally thus reported (see also Num_2), were of the O. T. church. So Mede and many others: 11) the 4 virtues of the Apostles, “ magnanimitas, beneficentia, æ quitas sapientia,” — Alcasar (in De W.): 12) the 4 principal angels, Corn.-a-lap., Laun., al.: 13) the angelic, or is-angelic, state of the glorified church: so Elliott, vol. i. p. 87. But thus we have no account given of the peculiar symbolism of these living-beings, nor of the part which they perform in the act of praise below. There are many other interpretations and ramifications of interpretation, hardly worth recounting. But the one which above all these seems to me to require our notice is that which is indicated in the rabbinical sentence cited by Schö ttgen here: “ Quatuor sunt qui principatum in hoc mundo tenent. Inter creaturas homo, inter aves aquila, inter pecora bos, inter bestias leo.” The four cherubic forms are the representatives of animated nature— of God’ s sentient creation. In Ezekiel, each form is compounded of the four. Here, the four forms are distinct. There (28:12), where the prince of Tyrus is compared to one of them, it is called the impression of similitude, and the crown of beauty: in Isa_6, where the seraphim, which enter into the composition of these living beings, ascribe holiness to Jehovah, they cry, “ His glory is the fulness of the whole earth.” With this view, every thing that follows is in accordance. For when these, and the 24 elders, in vv. 9-11, fall down before the throne, the part which these living-beings bear in the great chorus of praise is sufficiently indicated by the reason which is given for their ἄξιοςεἶ , viz. ὅτισὺἔκτισαςτὰπάντα , καὶδιὰτὸθέλημάσουἦσανκαὶἐκτίσθησαν . The objection brought against this view by Ebrard, viz. that Behemoth, the king of the waters, is not here represented, is mere trifling. He forgets that in the record of creation, the noblest of the creatures sprung from the waters are not fishes, but birds; and that the eagle represents both. It is in strict accordance also with this view, that these living-beings are full of eyes, ever wakeful, ever declaring the glory of God: that they have each six wings, which doubtless are to be taken as in Isa_6 from which the figure comes— “ with twain he covered his face (reverence, in not venturing to look on the divine majesty), and with twain he covered his feet (humility, hiding his own created form from the glory of the Creator), and with twain he did fly (obedience, readiness to perform the divine commands). This view is taken by the best of the modern Commentators: by Herder, De Wette, Rinck, Hengstb., Dü sterd. Ebrard differs only in this, that he regards them as symbolic not of creation itself, but of the creative power of God. Stern, whose commentary on this whole passage is very able and beautiful, inclines rather to take them as representing the power of divine grace within the church of God: but in his usual interpretation (see in p. 209, on ὅτανδώσουσιν , κ .τ .λ .) treats them as “ alles creaturliche Leben der Natur.” See also my Hulsean Lectures for 1841, vol. i. Lecture ii. We have thus the throne of God surrounded by His Church and His animated world: the former represented by the 24 elders, the latter by the four living-beings. 9-11. The everlasting song of praise of creation, in which the church joins. It is well observed by Dü sterd., that the ground of this ascription of praise is not redemption, which first comes in ch. 5:9 ff.,— but the power and glory of God as manifested in Creation; so that the words of the elders are in beautiful harmony with the praise of the four living-beings, and with the signification of the whole vision. And whensoever the living-beings shall give (the future δώσουσι must not be pressed quite so strongly as is done by De Wette (so also Stern), “ from henceforth for all the time to come: see ch. 7:15 ff.: beforetime it was not so, seeing that the 24 elders have only assumed their place since Christ’ s work of Redemption has been proceeding and His victory developing.” Still, it is more than a mere frequentative put for the regular subjunctive, as Dü sterd., after Vitr., Beng., Hengstb., and Ebr. It has a distinct pointing onward towards the future, implying eternal repetition of the act, which the subjunctive would not carry) glory and honour (i. e., recognition of His glory and honour) and thanksgiving (i. e. actual giving of thanks: the 3 accusatives are not strictly co-ordinate in meaning) to Him that sitteth upon the throne, to Him that liveth to the ages of the ages, the twenty-four elders shall fall down before Him that sitteth upon the throne, and shall worship Him that liveth to the ages of the ages (cf. ch. 5:8, 19:4), and shall cast down their crowns (to disclaim all honour and dignity of their own, and acknowledge that all belongs to Him. See instances of casting down crowns cited in Wetstein. Cf. especially Tacit. Ann. xv. 29: “ ad quam (effigiem Neronis) progressus Tiridates … sublatum capiti diadema imagini subjecit” ) before the throne, saying, Thou art worthy, O Lord and our (Dü sterd. remarks that the ἡμῶν has a force here peculiarly belonging to the 24 elders, as representing the redeemed, and thus standing in a covenant relation to God nearer than that of the 4 living-beings. But we must not forget, that Creation is only a part of Redemption, Colossians 1:20) God, to receive the glory (τὴνδ . &c., as alluding to the δόξα &c., ver. 9, ascribed by the living-beings. The articles are improperly omitted in E. V.) and the honour and the might (observe that τὴνδύναμιν in the mouth of the 24 elders represents εὐχαριστίαν in that of the 4 living-beings. The elders, though themselves belonging to creation, in this ascription of praise look on creation from without, and that thanksgiving, which creation renders for its being, becomes in their view a tribute to Him who called them into being, and thus a testimony to His creative power. And thus the reason follows): because Thou didst create all things (τὰπάντα , “ this universal whole,” the universe), and on account of Thy will they were and were created . Ch. 5:1-14. The book with seven seals, containing ἃδεῖγενέσθαιμετὰταῦτα , which the Seer was to be shewn, ch. 4:1. None found worthy to open it but the Lamb, who takes it for this purpose, amidst the praises of the heavenly host, of the church, and of the creation of God. 1. The sealed book. And I saw (lying) on the right hand (i. e. the right hand was open, and the book lay on the open hand. So in ch. 20:1, where see note. The common rendering, in the right hand, misses the ἐπί with the accus. Beza’ s and Ebrard’ s rendering, “ on the right side of Him on the throne,” is shewn to be wrong by what follows ver. 7, where the Lamb takes the book ἐκτῆςδεξιᾶςτοῦκαθημένουἐπὶτ . θρ .: see there. The lying on the open hand imports, that on God’ s part there was no withholding of His future purposes as contained in this book. The only obstacle to unsealing it was as follows, ver. 3) of Him that sat upon the throne a book (i. e. “ a roll of a book,” as in Ezekiel 2:9 f. This explanation alone will suit the meaning of the word as applied to the contemporary practice regarding sacred writings. See also Jeremiah 36:2, Jeremiah 36:23; Zechariah 5:2: and below) written within and behind (such scrolls, written not only, as commonly, on the inner side, but also on the outer, which, to one reading the inner, was behind (see below), are mentioned by Pliny, Epist. iii. 5, who says of his uncle Pliny the elder, “ tot ista volumina peregit, electorumque commentarios clx mihi reliquit, opistographos quidem et minutissime scriptos, qua ratione multiplicatur hic numerus:” by Lucian, Vitarum auctio, i. p. 549, ἡπήραδέσοιθερμῶνἔσταιμεστή , καὶὀπισθογράφωνβιβλίων : by Juvenal, Sat. i. 6, “ summi plena jam margine libri Scriptus et in tergo nondum finitus Orestes:” by Martial, viii. 22, “ Scribit in aversa Picens epigrammata charta.” This writing within and without, so that the whole roll was full, betokens the completeness of the contents as containing the divine counsels: there was no room for addition to that which was therein written. This would be of itself a sufficient reason for the fulness of the scroll. To see, as Elliott, i. p. 99; iii. p. 4, two divisions of written matter indicated, by the writing within, and by that on the back, correspondent to one another, seems hardly warranted by the text), fast-sealed with seven seals (not, consisting of seven writings, each sealed with one seal, as Grot. (who joins καὶὀπισθ . with κατεσφραγισμ .), Vitringa, Wetst., Storr, Ewald, al.: but one book, fastened with seven seals, which were visible to the Apostle. Various ingenious methods have been imagined, by which the opening of each of these seals may have loosened a corresponding portion of the roll: see e. g. the apocalyptic chart in Elliott, vol. i. p. 111, and its explanation, ib. note 2, p. 98. But they all proceed on the assumption that the roll in the vision was unfolded, which is no where to be gathered from the text. Nor have we any right to say that the separate visions which follow the opening of each seal are identical with separate portions of writing on the roll. These visions are merely symbolic representations of the progress of God’ s manifestation of the purpose of His will; but no portion of the roll is actually unfolded, nor is any thing read out of the book. Not its contents, but the gradual steps of access to it, are represented by these visions. What is in that book, shall not be known, until, in full completion, γνωρισθῇταῖςἀρχαῖςκαὶταῖςἐξουσίαιςἐντοῖςἐπουρανίοιςδιὰτῆςἐκκλησίαςἡπολυποίκιλοςσοφίατοῦθεοῦ , Ephesians 3:10: till those material events, which marked the gradual opening of the sum of God’ s purposes, are all past, and the roll is contemplated in its completeness by the spirits of the glorified hereafter. This completeness is here set forth to us again by the mystic number seven. See some excellent remarks on the entire distinctness of the opening of the seals, and the reading of the book, in Corn.-a-lap., p. 77 c:— “ nihil enim in libro legi poterat, nisi post resignationem omnium septem sigillorum: omnibus enim reseratis, tunc demum aperiri et legi potuit liber, non ante.” So also Ribera, p. 197: “ calamitates illæ quæ sigillis continebantur, prius omnes pene venturæ erant, quam ea quæ in libro scripta erant, apparerent et cognoscerentur.” Mr. Elliott, in his work “ Apocalypsis Alfordiana,” specially directed against my commentary on this book, treats this view with all the scorn which is unfortunately so characteristic of him, calling it absurd, unscriptural, &c. He has not produced a word of proof, or even illustrative corroboration, of his own view, that the opening of each seal corresponds to the unrolling of a certain portion of the scroll: but has contented himself with re-asserting it in the strongest language, and pouring contempt on those who hold the other view. I grieve to say, that this is so often the case throughout his above-mentioned work, as to render it generally impossible for me to meet his objections in argument. One who distrusts his own as well as all other explanations, and believes that much of this mysterious book is as yet unfathomed, is no match for one who hesitates not on every occasion to shew his confidence that he is in the right, and all who differ from him are wrong. An enquiry here arises, What is represented by this Book? Opinions have been very various. 1) Some of our earliest Commentators understood by it the Old Testament: or the Old and New conjoined. So, apparently, (in Ezech., Hom. xiv., vol. iii. p. 405: where after quoting our vv. 2-5, he says, “ quamdiu non venit Deus meus, clausa erat lex, clausus sermo propheticus, velata lectio veteris testamenti.” But again, he says, ἡγὰρπὰσαγραφήἐστινἡδηλουμένηδιὰτῆςβίβλου : so that he can hardly be safely quoted for this view), Euseb. (Demonstr. Ev. viii. 2, vol. iv. p. 386,— ποίαςδὲσφραγῖδας , ἢτῶνπροφητῶντὰςἀσαφείας ;), Epiphanius , Hippolytus (in Dan. frag. xix., Migne, Patrol. vol. x. p. 653 f., ὅτιδὲτὰπαλαιὰδιὰνόμουκαὶπροφητῶνλελαλημέναπάνταἦνἐσφραγισμένακ . ἄγνωστατοῖςἀνθρώποιςὑπάρχονταἨσαΐαςλέγει (29:11).… τὰμὲνοὖνπάλαιἐσφραγισμένανῦνδιὰτῆςχάριτοςτοῦκυρίουπάντατοῖςἁγίοιςἠνέῳγεν . αὐτὸςγὰρἦνἡτελείασφραγὶςκαὶκλεῖςἡἐκκλησία , ὁἀνοίγωνκαὶοὐδεὶςκλείει , κ .τ .λ ., ὡςἸωάννηςλέγει . καὶπάλινὁαὐτόςφησικαὶεἶδον , κ .τ .λ . our vv. 1, 2 and 6, 9), Andreas ;— Victorinus , Primasius, (“ hæ c visio mysteria nobis Sanctæ Scripturæ per incarnationem Domini patefacta demonstrat. Cujus unitas concors vetus testamentum quasi exterius, et novum continet interius:” and so Augustine), Tichonius (similarly to Bede), Hilary (Prol. to Comm. on Psalms, vol. i. p. 6, “ Liber iste, et præ terita et futura in his quæ intus et foris scripta erant continens, a nemine dignus est aperiri, &c. … Sed vicit leo ex tribu Judæ , &c.: quia solus septem illa … signacula quibus liber clausus est, per sacramentum corporationis suæ et divinitatis absolvit. Id ipsum autem Dominus post resurrectionem testatus est, dicens Quoniam oportet omnia impleri quæ scripta sunt in lege Moysis et in prophetis, et in psalmis de me.” But see more on Hilary under 2), below), Ambrose (Comm. in Psal. 118:64, § viii. 64, vol. i. (ii. Migne), p. 1078, “ legisti in Apocalypsi quod Agnus librum signatum aperuit, quem nullus ante aperire poterat. Quia solus Dominus Jesus in evangelio suo prophetarum æ nigmata et legis mysteria revelavit: solus scientiæ clavem detulit, et dedit aperire nobis” ), Jerome , al.: and so Joachim, Gregory the Great, , Ansbert (as Bede above), the glossa ordinaria (the same), Aquinas, al. I have given several of the above testimonies at length, as helping us to estimate this view. For it will appear from them, that the opening of the seals was very generally by these fathers and interpreters taken to mean, the fulfilment, and consequent bringing to light, of O. T. prophecy by the events of Redemption as accomplished in the Person of our Lord. But, if so, then this view cannot consist with what follows in the Apocalypse. For manifestly the opening of the seals, as notified by the symbolic visions belonging to each, does not relate to things past, but to things which were yet future when this book was written. Nor can this apparent consensus of the early expositors be cited, as it has been e. g. by Dr. Adams (“ Sealed Book, &c.” pp. 82 ff.), in support of any other view than theirs, in which this Book shall still represent the O. T. Such for example is that of Dr. Adams himself, who regards the opening of the sealed book as symbolizing a future republication of the genuine text of the O. T., by which the Jewish people is to be converted. The untenableness of this view appears at once, if only from (so to speak) its touching the apocalyptic course of visions at this point only, and finding no justification or expansion in any of the symbolic visions accompanying the opening of the seals. 2) Some have held the Book to be Christ Himself: so Hilary ((?) as cited by Corn.-a-lap. from the Prologue to the Psalms, “ Liber, ait, hic est Christus, quia Christus est hujus libri materia et argumentum:” and, “ sigilla septem, ait Hilarius, sunt septem præ cipua Christi mysteria, &c.” But the words are not found in that prologue), Heterius (Migne, Patr. Lat., vol. xcvi. pp. 963 ff.), Paschasius (Præ fatio in Matth. p. 11). But for the same reasons as above, neither can this be held. 3) Wetstein takes it to be “ libellus repudii a Deo scriptus nationi Judaicæ :” which for the same reason falls to the ground. 4) Schö ttgen, “ sententiam a Judice et patribus ejus conscriptis in hostes ecclesiæ conceptam:” and similarly in the main, Hengstenberg: but this view, though strongly defended by Hengstb., is not borne out by the contents of these chapters. 5) Alcasar holds it to be that part of the Apocalypse which treats of the opening of the seven seals (ch. 6-11): and nearly so Hengstb. also, except that he allows only from 6:1 to 8:1 for this portion. But both are obviously wrong, seeing that the opening of the seventh seal evolves a series of symbolic actions which only ends with the book itself. So that this comes to 6) the Book being = the Apocalypse itself: so Corn.-a-lap., seeing in the seven seals that part relating to their opening, and after that regarding the subsequent visions concerning Antichrist and the end of the world, as the contents of the book itself. But he seems, in concluding his paragraph, to resolve this view into the wider one 7) that the Book represents “ divinæ providentiæ concilium et præ finitio, qua apud Se statuit et decrevit facere vel permittere, &c.” This is very nearly that of , Lyra , Vitringa, Mede , Ewald, De Wette, Stern, Dü sterd., al. And this is, in the main, my own view. We may observe, that it is in fact but a limitation of this meaning, when many understand the Book to contain the prophetic fortunes of the Church of Christ: but also that it is a limitation which has arisen from the mistake, noticed above, of confounding the opening of the seals with the reading of the contents of the book. Those successive openings, or if we will, the fortunes and periods of the Church and world, are but so many preparations for that final state of perfection in which the Lamb shall reveal to the Church the contents of the Book itself). 2. And I saw a strong angel (the epithet ἰσχυρόν is by no means superfluous, but corresponds to the φωνῇμεγάλῃ below, which, as appears by what followed, penetrated heaven and earth and Hades. Compare ch. 10:1, 3 and notes) proclaiming in (reff.; the voice is the vehicle, or investiture, of the thing proclaimed) a loud voice, Who is worthy (see reff. ἄξιος here = ἱκανός Matthew 8:8) to open the book and to loose the seals of it? and no one was able, in heaven, nor yet upon the earth, nor yet under the earth (in Hades, the place of departed spirits: not, as Grot., in mari), to open the book, nor yet to look on it (if we were reading an ordinary Greek sentence, this οὐδέ would introduce a climax, which would rule the meaning to be, “ nor even so much as to look upon the book,” lying there closed as it did. But the somewhat indiscriminate use of οὐδέ in the former clause, in which no such climax can be intended, removes this necessity, and enables us to take βλέπειν of an act subsequent to the ἀνοῖξαι ,— the looking on the book, with a view to read it. For the claim to open the book must be founded on a claim of worthiness to see that which was contained in it). 4. And I wept much, because no one was found worthy to open the book nor to look upon it (“ per hunc fletum designatur Johannis desiderium de sciendo ecclesiæ futurum processum.” Lyra. It had been promised to him, ch. 4:1, that he should be shewn future events: and now it seemed as if this promise were about to be frustrated by the lack of one worthy to open the book. There was no weakness of faith, as Hengstb. fancies: indeed such a supposition is entirely out of place here: St. John is in this book the simple recipient of the Apocalypse: for that he is summoned to the heavenly scene, for that he is waiting in humility: but that now seems to be precluded, and his tears burst forth in the earnestness of disappointed desire after the fulfilment of the promise. Christ, as the opener of the book, is not yet revealed to him: and to have him anticipating that revelation by the power of his individual faith, would be to put him out of his place and violate consistency). 5. And one from among the elders (“ dicunt aliqui,” says Lyra, “ quod fuit Matthæ us evangelista, qui dixit in persona Christi, Data est mihi omnis potestas in cœ lo et in terra:” he himself preferring Peter, who had before this suffered martyrdom, and who was “ unus, id est, primus, inter Apostolos.” But see the interpretation of the elders above, ch. 4:4. The elders, in their triumphant place round God’ s throne, know better than the Evangelist, yet clothed with the infirmities of this earthly state, the nature and extent of the victory and glory of Christ. It is the practice of the book to introduce the heavenly beings thus talking with the Seer: cf. ch. 7:13 f.; 10:4, 8 ff.; 17:1; 19:9; 21:9, &c.; 22:8, &c.) saith to me, Weep not: behold the Lion which is from the tribe of Judah (from ref. Gen.: the lion, as victorious: from the tribe of Judah, as the Messiah of promise, sprung from among the brethren of the Seer, and so carrying more comfort to him), the root of David (from ref. Isa.: i. e. the branch or sucker come up from the ancient root, and so representing it: not, as Calov., al., the Divine root which brought forth David,— to which Vitringa also approaches very near:— for the evident design here is to set forth Christ as sprung from the tribe of Judah and lineage of David, and His victory as His exaltation through suffering, ver. 6), conquered , but is simply to be taken as standing in its proper sense in a pregnant construction. The usual rendering loses sight of the victory of Christ, and of the uniform sense in which the verb νικᾷν is constantly used in this book. The aor. must not be resolved into a perfect, but points to the past event of that great victory, by virtue of which the opening is in His power), (so as) to open (construction, see above) the book and (in order to that) its seven seals. 6. The vision of the Lamb. And I saw in the midst of the throne and of the four living-beings, and in the midst of the elders (the words seem to indicate the middle point before the throne; whether on the glassy sea (De W.) or not, does not appear; but certainly not on the throne, from what follows in the next verse. ἐνμέσῳ is repeated, as ἀναμέσον in Leviticus 27:12, Leviticus 27:14) a lamb (the use of ἀρνίον , the diminutive, as applied to our Lord, is peculiar to the Apocalypse. It is difficult to say what precise idea is meant to be conveyed by this form. Elsewhere, it is ἀμνός , John 1:29, John 1:36; 1 Peter 1:19; Acts 8:32: and as ἀμνός is found in Isaiah 53:7, from which the figure here is taken, the alteration of the word appears to be purposely made. Possibly, as De W., it may be to put forward more prominently the idea of meekness and innocence) standing (i. e. in its natural living position: the word is probably chosen on account of what immediately follows. Though ὡςἐσφαγμένον , it was not lying, but standing), as if slain , having (the gender again is that not of the thing expressed, but of the thing signified. See above, ch. 4:1) seven horns (the horn is the well-known emblem of might: cf. 1 Samuel 2:10; 1 Kings 22:11; Psalms 112:9, 148:14; Daniel 7:7, Daniel 7:20 ff., Daniel 7:8:3 ff.; ch. 17:3 ff. The perfect number seven represents that “ all power is given unto Him in heaven and earth,” Matthew 28:18) and seven eyes, which (eyes) are the seven spirits of God, sent forth (as they have been) into the whole earth , Bengel, De W., al., refer to both κέρατα and ὀφθαλμοί : this would be of course grammatically possible, but it seems otherwise decided here both by the context, and by Zechariah 4:10: ἑπτὰοὗτοιὀφθαλμοίεἰσιν [add κυρίου A; pref. ], οἱἐπιβλέποντες (E. V. which run to and fro; Heb. מ ְ ש ׁ ו ֹ ט ְ ט י ם , from ש ׁ ו ּ ט , remigare, cursitare) ἐπὶπᾶσαντὴνγῆν ). 7. The Lamb takes the Book. And he (or, it) came and took (not, ‘ received,’ as Ebrard. The book lay on the open hand of Him that sat on the throne, for any to take who was found worthy. That “ das Buch userreichen” which Ebrard insists on, is found not here, but in the previous description: and to introduce it here, confuses the distinctness of the symbolism. The perfect εἴληφεν apparently cannot be pressed: see reff.) it (i. e. the Book; cf. next verse) out of the right hand of Him that sat upon the throne . 8-10. Song of praise following thereupon. And when he took (the aor. ἔλαβεν is not an imperfect, “ when he was taking,” “ als es nahm,” Luth.: nor again is it a pluperf. “ when he had taken,” as E. V. (our idiom perhaps so requiring it), and many Commentators (even De W. and Dü sterd.);— but a pure past: the context, and not the word itself, indicating that the act to be described was subsequent to that thus expressed. And so in all places commonly cited for aorists “ put for” pluperfects) the book, the four living-beings and the twenty-four elders fell down before the Lamb (who shares the divine throne, and honour, and worship, cf. ver. 13; ch. 22:1; and ch. 3:21), having each (of them) (ἔχοντεςἕκαστος apparently applies only to the elders: not for any grammatical reason, but on account of the symbolism: for 1) it is unnatural to suppose figures described as the four living-beings are, having harps or vials; and even if this is not to be pressed (see above on ver. 7), yet 2) it is inconsistent with the right view of the four living-beings, as representing creation, that they should present the prayers of the Saints) a harp (κιθάρα , properly a zithern or kind of guitar: the harp of David, which the LXX call κινύρα in 1 Kings 16:16, 1 Kings 16:23, al., but always κιθάρα in the Psalms, is described by Josephus, Antt. vii. 12. 3, ἡμὲνκινύρα , δέκαχορδαῖςἐξημμένη , τύπτεταιπλήκτρῳ : and then he adds, ἡδὲνὰβλα , δώδεκαφθόγγουςἔχουσα , τοῖςδακτύλοιςκρούεται . But David, in the passages above cited, appears to have played with his hand: so that perhaps the κινύρα or κιθάρα was played in both ways), and golden vials (cups, or bowls, or, by the context, censers) full of incense , which (αἵ might well have θυμιαμάτων for its antecedent, being fem. to suit προσευχαί below: but it is perhaps more likely that φιάλας is its antecedent— each vial being full of incense) are (represent: see reff.) the prayers of the saints (see reff.: especially ch. 8:3: Psalms 140:2, κατευθυνθήτωἡπροσευχήμουὡςθυμίαμαἐνώπιόνσου . The twenty-four elders, representing as they do the whole church of God, offer the praises and the prayers of the whole church: the harps symbolizing the former, the censers the latter. Of any thing approaching intercession on the part of the glorified saints for the church below, or indeed of the glorified saints at all, there is not the least mention, nor does this passage at all touch the question of the fact of such intercession. In the division of the two employments, the most of prayer falls to the lot of the church in trial, and the most of praise to the church in glory: and this is perhaps the reason why, while they have harps on which they themselves play, they only offer or present the vials of incense. De W. remarks, that the Writer of the Apocalypse seems not to know any thing of the intercessory office of Christ. But that office is prominent through this whole scene. What is the lamb as it had been slain— what the ἠγόρασαςτῷθεῷἐντῷαἵματίσου , but recognitions of it? It underlies the whole book): and they sing (why present? Is it because the sound still lingered in his ears? Or more probably, as describing their special and glorious office generally, rather than the mere one particular case of its exercise?) a new song (new, because the occasion was new; the manifestation of the worthiness of the Lamb calls forth fresh words springing from fresh and living thoughts. These words which follow could not be spoken except by those who had seen Christ’ s redemption complete; therefore they must needs be new), saying, Thou art worthy to take the book and to open the seals of it: for Thou wert slain, and didst redeem (the object is not expressed, nor need it be: see similar constructions with ἐκ , Matthew 25:8; 1 John 4:13. The ἡμᾶς , which is in the mss. added or prefixed to the verb, has considerable authority, but on the whole seems more likely to have been inserted, considering the prevalent early interpretation of the elders as Apostles and Prophets, than omitted because they were imagined to be angels) to God through (ἐν , as the vehicle, and conditioning element of redemption) thy blood out of every tribe and tongue and people and nation , and madest them a kingdom and priests, and they reign upon the earth (“ this clause differs from that in ch. 1:6, both by the καί before ἱερεῖς , and by the important addition καὶβασιλ . κ .τ .λ . This last would be superfluous, if we were with Hengstb., al., to adhere to the rec. βασιλεῖς , or if βασιλείαν could have the sense given to it by Hengstb. in ch. 1:6, ‘ a people invested with kingly power.’ Here we have three particulars: 1) that those who are bought to be God’ s own are made into a kingdom, viz. God’ s,— 2) that they are made into priests,— 3) that they are invested with kingly power. So rightly Ebrard.” Dü sterd. The present βασιλεύουσιν is not to be rendered as a future, but keeps its own meaning (the whole aspect and reference of this heavenly vision being not future, but present: the world and church as now existing, cf. Ephesians 2:6). The Church even now, in Christ her Head, reigns on the earth: all things are being put under her feet, as under His: and even if this meaning be questioned, we have her kingly rank and office asserted in the present, even in the midst of persecution and contempt). 11, 12. The assenting chorus of the host of angels. And I saw (εἶδον , not in a general vague sense, introducing a fresh particular merely; but in its proper sense: John saw the host of angels whose voice he heard: cf. ch. 6:1 f. The gloss. ord. refers εἶδον to what has preceded: but this is contrary to St. John’ s usage), and I heard [as it were] a (or, the: φωνή , like many other substantives in regimen with their possessive genitives, being definite though anarthrous) voice of many angels around the throne and the living-beings and the elders (i. e. surrounding on all sides, in the more distant space, the smaller circle hitherto described. The Church, as the vehicle of the work of Redemption, of which Creation is but a part, is the central and crowning manifestation of God’ s power and love and wisdom. Round it, and Him who is its Head, the heavenly hosts are ranged in humble admiration; and into its wonders they desire to look. Cf. Ephesians 3:10; 1 Peter 1:12); and the number of them was myriads of myriads and thousands of thousands (i. e. innumerable in its vastness. See Psalms 68:18, and ref. Dan., where χίλιαιχιλιάδες comes before μύριαιμυριάδες : but it is of very little import whether the specification is by way of climax or of anti-climax, the same idea being conveyed), saying (the appositional nom. instead of the gen.: as in ch. 4:1) with a loud voice, Worthy is the Lamb which hath been slain to receive (by way of ascribed praise: cf. ch. 4:11 and note) the power and riches and wisdom and might and honour and glory and blessing (here, as in ch. 7:12, but in differing order, we have seven particulars of ascription. But here there is a difference both from ch. 7:12 and 4:11. In each of those places the art. is repeated before each particular: here, one article includes them all. Bengel well remarks, that we must regard them all as if they formed but one word. And when they are thus regarded, the article seems to point out the fact of all these, as one, belonging to God, whose power and glory the Lamb is declared worthy to share. Of the particulars themselves, πλοῦτος is better kept in its generality, all riches and fulness, than limited, as by De W., to spiritual riches; see 1 Chronicles 29:11: εὐλογία is blessing, in the sense so frequent when the word and its cognate verb are used of an act passing from man to God: viz. that of ascribed praise; the will on the part of the creature, though unaccompanied by the power, to return blessing for blessing conferred The idea of Bengel, that the septenary number has to do with the seven seals, is hardly probable: the number, as indicating completeness, running through the whole book). 13, 14. The chorus of assenting praise from Creation itself. And every creature which is in the heaven (the chorus being universal, this will include the angels, previously mentioned, and the glorified saints) and on the earth and under the earth (i. e. not the devils, as even Vitringa: but as in Philippians 2:10, the departed spirits in Hades: see note there), and upon the sea (i. e. most probably, on the surface of the sea; meaning not those on ships, but those sea-animals which are regarded as being on the surface), and all the things in them (so in Exodus 20:11. The clause added seems to serve the purpose of complete enumeration, applying here to γῆ and θάλασσα only, as ἐντῷοὐρανῷ has occurred already. The ἐπί and ὑποκάτω being both superficial, ἐν completes the list— in the depths of the earth and the sea: cf. ch. 8:9) I heard saying (the gender again is that of the things signified, not that of κτίσμα : see ch. 4:8), To Him that sitteth upon the throne (for the various cases after καθημ . ἐπί , see note, ch. 4:2) and to the Lamb (the Church, including Creation, gives praise to the Lamb for Redemption, vv. 9, 10: the angels praise the infinite condescension of the Son of God: the entire universe celebrates the glory of the universal Father and of the Redeemer, thence accruing) (be (or, is, belongs)) the blessing and the honour and the glory and the might (notice the fourfold arrangement where universality is set forth: and the repeated article, exhaustive of each predicate separately. It is fanciful, with Bengel, to allot the four ascriptions among the four classes of creatures above mentioned. In each case the number has the same signification: but they need not separately correspond) to the ages of the ages. 14. The solemn assent of the celestial representatives of Creation and of the Church. And the four living-beings said Amen (as above, in ch. 4:11, the four living-beings assert the worthiness of God to receive the glory and the honour and the power on account of His having created all things, so here they say their Amen to creation’ s chorus of praise: being themselves the representatives of the animated Creation). And the elders fell down and worshipped (in silent adoration of God and of the Lamb. The inference of Ewald from the rec. text (which is itself here wholly untenable), “ presbyteri adoratione repetita Deum prosequuntur, ut a quo auctore omnia progressa sunt et Messias creatus est, ad eum omnis redeat honor, omnis reverentia,” would be unwarranted even were that text retained: ζῶντι , anarthrous, would apply to the whole object of praise in ver. 13). Ch. 6:1-8:1. The opening of the seven seals. As preliminary to the exegesis of this section, I may observe that it is of the first importance to bear in mind, that the openings of these seals correspond to the various arrangements of God’ s Providence by which the way is prepared for the final opening of the closed book of His purposes to His glorified Church. That opening shall not fully and freely be made, till His people will know even as they are known. And that will not be, till they are fully gathered in to His heavenly garner. This book the Lamb opens, containing as it does matters which οὐδεὶςοἶδεν , οὐδὲἄγγελοςἐνοὐρανῷ , οὐδὲὁυἱός , first by the acts and procedures of His establishment of His reign over the earth, and then finally by His great second coming, the necessary condition of His elect being gathered out of the four winds into His glory. When these preparations for His coming have taken place, and that coming itself has passed, and the elect are gathered into glory, then will be the time when the last hindrance to our perfect knowledge will be removed, and the book of God’ s eternal purposes will lie open— the theme of eternity’ s praise. I may add that for the sake of perspicuity, I shall mainly follow, in these notes, the track of that interpretation which seems to me to be required; noticing only differences in those of other Commentators where grammar and philology are concerned. 1-8. The opening of the first four seals, marked by the ministration of the four living-beings. 1, 2. And I saw when the Lamb opened one from among the seven seals, and I heard one from among the four living-beings saying, as the voice (a pendent nominative; the regular construction would be dative) of thunder (which is to be taken not as peculiarly belonging to this first as resembling a lion, but as belonging to all alike, and accounted for by their mysterious and exalted nature: cf. ch. 1:10, 10:3), Come (to whom, and with what meaning is this ἔρχου spoken? The great majority of Commentators have taken the rec. reading, which fixes it by adding καὶβλέπε , as an address to the Seer, to approach nearer and look at the coming vision. And even those who have rejected this addition have yet regarded it as a true gloss, and the “ Come” as addressed to the Seer. But whither was he to come? Separated as he was by the glassy sea from the throne, was he to cross it? And where shall we find the simple verb ἔρχεσθαι used absolutely in such a sense, “ Draw near,” without ὧδε or some such particle? Compare also the place where the Seer is to go and take the little book (ch. 10:8), and see how different is the whole form of expression. In interpreting so unusual a term of address, surely we should rather begin by enquiring whether we have not the key to it in the book itself. And in this enquiry, are we justified in leaving out of consideration such a verse as ch. 22:17, τὸπνεῦμακαὶἡγὐμφηλέγουσινἜρχου · καὶὁἀκούωνεἰπάτωἜρχου , and the following ἀμὴνἔρχου , κύριεἸησοῦ , ib. ver. 20? This seems to shew, in my mind, beyond a doubt, what, in the mind of the Seer, the remarkable and insulated exclamation ἔρχου imported. It was a cry addressed, not to himself, but to the Lord Jesus: and as each of these four first seals is accompanied by a similar cry from one of the four living-beings, I see represented in this fourfold ἔρχου the groaning and travailing together of creation for the manifestation of the sons of God, expressed in each case in a prayer for Christ’ s coming: and in the things revealed when the seals are opened, His fourfold preparation for His coming on earth. Then at the opening of the fifth seal the longing of the martyred saints for the same great consummation is expressed, and at that of the sixth it actually arrives). And I saw, and behold a white horse, and he that sat on him having a bow, and a crown was given to him, and he went forth conquering, and in order that he may conquer (in the first place, the figure of the horses and their riders at once brings to mind the similar vision in Zechariah 1:7-11, 6:1-8, where the men on the horses are they whom the Lord hath sent to walk to and fro through the whole earth. In Zec_1, as here, that part of the vision is followed, ver. 12, by the cry of the ἕωςτίνος . Here the horses and their riders are the various aspects of the divine dispensations which should come upon the earth preparatory to the great day of the Lord’ s coming. As regards this first, the whole imagery speaks of victory. The horses of the Roman commanders in their triumphs were white. Wetst. quotes Virg. Æ n. iii. 537, where Æ neas says, “ Quatuor hic primum omen equos in gramine vidi, Tondentes campum late, candore nivali;” where Servius’ s comment is “ Hoc ad victoriæ omen pertinet.” The bow serves to identify the imagery here with that in Habakkuk 3:9, where God goes forth for the salvation of His people: see also Isaiah 41:2; Zechariah 9:13: and even more strikingly with that in Psalms 45:4, Psalms 45:5, “ In thy majesty ride prosperously, because of truth and meekness and righteousness: and thy right hand shall teach thee terrible things. Thine arrows are sharp in the heart of the king’ s enemies; whereby the people fall under thee.” It is hardly possible that one whose mind was full of such imagery, should have had any other meaning in his thoughts, than that to which these prophecies point. The crown finds its parallel in the vision of Zec_6, where, ver. 11, it is said, “ take silver and gold, and make crowns (στεφάνους , LXX), and set them upon the head of Joshua the son of Josedech, the high-priest.” The going forth conquering and in order to conquer can only, it seems to me, point to one interpretation. The νικῶν might be said of any victorious earthly power whose victories should endure for the time then present, and afterwards pass away: but the ἵνανικήσῃ can only be said of a power whose victories should last for ever. Final and permanent victory then is here imported. Victory, we may safely say, on the part of that kingdom against which the gates of hell shall not prevail: whose fortunes and whose trials are the great subject of this revelation. Such is the first vision, the opening of the first seal in the mystery of the divine purposes: victory for God’ s church and people: the great key-note, so to speak, of all the apocalyptic harmonies. And notice, that in this interpretation, there is no lack of correspondence with the three visions which follow. All four are judgments upon the earth: the beating down of earthly power, the breaking up of earthly peace, the exhausting of earthly wealth, the destruction of earthly life. Nor is this analogy disturbed, when we come to enquire, who is the rider on this white horse. We must not, in reply, on the one hand, too hastily introduce the Person of our Lord Himself, or on the other, be startled at the objection that we shall be paralleling Him, or one closely resembling Him, with the far different forms which follow. Doubtless, the resemblance to the rider in ch. 19:11 ff. is very close, and is intended to be very close. The difference however is considerable. There, He is set forth as present in his triumph, followed by the hosts of heaven: here, He is working, in bodily absence, and the rider is not Himself, but only a symbol of His victorious power, the embodiment of His advancing kingdom as regards that side of its progress where it breaks down earthly power, and makes the kingdom of the world to be the kingdom of our Lord and His Christ. Further it would not be wise, nor indeed according to the analogy of these visions, to specify. In all cases but the last, these riders are left in the vagueness of their symbolic offices. If we attempt in this case to specify further, e. g. as Victorinus, “ Equus albus verbum est præ dicationis cum Spiritu sancto missum in orbem. Ait enim Dominus, Præ dicabitur hoc Evangelium per totum orbem terrarum in testimonium coram gentibus, et tunc veniet finis,” — while we are sure that we are thus far right, we are but partially right: we do not cover the extent of the symbol, seeing that there are other aspects and instruments of victory of the kingdom of Christ, besides the preaching of the Word. The same might be said of any other of the partial interpretations which have been given by those who have taken this view. And it was taken, with divergences of separate detail, by all expositors from the earliest times down to the year 1500). 3, 4. And when he opened the second seal, I heard the second living-being saying, Come (see above on ver. 1). And there came forth another horse, red , and to him that sat upon him it was given (to him) to take away peace (τὴνεἰρ . not, as Elliott, “ the peace left by the former seal,” for 1) the former seal neither implies nor leaves such peace, and 2) these four seals are strictly correlative, not consecutive on one another: but, peace in its entirety, the τήν distributing, as the logicians say, the substantive. See for εἰρήνη without the art., Matthew 10:34 (peace, at all: any peace): Luke 2:14 (peace, in each particular case, under every circumstance), &c.: with the art., Romans 14:19, τὰτῆςεἰρ . διώκωμεν : 15:33, al., ὁθεὸςτῆςεἰρήνης : Ephesians 2:14, αὐτὸςἐστὶνἡεἰρήνηἡμῶν , &c.) out of the earth (generally, as ever: not, Judæ a, nor the Roman “ orbis terrarum,” nor any special portion merely) and that they (men: the inhabitants of the earth) shall kill (the pregnant future after ἵνα not only imports the result of purpose, but includes also matter of fact, “ that they may … which they also shall;” see Winer (edn. 6, § 41 b. 1. b), who however inteprets it as expressing duration (?), whereas the aor. denotes rapid transition) one another: and there was given to him a great sword (the key to the interpretation of this seal is to be found in Matthew 10:34, μὴνομίσητεὅτιἦλθονβαλεῖνεἰρήνηνἐπὶτὴνγῆν · οὐκἦλθονβαλεῖνεἰρήνηνἀλλὰμάχαιραν : see also Luke 12:51. It represents to us the taking away of peace from the earth, the slaying one another, the reign of the sword, as one of the destined concomitants of the growing and conquering power of Christ, and one of the world-long and world-wide preparations for His coming. Observe, all limitations of this meaning are wrong: whether to the persecutions of the Christians, or to any period of time, ancient or modern. The above was the most ancient interpretation; e. g. we have in Victorinus, “ Equus roseus et qui sedebat super eum habens gladium. bella sunt significata futura, ut legimus in Evangelio, Surget enim gens contra gentem,” &c., Matthew 24:7). 5, 6. And when he opened the third seal, I heard the third living-being saying, Come (see above on ver. 1). And I saw, and behold a black horse (the colour is indicative of the mournful nature of the employment of the rider: see below), and he that sat on him having a balance (the symbol of scarcity, during which the bread is doled out by weight: see Ezekiel 4:16, φάγονταιἄρτονἐνσταθμῷκαὶἐνἐνδείᾳ : and Leviticus 26:26, ἀποδώσουσιτοὺςἄρτουςὑμῶνἐνσταθμῷ , καὶφάγεσθεκαὶοὐμὴἐμπλησθῆτε . Some, as e. g. Woodhouse, have defended the meaning “ yoke” for ζυγόν . But surely the question is here decided for us by ref. Ezek., ζυγὸςδίκαιος , καὶμέτρονδίκαιον , καὶχοῖνιξδικαίαἔσταιὑμῖντοῦμέτρου : where the same words occur in juxtaposition. The assertion of Mr. Barker, in his strictures on Elliott’ s Horæ Ap., that ζυγός in the sense of balance absolutely is very rare, is sufficiently answered by the proverb ἀκριβέστεροςζυγοῦ : by Diog. Laert. viii. 18, where he records of Pythagoras the maxim ζυγὸνμὴὑπερβαίνειν , τουτέστι , τὸἴσονκαὶδίκαιονμὴὑπερβαίνειν . When a word can be thus used figuratively in common sayings, its literal sense cannot be so very rare. Cf. also the Etymologicon in Wetstein, ζυγὸςεἴρηταικαὶτὸλεγόμενονὑπὸτῶνποιητῶντάλαντονἠγοῦνἢτρυτάνη : and his citations from Sextus Empir. and Demosthenes) in his hand. And I heard as it were (ὡς must apparently be taken with the whole clause— “ something like (a voice in the midst of the four living-beings),” the uncertainty applying to the situation, not to its being a voice, which it was) a voice in the midst of the four living-beings (it is not specified, whose voice: but the point from which the voice comes is appropriate to its intent, which is to mitigate the woes of creation, represented by the four living-beings: see below), saying (Let there be) A chœ nix of wheat for a denarius (gen. of price, see Winer, edn. 6, § 30. 10 end), and three chœ nixes of barley for a denarius (the sense seems to be, Take care that there be thus much food for thus much price. The denarius was the ordinary soldier’ s pay for a day in the time of Tiberius (see note on Matthew 20:2), and has been usually and not unfairly assumed to be twice mentioned here as representing a day’ s wages. The chœ nix appears in like manner to be taken for a day’ s provision: for so it is used in several of the numerous places cited by Wetst.: e. g. Herod., vii. 187, who, in estimating the amount of food consumed by the army of Xerxes, assumes this: εὑρίσκωγὰρσυμβαλλεόμενος , εἰχοίνικαπυρῶνἕκαστοςτῆςἡμέραςἐλάμβανεκαὶμηδὲνπλέον : Thuc. iv. 16, speaking of the allowance made to the Lacedæ monians in Sphacteria while negotiations were going on,— σῖτον … δύοχοίνικαςἑκάστῳἈττικὰςἀλφίτων , καὶδύοκοτύλας : Athen. x. 452 e, μὴκαθῆσθαιἐπὶχοίνικα , ἀντὶτοῦμὴσκοπεῖντὰἐφ ʼ ἡμέρας , ἀλλὰτὴνἐπιοῦσανἀεὶπροσδέχεσθαι : Diog. Laert. Pythag. viii. 18, and Suidas under Pythagoras, ἐπὶχοίνικοςμὴκαθίζειν , ἐνἴσῳτοῦἐνεστῶτοςφροντίδαποιεῖσθαικαὶτοῦμέλλοντος · ἡγὰρχοῖνιξἡμερήσιοςτροφή . Nothing can be more decisive than such proverbial usage. The tendency of the voice is then to check or limit the agency of the rider on the black horse, and to provide that notwithstanding his errand sustenance shall not utterly fail. With regard to the three chœ nixes of barley, the cheaper and less profitable grain, it seems to have been rightly interpreted as taking in the other case, of the workman who, out of his denarius a day, has to maintain not himself only, but his family also, and cannot consequently afford the dearer wheaten bread); and the oil and the wine do not thou injure (not, as Heinr. and recently Elliott, “ do thou not commit injustice in the matter of the oil and the wine.” The usage of this book should have prevented such an interpretation: for ἀδικεῖν with the accus. of the material object hurt or injured is the constant habit of our Writer, see reff.: and in no case do we find the other construction used by him, or indeed by any other writer to my knowledge, except with such general adverbial accusatives as τι and οὐδέν , e. g. Galatians 4:12; Philemon 1:18. This statement of the usage of ἀδικέω in this Book and in Greek literature, Mr. Elliott, more suo, calls a “ vain dictum:” and adds, “ In the three Apocalyptic examples of the thing injured, occurring in connexion with the verb ἀδικέω in the active sense of injury, the accusative follows the verb: 7:2, 3, 9:4.” It did not suit his purpose to cite 11:5, αὐτοὺςἀδικῆσαι , and he therefore appears to introduce a distinction (of course untenable) between the person and thing injured. But this whole matter of the position of the accusative has to do with the emphasis only, and not with the construction at all. Not one of the examples which he cites in his note is to the point: in that from Xenophon, Cyrop. iv. 5. 42, τὴνδ ʼ ἀγορὰντὴνοὖσανἐντῷστρατοπέδῳκηρυξάτωμὲνἤδη , ἔφη , μὴἀδικεῖνμηδένα , πωλεῖνδὲτοὺςκαπήλουςὅτιἔχειἕκαστοςπράσιμον … , the pendent accusative being evidently prefixed to the whole subsequent enactment, not connected with the first verb in it only. Rinck gives another meaning, equally untenable, “ waste not the oil and the wine,” seeing they are so costly. As regards the meaning, the spirit of the saying is as explained above: the rider on the black horse symbolizing Famine, is limited in his desolating action by the command given, that enough is to be reserved for sustenance. Wheat, barley, oil, and wine, formed the ordinary sources of nourishment: cf. Psalms 104:14, Psalms 104:15. So that as regards its intent, the command is parallel with that saying of our Lord in Matthew 24:22: καὶεἰμὴἐκολοβώθησαναἱἡμέραιἐκεῖναι , οὐκἂνἐσώθηπᾶσασάρξ · διὰδὲτοὺςἐκλεκτοὺςκολοβωθήσονταιαἱἡμέραιἐκεῖναι . It is the mercy of God, tempering His judgments. And in its general interpretation, as the opening of the first seal revealed the certain proceeding on to victory of Christ and His church, and the second, that His coming should be prepared in the world not by peace but by the sword, so now by this third we learn that Famine, the pressure of want on men, not sweeping them away by utter failure of the means of subsistence, but keeping them far below the ordinary standard of comfort, and especially those who depend on their daily labour, will be one of the four judgments by which the way of the Lord’ s coming will be opened. This seems to point, not so much to death by famine, which belongs to the next vision, as to agrarian distress with all its dreadful consequences: ripening in some cases (see below) into the hunger-death, properly the consequence of Famine. The above interpretation of the third seal is given in the main by Victorinus— “ Equus niger autem famem significat; ait enim Dominus: Erunt fames per loca:” but he allegorizes the latter part of the vision: “ vinum et oleum ne læ seris, id est, hominem spiritualem ne plagis percusseris” ). 7, 8. And when he opened the fourth seal, I heard the voice of the fourth living-being saying, Come (see above on ver. 1). And I saw, and behold a livid horse (χλωρός , originally and properly grass-green, when used of flesh implies that greenish pallor which we know as livid: the colour of the corpse in incipient decay, or of the complexion extremely pale through disease. Thus Thucyd. in describing the symptoms of the plague at Athens, says that the body was οὐκἄγανθερμόν , οὔτεχλωρόν , ἀλλ ʼ ὑπέρυθρον . Callistratus, as quoted in Wetst. says, ἡμὲνγὰρχεὶρὑπὸτοῦφόβουχλωρόντεκαὶτεθνηκὸςὁρῶσα . Hippocrates, ibid. says of the colour, μελάντερόνἐστιτοῦἐρυθροῦ , καὶοἷονἀρχήτιςτοῦμελαίνεσθαικαὶπελιδνοῦσθαι . And again, in describing the symptoms of approaching death,— ῥὶςὀξεῖα , ὀφθαλμοὶκοιλοί , … καὶτὸχρῶματοῦξύμπαντοςπροσώπουχλωρόντεκαὶμέλανἐὸν .… σημαίνειθανατῶδες . See also Wetst.’ s other quotations), and he that sat upon him (ἐπάνωαὐτοῦ , lit. on the top of him: in the three other cases, ἐπ ʼ αὐτόν . The nominative is pendent, see ch. 3:12, 21) his name was Death (i. e. he was death personified. In this case only of the four is the explanation given. It is wrong to understand Pestilence by this θάνατος : see below), and Hades (the impersonation of the place of the departed: see ch. 1:18, 20:14, where as here θανάτουκαὶᾅδου go together. Eichhorn and Ebrard understand it of the whole multitude of the departed: but this clearly is beside the purpose: personification being the prevailing character of these four riders) was following with him (in his train: ready to engulf and detain his victims), and there was given to them (Death and Hades, considered as joint partners in the baleful work) power over the fourth part of the earth , to kill with (the ἐν of investiture, expressing the element or vehicle in which the action transpires) sword and with famine and with death (i. e. here, pestilence: see below), and by (ὑπο , seeing that the other three were rather general indications of the manner in which, but this last of the actual agent by whose administration. Wetst. gives examples of ἀποθανεῖν , τελευτᾷν , ὑπο , but the construction with an active verb is not common. See Matthiæ , § 592, who gives, besides ref., Eurip. Alcest. 753, εἰδὲἀπειπεῖνχρῆνμεκηρύκωνὕποτὴνσὴνπατρῴανἑστίαν ,— Plato, Phileb. p. 320, ὑπὸἀγγέλωνφράζειν ,— and Thuc. vi. 32, ὑπὸκήρυκοςεὐχὰςποιεῖσθαι . It is singular that these examples should all belong to the same description of employment of agents) the wild beasts of the earth (the enumeration comprehends the “ four sore judgments” enumerated in Ezekiel 14:21, and in the same terms: τὰςτέσσαραςἐκδικήσειςμουτὰςπονηράς , ῥομφαίανκαὶλιμὸνκαὶθηρίαπονηρὰκαὶθάνατον . This fixes the meaning of this second and subordinate θανάτῳ as above. This seal also is interpreted as above by the earliest Commentators: e. g. Victorinus: “ Hæ c eadem quoque inter cæ teras clades præ miserat Dominus, venturas pestes magnas et mortalitates.” But as on the third seal, so here also, he goes off into vague allegory about the latter part of the vision). We have now passed the four first seals, after which the character of the vision changes. One feature common to these four is, Personification: the representation of processions of events by the impersonation of their leading features. Another is, the share which the four living-creatures bear in the representation, which after this point ceases, as far as the seals are concerned. No interpretation can be right, which does not take both these common features into account. And in my view this may best be done by viewing, as above, these four visions as the four solemn preparations for the coming of the Lord as regards the visible Creation, which these four living-beings symbolize. The whole Creation demands His coming. Ἔρχου , is the cry of all its tribes. This cry is answered, first by the vision of the great Conqueror, whose arrows are in the heart of his enemies, and whose career is the world’ s history. The breaking of this first seal is the great opening of the mystery of God. This in some sense includes and brings in the others. Those others then, as we might expect, hold a place subordinate to this. They are, in fact, but exponents of the mysteries enwrapt within this conquering career: visions of the method of its being carried out to the end in its operation on the outward world. That the world-wide declaration of the everlasting Gospel should be accompanied by war, by famine, by pestilence, and other forms of death, had been announced by our Lord Himself (Matthew 24:7), and is now repeated in this series of visions. The fulfilment of each of these judgments is, as it were, the removing a seal from the book of God’ s mysterious purposes: the bringing nearer of the time when that book shall be open for all the redeemed to read. With regard to the question whether these four visions are to be regarded as consecutive or contemporaneous, I have already expressed an opinion. In their fulness, I believe them to be contemporaneous, and each of them to extend through the whole lifetime of the church. The analogy of the whole four symbols seems to require this. We read nothing implying that there are “ days” of the opening of any particular seal, as there are, ch. 10:7, of the sounding of the several trumpets. The ἵνανικήσῃ of the first seal speaks of a purpose which will not be accomplished till the earth be all subjugated: and if I am right in supposing the other visions subordinate to this, their agency is necessarily included in its process. At the same time I would by no means deny that they may receive continually recurring, or even ultimate fulfilments, as the ages of the world go on, in distinct periods of time, and by distinctly assignable events. So far we may derive benefit from the Commentaries of those who imagine that they have discovered their fulfilment in successive periods of history, that, from the very variety and discrepancy of the periods assigned by them, we may verify the fact of the prevalence of these announced judgments, hitherto, throughout the whole lifetime of the Church. As regards ultimate fulfilment, there can be no doubt, that all these judgments on the world without, as well as the manifestation (of which they form a part) of the conquering career of the Kingdom of Christ, will reach their culminating point before the coming of the great and terrible day of the Lord. I may add, that no account whatever is taken, in the common historic interpretation, of the distinctive character of the four first seals, as introduced by the cry of the four living-beings: nor indeed is any interpretation commonly given of that cry itself. 9-11. Opening of the fifth seal. We may at once observe, that the whole character of the vision is altered. The four living-beings have uttered each his cry of ἔρχου , and are now silent. No more horses and riders go forth upon the earth. The scene is changed to the heavenly altar, and the cry is from thence. Any interpretation which makes this vision of the same kind with and consecutive to the four preceding, must so far be wrong. In one point only is the character of the former vision sustained. It is the κατοικοῦντεςἐπὶτῆςγῆς who are objects of the judgment invoked: as it was the earth, and its inhabitants, and its produce, which were the objects of the former judgments. See again below on the sixth seal. 9. And when he opened the fifth seal, I saw under the altar (it is an altar of sacrifice which is here meant; ἐσφαγμένων , which follows, seems plainly to imply this: see below) the souls (i. e. departed spirits. It is manifestly idle to enquire, seeing that the Apostle was in a state of spiritual and supernatural vision, how these disembodied spirits became visible to him. That they were not, as Eichhorn, clothed with bodies, is manifest) of those that have been slain on account of the word of God and on account of the testimony which they had (i. e. which was committed to them to bear, and which they bore: see reff., especially ch. 12:17. The testimony is one borne by them, as most Commentators: not one borne to them by the faithful Witness, as Dü sterd. and Ebrard, most unnaturally: for how could the testimony borne to them before the Father by Christ (so Ebr.) be the cause of their being put to death on earth? Much has been said about the souls of the martyrs not being their departed spirits, which must be conceived of as being in bliss with Christ (cf. Hengstb.), and in consequence it has been imagined that these were only their animal lives, resident in the blood and shed forth with it. But no such difficulty really exists. We know, whatever be the bliss of the departed martyrs and confessors, that they are waiting for the coming of the Lord, without which they are not perfect: and in the holy fire of their purified zeal, they look forward to that day as one of righteous judgment on the ungodly world. The representation here, in which they are seen under the altar, is simply symbolical, carrying out the likening of them to victims slain on an altar. Even as the blood of these victims was poured under the altar and the life was in the blood, so their souls are represented as under the symbolical altar in heaven, crying for vengeance, as blood is often said to do. After this, it hardly need be said that no inference can be drawn from this vision respecting the intermediate state between the death of the saints and the coming of the Lord): and they cried with a great voice, saying Until when (i. e. how long: see reff.), thou Master (δεσπότης is the correlative of δοῦλος , cf. σύνδουλοι below, ver. 11, and see ch. 1:1; Luke 2:29; 1 Timothy 6:1. It is God who is here addressed; with Him rests the time when to avenge His elect, cf. Luke 18:7, Luke 18:8) holy and true (see on ch. 3:7, for the sense of ἀληθινός in such connexion: here it is too evidently intended of subjective truthfulness for the other meaning even to be brought into question: and it is wonderful that Dü sterd. should have insisted on it, “ der Herr welcher in Wahrheit diesen Namen verdient.” For the voc. expressed by the nom. with the art., see reff., and Winer, edn. 6, § 29. 2), dost thou not judge (give decision in the matter of; with ἐκ , see reff.) and exact vengeance for our blood from (reff.: ἀπο is found in Luke 18:3) them that dwell upon the earth (i. e. the ungodly world, as distinguished from the church of God)? As hitherto, so here again, the analogy and order of our Lord’ s great prophecy in Matthew 24:11 is closely followed. “ The signs of His coming, and of the end of the world” were there announced by Himself as war, famine, and pestilence, vv. 6, 7. And when He had declared that these were but the beginning of sorrows , He next, vv. 9 f., announces the persecution and martyrdom of His people. Similarly here, after the judgments already announced, we have the prayer for vengeance on the part of the martyrs, and the announcement of more such martyrdoms to come. And as our Lord’ s prophecies received a partial fulfilment in the events preceding the destruction of Jerusalem, and may have done so again and again since, but await their great and final fulfilment when the day of His coming approaches, so it is with these. The cry of the martyrs’ blood has been ever going up before God since Stephen fell: ever and anon, at some great time of persecution, it has waxed louder: and so on through the ages it shall accumulate and gather strength, till the great issue of the parable Luke 18:1 ff. is accomplished. And there was given to them [each] a white robe (there will be no real difficulty in understanding this, if we are careful to mark its real place and interpret it accordingly. The white robe, in this book, is the vestment of acknowledged and glorified righteousness in which the saints walk and reign with Christ: cf. ch. 3:4; 7:13 ff., al. This was given to the martyrs: but their prayer for vengeance was not yet granted. The Seer saw in vision that this was so. The white robe was not actually bestowed as some additional boon, but seemed in vision to be thus bestowed, because in that vision one side only of the martyrs’ intermediate state had been presented, viz. the fact of their slaughter and their collective cry for vengeance. Now, as over against that, the other more glorious side is presented, viz. that though the collective cry for vengeance is not yet answered, yet individually they are blessed in glory with Christ, and waiting for their fellows to be fully complete), and it was said to them that they should rest (not merely, abstain from their cry for vengeance, be quiet (so De W., al.):— but rest in blessedness, see ch. 14:13, and ref. Daniel) yet a little while until (construction, see reff.) their fellow-servants also and their brethren the same persons; those who are οἱσύνδουλοιαὐτῶν and οἱἀδελφοὶαὐτῶν : the former term reminding them of the necessity of completeness as far as the service of their one Master is concerned: the latter, as far as they belong to one and the same great family) shall have accomplished (scil. “ their course.” Considering that this absolute use of πληροῦν without an object following is an ἅπαξλεγόμενον , it is strange that Ebr. and Dü sterd. should designate πληρώσωσιν as an explanatory reading for πληρωθῶσιν . If this latter be read, then we must render, shall have been completed (in number); a meaning found Luke 21:24; Acts 7:23, 30, 9:23, 24:27: cf. also Colossians 2:10, which suggests another reason for altering to -θῶσιν ), who are about to be slain as also they were. 12-7:17. Opening of the sixth seal, and its attendant visions. And herein (12-17) Immediate approach of the great day of the Lord, Matthew 24:29 : (7:1-8) gathering of the elect out of the four winds, Matthew 24:31: (7:9-17) vision of the whole glorified church, Mat_25. The interpretation of this sixth seal is a crucial point in Apocalyptic exegesis. We may unhesitatingly set down all interpretations as wrong, which view as the fulfilment of this passage any period except that of the coming of the Lord. See the grounds of this below. And I saw when he opened the sixth seal, and a great earthquake took place (we have no word but “ earthquake” for σεισμός , but it does not by any means cover the meaning. For here the heavens are shaken (against Dü sterd.), and the sea, and the dry land. See Haggai 2:6, Haggai 2:7, and the comment in Hebrews 12:26 f. Compare also Zechariah 14:4, Zechariah 14:5), and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair (see ref. Isa. The cloth meant is the cilicium: see note on Acts 18:3. This answers to Matthew 24:29,— εὐθὺςδὲμετὰτὴνθλῖψιντῶνἡμερῶνἐκείνωνὁἥλιοςσκοτισθήσεται .… , and to ὁἥλιοςμεταστραφήσεταιεἰςσκότος , in Joe 2:31), and the whole moon (i. e. not the moon in her crescent or her incomplete form, but entire; as we say, the full moon) became as blood , and the stars of the heaven fell to the earth , as a fig-tree casteth her unripe figs (ὄλυνθος , τὸμὴπεπαμμένονσῦκον , Hesych. De W. explains it to mean, the winter figs, which almost always fall off unripe) when shaken by a great wind (so Matt. again, l. c., καὶαἱδυνάμειςτῶνοὐρανῶνσαλευθήσονται . It is remarkable, that in Matt., when the description has finished, the next words are ἀπὸτῆςσυκῆςμάθετετὴνπαραβολήν . The similitude from the fig-tree, though a different one, rises to the mind of the Apostle as he sees in vision the fulfilment of his Master’ s words which were so shortly followed by a similar illustration. The imagery itself, as that in the beginning of the next verse, is from Isaiah 34:4). And the heaven parted asunder as a scroll when rolled up (the stars having fallen from it, the firmament itself was removed away, as an open scroll which is rolled up and put by. So also almost verbatim, Isaiah 34:4), and every mountain and island were moved out of their places . And the kings of the earth and the great men (the word μεγιστᾶνες belongs to later Greek. It serves here to designate the great civil officers, statesmen and courtiers, as distinguished from the next following) and the chief captains (see reff., especially those in Acts, where the officer in command of the garrison at Jerusalem is so called) and the rich men and the strong men of Jehovah: but also as here: see reff. Now, the catalogue becomes more general) and every man, bond and free, hid themselves in (εἰς , pregn.; ran for shelter into) the caves and in the rocks of the mountains (see reff. Isa., from which the imagery comes), and say to the mountains and to the rooks, Fall upon us and hide us from the countenance of Him that sitteth upon the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb (the imagery is from Hosea 10:8, further impressed by our Lord’ s solemn saying on the way to Calvary, Luke 23:30:— the meaning, that all these shall seek death or annihilation in terror of the coming day, when they shall have to stand before God): because the great day (we have no way in English of expressing the ἡμεγάλη without an awkward periphrasis. The art. lifts the adjective out of its mere epithetal office, and makes it almost a title— the day, that great day: cf. Acts 8:10, where the people say of Simon Magus, οὗτόςἐστινἡδύναμιςτοῦθεοῦἡκαλουμένημεγάλη . This name, ἡἡμ . ἡμεγάλη , if properly considered, should have kept expositors firm here to the great verity of this part of the Apocalyptic visions, and prevented them from going in omnia alia as they have done) of His wrath is come (the virtually perfect sense of the aor. ἦλθεν here can hardly be questioned. Yet even here an account may be given of the aoristic use: see note on ch. 11:15), and who is able to stand (reff., and Malachi 3:2)? We are thus brought to the very threshold itself of the great day of the Lord’ s coming. It has not yet happened: but the tribes of the earth are troubled at its immediate approach, and those terrible signs with which all Scripture ushers it in, have taken place. We are now then arrived at the time described in Matthew 24:30: the coming itself of the Son of man being for a while kept in the background, as hereafter to be resumed. He is seen as it were coming: but before the vengeance is fully accomplished, the elect of God then living on the earth must be gathered, as Matthew 24:31, out of the four winds of heaven, from among the inhabitants of the earth. To this ingathering the sealing in our text is the necessary preliminary. The correspondence between the series of prophecies holds even in the minutest particulars, and where they do not correspond, their very differences are full of instruction. See these pointed out as we proceed. Ch. 7:1-8. The sealing of the Elect. [And] after this εἶδον ,— comes in by way of episode. They represent two great events, the sealing of the elect on earth, and the great final assemblage of the saints in heaven. The great day of the Lord’ s judgment is not described; it is all but brought before us under the sixth seal, and is actually going on in the first of these episodes (see below): but only that part of it which regards the saints appears to us, and that only by its result— their gathering in to heaven) I saw four angels (not, as many interpreters, bad angels; nor does it necessarily follow that we are to adopt the analogy of ch. 16:5 and to regard them as “ angels of the winds:” but simply angels, to whom this office is committed. This is all that is declared to us in the text, and it is idle to enquire beyond it. All allegorizing and all individualizing interpretations are out of the question) standing upon the four corners (ἐπί with accus. at the first appearance, as indicating the coming into that position, “ sensu præ gnanti;” see on ch. 4:2) of the earth (i. e. North, South, East, and West, the cardinal points from which the winds blow) holding the four winds of the earth, that the wind may not blow on the earth nor on the sea, nor against any (or a, i. e. any) tree (the three disjunctives, μήτε , merely couple, without any climax), and I saw another angel (as before, simply an angel; not as has been fancied, our Lord, nor the Holy Spirit; cf. τοῦθεοῦἡμῶν below) coming up from the rising of the sun (ἀναβαίνοντα , because the rising of the sun is low on the earth’ s horizon, whereas the Apostle was in heaven, looking down on the earth: and ἀπὸἀνατολῆςἡλίου , as naturally agreeing with the glorious and salutary nature of his employment. Cf. Ezekiel 43:2; Malachi 4:2. The allegorical interpretations which have been given are entirely uncountenanced in the text), having the seal (σφραγῖδα , though anarthrous, is defined by the possessive gen. following) of the living God (ζῶντος , as giving to the seal solemnity and vital import): and he cried with a great voice to the four angels to whom it was gives (reff.) to injure (viz. by letting loose the winds, which they as yet held in) the earth and the sea, saying, Do not ye injure the earth nor the sea nor the trees, until we (not I: see Matthew 24:31, cited below) shall have sealed the servants of our God (the God alike of the speaker and of those addressed) upon their foreheads (the noblest, as well as the most conspicuous part of the human frame). This vision stands in the closest analogy with Matthew 24:31, where immediately after the appearing of the sign of the Son of man and the mourning of the tribes of the earth, we read καὶἀποστελεῖτοὺςἀγγέλουςαὐτοῦμετὰσάλπιγγοςφωνῆςμεγάλης , καὶἐπισυνάξουσιντοὺςἐκλεκτοὺςαὐτοῦἐκτῶντεσσάρωνἀνέμων , ἀπ ʼ ἄκρωνοὐρανῶνἕωςἄκρωναὐτῶν . The judgment of the great day is in fact going on in the background; but in this first and general summary of the divine judgments and dealings, in which the sighs of Creation and of the Church for Christ’ s coming are set before us, only that portion of its proceedings is described which has reference to these two. When the strain is again taken up, the case and reference are different. The questions now arise, 1) who are these that are sealed? and 2) what is the intent of their being sealed? 1) Those who have followed the preceding course of interpretation will have no difficulty in anticipating the reply. They are, primarily, those elect of God who shall be living upon earth at the time here indicated, viz. that of the coming of the Lord: those indicated in Matthew 24:31, above cited. (On the import and reason of the use of Israel and its tribes, I shall speak below.) As such, they are not identical with, but are included in, the great multitude which no man can number of ver. 9 ff. But they are also symbolical of the first-fruits of the Church: see notes on ch. 14:1 ff. 4. And I heard the number of the sealed, an hundred and forty-four thousand sealed (the number is symbolical of fixedness and full completion, 12 × 12, taken a thousand fold. No one that I am aware of has taken it literally, and supposed that just this particular number and no more is imported. The import for us is that the Lord knoweth and sealeth His own: that the fulness of their number shall be accomplished and not one shall fail: and, from what follows, that the least as well as the greatest of the portions of his Church, shall furnish its quota to this blessed company: see more below) from every tribe (i. e. from the sum of the tribes; from every tribe, all being taken together. This is evident from what follows. For this accumulative sense of πᾶς with an anarthrous substantive, see reff. and Winer, edn. 6, § 18. 4) of the sons of Israel (this has been variously understood. By many, and even by the most recent Commentator, Dü sterdieck, these sealed ones are taken to represent Jewish believers: the chosen out of the actual children of Israel. I need hardly say that such an interpretation seems to me to be quite inconsistent with the usage of this book. Our rule in such cases must be, to interpret a term, where it may possibly be ambiguous, by the use of the same term, if we can discover any, in a place or places where it is clear and unmistakeable. Now in the description of the heavenly Jerusalem, ch. 21:9 ff., we have the names τῶνδώδεκαφυλῶνυἱῶνἸσραήλ inscribed on its 12 gates. Can there be any doubt as to the import of those names in that place? Is it not that the city thus inscribed is the dwelling-place of the Israel of God? Or are the upholders of the literal sense here prepared to carry it out there, and to regard these inscribed names as importing that none but the literal descendants of Israel dwelt within? (For observe that such an inference could not be escaped by the fact of the names of the 12 Apostles being inscribed on its foundations: those being individual names, the others collective.) It seems certain, by this expression being again used there “ totidem verbis,” that the Apostle must here, as there, have intended Israel to be taken not as the Jewish nation, but as the Israel of God. Again, we have a striking indication furnished in ch. 3:12, who these children of Israel are, and to what city they belong:— ὁνικῶν … γράψωἐπ ʼ αὐτὸντὸὄνοματοῦθεοῦμου , καὶτὸὄνοματῆςπόλεωςτοῦθεοῦμουτῆςκαινῆςἹερουσαλὴμἡκαταβαίνουσαἐκτοῦοὐρανοῦἀπὸτοῦθεοῦμου , καὶτὸὄνομάμουτὸκαινόν . These words serve to bind together the sealing here, and the vision of the new Jerusalem in ch. 21. Nor is it any valid objection to this view that the persons calling themselves Jews in ch. 2:9, 3:9, have been taken to be actual Jews. There is a wide difference in the circumstances there, as there is also in the appellation itself): out of the tribe of Judah, twelve thousand sealed, &c. &c. The points to be noticed in this enumeration are, 1) that with the exception of Judah being placed first, the order of the tribes does not seem to follow any assignable principle. It may indeed be not without reason, that Reuben, the eldest, next follows Judah, and Benjamin the youngest is placed last, with Joseph his own brother: but beyond this all is uncertainty: as any one will find, who attempts to apply to the order any imaginable rule of arrangement. So far has been generally confessed. “ Nullus servatur ordo, quia omnes in Christo pares,” says Grotius. 2) That the tribe of Dan is omitted. This is accounted for by the fathers and ancient interpreters, from the idea (founded on Genesis 49:17) that antichrist was to arise from this tribe. So in Catena,— ἡτοῦΔὰνφυλὴτῆςσωτηρίαςἐκβέβληται , ἅτεμαιεύουσατὸνἈντίχριστον , καὶὑπ ʼ αὐτοῦσυγκροτουμένη , καὶτούτῳπροσανέχουσα , καὶκαύχηματοῦτονπροβαλλομένηκαὶκλέοςἀκλέεςκαὶὀλέθριον : by most Commentators, from the fact, that this tribe was the first to fall into idolatry, see Jdg_18: by others (Grot., Ewald, De W., Ebrard, Dü sterd., al.), from the fact that this tribe had been long ago as good as extinct. Grot. quotes for this a Jewish tradition,— “ jam olim ea tribus ad unam familiam Hussim reciderat, ut aiunt Hebræ i, quæ ipsa familia bellis interiisse videtur ante Esdræ tempora.” Accordingly we find in 1 Chron. 4ff. where all Israel are reckoned by genealogies, that this tribe is omitted altogether. This latter seems the more probable account here, seeing that in order to the number 12 being kept, some one of the smaller tribes must be omitted. In Deu_33, Simeon is omitted. 3) That instead of Ephraim, Joseph is mentioned. We have a somewhat similar instance in Numbers 13:11, with this difference, that there it is “ of the tribe of Joseph, namely of the tribe of Manasseh.” The substitution here has been accounted for by the “ untheocratic” recollections connected with the name Ephraim (so e. g. Dü sterd.). But this may well be questioned. In the prophecy of Hosea, where the name so frequently occurs, it designates Israel repentant, as well as Israel backsliding; cf. especially Hosea 14:4-8, the recollection of which would admirably fit the spirit of this present passage. I should rather suppose that some practice had arisen which the Apostle adopts, of calling the tribe of Ephraim by this name. 4) That the tribe of Levi is included among the rest, hardly appears to depend on the reason assigned by Bengel, al., that the Levitical ceremonies being now at an end, all are alike priests and have access to God: for in some O. T. catalogues, even where territorial division is in question, Levi is not omitted: the cities of the priests being mentioned under the head of this tribe. Cf. 1Ch_6. It yet remains to enquire, before passing on to the second vision in this episode, what is the import and intent of the sealing here mentioned. It has been the general view, that it was to exempt those sealed from the judgments which were to come on the unbelieving. And it can hardly be denied, that this view receives strong support from Scripture analogy, e. g. that of Exo_12 and Eze_9, especially the latter, where the exempted ones are marked, as here, on their foreheads. It is also borne out by our ch. 9:4, where these sealed ones are by implication exempted from the plague of the locusts from the pit. It is again hardly possible to weigh fairly the language used in this place itself, without coming to the same conclusion. The four angels are commanded not to begin their work of destruction, until the sealing has taken place. For what imaginable reason could such a prohibition be uttered, unless those who were to be sealed were to be marked out for some purpose connected with that work? And for what purpose could they be thus marked out, if not for exemption? The objection brought against this view by Dü sterd., that so far from being exempt from trials, the saints in glory have come out of great tribulation, is grounded on the mistake of not distinguishing between the trials of the people of God and the judgments on the unbelieving world. In the latter, the saints have no part, as neither had the children of Israel in the plagues of Egypt. And indeed the very symbolism here used, in which the elect are pointed out under the names of the 12 tribes, serves to remind us of this ancient exemption. At the same time, exemption from the coming plagues is not the only object of the sealing. It serves a positive as well as a negative purpose. It appropriates to God those upon whom it has passed. For the seal contains His own Name, cf. ch. 3:12, 14:1. And thus they are not only gathered out of the world, but declared to be ready to be gathered into the city of God. And thus the way is prepared for the next vision in the episode. 9-17. The great multitude of the redeemed in heaven. The opening of the sixth seal introduced the coming of the Lord. The first vision of the episode revealed the gathering together of the elect from the four winds. But before the seventh and last seal can be opened, and the book of God’ s purposes be unrolled, not only must all things on this earth be accomplished, but the whole multitude of the redeemed must be gathered in to the joy of their Lord. Then, and not till then, shall we know even as we are known, and read the mystery of God’ s ways without hindrance. Accordingly, in this sublime vision we are admitted to a sight of the finished state of glory, in which the seventh seal shall be opened. After these things (see above on ver. 1. The term indicates separation from that which went before, and introduces a second and distinct vision in the episode) I saw, and behold a great multitude, which (construction, see reff.) no one could (the past ἐδύνατο represents the classical ἂνδύναιτο : not that the attempt was actually made, but that if made it was sure to fail) number, out of every nation (see ch. 5:9) and (all) tribes and peoples and tongues (observe, that this very specification, of a multitude without number, carries us on past the first or millennial resurrection, indicated in the two former parables of Mat_25 (see notes there), and past the final judgment sublimely described at the end of that chapter: οἱδὲδίκαιοιεἰςζωὴναἰώνιον is the point at which our vision takes up that prophecy. We have οἱδίκαιοι , in their robes of righteousness, made white in the blood of the Lamb, already, vv. 15-17, in the midst of those pleasures for evermore which always stand in Scripture for a description of the employments of the life everlasting) standing before the throne and before the Lamb (by these words the vision is fixed as belonging to that heaven itself which has been previously described, ch. 4. The celestial scene becomes filled with this innumerable throng: its other inhabitants remaining as before) clothed in white robes (see ch. 6:11, note: and below, ver. 14), and palm-branches in their hands (bearing the palm-branch was a mark of festal joy, cf. John 12:13; Joh_1 Macc. 13:51: and this practice extended beyond the Jews, cf. Paus. Arcad. 48, οἱδὲἀγῶνεςφοίνικοςἔχουσινοἱπολλοὶστέφανον · εἰςδὲτὴνδεξιάνἐστικαὶπανταχοῦτῷνικῶντιἐστιθέμενοςφοῖνιξ . Remember also Virgil’ s “ palmæ , pretium victoribus,” Æ n. v. 111. As regards the palm-branch being also called φοῖνιξ , we have the authority of Pollux (Wetst.), τοῦμέντοιφοίνικοςκαὶὁκλάδοςὁμωνύμωςφοῖνιξκαλεῖται ): and they cry (the pres. expresses their unceasing occupation) with a loud voice, saying, Salvation (ἡσωτηρία , the praise of our salvation: the ascription of the salvation which we have obtained) (be) to our God who sitteth on the throne and to the Lamb. 11, 12. The choir of angels, as in ch. 5:11, respond to the ascription of praise. And all the angels were standing round the throne and the elders and the four living-beings, and fell before the throne on their faces (then they were in the vision in the similitude of men) and worshipped God, saying, Amen: the blessing and the glory and the wisdom and the thanksgiving and the honour and the power and the might (observe the sevenfold ascription) be to our God unto the ages of the ages. Amen. 13-17. Explanation of the vision. And one of the elders answered (on this use of ἀπεκρίθη , see reff.) saying to me (the elders symbolizing the Church, one of them fitly stands out as the interpreter of this vision in which the glorified Church is represented), These that are clothed in the white robes, who are they, and whence came they (‘ ad hoc interrogat, ut doceat,’ The questions are those ordinarily put when we seek for information respecting strangers. Wetst. compares the τίς ; πόθενεἶςἀνδρῶν ; of Homer; and the “ Qui genus? unde domo?” of Virgil. Both enquiries are answered in ver. 14)? And I said to him, My Lord (the address is one of deep reverence as to a heavenly being. See the limits of this reverence in ch. 19:10, 22:8, 9), thou knowest (see ref. Ezek., from which the form of expression comes. The σὺοἶδας must not with Ebrard be forced to mean, “ I know well, but thou knowest better:” but must be taken in its simple acceptation, “ I know not, but thou dost.” And this again need not mean that the Apostle had no thought on the subject, but that he regarded himself as ignorant in comparison with his heavenly interlocutor). And he said to me, These are they that come (not, as E. V., “ that came:” nor again must the present be put prominently forward, that are coming, as if the number in the vision were not yet complete: still less is it to be taken as a quasi-future, “ that shall come,” cf. ἔπλυναν and ἐλεύκαναν below;— but as in the expression ὁἐρχόμενος , the present is merely one of designation. Their description, generically, is, that “ they are they that come,” &c.) out of the great tribulation , and they washed their robes (the aor. is that so often used of the course of this life when looked back upon from its yonder side: they did this in that life on earth which is now (in the vision) past and gone by) and made them white (the reff. are full of interest) in the blood of the Lamb (i. e. by that faith in the atoning blood of Christ of which it is said, τῇπίστεικαθαρίσαςτὰςκαρδίαςαὐτῶν , Acts 15:9: and 1 John 1:7, τὸαἷμαἸησοῦχριστοῦ .… καθαρίζειἡμᾶςἀπὸπάσηςἁμαρτίας . See also Ephesians 5:25-27. Several of the ancient Commentators have misunderstood this: e. g. Areth.,— φαμὲνὡςἐκτοῦαἵματοςαὐτῶνἡὑπὲρχριστοῦἔκχυσιςπάσηςἀπήλλαξεναὐτοὺςκηλῖδος . τῷγὰροἰκείῳαἵματιβαπτισθέντεςλευκοὶἀπὸτοῦτοιούτουλουτροῦἀνέβησανπρὸςτὸνἑαυτῶνβασιλέαχριστόν : and, though differently, Joachim:— “ sed cum sancti martyres in sanguine suo baptizati sint, quomodo sanguini Christi ascribitur quod abluti sunt, et non potius proprio sanguini quem pro Christo fuderunt? sed sciendum est, quod postquam empti sumus sanguine Christi, et ejus sacratissimo cruori communicare concessi, etiam sanguis noster sanguis ejus effectus est.” Similarly Lyra: “ merito dicitur sanguis Agni, quia est sanguis membrorum ejus, in quibus dicit se persecutionem pati.” Ansbert ambiguously, “ eas in sanguine agni candificant, subaudis, in Christi passionibus habitum mentis exornant.” And Ewald has fallen into the same mistake: “ sanguine Christi, i. e. cæ de quam ob Christi doctrinam, Christi et in hac re exemplar secuti, passi sunt.” Observe, we must not separate the two acts, washing and making white, as Hengstb., interpreting the former of the forgiveness of sins, the latter of sanctification: the latter is only the result of the former: they washed them, and by so doing made them white. The act was a life-long one,— the continued purification of the man, body, soul, and spirit, by the application of the blood of Christ in its cleansing power). On this account (because they washed their robes white in Christ’ s atoning and purifying blood: for nothing that has spot or wrinkle, or any such thing, can stand where they are standing: cf. again Ephesians 5:27: none will be there who are not thus washed) they are before the throne of God (in the presence of His throne: seeing Him (Matthew 5:8; 1 Corinthians 13:12) as He sees them), and they serve Him by day (gen. sing.) and by night (“ more nostro loquens æ ternitatem significat,” Bede) in His temple (as His priests, conducting the sweet praises of that heavenly choir, ver. 10, and doing what other high and blessed service He may delight to employ them in): and He that sitteth on the throne shall spread His habitation over them (it is exceedingly difficult to express the sense of these glorious words, in which the fulfilment of the O. T. promises, such as Leviticus 26:11; Isaiah 4:5, Isaiah 4:6; Ezekiel 37:27, is announced. They give the fact of the dwelling of God among them, united with the fact of His protection being over them, and assuring to them the exemptions next to be mentioned. In the word σκηνώσει are contained a multitude of recollections: of the pillar in the wilderness, of the Shechinah in the holy place, of the tabernacle of witness with all its symbolism. These will all now be realized and superseded by the overshadowing presence of God Himself). They shall not hunger any more, nor yet (the repeated οὐδέ is exclusive, and carries a climax in each clause) thirst any more, neither shall the sun ever light upon them, no, nor any (reff.) heat (as, e. g., ὁκαύσων , the sirocco, which word is used in Isaiah 49:10, from whence this whole sentence is taken): because the Lamb which is in the midst of the throne (the ἀνὰμέσον is somewhat difficult to express in its strict meaning. In ref. Matt., it has the sense of among: in ref. Mark, that of through the midst of: in ref. Isa., of between. It seems to imply at least two things, between or in the midst of which any thing passes, or is situate. And in order to apply this here, we must remember the text and note at ch. 5:6, where we found reason to believe that ἐνμέσῳτοῦθρόνου , κ .τ .λ ., imported in the middle point in front of the throne. If so, the two points required for ἀνὰμέσον would be the two extreme ends of the throne to the right and to the left. See, besides reff., Exodus 11:7; Leviticus 27:12, Leviticus 27:14; Judges 15:4; Jdg_3 Kings 5:12; Ezekiel 22:26) shall tend them (as a shepherd his flock), and shall guide them to the fountains of the waters of life (cf. ch. 22:1. ζωῆς is prefixed for emphasis, as σαρκός in 1 Peter 3:21, οὐσαρκὸςἀπόθεσιςῥύπου . It is not found in the place of Isaiah, which runs thus: ὁἐλεῶναὐτοὺςπαρακαλέσει , καὶδιὰπηγῶνὑδάτωνἄξειαὐτούς . See Psalms 23:2): and God shall wipe away (see reff.) every tear out of their eyes. All is now ready for the final disclosure by the Lamb of the book of God’ s eternal purposes. The coming of the Lord has passed, and the elect are gathered in. Accordingly, the last seal is now opened, which lets loose the roll. Ch. 8:1. And when (for ὅταν with indic., see reff. Notice, that it occurs in the opening of this seal only, giving it an indefiniteness which does not belong to any of the rest. The touch is so slight as not to be reproducible in another language: but it can hardly be denied that in the Writer’ s mind it exists) he opened the seventh seal (what sign may we expect to follow? The other six seals have been accompanied each by its appropriate vision. Since the opening of the last one, followed as it was by the portents and terrors of the day of the Lord, there has been an episodical series of visions, setting forth the gathering in of the elect, and the innumerable multitude of the glorified Church. What incident is appropriate for the removal of this last, the only obstacle yet remaining to the entire disclosure of the secret purposes of God?) there was (there became, there came on, supervened, from a state very different, viz. the choral songs of the great multitude, re-echoed by the angelic host) silence in the heaven about half an hour (in enquiring into the meaning of this silence, let us first see whether we have any indication by analogy in the book itself, which may guide us. In ch. 10:4, when the Apostle is about to write down the voices of the seven thunders, he is commanded to abstain, and not to write them down. And though neither the manner nor the place of that withholding exactly corresponds to this half-hour’ s silence, yet it holds a place related to the sounding of the seventh trumpet, quite sufficiently near to that of this, with regard to the seventh seal, to be brought into comparison with it. It imports 1) a passing over and withholding, as far as the Apostle is concerned, of that which the seventh seal revealed: i. e. of that complete unrolling of God’ s book of His eternal purposes, of the times and seasons which He holds in His own power. For this unrolling, every thing has been prepared: even to the taking off of the last seal which bound the mysterious roll. But as to what the roll itself contains, there is silence. 2) But it also imports, as Victorinus beautifully says, “ semihora, initium quietis æ ternæ :” the beginning of that blessed sabbatical state of rest, during which the people of God shall be in full possession of those things which ear hath not heard nor eye seen. With equal truth and beauty does the same, our earliest apocalyptic expositor, proceed: “ sed partem intellexit, quia interruptio eadem per ordinem repetit. Nam si esset juge silentium, hic finis narrandi fieret.” So that the vexed question, whether what follows belongs, or not, to the seventh seal, is, in fact, a question not worth seriously answering. Out of the completion of the former vision rise up a new series of visions, bearing a different character, but distinguished by the same number, indicating perfection, and shewing us that though evolved out of the completion of the former series, they do not belong to the last particular member of that series, any further than as it leads the way to them. Even more marked is this again below in ch. 11-16, where the pouring out of the seven vials can in no way be said to belong to or form part of the blowing of the seventh trumpet. It will be seen then that I believe all interpretation to be wrong, which regards the blowing of the seven trumpets as forming a portion of the vision accompanying the seventh seal in particular; and again that I place in the same category all that which regards it as taking up and going over the same ground again. In the seven seals, we had revealed, as was fitting, the opening of the great Revelation, the progress and fortunes of God’ s Church and people in relation to the world, and of the world in relation to the church. With regard to the trumpets themselves, we may observe, 1) that they repeat again the same mystic number seven, indicating that the course of events (see below) represented by this sounding is complete in itself, as was that indicated before by the breaking of the seals, and as is also that afterwards to be indicated by the pouring out of the vials: 2) that as in the case of the seals, there is a distinction made between the first four and the following three. Cf. below, ver. 13. 3) that as also in the case of the seals, there is an interval, with two episodical visions, between the sixth and the seventh trumpet. Cf. ch. 10, and ch. 11:1-14:4) that of the trumpets, six only announce visions partaking of the common character of judgments, whereas the seventh forms, as we also saw in the case of the seventh seal, the solemn close to the rest. 5) and further, that as regards this seventh trumpet, the matters imported by it as being ἡοὐαὶἡτρίτη (ch. 11:14) are not given, but merely indicated by ἦλθεν … ὁκαιρὸςτῶννεκρῶνκριθῆναι , κ .τ .λ . (ch. 11:18): just as we saw that the things imported by the opening of the seventh seal were not detailed, but only indicated by the episodical visions, and by the nature of the similitude used. 6) that before the sounding of the seventh trumpet, the mystery of God is finished, as far as relates to the subject of this course of visions. This is indicated by the great Angel in ch. 10:7; and again by implication in ch. 11:15-19, both by the purport of the voices in heaven, ver. 15, and by the ascriptions of praise, vv. 16-18. This is the same again at the pouring out of the seventh vial, where the great voice from the throne announces γέγονεν , ch. 16:17: as we saw that it was at the opening of the seventh seal, as indicated by the silence of half an hour. Each course of visions is complete in itself: each course of visions ends in the accomplishment of that series of divine actions which it sets forth. 7) that as, when the preparation for the seven angels to sound their trumpets is evolved out of the opening of the seventh seal, the vision of the seals is solemnly closed in by ἐγένοντοβρονταὶκαὶἀστραπαὶκαὶφωναὶκαὶσεισμός , so the vision of the trumpets is solemnly closed in by ἐγένοντοἀστραπαὶκαὶφωναὶκαὶβρονταὶκαὶσεισμὸςκαὶχάλαζαμεγάλη . That the similar occurrence, ch. 16:18, does not close the series of the vials, seems to be owing to special circumstances belonging to the outpouring of the seventh vial: see there (ch. 16:21). 8) that as in vv. 3-5, which form the close of the vision of the seals, and the opening of that of the trumpets, the offering of the prayers of the saints is the prominent feature (see notes below), so in the close of the series of the trumpets we have a prominent disclosure of the ark of the covenant of God, declaring and sealing His faithfulness to His church. Similarly again at the beginning of the series of the vials, we have the temple of the tabernacle of witness opened. Why we have not a similar appearance at the close of that series, is to be accounted for as above. 9) that, seeing that this course of visions opens and closes as last noticed, it (to say nothing at present of the following series of the vials) is to be regarded as embracing a course of judgments (for such evidently is every one of its six visions) inflicted in answer to those prayers, and forming a portion of that ἐκδίκησις invoked by the souls of the martyrs in ch. 6:10. 10) If this be so, then, as this series of visions is manifestly to be regarded as extending to the end of the whole period of time (cf. ch. 10:7, ἐνταῖςἡμέραιςτῆςφωνῆςτοῦἑβδόμουἀγγέλου , ὅτανμέλλῃσαλπίζειν , καὶἐτελέσθητὸμυστήριοντοῦθεοῦ , κ .τ .λ .), we may fairly say that it takes up the great world-wide vision of the seals at the point where it was said to the vengeance-invoking martyrs ἵναἀναπαύσωνταιἔτιχρόνον : and that the judgments of this series of visions occur during the time of waiting. This view is confirmed by finding that οἱκατοικοῦντεςἐπὶτῆςγῆς , upon whom the vengeance is invoked in ch. 6:10, are the objects of vengeance during this series of judgments, cf. ver. 13. 11) In reference to this last remark, we may observe that no one portion especially of the earth’ s inhabitants is pointed out as objects of this series of judgments, but all the ungodly, as usurpers of the kingdom of Christ. This is plain, by the expressions in the ascription of praise with which it closes, I mean, ἐγένετοἡβασιλείακ .τ .λ . Earthly domination is cast down, and the Lord’ s Kingdom is brought in. And it is also plain, from the expression used in that same ascription of praise, καὶδιαφθεῖραιτοὺςδιαφθείρονταςτὴνγῆν , of what character have been these ungodly— the corrupters of the earth— the tainters and wasters of the means and accessories of life. 12) Whatever be the interpretation which follows from the foregoing considerations, two canons must not be violated. a) As in the case of the seals, so it is manifest here, from ch. 11:18, ἦλθεν .… ὁκαιρὸςτῶννεκρῶνκριθῆναι , κ .τ .λ ., that the series of visions reaches forward to the time of the end, and is only terminated by the great events indicated in those words. And b) as yet, no particular city, no especial people is designated as the subject of the apocalyptic vision. All is general. The earth, the trees, the grass, the sea, the waters, the lights of heaven, mankind,— these are at present the objects in our field of view. There is as yet no θρόνοςτοῦθηρίου , as in the outpouring of the vials, ch. 16:10. The prophecy goes on becoming more specific as it advances: and it is not for us to anticipate its course, nor to localize and individualize where it is as yet general and undefined. The further details will be treated as we go on). 2. First appearance of the seven trumpet angels. And I saw (viz. during the symbolic silence, at the end of the half-hour. What now follows is not to be considered as in the interpretation chronologically consequent upon that which was indicated by the seals, but merely as in the vision chronologically consequent on that course of visions. The evolution of the courses of visions out of one another does not legitimately lead to the conclusion that the events represented by them are consecutive in order of time. There are other and more important sequences than that of time: they may be independent of it, or they may concur with it) the seven angels which stand before God (cf. Tobit 12:15, ἐγώεἰμιῬαφαήλ , εἷςἐκτῶνἑπτὰἁγίωνἀγγέλωνοἳπροσαναφέρουσιτὰςπροσευχὰςτῶνἁγίωνκαὶεἰσπορεύονταιἐνώπιοντῆςδόξηςτοῦἁγίου . The agreement is not entire, inasmuch as here another angel, and not one of the seven, presently offers the prayers of the saints. These are not the archangels, as De W. and Stern, nor are they the seven spirits of ch. 4:5, as Aret. and Ewald: nor again are they merely seven angels selected on account of the seven trumpets, as Hengstb. and Ebrard: this is entirely precluded by the article τούς . It is clear that the passage in Tobit and the words here refer to the same matter, and that the fact was part of that revelation with regard to the order and employments of the holy angels, which seems to have taken place during the captivity), and there were given to them seven trumpets (understand, with intent that they themselves should blow them). And another angel (not to be identified with Christ, as is done by , Vitringa, Calov., al., and recently by Elliott: for thus confusion is introduced into the whole imagery of the vision. In ch. 5:8, we have the twenty-four elders falling down with vials containing the prayers of the saints: here we have an angel offering incense that it may mingle with the prayers on the heavenly altar. Any theological difficulty which belongs to the one belongs also to the other; and it is a canon which we must strictly observe in interpretation, that we are not, on account of any supposed doctrinal propriety, to depart from the plain meaning of words. In ch. 7:2 we have ἄλλοςἄγγελος in the sense of a created angel (see note there): and would it be probable that St. John would after this, and I may add with his constant usage of ἄγγελος throughout the book for angel in its ordinary sense, designate our Lord by this title? There is something to me far more revolting from theological propriety in such a supposition, than in an angel being seen in the heavenly ministrations offering incense to mix with the prayers of the saints. It ought really to be needless to remark, in thus advocating consistency of verbal interpretation, that no countenance is hereby given to the invocation of angels: the whole truth of their being and ministration protesting against such an inference. They are simply λειτουργικὰπνεύματα , and the action here described is a portion of that their ministry. Through Whom the prayers are offered, we all know. He is our only Mediator and channel of grace) came and stood over (ἐπί with gen., not simply juxta, nor ante, but super; so that his form appeared above it; the altar being between the Apostle and him) the altar (viz. the altar named ch. 6:9, as the repetition of the word with the art. shews: see below on ver. 5), having a golden censer (the word λιβανωτός is elsewhere the frankincense itself: so ref. 1 Chron.: so also Schol. on Aristoph. Nub., cited by Grot., λίβανος .… αὐτὸτὸδένδρον · λιβανωτὸςδὲὁκαρπὸςτοῦδένδρου : and Ammonius (ib.), λίβανοςμὲνγὰρκοινῶςκαὶτὸδένδρονκαὶτὸθυμιώμενον · λιβανωτὸςδὲμόνοντὸθυμιώμενον . But here it unquestionably means a censer: cf. below, ver. 5, εἴληφεντὸνλ . καὶἐγέμισεναὐτὸνκ .τ .λ . No argument can be derived from the censer being a golden one, as Elliott, partly after Sir I. Newton. The spirit of the heavenly imagery will account for this without going farther: we have, throughout, crowns (ch. 4:4), incense-vials (5:8), vengeance-vials (15:7), girdles (15:6), a measuring-reed (21:15), &c., all of the same costly metal). And there was given to him (viz. by divine appointment, through those ministering: not, by the saints who offered the prayers (Ell.), for two reasons: 1) because the incense is mentioned as something distinct from the prayers of the saints; see below: 2) because no forcing of ἐδόθη will extract this meaning from it. It is a frequent apocalyptic formula in reference to those things or instruments with which, or actions by which, the ministrations necessary to the progress of the visions are performed: cf. ver. 2, ch. 6:2, 4 bis. 8, 11, 7:2, 9:1, &c.) much incense (see ch. 5:8, and on the difference of the imagery, below), that he might (if we read δώσει , which after all is not really a various reading,— η , and ηι , being in the mss. perpetually confused with ει ,— we must remember that the fut. with ἵνα is a mixed construction, made up of ἵναδώσῃ and ἃδώσει . We are compelled in English to choose one of these) give it to (various renderings and supplyings of the construction have been devised: but the simple dative after δώσει appears the only legitimate one: and the sense as expressed by Calov., “ ut daret ταῖςπρ ., orationibus sanctorum, eadem, i. e., ut redderet eas boni odoris preces.” This object was, to incense the prayers of the Saints: on the import, see below) the prayers of all the saints (not only now of those martyred ones in ch. 6:9: the trumpets which follow are in answer to the whole prayers of God’ s church. The martyrs’ cry for vengeance is the loudest note, but all join) upon (the ἐπί with accus. carrying motion; which thus incensed were offered on the golden altar, &c. From what follows it would seem that the prayers were already before God: see below) the altar of gold which was before the throne (this may be a different altar from that over which the angel was standing; or it may be the same further specified. The latter alternative seems the more probable. We must not imagine that we have in these visions a counterpart of the Jewish tabernacle, or attempt to force the details into accordance with its arrangements. No such correspondence has been satisfactorily made out: indeed to assume such here would perhaps be inconsistent with ch. 11:19, where first the temple of God in heaven is opened. A general analogy, in the use and character of the heavenly furniture, is all that we can look for). And the smoke of the incense ascended to (such again seems to be the only legitimate rendering of the dative. The common one, “ with,” cannot be justified: see Winer, edn. 6, § 31. 6. The prayers, being already offered, received the smoke of the incense. The whole imagery introduces the fact that those prayers are about to be answered in the following judgments) the prayers of the saints out of the hand of the angel, before God (these latter words belong to ἀνέβη , or rather to ἀνέβηταῖςπρ . τ . ἁγ . Notice, that no countenance is given by this vision to the idea of angelic intercession. The angel is simply a minister. The incense (importing here, we may perhaps say, acceptability owing to the ripeness of the season in the divine purposes, so that the prayers, lying unanswered before, become, by the fulness of the time, acceptable as regards an immediate reply) is given to him: he merely wafts the incense up, so that it mingles with the prayers. Dü sterd. well remarks, that the angel, in performing sacerdotal offices, is but a fellow-servant of the saints (ch. 19:10) who are themselves priests (ch. 1:6, 5:10, 7:15)). 5. And the angel took is indeed coupled to εἴληφεν ) the censer (after having used it as above, i. e. shaken from it the incense on the altar) and filled it (while the smoke was ascending) from the fire of the altar (i. e. from the ashes which were on the altar), and cast it (i. e. the fire with which the censer was filled: the hot ashes) towards the earth (to signify that the answer to the prayers was about to descend in the fire of God’ s vengeance: see below, and compare Ezekiel in ref.): and there took place thunders and voices and lightnings and an earthquake (“ per orationes sanctorum,” says Corn.-a-lap., “ … precantium vindictam de impiis suisque persecutoribus, ignis vindictæ , i. e. tonitrua, fulgura et plagæ sequentes vii. angelorum et tubarum in impios sunt demissa.” All these immediate consequences of the casting down of the hot ashes on the earth are the symbolic precursors of the divine judgments about to be inflicted). One point must here be noticed: the intimate connexion between the act of this incense-offering angel and the seven trumpets which follow. It belongs to them all: it takes place when now the seven angels have had their trumpets given them, and this series of visions is introduced. So that every interpretation must take this into account: remembering that the judgments which follow are answers to the prayers of the saints, and are inflicted on the enemies of the church. 6. And the seven angels which had the seven trumpets prepared themselves that they might blow (raised their trumpets to their mouths, and stood in attitude to blow them). 7-12. The first four trumpets. It has been before observed, that as in the case of the seals, so here, the first four are marked off from the last three. The distinction is here made, not only, as there, by an intrinsic feature running through the four, but by the voice of the eagle in ver. 13, introducing those latter trumpets and giving them also a distinguishing feature. And as we there maintained (see note on ch. 6:8) that any interpretation, to be right, must take into account this difference between the four and the three, so here also. But in order to the taking into account of this difference, we must gain some approximate idea of its import. Does the intrinsic feature, common to these four plagues, bear a general interpretation which will suit their character as distinguished from the other three? I imagine it does. For, whereas each of those three (or rather of the former two of them, for, as has been observed, the seventh forms the solemn conclusion to the whole) evolves a course of plagues including separate and independent details, these four are connected and interdependent. Their common feature is destruction and corruption: not total, it is true, but partial: in each case to the amount expressed by τὸτρίτον : but this fractional extent of action appears again under the sixth trumpet, ch. 9:15, 18, and therefore clearly must not be pressed as carrying the distinctive character of the first four (on its import see note below, ver. 7). It is in the kind of exercise which their agency finds, that these four trumpets are especially distinguished. The plagues indicated by them are entirely inflicted on natural objects: the earth, trees, grass, sea, rivers, lights of heaven: whereas those indicated by the two latter are expressly said to be inflicted on men, and not on natural objects: cf. ch. 9:4, 15. Surely, however these natural objects are in each case to be understood, this is a point not lightly to be passed over. Nor can it fail to strike every unprejudiced student, that we must not, as is done by many expositors, interpret the γῆ and χόρτος and δένδρα as signifying nations and men in the former portion of the series of visions, and then, when the distinction between these and men is made in the latter part, be content with the literal meaning. With every allowance for the indisputable intermixture, in many places, of literal and allegorical meanings, all analogy requires that in the same series of visions, when one judgment is to destroy earth, trees, and grass, and another not to injure earth, trees, or grass, but men only, the earth, trees, and grass should bear the same meaning in the two cases. We may fairly say then, that the plagues of the four former trumpets affect the accessories of life— the earth, the trees, the green grass, the waters as means of transit and of subsistence, the lights of heaven:— whereas those of the last two affect life itself, the former by the infliction of pain, the latter of death. A certain analogy may be noticed, but not a very close one, between these plagues and those in Egypt of old. The analogy is not close, for the order is not the same, nor are all particulars contained in the one series which are contained in the other: but the resemblance is far too striking to pass without remark. We have the hail and fire, the water turned to blood, the darkness, the locusts(, the infliction of death): five, in fact, if not six, out of the ten. The Egyptian plagues are beyond doubt remembered in the sacred imagery, if they are not reproduced. The secret of interpretation here I believe to be this: The whole seven trumpets bring before us the punishment of the enemies of God during the period indicated by their course. These punishments are not merely direct inflictions of plagues, but consist in great part of that judicial retribution on them that know not God, which arises from their own depravity, and in which their own sins are made to punish themselves. This kind of punishment comes before us especially in the four first trumpet-visions. The various natural accessories of life are ravaged, or are turned to poison. In the first, the earth and its produce are ravaged with fire: in the second, the sea is mingled with blood, and ships, which should have been for men’ s convenience, are destroyed. In the third, the waters and springs, the essential refreshments of life, are poisoned, and death is occasioned by drinking of them. In the fourth, the natural lights of heaven are darkened. So that I regard these first four trumpets as setting forth the gradual subjugation of the earth to Him whose kingdom it is in the end to become, by judgments inflicted on the ungodly, as regards the vitiating and destroying the ordinary means of subsistence, and comfort, and knowledge. In the details of these judgments, as also of the two following, there are many particulars which I cannot interpret, and with regard to which it may be a question whether they are to be considered as other than belonging to the requisite symbolic machinery of the prophecy. But in confessing this I must also say, that I have never seen, in any apocalyptic Commentator, an interpretation of these details at all approaching to verisimilitude: never any which is not obliged to force the plain sense of words, or the certain course of history, to make them fit the requisite theory. Many examples of these will be found in the history of apocalyptic interpretation given by Mr. Elliott in vol. iv. of his Horæ Apocalypticæ . 7. And the first blew his trumpet, and there took place hail and fire mingled in blood (i. e. the hail and the fire were mingled together (plur.) in blood, as their flux or vehicle; the stones of hail and the balls of fire (not lightning, as Ebr.) fell in a shower of blood, just as hail and fireballs commonly fall in a shower of rain. There is here manifestly an allusion to the plague of hail in Egypt, of which it is said that “ the fire ran along upon the ground:” ἦνδὲἡχάλαζακαὶτὸπῦρφλογίζονἐντῇχαλάζῃ , ref. Exod.: but with the addition of the blood. With regard to this latter, we may remark, that both here and under the vials, where the earth, seas, and rivers are again the objects of the first three judgments, blood is a feature common to all three. It appears rather to indicate a general character of the judgments, than to require any special interpretation in each particular case. In blood is life: in the shedding, or in the appearing, of blood, is implied the destruction of life, with which, as a consequence, all these judgments must be accompanied), and it was cast into the earth (towards the surface of the earth): and the third part (this expression first occurring here, it will be well once for all to enquire into its meaning in these prophecies. I may first say, that all special interpretations seem to me utterly to have failed, and of these none so signally as that of Mr. Elliott, who would understand it of a tripartite division of the Roman Empire at the time to which he assigns this judgment. It is fatal to this whole class of interpretations, that it is not said the hail, &c. were cast on a third part, but that the destruction occasioned by them extended to a third part of the earth on which they were cast. And this is most expressly declared to be so in this first case, by all green grass being also destroyed, not a third part: a fact of which Elliott takes no notice. It is this mixture of the fractional third with other designations of extent of mischief, which will lead us, I believe, to the right interpretation. We find it again under the third trumpet, where the star Wormwood is cast ἐπὶτὸτρίτοντῶνποταμῶν , καὶἐπὶτὰςπηγὰςτε͂νὑδάτων : the result being that τὸτρίτοντῶνὑδάτων was embittered. This lax usage would of itself lead us to suppose that we are not to look for strict definiteness in the interpretation. And if we refer to the prophecy in Zechariah 13:8 f., where the import is to announce judgment on a greater part and the escape of a remnant, we find the same tripartite division: καὶἔσταιἐνπάσῃτῇγῇ , λέγεικύριος , τὰδύομέρηαὐτῆςἐξολοθρευθήσεται , καὶἐκλείψει , τὸδὲτρίτονὑπολειφθήσεταιἐναὐτῇ . καὶδιάξωτὸτρίτονδιὰπυρός , κ .τ .λ . Nay, in the Apocalypse itself, we have τὸτρίτον used where the sense can hardly but be similarly indefinite: e. g., under the sixth trumpet, ch. 9:15, 18, and 12:4, where it is said that the dragon’ s tail σύρειτὸτρίτοντῶνἀστέρωντοῦοὐρανοῦ : the use of the present shewing that it is rather a general power, than a particular event which is designated. Compare again the use of τὸτέταρτοντῆςγῆς in ch. 6:8, and of τὸδέκατοντῆςπόλεως in ch. 11:13. All these seem to shew, that such prophetic expressions are to be taken rather in their import as to amount, than in any strict fractional division. Here, for instance, I would take the pervading τὸτρίτον as signifying, that though the judgment is undoubtedly, as to extent, fearful and sweeping, yet that God in inflicting it, spares more than he smites: two thirds escape in each case, while one is smitten) of the earth (i. e. plainly of the surface of the earth, and that, of the cultivated soil, which admitted of such a devastation) was burnt up (so that the fire prevails in the plague, not the hail nor the blood), and the third part of the trees (in all the earth, not in the third part) was burnt up, and all green grass (upon earth: no longer a third part: possibly because green grass would first and unavoidably every where scorch up at the approach of such a plague, whereas the hardier crops and trees might partially escape) was burnt up. 8. And the second angel blew his trumpet: and as it were a great mountain burning with fire was cast into the sea (first, by the ὡς , that which was cast into the sea was not a mountain, but only a burning mass so large as to look like one. Then, it was this mass itself, not any thing proceeding from it, which was cast down. So that the introduction of a volcano into the imagery is quite unjustifiable. In the language (hardly in the sense) there seems to be a reminiscence of Jer_28 (51):25, δώσωσεὡςὄροςἐμπεπυρισμένον . It is remarkable that there the ὄρος should be characterized as τὸδιεφθαρμένοντὸδιαφθεῖρονπᾶσαντὴνγῆν : cf. our ch. 11:18), and the third part of the sea became blood is again represented to us that in the infliction of this plague from above, the instrument of it is merely described as it appeared , not as it really was. So that all ideas imported into the interpretation which take the mountain, or the fiery character of it, as elements in the symbolism, are departures from the real intent of the description): and the third part of the creatures (reff.) (that were) in the sea died (cf. Exodus 7:17-21) those which have life (animal souls: see reff.: and for the appositional nominative, ch. 2:20 reff.), and the third part of the ships were destroyed (another inconsequent result, and teaching us as before. We may remark, at the end of this second trumpet, that the judgments inflicted by these first two are distinctly those which in ch. 7:3 were held back until the servants of God were sealed: μὴἀδικήσητετὴνγῆνμήτετὴνθάλασσανμήτετὰδένδρα , ἄχρισφραγίσωμενκ .τ .λ . So that, as before generally remarked, the place of these trumpet-plagues must be sought after that sealing: and consequently (see there) in very close conjunction with the day of the Lord itself). 10. And the third angel blew his trumpet, and there fell from heaven a great star burning as a lamp, and it fell upon the third part of the rivers and upon the fountains of the waters (it can hardly be said, as Dü sterd., that we are here as matter of course to understand, on the third part of the fountains, any more than we are to limit the πᾶςχόρτοςχλωρός in ver. 7 to all the grass within the third part of the earth). And the name of the star is called Wormwood (the more usual forms are τὸἀψίνθιον , or ἡἄψινθος . The masc. seems to be chosen on account of its conformity to ὁἀστήρ . There is a river in Thrace so called. See on the plant, and its medicinal use by the ancients, Winer, Realw. art. Wermuth: and Pliny, xxvii. 28), and the third part of the waters became (was turned into, see reff.) wormwood: and many of the men (who dwelt by these waters: such may be the force of the article. But τῶνἀνθρ . may be general. It is the only place where the expression πολλ . τῶνἀνθρ . occurs) died from (ἐκ of the source whence a result springs, see Winer, edn. 6, § 47, sub voce) the waters, because they were embittered (compare the converse history, Exodus 15:23 ff., of the bitter waters being made sweet by casting a certain tree into them: see also 2 Kings 2:19 ff. The question whether wormwood was a deadly poison or not, is out of place here. It is not said that all who drank, died. And the effect of any bitter drug, however medicinally valuable, being mixed with the water ordinarily used, would be to occasion sickness and death. It is hardly possible to read of this third plague, and not to think of the deadly effect of those strong spirituous drinks which are in fact water turned into poison. The very name absinthe is not unknown in their nomenclature: and there is no effect which could be so aptly described by the falling of fire into water, as this, which results in ardent spirit,— in that which the simple islanders of the South Sea call firewater. That this plague may go on to destroy even this fearful proportion of the ungodly in the latter days, is far from impossible, considering its prevalence even now in some parts of the civilized world. But I mention this rather as an illustration, than as an interpretation). And the fourth angel blew his trumpet: and the third part of the sun was struck (it is not said, as in the case of the former three trumpets, with what. And this absence of an instrument in the fourth of these correlative visions perhaps teaches us not to attribute too much import to the instruments by which the previous judgments are brought about. It is the πληγή itself, not its instrument, on which attention should be directed) and the third part of the moon and the third part of the stars, that the third part of them might be darkened, and the day might not shine during the third part of it (the limitation of the τὸτρίτον is now manifestly to time, not to brightness. So E. V. rightly, “ for a third part of it.” That this consequence is no natural one following upon the obscuration of a third portion of the sun, &c., is not to be alleged as any objection, but belongs to the altogether supernatural region in which these visions are situated. Thus we have a globe of fire turning sea-water to blood— a burning star embittering the waters: &c.), and the night in like manner (i. e. the night as far as she is, by virtue of the moon and stars, a time of light. And this is far more so under the glorious Eastern moon and stars, than in our mist-laden climate). 13. Introduction of the three remaining trumpets by three woes. And I saw and heard (the construction is zeugmatic) an (ἑνός indefinite, as in reff.: see Winer, edn. 6, § 18. 9. Or it may carry meaning— a single or solitary eagle,— as might also be the case in one of the reff., ch. 18:21, see there) eagle (hardly to be identified with the eagles of Mat 24:28: for 1) that saying is more proverbial than prophetic: and 2) any application of that saying would be far more aptly reserved for our ch. 19:17. Nor again is the eagle a bird of ill omen, as Ewald: nor a contrast to the dove in John 1:32, as Hengstb.: but far more probably the symbol of judgment and vengeance rushing to its prey, as in Deuteronomy 28:49; Hosea 8:1; Habakkuk 1:8. Nor again is it to be understood as an angel in eagle’ s shape: but a veritable eagle in the vision. Thus we have the altar speaking, ch. 16:7) flying in mid-heaven saying with a loud voice, Woe, woe, woe, to those that dwell (the government of an accus. after οὐαί is also found in ch. 12:12) upon the earth (the objects of the vengeance invoked in the prayers of the martyrs, ch. 6:10: the ungodly world, as distinguished from the church) by reason of (so E. V., well: ἐκ denoting, as in ver. 11, the source whence the woe springs) the remaining voices of the trumpet (the sing, is used generically: the three voices all having this common to them, that they are the sound of a trumpet) of the three angels who are about to blow. Ch. 9-11. The last three, or woe-trumpets. These, as well as the first four, have a character of their own, corresponding in some measure to that of the visions at the opening of the three last seals. The particulars related under them are separate and detailed, not symmetrical and correspondent. And as in the seals, so here, the seventh forms rather the solemn conclusion to the whole, than a distinct judgment of itself. Here also, as there, it is introduced by two episodical passages, having reference to the visions which are to follow, and which take up the thread of prophecy again at a period previous to things detailed before. 1-12. The fifth, or first Woe trumpet. And the fifth angel blew his trumpet, and I saw a star fallen (not, as E. V. fall, which gives an entirely wrong view of the transactions of the vision. The star had fallen before, and is first seen as thus fallen) out of heaven to the earth (the reader will at once think on Isaiah 14:12, “ How art thou fallen from heaven, O Lucifer, son of the morning!” And on Luke 10:18, “ I beheld Satan as lightning fall from heaven.” And, doubtless, as the personal import of this star is made clear in the following words, such is the reference here. We may also notice that this expression forms a connecting link to another place, ch. 12:9, in this book, where Satan is represented as cast out of heaven to the earth: see notes there. It is hardly possible with , Ribera, Bengel, and De W., to understand a good angel by this fallen star. His description, as well as his work, corresponds only to an agent of evil. Andreas is obliged to distort words to bring in this view: ἐπὶγῆνδὲκαταβάντα , τοῦτογὰρτὸπεπτωκέναισημαίνει , is enough to condemn any interpretation), and there was given to him (ἐδόθη , as usual, for the purpose of the part which he is to bear in the vision) the key of the pit of the abyss (viz. of hell, which in the vision is a vast profundity opening by a pit or shaft upon the surface of the earth, imagined as shut down by a cover, and locked. This abyss is in the Apocalypse the habitation of the devil and his angels: cf. ver. 11, ch. 20:1, 3: see also ch. 11:7, 17:8), and he opened the pit of the abyss, and there went up smoke from the pit as smoke of a great furnace (see ref. Gen.), and the sun was darkened and the air (not, as Bengel, a hendiadys, “ aer, quatenus per solem illuminatur:” for the sun may be obscured, as by a cloud, without the air being darkened) by reason of the smoke of the pit. And out of the smoke (which therefore was their vehicle or envelope) came forth locusts into (towards, over, so as to spread over: εἰς gives more the sense of distribution than ἐπί would) the earth, and there was given to them power as the scorpions of the earth (τῆςγῆς , not as noting any distinction between land-scorpions and water-scorpions, as Ewald, but because the scorpions are natural and of the earth, whereas these locusts are infernal and not of nature) have power (viz. to sting, as below explained): and it was commanded them that they shall not hurt (for construction, see reff.) the grass of the earth, nor yet every (i. e. any) green thing, nor yet every (any) tree (the usual objects on which locusts prey: cf. Exodus 10:13, Exodus 10:15), but only (lit. except: the former sentence being regarded as if it had run, “ that they should hurt nothing,” — and then “ except” follows naturally) the men, the which (οἵτινες designates the class or kind: see reff.) have not the seal of God upon their foreheads (this, as before noticed, fixes this fifth trumpet to the time following the sealing in ch. 7. It denotes a plague which falls on the unbelieving inhabitants of the earth after the servants of God have been marked out among them, and of which the saints are not partakers. Either then it denotes something purely spiritual, some misery from which those are exempt who have peace with God,— which can hardly be, consistently with vv. 5, 6,— or it takes place in a state totally different from this present one, in which the wheat and tares are mingled together. One or other of these considerations will at once dismiss by far the greater number of interpretations. That of Elliott, the fact of Mahomet’ s mission being avowedly against corrupt Christianity as idolatry, does not in the remotest degree answer the conditions. In the very midst of this corrupt Christianity were at that time God’ s elect scattered up and down: and it is surely too much to say that every such person escaped scathless from the Turkish sword). And it was given to them (allotted to them by God as the limit of their appointed work and office: here the ἐδόθη expresses rather the limitation than the extension of the grant) that they should not kill them (the unsealed), but that they (the unsealed: the subject is changed) shall be (fut. aft. ἵνα , see above, ver. 4) tormented five months (the reason seems to be correct, which several Commentators have given for this number being chosen: viz., that five months is the ordinary time in the year during which locusts commit their ravages: so Calov., Vitr., Eich., Ewald, De W., Dü sterd., al. At all events we are thus in some measure delivered from the endless perplexities of capricious fancy in which the historical interpreters involve us): and their torment (i. e. that of the sufferers: against Dü sterd.) is as the torment of (arising from: notice the same construction in two senses) a scorpion, when it has smitten , as in the Latin ictus (Pliny, H. N. vi. 28), are used of the bite or sting of an animal) a man. And in those days men shall seek death (observe the transition of the style from the descriptive to the prophetic. For the first time the Apostle ceases to be the exponent of what he saw, and becomes the direct organ of the Spirit), and shall not (the οὐμή , with a subjunctive (its ordinary construction), is a more certain and definite negation than even the future itself. The latter expresses fact; whereas the former states that the fact cannot be otherwise: οὐμή with the future, as in text, seems to be a later and lax way of expressing the same) find it: and they shall vehemently desire (desire alone is not strong enough: ἐπιθυμέω , -ία , express the direction of the θῦμος (itself from θύω , ferveo— ἀπὸτῆςθύσεωςκαὶζέσεωςτῆςψυχῆς , Plato, Cratyl. 419 e) upon an object. As desire is too strong for θέλω , so is it too weak for ἐπιθυμέω ) to die , and death fleeth (the pres., of the habitual avoidance in those days) from them (the longing to die arises from the excruciating pain of the sting. Cf. Jeremiah 8:3. I cannot forbear noticing as we pass, the caprice of historical interpreters. On the command not to kill the men, &c., in ver. 5, Elliott says, “ i. e. not to annihilate them as a political Christian body.” If then the same rule of interpretation is to hold, the present verse must mean that the “ political Christian body” will be so sorely beset by these Mahometan locusts, that it will vehemently desire to be annihilated, and not find any way. For it surely cannot be allowed that the killing of men should be said of their annihilation as a political body in one verse, and their desiring to die in the next should be said of something totally different, and applicable to their individual misery. Is it in consequence ó f foreseeing this difficulty, that Mr. Elliott has, as in the case of many important details in other places, omitted all consideration of this verse?). 7. The Apostle now returns to the description of the locusts themselves. And the shapes to any pattern. See Winer, edn. 6, § 16. a. 2, α ) of the locusts (were) like horses made ready for war (this resemblance,— cf. ref. Joel, ἡὅρασιςαὐτῶνὡςὅρασιςἵππων ,— has been noticed by travellers. Winer, Realw. art. Heuschrecken, refers to Niebuhr, Beschreibung, 173. Ewald gives other references, and says, “ refert omnino animal equini corporis quæ dam similia, unde nostris etiam Heupferd dici notum est.” And especially does it hold good when the horse is equipped for war; the plates of the horse’ s armour being represented by the hard laminæ of the outer shell of the locust: see below, ver. 9), and on their heads as it were crowns like unto gold (it is not easy to say what this part of the description imports. Elliott tries to apply it to the turban: but granting some latitude to στέφανοι , the ὅμοιοιχρυσῷ will hardly bear this. The appearance of a turban, even when ornamented with gold, is hardly golden. I should understand the words, of the head actually ending in a crown-shaped fillet which resembled gold in its material, just as the wings of some of the beetle tribe might be said to blaze with gold and gems. So we have below εἶχονθώρακαςὡςθ . σιδηροῦς : the material not being metallic, but only quasi-metallic. Eichhorn and Heinr. understand these crowns of soldiers’ helmets: but this is quite arbitrary and gratuitous): and their faces (were) as the faces of men ; Ecclesiastes 7:28; Isaiah 4:1. But here there is no such necessity in the context: nay, it is much more natural to take ἀνθρώπων as the general term, their faces were like human faces, and then comes the limitation, not in the face, but in another particular), and they had hair as the hair of women (i. e. long and flowing, 1 Corinthians 11:14 f. De Wette quotes from Niebuhr an Arabic proverb in which the antlers of locusts are compared to the hair of girls. But perhaps we must regard the comparison as rather belonging to the supernatural portion of our description. Ewald would understand the hair on the legs, or on the bodies, of the locusts, to be meant, referring to י ֶ ל ֶ ק ס ָ מ ָ ר , rough locusts, Jer_51 (28):27, where the LXX have merely ἀκρίδων , and the E. V. “ rough caterpillars.” To infer, from this feature, licentiousness as a characteristic in the interpretation, is entirely beside the purpose): and their teeth were as the teeth of lions (so also of the locust in Joe 1:6, οἱὀδόντεςαὐτοῦὀδόντεςλέοντος . Ewald rightly designates as very doubtful a fancied resemblance to a lion in the under jaw. We may observe that this, as some other features in the description, is purely graphic, and does not in any way apply to the plague to be inflicted by these mystic locusts), and they had breastplates as iron breastplates (the plate which forms the thorax of the natural locust, was in their case as if of iron), and the sound of their wings (was) as a sound of chariots of many horses (by the two genitives the sound of both, the chariots and the horses, is included. The chariots are regarded as an appendage to the horses) as they run to war. And they have tails like to scorpions (i. e. to the tails of scorpions: the construction called the comparatio compendiaria: see reff.), and stings (viz. in their tails: this is the particular especially in which the comparison finds its aptitude): and in their tails is their power to hurt men five months (see above on ver. 5). They have as king over them the angel of the abyss ; his name is in Hebrew Abaddon , in both of which places it is joined with ש ׁ ְ א ֹ ל ,— Psalms 88:12; Job 28:22. In all these places the LXX express it by ἀπώλεια . So that this is the local name personified: or rather perhaps that abstract name personified, from which the local import itself is derived), and in the Greek he has for his name Apollyon (the name ἀπολλύων seems chosen from the LXX ἀπώλεια , see above. It is a question, who this angel of the abyss is. Perhaps, for accurate distinction’ s sake, we must not identify him with Satan himself,— cf. ch. 12:3, 9,— but must regard him as one of the principal of the bad angels). The one (first) woe hath passed: behold, there cometh (singular, the verb applying simply to that which is future, without reference as yet to its plurality) two woes after these things. There is an endless Babel of allegorical and historical interpretation of these locusts from the pit. The most that we can say of their import is, that they belong to a series of judgments on the ungodly which will immediately precede the second advent of our Lord: that the various and mysterious particulars of the vision will no doubt clear themselves up to the church of God, when the time of its fulfilment arrives: but that no such clearing up has yet taken place, a very few hours of research among histories of apocalyptic interpretation will serve to convince any reader who is not himself the servant of a preconceived system. 13-21. The sixth Trumpet. And the sixth angel blew his trumpet, and I heard a (it is doubtful, in the uncertain authenticity of τεσσάρων , whether any stress is to be laid on this μίαν or not. Vitringa gives it the emphasis,— “ quatuor hæ c cornua simul edidisse vocem, non diversam, sed unam eandemque:” and so Hengstb. The allegorical interpreters give it various imports— the agreement of the four Gospels (Zeger, Calov., al.),— that of the prayers of exiled Jews (Grot.), &c.) voice out of the [four] horns of the golden altar which was before God (the same altar as that previously mentioned in ch. 8:3 and 6:9, where see notes. From ch. 16:7 it would appear that the voice probably proceeded from the altar itself, represented as uttering the cry of vengeance for the blood shed on it; cf. ch. 6:9, with which cry of the martyred saints the whole series of retributive judgments is connected. The reading in the Codex Sinaiticus (see digest) is very remarkable, and may represent the original text. To suppose, as Elliott, that the cry from the altar is indicative of an altar having been the scene of some special sin on the part of the men of Roman Christendom, and so to apply it to the perversions of Christian rites in the Romish Church, is surely to confuse the whole imagery of the vision. For it is not of any altar in the abstract that we are reading, but of the golden altar which was before God, where the prayers of the saints had been offered by the angel, ch. 8:3, 5: and the voice is the result of those prayers, in accordance with which those judgments are inflicted. The horns again, representing the enceinte of the altar, not any special rites with which the horns of an altar were concerned, cannot be pressed into the service of the above-noticed interpretation, but simply belong to the propriety of that heard and seen. The voice proceeded from the surface of the altar, on which the prayers had been offered: and that surface was bounded by the κέρατα ) saying to the sixth angel, who had (construction, see reff. It is far better to take ὁἔχων as the appositional nom., so common in this book, than, as Tregelles, to understand it as vocative. It is natural that the word ἕκτῳ should be further specified by adding the class to which the angel belonged, ὁἔχωντὴνσάλπιγγα : but hardly, that he should be singled out by the address, “ Thou that hast the trumpet,” from the whole seven who had trumpets) the trumpet (τήν , as being that one now before us,— belonging to the present vision), Loose (it is too much to say that the angel himself is made the active minister of this loosing: we do not read καὶπορευθεὶςἔλυσεν following, but simply καὶἐλύθησαν . We must therefore believe that the command is given to him only in so far as he is the representative and herald of all that takes place under his trumpet-blowing) the four angels which are bound on (not “ in,” as E. V.: ἐπί with the dat. denotes close adherence or juxtaposition: so our Lord sat ἐπὶτῇπηγῇ John 4:6) the great river Euphrates (the whole imagery here has been a crux interpretum: as to who these angels are, and what is indicated by the locality here described. I will only venture to point out, amidst the surging tumult of controversy, one or two points of apparent refuge to which we must not betake ourselves. First, we must not yield to the temptation, so attractive at first sight, of identifying these four angels with the four angels standing on the four corners of the earth and holding in the four winds, in ch. 7:1 ff. For the mission of these angels is totally distinct from theirs, as the locality is also. There is not a syllable of winds here, nor any hurting of earth, sea, or trees. Secondly, the question need not perplex us here, whether these are good or bad angels: for it does not enter in any way into consideration. They simply appear, as in other parts of this book, as ministers of the divine purposes, and pass out of view as soon as mentioned. Here, it would almost seem as if the angelic persons were little more than personifications; for they are immediately resolved into the host of cavalry. Thirdly, that there is nothing in the text to prevent “ the great river Euphrates” from being meant literally. Dü sterd. maintains, that because the rest of the vision has a mystical meaning, therefore this local designation must have one also: and that if we are to take the Euphrates literally and the rest mystically, endless confusion would be introduced. But this is quite a mistake, as the slightest consideration will shew. It is a common feature of Scripture allegory to intermingle with its mystic language literal designations of time and place. Take for instance the allegory in Psalms 80:8, Psalms 80:11, “ Thou hast brought a vine out of Egypt.… she sent out her boughs unto the sea, and her branches unto the river:” where, though the vine and her boughs and branches are mystical, Egypt, the sea, and the river, are all literal. See some good remarks on this in Mr. Elliott’ s 1st vol., p. 331 ff., where the above example is cited among others). And the four angels were loosed, which had been prepared (the perf. part. in conjunction with an aor. verb is necessarily pluperf. in sense) for (in the ordinary sense of εἰς after ἑτοιμάζω and its kindred words— viz. “ in reference to,” “ in reservation for,” “ with a view to:” see ver. 7; 2 Timothy 2:21; and πρός , 1 Peter 3:15) the hour and day and month and year (viz. which had been appointed by God: the appointed hour occurring in the appointed day, and that in the appointed month, and that in the appointed year. The art., prefixed, and not repeated, seems to make this meaning imperative. Had the art. been repeated before each, the ideas of the appointed hour, day, month, and year would have been separated, not, as now, united: had there been no art., we might have understood that the four were to be added together to make up the time, though even thus the εἰς occurring once only would have made some difficulty. The natural way of expressing this latter meaning would be, εἰςὥρανκ . εἰςἡμέρανκ . εἰςμῆνακ . εἰςἐνιαυτόν . The only way in which it can be extracted from the words as they now stand, is by understanding the τήν to designate some previously well-known period, “ for the (well-known) hour and day and month and year.” But as no such notoriety of the period named can be recognized, we must I conceive adhere to the sense above given), that they should kill the third part of men (on τὸτρίτον , see above, ch. 8:7. It seems necessary, that in τῶνἀνθρώπων we are to include only the κατοικοῦντεςἐπὶτῆςγῆς of ch. 8:13, not any of the servants of God): and the number of the armies of the cavalry was twice myriads of myriads (i. e. 20,000 × 10,000: = 200,000,000, two hundred millions. The number seems to be founded on those in the reff.);— I heard the number of them. And after this manner (i. e. according to the following description) saw I the horses in my vision (Dü sterd. suggests, and it seems likely enough, that this express reference to sight is inserted on account of the ἤκουσα which preceded) and those who sat upon them, having (ἔχοντας most naturally refers to both horses and riders, not to riders only. The armour of both was uniform) breastplates fiery-red (the three epithets express the colours of the breastplates, and are to be separated, as belonging each to one portion of the host, and corresponding to the fire, smoke, and brimstone which proceeded out of the horses’ months below) and fuliginous (answering to καπνός below. ὑακίνθινος is used for any dark dull colour; Homer calls dark hair ὑακινθίνῳἄνθειὁμοίας , Od. ζ . 231, ψ . 158. The hyacinth of the Greeks is supposed to have been our dark blue iris: see Palm and Rost, sub voce) and sulphureous (light yellow: such a colour as would be produced by the settling fumes of brimstone): and the heads of the horses (τῶνἵππων takes up the horses again, both horses and riders having been treated of in the preceding sentence) (were) as heads of lions, and out of their months goeth forth fire and smoke and brimstone (i. e. separately, one of these out of the mouths of each division of the host. It is remarkable, that these divisions are three, though the angels were four). From (ἀπό indicates not directly the instrumentality, but the direction from which the result comes) these three plagues were killed the third part of men, by (ἐκ , the source out of which the result springs) the fire and the smoke and the brimstone which went forth (the participle agrees with the last noun only, but applies to all) out of their mouths. For the power of the horses is in their mouths (principally; seeing that by what proceeded from their mouths their mission, to slay the third part of men, was accomplished) and in their tails: for their tails were like serpents, having heads, and with (ἐν is the prep. of investiture, used of that in which clad or armed a man does any thing) them they hurt (i. e. inflict pain: viz. with the bites of the serpent heads in which they terminate. I cannot but mention, in no unfriendly spirit, but because, both being friends, Truth is the dearer, that which may be designated the culminating instance of incongruous interpretation in Mr. Elliott’ s historical exposition of these prophecies. These tails are, according to him, the horsetails, borne as symbols of authority by the Turkish Pachas. Well may Mr. Barker say (Friendly Strictures, p. 32), “ an interpretation so wild, if it refutes not itself, seems scarcely capable of refutation.” Happily, it does refute itself. For it is convicted, by altogether leaving out of view the power in the mouths, which is the principal feature in the original vision: by making no reference to the serpent-like character of these tails, but being wholly inconsistent with it: by distorting the canon of symmetrical interpretation in making the heads attached to the tails to mean that the tails are symbols of authority: and by being compelled to render ἀδικοῦσι “ they commit injustice,” a meaning which, in this reference, it surely will not bear. When it is said of fire- and smoke- and brimstone-breathing horses which kill the third part of men, that besides having power in their mouths they have it in their tails, which are like serpents, ending in heads, it would be a strange anti-climax to end, “ and with these they do injustice.” I will venture to say, that a more self-condemnatory interpretation was never broached than this of the horsetails of the Pachas). And the rest of men (this specification which follows clearly shews what sort of men are meant; viz. the ungodly alone) who were not killed in (the course of: the ἐν again of that in which, as its vehicle or investiture, their death would come, if it had come) these plagues, did not even (the force of οὐδέ , which on the whole seems likely to have been the original reading) repent of (ἐκ , so as to come out from: see reff.) the works of their hands (i. e. as the context here necessitates, not, the whole course of their lives, but the idols which their hands had made. This will at once appear on comparing our passage with Deuteronomy 4:28, λατρεύσετεἐκεῖθεοῖςἑτέροις , ἔργοιςχειρῶνἀνθρώπων , ξύλοιςκαὶλίθοις , οἳοὐκὄψονται , κ .τ .λ ., and Ps. 134:15, τὰεἴδωλατῶνἐθνῶνἀργύριονκ . χρυσίον , ἔργαχειρῶνἀνθρώπων · στόμαἔχουσικαὶοὐλαλήλουσιν , κ .τ .λ . See also Acts 7:41) that they should not (in order not to: the final purpose, explaining the οὐμετεν . ἐκ preceding: cf. Winer, edn. 6, § 53. 6) worship (for ἵνα with indic. fut. see above, ch. 3:9 reff.) devils (see reff, 1 Cor.; 1 Tim., and notes there. The objects of worship of the heathen, and of semi-heathen Christians, are in fact devils, by whatever name they may be called), and images of gold (lit. the images which are, &c. But this we idiomatically express as above) and of silver and of brass and of stone and of wood, which can neither see nor hear nor walk: and they did not repent of their murders nor of their witchcrafts (lit. their drugs: concrete in sense of abstract, as in all the places in the canonical LXX in reff. On the sense, see note on Galatians 5:20) nor of their fornication (Bengel remarks on πορνείας being in the sing., whereas the rest are plural, “ Alia scelera ab hominibus per intervalla patrantur: una perpetua πορνεία est apud eos qui munditie cordis carent.” But perhaps this is too refined) nor of their thefts. The character of these sins points out very plainly who are the sufferers by this sixth, or second woe trumpet, and the survivors who do not repent. We are taught by St. Paul that the heathen are without excuse for degrading the majesty of God into an image made like unto corruptible things, and for degenerating into gross immoralities in spite of God’ s testimony given through the natural conscience. And even thus will the heathen world continue in the main until the second advent of our Lord, of which these judgments are to be the immediate precursors. Nor will these terrible inflictions themselves bring those to repentance, who shall ultimately reject the Gospel which shall be preached among all nations. Whether, or how far, those Christians who have fallen back into these sins of the heathen, are here included, is a question not easy to decide. That they are not formally in the Apostle’ s view, seems clear. We are not yet dealing with the apostasy and fornication within the church herself. But that they, having become as the κατοικοῦντεςἐπὶτῆςγῆς , even so far as to inherit their character of persecutors of the saints, may by the very nature of the case, be individually included in the suffering of these plagues,— just as we believe and trust that many individually belonging to Babylon may be found among God’ s elect,— it is of course impossible to deny. Ch. 10:1-11:14. Episodical and anticipatory. As after the sixth seal, so here after the sixth trumpet, we have a passage interposed, containing two episodes, completing that which has been already detailed, and introducing the final member of the current series. But it is not so easy here as there, to ascertain the relevance and force of the episodes. Their subjects here seem further off: their action more complicated. In order to appreciate them, it will be necessary to lay down clearly the point at which we have arrived, and to observe what is at that point required. The last vision witnessed the destruction of a third part of the ungodly by the horsemen from the East, and left the remainder in a state of impenitent idolatry and sin. Manifestly then the prayers of the saints are not yet answered, however near the time may be for that answer. If then this Episode contains some assurance of the approach of that answer in its completeness, it will be what we might expect at this point in the series of visions. At the same time, looking onwards to the rest of the book, we see, that as out of the more general series of visions at the opening of the seals, affecting both the church and the world, there sprung a new and more particular series of the trumpets, having reference to one incident in the former vision, and affecting especially the “ inhabiters of the earth,” so if now the gaze of prophecy once more turns to the church and her fortunes, and the Apostle receives a new commission to utter a second series of prophecies, mainly on that subject, it will also be no more than what we might fairly look for. Again: if the episodical vision in its character and hue partakes of the complexion of the whole series of trumpet-visions, and, as regards the church, carries a tinge of persecution, and of the still crying prayer for vengeance, not yet fully answered,— while at the same time it contains expressions and allusions which can only be explained by reference onward to the visions yet to come; this complex character is just that which would suit the point of transition at which we are now standing, when the series of visions immediately dependent on one feature in the opening of the seals is just at its end, and a new one evolving the other great subject of that general series is about to begin. Now each one of these particulars is found as described above. For 1) the angel of ch. 10 declares, with reference to the great vengeance-burden of the whole series of the trumpet-visions, respecting which the souls of the martyrs had been commanded ἵναἀναπαύσωνταιἔτιχρόνονμικρόν , ch. 6:11,— that χρόνοςοὐκέτιἔσται , but that in the days of the seventh angel, when he is about to blow, the whole mystery of prophecy would be fulfilled. 2) The same angel gives to the Seer the open little book, with a distinct announcement that he is to begin a new series of prophecies, and that series, by what immediately follows, ch. 11:1 ff., evidently relating to the church of God in an especial manner. 3) The whole complexion of the episodical vision of the two witnesses, ch. 11:3 ff., is tinged with the hue which has pervaded the series of trumpet-visions, from their source in ch. 6:9-11, viz. that of vengeance for the sufferings of the saints: while at the same time allusions occur in it which are at present inexplicable, but will receive light hereafter, when the new series of visions is unfolded. Such are the allusions to τὸθηρίοντὸἀναβαῖνονἐκτῆςἀβύσσου , ch. 11:7, and to ἡπόλιςἡμεγάλη , ib. ver. 8. With these preliminary considerations, we may, I think, approach these episodical visions with less uncertainty. 1-11. The vision of the little book. 1-4. Introductory. And I saw another strong angel (ἄλλον , perhaps in allusion to the many which have been mentioned: but seeing that the epithet ἰσχυρόν occurs in the mention of the angel who cried out in reference to the sealed book, ch. 5:2, and that the present angel’ s errand also regards a book, we can hardly help taking ἄλλον with both substantive and adjective, and referring it to that first ἄγγελοςἰσχυρός in ch. 5:2. And this consideration may serve to introduce the assertion, to me hardly admitting of a doubt, that this angel is not, and cannot be, our Lord himself. Such a supposition would, it seems to me, entirely break through the consistency of apocalyptic analogy. Throughout the book, as before observed, on ch. 8:3, angels are the ministers of the divine purposes, and the carriers out of the apocalyptic course of procedure, but are every where distinct from the divine Persons themselves. In order to this their ministry, they are invested with such symbols and such delegated attributes as beseem in each case the particular object in view: but no apparent fitness of such symbolical investiture to the divine character should induce us to break through the distinction, and introduce indistinctness and confusion into the book. When St. John means to indicate the Son of God, he indicates Him plainly: none more so: when these plain indications are absent, and I find the name ἄγγελος used, I must take leave to regard the agent as distinct from Him,— however clothed, for the purposes of the particular vision, with His delegated power and attributes) descending out of heaven (the place of the Seer yet continues in heaven: see below, vv. 8, 9), clothed with a cloud (as a messenger of divine judgment: see ch. 1:7), and the rainbow upon his head (ἡ the well-known, ordinary, rainbow: indicating, agreeably with its first origin, God’ s covenant of mercy. See note on ch. 4:3. On the accus. after ἐπί at the first mention of superposition, see note, ch. 4:2), and his face as the sun (indicating the divine glory with which he was invested: see ch. 1:16, 18:1: and compare Luke 9:26), and his feet as pillars of fire (see ch. 1:15. The symbols with which this angel is accompanied, as those which surrounded the throne of God in ch. 4:2 ff., betoken judgment tempered with mercy, the character of his ministration, which, at the same time that it proclaims the near approach of the completion of God’ s judgments, furnishes to the Seer the book of his subsequent prophecy, the following out of God’ s purposes of mercy), and having in his hand (his left hand, by what follows, ver. 5) a little book (the diminutive has been taken by some to point to the subsequent eating of the book by the Apostle: so Eichhorn: but Dü sterd. remarks that if so, even the βιβλαρίδιον would be too large:— by others, to the size relatively to the angel: so Bengel. But the most natural reason for its use is to be found by comparison with the βιβλίον of ch. 5 ff. That was the great sealed roll of God’ s purposes: this (see below) but one portion of those purposes, which was to be made the Seer’ s own for his future prophesyings. The form βιβλαρίδιον is not found in Greek writers: the diminutive is βιβλιδαρίον , used by Aristoph. frag. (in Julius Pollux, vii. 210. See also Bibl. p. 142). On the signification, &c., of this little book or roll, see below ver. 8, notes) open. And he placed his right foot on the sea, and his left on the earth, and cried with a loud voice as a lion roareth (the whole imagery represents the glory and majesty of Him whose messenger this angel is: and is to be taken literally in the vision, the earth meaning the earth; the sea, the sea: and the description of the loudness of the voice being simply thus descriptive). And when he cried, the seven thunders spoke their (no further stress on ἑαυτῶν , than as it belongs to the peculiar character of the utterances of these thunders. They were to be concealed, remaining unwritten: and this fact, I conceive, reflects back a tinge on the possessive genitive, making it so far emphatic: the voices were, and remained, ἑαυτῶν : not shared by being perpetuated) voices. And when the seven thunders spoke, I was about to write (in obedience to the command in ch. 1:19): and (not, “ but:” as I was about to write, a new circumstance arose) I heard a voice out of heaven (from which it does not follow that the Seer is on earth, any more than in ver.1) saying, Seal up the things which the seven thunders spoke, and do not write them (cf. the contrary command, ch. 22:10. Many speculations have been raised as to the purport of the utterances of the seven thunders, and the reason for concealing them. From the very nature of the case, these must be utterly in vain. The wisdom of Him who signified this Revelation to His servant John, has not seen fit to reveal these things to us. But the very nature of the case also convicts some of these speculations of error. The thunders, e. g., did not speak “ humanum excedentia captum” as Ewald, seeing that not only did St. John understand their utterances, but he was about to write them down for others to read, as intelligible to them also. Again, they were not any utterances of mere human device. They were spoken by command of the great angel, as ver. 3 necessarily implies: they in common with the seals, trumpets, and vials, form part of the divinely-arranged machinery of the Apocalypse. It is matter of surprise and grief therefore, when we find historical interpreters of our day explaining them of the papal anathemas of the time of the Reformation. Elliott, vol. ii. p. 100 ff. It seems to me that no interpretation could be more unfortunate— none more thoroughly condemnatory of the system which is compelled to have recourse to it. For, merely to insist upon one point,— if it were so, then the Apostle sealed the utterances in vain, for all know what those thunders have uttered: then the command should have run σφράγισον .… ἕωςκαιροῦσυντελείας , as in Daniel 12:4, instead of an absolute command as here. Thus much we may infer; from the very character of thunder,— that the utterances were of fearful import: from the place which they hold, that they related to the church. from the command to conceal them, first, encouragement, that God in His tender mercy to His own does not reveal all His terrors: secondly, godly fear, seeing that the arrows of His quiver are not exhausted, but besides things expressly foretold, there are more behind not revealed to us). 5-7. The oath of the strong angel, that the time of fulfilment of all prophecy was close at hand. In this portion of the vision, the reminiscences of Dan 12:7 are very frequent:— καὶἤκουσατοῦἀνδρὸςτοῦἐνδεδυμένουτὰβαδδίν , ὃςἦνἐπάνωτοῦὕδατοςτοῦποταμοῦ , καὶὕψωσετὴνδεξιὰναὐτοῦκαὶτὴνἀριστερὰναὐτοῦεἰςτὸνοὐρανόν , καὶὤμοσενἐντῷζῶντιεἰςτὸναἰῶνα , ὅτιεἰςκαιρὸνκαιρῶνκαὶἥμισυκαιροῦ , ἐντῷσυντελεσθῆναιδιασκορπισμὸνγνώσονταιπάνταταῦτα . And the angel whom I saw standing upon the sea and upon the earth, lifted his right hand (not both hands, as in Daniel above, seeing that the little book lay open on his left. On the practice of lifting the hand in swearing, cf. ref. and Genesis 14:22 (Exodus 6:8 and Numbers 14:30, marg. and LXX)) towards heaven (as God’ s dwelling-place, Isaiah 57:15) and sware by (construction, see reff.) Him that liveth to the ages of the ages (cf. Dan. above), who created the heaven and the things in it, and the earth and the things in it, and the sea and the things in it (this full and formal designation of God as Creator of all is given, because the subject of the angel’ s oath is, the mystery of God, which necessarily rests in His power alone who made all things. We may observe, that the fact as well as the form of this oath is against the supposition, that this strong angel is the Lord Himself. Considering St. John’ s own declarations respecting the Son of God, it is utterly inconceivable that he should have related as spoken by Him an oath couched in these terms), that time (see below) should no longer be (i. e. should no more intervene: in allusion to the answer given to the cry of the souls of the martyrs, ch. 6:11, καὶἐῤῥέθηαὐτοῖςἵναἀναπαύσωνταιἔτιχρόνονμικρόν . This whole series of trumpet-judgments has been an answer to the prayers of the saints, and now the vengeance is about to receive its entire fulfilment: χρόνοςοὐκέτιἔσται : the appointed delay is at an end. That this is the meaning is shewn by the ἀλλ ʼ ἐντ . ἡμ . which follows. Several erroneous views have been taken of this saying: e. g., 1) that of “ mutabilis sæ cularium temporum varietas in novissima tuba cessabit,” al., and apparently the E. V. — that it imports the ending of the state of time, and the beginning of eternity: 2) the chronological one of Bengel, who allots a definite length, viz. 11111/9 years (?) to a chronus, and then interprets, “ there shall not elapse a chronus:” bringing the end, on his successive-historical system, to the year 1836, which is self-refuted: 3) the view of Vitringa and Hengstenb., which grounds an error on the right understanding of these words themselves,— “ moram nullam temporis esse intercessuram inter clangorem septimæ tubæ et oraculorum propheticorum implementum:” for the assertion of ver. 7, which is the carrying out of this denial, expressly identifies the days of the voice of the seventh angel, when he is about to sound, with the immediate fulfilment of all prophecy): but (ἀλλά is not = εἰμή , but bears its proper meaning of strong contrast) in the days of the voice of the seventh angel (i. e. the days indicated, in the fulfilment of the vision, by the sounding of the seventh angel’ s trumpet. De W. well observes, that there is in the diction of this clause a mingling of the fulfilment with the prophecy), when he is about to blow his trumpet (these words ὅτανμέλλῃ are used, as in reff., in their strictest propriety. For when the seventh angel does sound, the completed time of the fulfilment is simultaneous with his blowing: cf. ch. 11:18: so that it is properly said that the fulfilment comes in the days when he is about to blow. Elliott’ s version, “ at what time soever he may have to sound,” can hardly be the rendering of ὅτανμέλλῃσαλπίζειν . For 1) ὅταν will not in the LXX and N. T. bear this emphatic uncertainty, but is simply “ when,” in contingent clauses: and 2) μέλλῃ , in a sentence spoken strictly of time, must be kept to its temporal signification. Of course, the E. V., “ when he shall begin to sound,” is inadmissible), then (this καί in apodosi is in fact the token of a mixed construction: which resolved would be ἀλλ ʼ ὅτιἥξουσιναἱἡμέραικ .τ .λ ., καὶκ .τ .λ . So also in reff. See Winer, edn. 6, § 53. 3, f) the mystery of God (this expression will be best understood by ref. Rom., connected as it is here with the verb εὐηγγέλισεν (see below). It is the mystery of the kingdom, as unfolded in the course of the Gospel dispensation, as is clearly shewn by the thanksgiving after the blowing of the seventh trumpet in ch. 11:15 ff.) is fulfilled (lit., was fulfilled,— the speaker looking back, in prophetic anticipation, on the days spoken of, from a point when they should have become a thing past), as He evangelized (it is impossible to give the force of εὐηγγέλισεν with the accus. by a periphrasis, without losing its force. It expresses that God informed them of the glad tidings: it being left to be understood by their office of προφήτης , that they published the εὐαγγέλιον . See Galatians 3:8, where the sense, though not the construction, is much the same) His servants the prophets. 8-11. The delivery of the little book to John, and announcement of a further work of prophecy to be carried on by him. And the voice which I heard out of heaven, (I) again (heard) talking with me and saying (the sentence is a curious instance of mixed construction. One of its simple forms would be κ . ἡφωνὴἣνἤκ . ἐκτ . οὐρ . πάλινἐλάλειμετ ʼ ἐμοῦλέγονσα : the other, κ . τὴνφωνὴνἤκουσαἐκτ . οὐρ . πάλ . λαλοῦσανμετ ʼ ἐμοῦκ . λἐγουσαν . The former member of the first of these, and the latter member of the second, are united in the text), Go take the book which lieth open in the hand of the angel which standeth upon the sea and upon the earth. And I went away (from my former place as a spectator in heaven: from which, however, the Seer docs not seem wholly to remove, cf. ch. 11:16; 19:1 ff., although his principal spot of observation is henceforth the earth: cf. ch. 11:1, 14:1, 17:3, &c.) to the angel telling him to give me the little book. And he saith to me, Take and eat it up (cf. Ezekiel 3:1 ff.; Jeremiah 15:16; Psalms 40:9): and it shall embitter thy belly, but in thy mouth shall be sweet as honey. And I took the book out of the hand of the angel and ate it up: and it was in my mouth as honey, sweet; and when I had eaten it up, my belly was embittered (there is the difference between Ezekiel’ s roll and this, that, in the prophet’ s case, only the sweetness in the mouth is mentioned. The Angel, dwelling most on the most important thing, the working of the contents of the book, puts the bitterness first: the Evangelist, in relating what happened, follows the order of time. The text itself will guard us against some misinterpretations of this bitterness and sweetness. It is plain that we must understand these to belong, not to differing characters of different portions of the contents of the book (as Heinr., Ewald), but to different sensations of the Evangelist in different parts of his body respecting one and the same content of the book. Nor again must we invert the order, imagining (as Herder and Rinck) that the first bitterness leads afterwards to sweetness and joy, or (as Bede, Aretius, al.) that the bitterness in the belly indicates the reception by the Evangelist, but the sweetness in the mouth, the declaration to others; proceeding on a misunderstanding of ver. 11. For further particulars, see below). And they say to me, Thou must (i. e. it is God’ s will that thou shouldest: a command is laid upon thee so to do) again prophesy (as thou hast done before in writing the former part of the ἀποκάλυψις : see in the interpretation below) concerning (not, as E.V. “ before:” nor can ἐπί with a dat. bear such a meaning. The substantives which follow the preposition are the objects of the προφητεῦσαι . So in reff. See Winer, edn. 6, § 48, c. c) peoples and nations and languages and many kings . I have postponed till this point the question, what we are to understand by the βιβλαρίδιον , and the Seer’ s concern with it. And I will at once say, before discussing the various differing interpretations, that I conceive the simple acceptation of the description and symbolism here can lead but to one conclusion; viz. that it represents the μυστήριοντοῦθεοῦ above spoken of, the subject of the remainder of the apocalyptic prophecies. So far, many of the principal Commentators are at one. Indeed it is difficult to conceive how any other interpretation can have been thought of, except as made necessary by some previous self-committal of the Expositor regarding the sealed book of ch. 5, or by the exigencies of some historical system. But within the limits of this agreed meaning, there are many different views as to the extent of the reference of the “ little book” to that which follows, and as to its relation to the seven-sealed book of ch. 5. As regards these points, we may remark, 1) that the contents of the “ little book” cannot well be confined to ch. 11:1-13, or we should not have had so solemn an inauguration of it, nor so wide-reaching an announcement of the duty of the Apostle consequent on the receipt of it: 2) that the oath of the Angel must necessarily be connected with his bearing of the open book on his hand, and if so, makes it necessary to infer that the contents of the book are identical with the mystery, respecting which he swears: 3) that the episode which follows, containing the first work of the Apostle under this his new prophetic commission, inchoates an entirely new matter— the things which befall the Church of God and the holy city, which new character of incidents continues to prevail until the very end of the book: 4) that the relation of this “ little book” to the sealed book of ch. 5 can hardly be doubtful to the readers of this Commentary, seeing that we have maintained that book to be the sum of the divine purposes, which is not opened at all within the limits of the apocalyptic vision, but only prepared to be opened by the removal of its seven seals. That this is not that complete record of the divine purposes, nor, technically speaking, any portion of it, must be evident to us. For it forms a small detached roll or volume, lying open on the angel’ s hand: it is destined for the especial individual behoof of the Seer, into whom it passes, and becomes assimilated with himself, to be given forth as he should be directed to utter it. 5) That it contained more than we possess in the remaining portion of this book, is probable. St. John doubtless knew more than he has told us. Previously to this, he knew what the seven thunders uttered: and subsequently to this, we can hardly imagine that he was ignorant of the name of the wild beast, whose number he has given us. It remains that we say something on the circumstances accompanying the Apostle’ s reception of the mysterious book. Its sweetness, when he tasted it, allusive as it is to the same circumstance in Ezekiel’ s eating the roll which was all lamentation, mourning, and woe, doubtless represents present satisfaction at being informed of, and admitted to know, a portion of God’ s holy will: of those words of which the Psalmist said, Psalms 119:103, “ How sweet are thy words unto my taste, yea sweeter than honey unto my mouth!” But when the roll came to be not only tasted, but digested,— the nature of its contents felt within the man,— bitterness took the place of sweetness: the persecutions, the apostasies, the judgments, of the church and people of the Lord, saddened the spirit of the Seer, and dashed his joy at the first reception of the mystery of God. Ch. 11:1-14. The measurement of the temple of God. The two witnesses: their testimony, death, resurrection, and assumption into heaven: the earthquake, and its consequences. This passage may well be called, even more than that previous one, ch. 10:1 ff., the crux interpretum; as it is undoubtedly one of the most difficult in the whole Apocalypse. Referring to the histories of apocalyptic exegesis for an account of the various interpretations, I will, as I have done in similar cases, endeavour to lay down a few landmarks, which may serve for guidance at least to avoid inconsistency, if we cannot do more. And I will remark, 1) that we are not bound to the hard “ wooden” literal sense so insisted on in our day by some of the modern German Expositors. I would strongly recommend any one who takes that view, who will have Jerusalem = nothing but Jerusalem, and confine the two witnesses to two persons bodily appearing there, to read through the very unsatisfactory and shuffling comment of Dü sterdieck here: the result of which is, that finding, as he of course does, many discrepancies between this and our Lord’ s prophecy of the same destruction of Jerusalem, he is driven to the refuge that while our Lord describes matters of fact, St. John idealizes the catastrophe, setting it forth not as it really took place, but according to its inner connexion with the final accomplishment of the mystery of God, and correspondently to the hope which God’ s Old Testament people possessed as contrasted with the heathen power of this world, which abides in “ Babylon.” But really, if we have come thus far by fighting for the literal interpretation, why not a little further? Or rather why so far? If “ Babylon” is the abode of the world, why not “ Jerusalem” of the church? If our interpreter, maintaining the literal sense, is allowed so far to “ idealize,” as to exempt the temple of God itself (ver. 1) from a destruction which we know overtook it, and nine-tenths of the city (ver. 13) from an overthrow which destroyed it all, surely there is an end to the meaning of words. If Jerusalem here is simply Jerusalem, and the prophecy regards her overthrow by the Romans, and especially if this passage is to be made such use of as to set aside the testimony of Irenæ us as to the date of the Apocalypse by the stronger testimony of the Apocalypse itself (so Dü sterd. from Lü cke), then must every particular be shewn to tally with known history; or if this cannot be done, at least it must be shewn that none contradicts it. If this cannot be done, then we may fairly infer that the prophecy has no such reference, or only remotely, here and there, and not as its principal subject. 2) Into whatever difficulty we may be led by the remark, it is no less true, that the πόλιςἡἁγία of ver. 2 cannot be the same as the πόλιςἡμεγάλη of ver. 8. This has been felt by the literal interpreters, and they have devised ingenious reasons why the holy city should afterwards be called the great city: so De Wette, “ he named Jerusalem the great city, because he can no more call her holy after her desecration” (but he need not therefore call her great, by which epithet she is never called)— Dü sterd., “ because it is impossible in one breath to call a city ‘ holy,’ and ‘ Sodom and Egypt’  ” (most true: then must we not look for some other city than one which this very prophecy has called holy?). So far Joachim says well, “ Veruntamen quod ait in plateis civitatis magnæ , non satis videtur facere pro eodem intellectu (the literal). Nunquam enim magna civitas forte legitur, sed magis Nineve et Babylon magnæ civitates dictæ sunt: nimirum quia multi sunt vocati, pauci vero electi.” His other reason see in the interpretation below. 3) We are compelled, if I am not mistaken, to carry the above considerations somewhat further, by the very conditions of the prophecy itself. For it is manifestly and undeniably of an anticipatory character. It is not, and cannot be, complete in itself. The words of ver. 7, τὸθηρίοντὸἀναβαῖνονἐκτῆςἀβύσσου , bear no meaning where they stand, but require, in order to be understood at all, to be carried on into the succeeding visions of ch. 13 ff. And if into those visions, then into a period when this wild-beast has received power from the dragon,— when, as in ch. 13:7, he makes war with the saints and conquers them, and all on earth except the elect are worshipping him. 4) Let us observe the result as affecting our interpretation. We are necessarily carried on by the very terms of our present compendious prophecy, into the midst of another prophecy, far more detailed and full of persons and incidents: of one which has its μεγάληπόλις , its ναὸςτοῦθεοῦ , its προσκυνοῦντεςἐναὐτῷ , its μαρτυρίαἸησοῦ , and other coincident particulars. What inference does a sound principle of interpretation force upon us? What, if not this— that our present compendious prophecy, as in the particular of the beast that comes out of the abyss, so in its other features, must be understood as giving in summary, and introducing, that larger one? and consequently, that its terms are to be understood by those of that larger one, not servilely and literally where they stand? And observe, this is deduced from the very necessity of the case itself, as shewn in ver. 7, not from any system throwing its attraction forward and biassing our views. We cannot understand this prophecy at all, except in the light of those that follow: for it introduces by anticipation their dramatis personæ . 5) If I mistake not, we thus gain much light on the difficulties of this prophecy. If it is a compendium of the more detailed prophecies which follow, opening the great series regarding God’ s church, and reaching forward to the time of the seventh trumpet, then its separate parts, so hard to assign on any other view, at once fall into their places. Then, e. g. we at once know what is meant by the temple and its worshippers, viz. that these expressions are identical in reference with those others in the subsequent prophecy which point out an elect remnant, a Goshen in Egypt, a Zoar from Sodom, a number who do not worship the wild-beast and his image, who are not defiled with women, &c. And so of the rest. 6) It will then be on this principle that I shall attempt the exposition of this difficult prophecy. Regarding it as a summary of the more detailed one which follows, I shall endeavour to make the two cast light on one another: searching for the meaning of the symbols here used in their fuller explanation there, and gaining perhaps some further insight into meanings there from expressions occurring here. 1, 2. Command to measure the temple, but not the outer court, which is given to the Gentiles. And there was given to me (by whom, is not said, but it is left indefinite, as at ch. 6:11, 8:2) a reed like to a staff (see reff.) saying (λέγων is out of the construction, and indefinite: as in ch. 4:1. , in Catena, imagines that it is the reed that speaks, and builds an allegorical interpretation on the idea: πῶςγὰρὁκάλαμοςἄψυχοςὢνἔλεγενἜγειραικ .τ .λ .; ἐκτούτουοὖνδείκνυται , ἀγγελικῇσυνέσειμετρεῖσαιτὸνναὸντοῦθεοῦ . And so in our own time, remarkably enough, Bp. Wordsworth: “ The Reed speaks: it is inspired: the Spirit is in it: it is the Word of God. And it measures the Church: that is, the Canon of Scripture is the rule of faith.” (Thus in his Lectures on the Apocalypse. In his notes ad loc., he treats λέγων as absolute.)), Arise (ἔγειρε does not necessarily imply that the Apostle was kneeling before: see reff.) and measure the temple of God and the altar (apparently, the altar of incense: as that alone stood in the ναός . But perhaps we must not be too minute in particularizing), and them that worship in it (see the previous remarks on this prophecy. The measuring here is evidently for the purpose of taking account of, understanding the bearing and dimensions of, that which is to be measured; see ch. 21:15, where the heavenly Jerusalem is measured by the angel. But here two questions arise: 1) What is that which is measured? and 2) when does the measuring take place? 1) I have no doubt that, as above hinted, the ναὸςτ . θεοῦ and its θυσιαστήριον are to be here taken symbolically, as the other principal features of the prophecy: and to one believing this, there can be but little further doubt as to what meaning he shall assign to the terms. Thus understood, they can only bear one meaning: viz., that of the Church of the elect servants of God, every where in this book symbolized by Jews in deed and truth. The society of these, as a whole, is the ναός , agreeably to Scripture symbolism elsewhere, e. g. 1 Corinthians 3:16, 1 Corinthians 3:17, and is symbolized by the inner or holy place of the Jerusalem temple, in and among which they as true Israelites and priests unto God, have a right to worship and minister. These are they who, properly speaking, alone are measured: estimated again and again in this book by tale and number— partakers in the first resurrection,— the Church of the first-born. Then as to our question 2), it is one which, so far as I know, has not engaged the attention of expositors. When a command is elsewhere in this book given to the Seer, we may observe that his fulfilment of it is commonly indicated. He is commanded to write, and the writing before us proves his obedience. He is ordered to take the little book, καὶἀπῆλθονκ .τ .λ . But of the fulfilment by him of this command, ἔγειρεκαὶμέτρησον , no hint appears to be given. The voice goes on continuously, until it melts imperceptibly into the narrative of the vision. After this, we hear no more of the measuring, till another and more glorious building is measured in ch. 21. This being so, either 1) which is inconceivable, the measurement does not take place at all, or, 2) which is hardly probable, it takes place and no result is communicated to us, or 3) the result of it is found in the subsequent prophecies: in the minute and careful distinctions between the servants of God and those who receive the mark of the wild-beast— in all those indications which point out to us the length and breadth and depth and height, both of faith, and of unfaithfulness). And the court which is outside the temple (i. e. apparently, every thing except the ναός itself: not merely the outer court or court of the Gentiles. That only the ναός itself, in the strictest sense, is to be measured, is significant for the meaning above maintained) cast out , and measure not it (αὐτήν has a slight emphasis: otherwise it need not have been expressed), because it was given (viz. at the time when the state of things subsisting in the vision came in: or, in God’ s apportionment) to the Gentiles (if the ναός and the προσκυνοῦντες represent the elect church of the first-born, the ἔθνη will correspond to those who are outside this sacred enclosure: those over whom eventually the millennial reign of ch. 20 shall be exercised: those from among whom shall spring the enmity against God’ s church, but among whom also shall be many who shall fear, and give God glory, cf. ver. 13. Of these is formed the outward seeming church, mixed up with the world; in them, though not in each case commensurate with them, is Babylon, is the reign of the wild-beast, the agency of the false prophet: they are the κατοικοῦντεςτὴνγῆν or ἐπὶτῆςγῆς , the material on which judgment and mercy are severally exercised in the rest of this book (cf. especially ver. 18), as contrasted with God’ s own people, gathered and to be gathered out from among them), and they shall tread down (i. e. trample as conquerors, the outer church being in subjection to them: see reff. The other meaning, shall tread, merely, is of course included; but must not be made the prevalent one. The period named shall be one during which ἡβασιλείατῶνοὐρανῶνβιάζεται , καὶβιασταὶἁρπάζουσιναὐτήν , Matthew 11:12) the holy city (Jerusalem, in the literal sense of the prophecy: the whole temple except the ναός itself being counted with the city outside) forty and two months (this period occurs in three forms in this book: 1) as forty-two months; see ch. 13:5: 2) as 1260 days = 42 months × 30, see ver. 3, ch. 12:6: 3) as time, times, and half a time = 3½ years, 3 × 360 + 180 = 1260 days, see ch.12:14. This latter designation is also found in Daniel 7:25, Daniel 12:7. With respect to these periods, I may say that, equal as they certainly seem to be, we have no right to suppose them, in any two given Cases, to be identical, unless the context requires such a supposition. For instance, in these two verses, 2 and 3, there is strong temptation to regard the two equal periods as coincident and identical: but it is plain that such a view is not required by the context; the prophecy contains no note of such coincidence, but may be very simply read without it, on the view that the two periods are equal in duration, but independent of one another: and the rather, that this prophecy, as has been already shewn, is of a compendious character, hereafter to be stated at large. I will further remark, and the reader will find this abundantly borne out by research into histories of apocalyptic exegesis, that no solution at all approaching to a satisfactory one has ever yet been given of any one of these periods. This being so, my principle is to regard them as being still among the things unknown to the Church, and awaiting their elucidation by the event. It is our duty to feel our way by all the indications which Scripture furnishes, and by the light which history, in its main and obvious salient events, has thrown on Scripture: and, when those fail us, to be content to confess our ignorance. An apocalyptic commentary which explains every thing, is self-convicted of error). 3-13. The two witnesses: their testimony, death, resurrection, ascension: consequences on the beholders. The remarks just made are here especially applicable. No solution has ever been given of this portion of the prophecy. Either the two witnesses are literal,— two individual men,— or they are symbolical,— two individuals taken as the concentration of principles and characteristics, and this either in themselves, or as representing men who embodied those principles and characteristics. In the following notes I shall point out how far one, how far another of these views, is favoured by the text, and leave the reader to judge. And I will give to my two witnesses and Beza (“ sanctam civitatem,” which is decidedly wrong, seeing it is given to the Gentiles)), and they shall prophesy (προφητεύσουσιν here has generally been taken to mean, shall preach repentance. It may be so: but in ch. 10:11, the verb is used in its later and stricter sense of foretelling events, as in 1 Peter 1:10; Jude 1:14. If their testimony consisted in denouncing judgment, the other would necessarily be combined with it) a thousand two hundred and sixty days (Dü sterd. remarks that the fact of a period of the same length as the forty-two months being now expressed in days, implies that they will prophesy day by day throughout it. The reader will of course see, that the two questions, of these days being days or years, and of the individuality or the symbolical character of the witnesses, are mutually connected together. He will also bear in mind that it is a pure assumption that the two periods, the forty-two months and the 1260 days, coincide over the same space of time. The duration of time is that during which the power of Elijah’ s prophecy shut up the heaven: viz. three years and six months: see Luke 4:25, and more on ver. 6 below) clothed in sackcloth (in token of need of repentance and of approaching judgment: see Isaiah 22:12; Jeremiah 4:8, Jeremiah 4:6:26; Jonah 3:5. Certainly this portion of the prophetic description strongly favours the individual interpretation. For first, it is hard to conceive how whole bodies of men and churches could be thus described: and secondly, the principal symbolical interpreters have left out, or passed very slightly, this important particular. One does not see how bodies of men who lived like other men (their being the victims of persecution is another matter), can be said to have prophesied clothed in sackcloth. It is to be observed that such was the garment of Elijah; see 2 Kings 1:8, and cf. Matthew 3:4). These are the two olive trees and the two candlesticks which stand before the Lord of the earth (the whole from ref. Zech., to which the art. αἱ refers. But it is to be observed that while in Zech. we have the two ἐλαῖαι , and spoken of in the same terms as here, there is but one λυχνία , with its seven lights, which very seven lights, as there interpreted in ver. 10, are referred to in our ch. 4:5, 5:6. So that it is somewhat difficult to say, whence αἱδύολυχνίαι has come. The most probable view is that St. John has taken up and amplified the prophetic symbolism of Zechariah, carrying it on by the well-known figure of lights, as representing God’ s testifying servants. Who the two “ sons of oil” in the prophet were, whether Zerubbabel and Joshua, or the prophets Zechariah and Haggai, is of no import to our text here): and if any one be minded to harm them, fire goeth forth (the pres., of that which is habitual and settled, though yet future: see also on ver. 7 below) out of their mouth, and devoureth their enemies (so Elijah, 2 Kings 1:10 ff.; and so ran the word of promise to Jeremiah (ref.), ἰδοὺἐγὼδέδωκατοὺςλόγουςμουεἰςτὸστόμασουπῦρ , καὶτὸνλαὸντοῦτονξύλα , καὶκαταφάγεταιαὐτούς : the two being here combined together. Cf. also Sir. 48:1, ἀνέστηἨλίαςπροφήτηςὡςπῦρ , καὶὁλόγοςαὐτοῦὡςλαμπὰςἐκαίετο ); and if any one be minded to harm them, after this manner (see Sir. 48:3) he must be killed (this whole description is most difficult to apply, on the allegorical interpretation; as is that which follows. And as might have been expected, the allegorists halt and are perplexed exceedingly. The double announcement here seems to stamp the literal sense, and the εἴτις and δεῖαὐτὸνἀποκτανθῆναι are decisive against any mere national application of the words (as Elliott). Individuality could not be more strongly indicated). These have (see on the pres. above) [the] power to shut the heaven, that the rain may not rain during the days of their prophecy (as did Elijah: the duration of the time also corresponding: see reff.): and they have power over the waters to turn them into blood (as had Moses, ref.), and to smite the earth with (the ἐν of investiture. See ref. 1 Kings, from which, applying to the plagues in Egypt, the expression is taken) every plague as often as they shall be minded (all this points out the spirit and power of Moses, combined with that of Elias. And undoubtedly, it is in these two directions that we must look for the two witnesses, or lines of witnesses. The one impersonates the law, the other the prophets. The one reminds us of the prophet whom God should raise up like unto Moses; the other of Elias the prophet, who should come before the great and terrible day of the Lord; ὁκαταγραφεὶςἐνἐλεγμοῖςεἰςκαιρούς , κοπάσαιὀργὴνπρὸθυμοῦ , Sir, 48:10. But whether we are to regard these prophecies as to be fulfilled by individuals, or by lines of testimony, must depend entirely on the indications here given). And when they had finished (τελέσωσιν is a futurus exactus, implying, as plainly as words can imply it, that the whole period of their testimony will be at an end when that which is next said shall happen. All attempts of the allegorical expositors to escape this plain meaning of the words are in vain. Such is that of Mede, “ when they shall be about finishing:” of Daubuz, “ whilst they shall perform:” of Elliott, “ when they shall have completed their testimony,” meaning thereby not the whole course of it, but any one complete delivery of it which others might have followed) their testimony, the wild-beast that cometh up out of the abyss (this is the first mention of the wild-beast; and the whole description, as remarked above, is anticipatory. The pres. part. ἀναβαῖνον gives simply designation, as so often: and is not to be interpreted future, as Elliott, “ that is to ascend.” The character of the beast is that he ascendeth out of the abyss; just as the tempter of our Lord is called ὁπειράζων , Matthew 4:3, though the narrative is in the past tense. This wild-beast is evidently identical with that mentioned in ch. 17:8, of which the same term is used, ὃμέλλειἀναβαίνεινἐκτῆςἀβύσσου : and if so, with that also which is introduced ch. 13:1 ff., as ἐκτῆςθαλάσσηςθηρίονἀναβαῖνον , seeing that the same details, of the seven heads and ten horns, are ascribed to the two. But, though the appellation is anticipatory as far as this book is concerned, the beast spoken of was already familiar to its readers from Dan. 7.: see below) shall make war with them (see ref. Dan.), and shall conquer them and kill them. And their corpse , but simply as above, because πτῶμα does not properly signify a dead body, but that which has fallen, be it of one, or of many. Below, where the context requires the separate corpses to be specified, the less proper meaning of πτῶμα is adopted, and we have the plural) (is) (the present is best to supply, on account of the verbs following, which are in the present, until we come to πέμψουσιν : and with which the portion relating to the corpses is bound up) upon the street (reff.) of the great city (not Jerusalem (see above), which is never called by this name: but the ἡπόλιςἡμεγάλη of the succeeding visions, of which this is anticipatory and compendious), namely, that which (ἥτις , not = ἡ , but specifying and particularizing) is called spiritually (i. e. allegorically; in a sense higher than the literal and obvious one. The only other place in which we find this usage of the word is in ref. 1 Cor., which see, and notes there) Sodom and Egypt (those Commentators who maintain that the literal Jerusalem is here meant, allege Isaiah 1:9 ff., and Ezekiel 16:48, as places where she is called Sodom. But the latter place is no example: for there Jerusalem is compared, in point of sinfulness, with her sisters, Samaria and Sodom, and is not called Sodom at all. And in Isaiah 1:9 ff., Isaiah 1:1) it is not Jerusalem, but the Jewish people in general (see also Isaiah 3:9) that are called by this name: and that 2) not so much in respect of depravity, as of the desolation of Judæ a, which (vv. 7-9) almost equalled that of the devoted cities. And even supposing this to be a case in point, no instance can be alleged of Jerusalem being called Egypt, or any thing bearing such an interpretation. Whereas in the subsequent prophecy both these comparisons are naturally suggested with regard to the great city there mentioned: viz. that of Sodom by ch. 19:3, ὁκαπνὸςαὐτῆςἀναβαίνειεἰςτοὺςαἰῶναςτῶναἰώνων , compared with Genesis 19:28, and that of Egypt, and indeed Sodom also, by ch. 18:4 ff., ἐξέλθατεἐξαὐτῆςὁλαόςμου , κ .τ .λ .), where their Lord also (as well as they: not the specific term ἐσταυρώθη , but the general fact of death by persecution, underlying it, being in the Writer’ s mind) was crucified (these words have principally led those who hold the literal Jerusalem to be meant. But if, as I believe I have shewn, such an interpretation is forbidden by the previous words, then we must not fall back on an erroneous view on account of the apparent requirements of these words, but enquire whether by the light of the subsequent prophecy, which is an expansion of this, we may find some meaning for them in accordance with the preceding conditions. And this is surely not difficult to discover. If we compare ch. 18:24, καὶἐναὐτῇαἷμαπροφητῶνκ . ἁγίωνεὑρέθηκ . πάντωντῶνἐσφαγμένωνἐπὶτῆςγῆς , with Matthew 23:35, ὅπωςἔλθῃἐφ ʼ ὑμᾶςπᾶναἷμαδίκαιονἐκχυννόμενονἐπὶτῆςγῆς , we shall find a wider ground than the mere literal Jerusalem on which to place the Lord’ s own martyrdom and that of His saints. It is true, He was crucified at Jerusalem: but it is also true that He was crucified not in, but outside the city, and by the hands, not of Jews, but of Romans. The fact is that the literal Jerusalem, in whom was found the blood of all the saints who had been slain on earth, has been superseded by that wider and greater city, of which this prophecy speaks: and as the temple, in prophetic language, has become the church of God, so the outer city, in the same language, has become the great city which will be the subject of God’ s final judgments. For those who consider this, there can be no hesitation in interpreting even this local designation also of this great city). And some from among (construction, see reff.) the peoples and tribes and languages and nations look upon (the prophetic history is carried on in the present, as in ch. 18:11 compared with ib. ver. 9, and elsewhere) their corpse (see above) three days and a half (on this period we may remark, that these 3½ days are connected by analogy with the periods previously mentioned: with the 1260 days and 42 months = 3½ years: and that in each case the half of the mystic number 7 enters. Also, that Elliott’ s calculation of this period as 3½ years, by which he makes out that that period elapsed, “ precisely, to a day,” between the ninth session of the Lateran council, and the posting up of the theses by Luther at Wittenberg,— and on the accuracy of which he exclaims, “ O wonderful prophecy! O the depth of the riches of the wisdom and of the foreknowledge of God!” — labours under this fatal defect:— that whereas his 3 years, from May 5, 1514, to May 5, 1517, are years of 365 days, his half-year, from May 5, 1517, to Oct. 31, of the same year, is “ 180, or half 360 days:” i. e. wanting 2½ days of the time required according to that reckoning. I may observe, that in his Apocalypsis Alfordiana, p. 128, he has repeated this inconsistency), and do not permit (ἀφίουσιν , as ἤφιεν in Mark 1:34, Mark 11:16, is from the form ἀφίω . The same form occurs in Ecclesiastes 2:18; Philo, Leg. ad Cai. § 30, vol. ii., p. 576. See Winer, edn. 6, § 14. 3 [and Moulton’ s note, p. 97. 2]) their corpses to be put into a tomb (the following exposition will hardly be credited: but is useful, as shewing how far away men can be led in forcing the sense in favour of a particular view. Wordsw. regards the two witnesses as the Old and New Testaments, and the beast that makes war with them as Papal Rome. On this clause, he says, “ the original word here is μνήματα , not τάφους , and is to be rendered not graves, but monuments: i. e. she has laboured that the Two Witnesses may not be committed to the immortal monuments of Editions, Translations, and Expositions.” It will be hardly necessary to remind any N. T. student that μνῆμα never occurs in it in any sense but in the concrete one of a grave or tomb: see reff. The same is true of the LXX, where it occurs fifteen times. And again it is fatal to this strange exposition, that it is not the beast, but ἐκτῶνλαῶνκ . φυλ . κ . γλ ., who will not permit their bodies to be put into a tomb. It may also be remarked, that it is now to a Roman printing press that we owe our only edition of the oldest published codex of the Greek Old and New Testaments). And they that dwell upon the earth (see reff.: the godless world) rejoice over them (at their fall: ἐπί with dat., of the close juxtaposition which connects a mental affection with its object) and are glad and shall send gifts to one another (as on a day of festival, see reff.; and Winer, Realw. i. 411, art. Geschenke), because these two prophets tormented them that dwelt upon the earth (viz. by the plagues above mentioned, vv. 5, 6). And after the three days and half, the Spirit of life from God (may belong to ζωῆς only; but much better to πνεῦμαζωῆς taken as one word. The art. τό would strictly be required, but may well be wanting in later Greek) entered into them (the ἐν would be a pregnant construction: entered into, so as to be in), and they stood upon their feet (the very words of Ezek. l. c., but with one difference, the accus. πόδας , which, as remarked on ch. 4:2, is characteristic of our Writer at the first mention of a superimposition), and great fear fell upon those who beheld them. And they heard a great voice from heaven saying to them, Come up hither. And they went up to heaven in the cloud (or, as we more commonly say in English, the clouds: viz. the cloud which ordinarily floats in the air; the mist: see ref.: not, as Wordsw., “ the cloud of Christ’ s glory:” nor needing, as Elliott, identification with any cloud previously mentioned in this book. But the ascension of the witnesses partakes of the character of His ascension. No attempt has been made to explain this ascension by those who interpret the witnesses figuratively of the Old and New Testaments or the like. The modern historical system, which can interpret such a Scripture phrase of “ calling up to political ascendancy and power,” surely needs no refutation from me), and their enemies beheld them. And in that hour there was a great earthquake, and the tenth part of the city (the great city, as above) fell, and there were slain in the earthquake names of men (i. e. men themselves, the ὀνόματα shewing that the number is carefully and precisely stated, as if the name of each were recounted: see reff.: and more below) seven thousands (i. e. the number 7000. In every place of the 23 where χιλιάς occurs in the N. T., it signifies simply the numeral 1000, and never a chiliad, or a province, as Elliott, forcing the expression to mean, in his historical interpretation, the seven Dutch united provinces (so also Cocceius), which were lost to the Papacy at the Reformation. He also forces ὀνόματαἀνθρώπων out of its idiomatic sense to import “ titles of dignity and command,” Duchies, Marquislates, Lordships), and the rest (of the inhabitants of the city) became terrified, and gave glory (it would be entirely needsess to contend that ἔδωκαν belongs to the name subject as ἐγένοντο , viz. οἱλοιποί , had not an attempt been made (Ell. ii. 466) to supply “ the ascended witnesses” as a new subject. To say nothing of the inapplicability of the instances cited to justify such a view, our ch. 14:7 is decisive against it, where men are exhorted φοβήθητετὸνθεὸνκαὶδότεαὐτῷδόξαν : as also ch. 16:9, where the men tormented οὐμετενόησανδοῦναιαὐτῷδόξαν . In fact, the giving glory to God is not equivalent in the Scriptures to thanking God, but is as Bengel notices, “ character conversionis,” or at all events, the recognition of God. The exceptions to this are more apparent than real, e. g. Luke 17:18, where recognition is the main feature: ch. 4:9, where δόξαν does not stand alone. See also LXX, 1 Kings 6:5.Joshua 7:19 Joshua 7:19 is a remarkable example of the ordinary meaning of the phrase) to the God of heaven (an expression, see reff., confined to the later books of the O. T.). 14. Transitional. The second woe is past (see on ch. 9:12): behold, the third woe cometh quickly (the episodical visions of ch. 10:1-11, 11:1-13, are finished: and the prophecy recurs to the plagues of the sixth trumpet, ch. 9:13-21. These formed the second woe: and upon these the third is to follow. But in actual relation, and in detail, it does not immediately follow. Instead of it, we have voices of thanksgiving in heaven, for that the hour of God’ s kingdom and vengeance is come. The Seer is not yet prepared to set forth the nature of this taking of the kingdom, this reward to God’ s servants, this destruction of the destroyers of the earth. Before he does so, another series of prophetic visions must be given, regarding not merely the dwellers on the earth, but the Church herself, her glory and her shame, her faithfulness and her apostasy. When this series has been given, then shall be declared in its fulness the manner and the process of the time of the end. And consequently as at the end of the vision of the seals, so here also. The sixth seal gave the immediately preceding signs of the great day— we were shewn in anticipatory episodes, the gathering of the elect and the multitude before the throne, and then the veil was dropt upon that series of visions and another began. And now God’ s avenging judgments on the earth, in answer to the prayers of His saints, having reached their final point of accomplishment, and the armies of heaven having given solemn thanks for the hour being come, again the veil is dropt, and again a new procession of visions begins from the beginning. The third woe, so soon to come, is in narration deferred until all the various underplots, so to speak, of God’ s Providence have been brought onward to a point ready for the great and final dé nouement). 15-19. The seventh trumpet. And the seventh angel blew his trumpet, and there were great voices in heaven (notice, a) that the seventh seal, the seventh trumpet, and the seventh vial, are all differently accompanied from any of the preceding series in each case. b) At each seventh member of the series we hear what is done, not on earth, but in heaven,— the half-hour’ s silence, the song of thanksgiving, the voice from the temple and the throne, saying, “ It is done.” c) At each seventh member likewise we have it related in the form of a solemn conclusion, 1) ἐγένοντοβρονταὶκαὶφωναὶκαὶἀστραπαὶκαὶσεισμός , ch. 8:5,— 2) ἐγένοντοἀστραπαὶκαὶφωναὶκαὶβρονταὶκαὶσεισμὸςκαὶχάλαζαμεγάλη , ch. 11:19,— 3) ἐγένοντοἀστραπαὶκαὶφωναὶκαὶβρονταὶ , καὶσεισμὸςἐγένετομέγαςκ .τ .λ ., ch. 16:18 ff. d) At each seventh member we have plain indication in the imagery or by direct expression, that the end is come, or close at hand: 1) by the imagery of the sixth seal, and the two episodes, preceding the seventh seal: 2) by the declaration here, ἦλθενὁκαιρὸςτῶννεκρῶνκριθῆναι : 3) by the Γέγονεν sounding from the temple and the throne on the pouring out of the seventh vial. e) All this forms strong ground for inference, that the three series of visions are not continuous, but resumptive: not indeed going over the same ground with one another, either of time or of occurrence, but each evolving something which was not in the former, and putting the course of God’ s Providence in a different light. It is true, that the seals involve the trumpets, the trumpets the vials: but it is not in mere temporal succession: the involution and inclusion are far deeper: the world-wide vision of the seals containing the cry for vengeance, out of which is evolved the series of the trumpets: and this again containing the episodical visions of the little book and the witnesses, out of which are evolved the visions of ecclesiastical faithfulness and apostasy which follow), saying (whose these voices were, is not specified: but we may fairly assume them to have been those of the armies of heaven and the four living-beings, as distinguished from the twenty-four elders which follow. For the masc. part., see ref.), The Kingdom of the world (i. e. over this world: ἡβασιλεία abstract. In the received text, reading αἱβασιλείαι , it is the kingdoms, concrete, of the world) is become (aor., but alluding to the result of the whole series of events past, and not to be expressed in English except by a perfect) our Lord’ s and of His Christ (no supply, such as “ the Kingdom,” is required: nor is this the case even in the rec. text. The gen. in both cases is one merely of possession), and He (no emphasis on He, as we are almost sure to lay on it, perhaps from the accent unavoidable in the Hallelujah Chorus of Handel) shall reign to the ages of the ages (this announcement necessarily belongs to the time close on the millennial reign: and this is no more than we might expect from the declaration of the strong angel in ch. 10:7). And the twenty-four elders (representing the church in glory) which before God sat upon their thrones (or, omitting the οἱ , sitting upon their thrones before God), fell upon their faces, and worshipped God, saying, We give thanks to Thee, O Lord God the Almighty (this ascription of thanks is the return for the answer to the prayers of the saints furnished by the judgments of the trumpets), who art and wast (for construction, see reff.), because Thou hast taken Thy great might and hast reigned (on the aor., see above). And the nations were angry (see ref. Ps.), and Thine anger came, and the time of the dead to be judged (another indication that the end is at hand when these words are spoken), and (the time) to give their reward to Thy servants the prophets (see reff. and especially Matthew 10:41, to which reference seems to be made), and to the saints, and to them that fear Thy name, the small and the great (the three terms together include the whole church), and to destroy the destroyers of (so is the pres. part. best rendered) the earth (all this looks onward to judgments and acts of God yet to come when the words are spoken. The thanksgiving is not that God hath done all this, but that the hour is come for it all to take place. Before it does, another important series of visions has to be unfolded). 19. Concluding, and transitional. And the temple of God was opened in the heaven , and the ark of His covenant was seen in His temple (the episode of ch. 11:1 ff. began with measuring the temple of God, the shadow of things in the heavens: and now, when the time is come for the judgments there indicated to be fulfilled, that temple itself in the heavens is laid open. The ark of the Covenant is seen, the symbol of God’ s faithfulness in bestowing grace on His people, and inflicting vengeance on His people’ s enemies. This is evidently a solemn and befitting inauguration of God’ s final judgments, as it is a conclusion of the series pointed out by the trumpets, which have been inflicted in answer to the prayers of His saints. It is from this temple that the judgments proceed forth (cf. ch. 14:15, 17, 15:5 ff., 16:17); from His inmost and holiest place that those acts of vengeance are wrought which the great multitude in heaven recognize as faithful and true, ch. 19:2. The symbolism of this verse, the opening for the first time of the heavenly temple, also indicates of what nature the succeeding visions are to be: that they will relate to God’ s covenant people and His dealings with them): and there were lightnings and voices and thunderings and an earthquake and a great hail (the solemn salvos, so to speak, of the artillery of heaven, with which each series of visions is concluded: see this commented on above at the beginning of this section). Chap. 12:1-17. The vision of the Woman and the great red Dragon. On the nature of this vision, as introductory of the whole imagery of the latter part of the Apocalypse, I have already remarked at ch. 11. It is only needful now to add, that the principal details of the present section are rather descriptive than strictly prophetical: relating, just as in the prophets the descriptions of Israel and Judah, to things passed and passing, and serving for the purpose of full identification and of giving completeness to the whole vision. And a great (important in its meaning, as well as vast in its appearance) sign (σημεῖον , one of those appearances by which God ἐσήμανεν to John the revelations of this book, ch. 1:1) was seen in heaven (heaven here is manifestly not only the show-place of the visions as seen by the Seer, but has a substantial place in the vision: for below, ver. 7 ff., we have the heaven contrasted with the earth, and the dragon cast out of heaven into the earth. See more there), a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon beneath her feet (see Son 6:10, which seems to be borne in mind), and on her head a crown of twelve stars , and [she is] (or, being) with child [and] crieth out in pangs and tormented to bring forth (the inf. τεκεῖν , of that which would be the result of the βασανίζεσθαι , has a parallel in Acts 7:19, ἐκάκωσεν .… τοῦποιεῖν , and in other places, see Winer, edn. 6, § 44. 4, but not without the art.). And another sign was seen in heaven; and behold, a great red dragon (interpreted below, ver. 9, to be the devil, the ancient serpent: see also vv. 13, 15. He is πυῤῥός perhaps for the combined reasons, of the wasting properties of fire, and the redness of blood: “ rufus, ut homicida,” as the gloss, interl.: see John 8:44), having seven heads and ten horns, and upon his heads seven diadems (the Dragon being the devil, these symbolic features must be interpreted of the assuming by him of some of those details in the form of the beast in ch. 13:1 ff., to whom afterwards he gives his power and his throne: in other words, as indicating that he lays wait for the woman’ s offspring in the form of that antichristian power which is afterwards represented by the beast. At the same time, the seven crowned heads may possess an appropriateness of their own, belonging as they do to the dragon alone (the beast has the crowns on his horns, ch. 13:1). They may represent, as he is Prince of this world, universality of earthly dominion. The ten horns belong to the fourth beast of Dan 7:7, 20). And his tail draggeth down the third part of the stars of the heaven, and cast them to the earth (so the little horn in Daniel 8:10, “ cast down some of the host and of the stars to the ground, and stamped upon them.” The allusion here may be as in Catena, συγκατέβαλεγὰρἑαυτῇπλείστωνἀγγέλωνμοῖρανσυναποστῆσαιπείσασατοῦθεοῦ , καὶπεποίηκεχθονίουςτοὺςοὐρανίους , καὶσκότοςτοὺςλαμπροὺςὡςἀστέρας . The magnitude and fury of the dragon are graphically given by the fact of its tail, in its lashing backwards and forwards in fury, sweeping down the stars of heaven). And the dragon stands before the woman which is about to bear, that when she has borne he may devour her child (this was what the devil instigated Herod the Great to do, who was the dependant of the Roman Empire. But doubtless the reference is wider than this: even to the whole course of hostility against the Lord during His humiliation: see below). And she bore a male (if ἄρσεν is neuter, and not to be written ἄρσεν ʼ , the expression is a solœ cism, or rather a combination of genders, ἄρσεν going back from the masculine individual υἱὸν to the neuter of the genus) son, who shall rule (lit. shepherd, i. e. order and guide) all the nations with (ἐν of investiture, very nearly expressed by our instrumental “ with,” which in its primitive meaning does but signify accompaniment) a rod of iron (these words, cited verbatim from the LXX of the Messianic Psa_2, and preceded by the ὅς of personal identification, leave no possibility of doubt, who is here intended. The man-child is the Lord Jesus Christ, and none other. And this result is a most important one for the fixity of reference of the whole prophecy. It forms one of those landmarks by which the legitimacy of various interpretations may be tested; and of which we may say, notwithstanding the contradiction sure to be given to the saying, that every interpretation which oversteps their measure is thereby convicted of error. Again, the exigencies of this passage require that the birth should be understood literally and historically, of that Birth of which all Christians know. And be it observed, that this rule of interpretation is no confident assertion of mine, as has been represented, but a result from the identifying use of words of the prophetic Scripture, spoken of Him, who will not suffer His honour to be given to another): and her child was caught up to God and to His throne (i. e. after a conflict with the Prince of this world, who came and tried Him but found nothing in Him, the Son of the woman was taken up to heaven and sat on the right hand of God. Words can hardly be plainer than these. It surely is but needful to set against them, thus understood, the interpretation which would regard them as fulfilled by the “ mighty issue of the consummated birth of a son of the church, a baptized emperor, to political supremacy in the Roman empire,” “ united with the solemn public profession of the divinity of the Son of man.” Elliott, iii. 24). And the woman fled into the wilderness, where she hath there a place prepared from (the source of the preparation being His command: see reff., and Winer, edn. 6, § 47, b) God, that they may nourish her there for a thousand two hundred and sixty days (the whole of this verse is anticipatory: the same incident being repeated with its details and in its own place in the order of the narrative below, vv. 13 ff. See there the comment and interpretation. The fact of its being here inserted by anticipation is very instructive as to that which now next follows, as not being consecutive in time after the flight of the woman, but occurring before it, and in fact referred to now in the prophecy as leading to that pursuit of the woman by the dragon, which, as matter of sequence, led to it). 7 ff.] And there was war in heaven (we now enter upon a mysterious series of events in the world of spirits, with regard to which merely fragmentary hints are given us in the Scriptures. In the O. T. we find the adversary Satan in heaven. In Job 1:2 Job 1:2 Job 1:2, he appears before God as the Tempter of His saints: in Zec_3 we have him accusing Joshua the High-priest in God’ s presence. Again our Lord in Luke 10:18 exclaims, “ I beheld Satan as lightning fall from heaven,” where see note. Cf. also John 12:31. So that this casting down of Satan from the office of accuser in heaven was evidently connected with the great justifying work of redemption. His voice is heard before God no more: the day of acceptance in Christ Jesus has dawned. And his angels, those rebel spirits whom he led away, are cast down with him, into the earth, where now the conflict is waging during the short time which shall elapse between the Ascension and the second Advent, when he shall be bound. All this harmonizes together: and though we know no more of the matter, we have at least this sign that our knowledge, as far as it goes, is sound,— that the few hints given us do not, when thus interpreted, contradict one another, but agree as portions of one whole. The war here spoken of appears in some of its features in the book of Daniel, ch. 10:13, 21, 12:1. In Jude 1:9 also we find Michael the adversary of the devil in the matter of the saints of God): Michael (“ one of the chief princes,” Daniel 10:13: “ your prince,” i. e. of the Jewish nation, ib. ver. 21: “ the great prince which standeth for the children of thy people,” ib. 12:1: “ the archangel,” Jude 1:9: not to be identified with Christ, any more than any other of the great angels in this book. Such identification here would confuse hopelessly the actors in this heavenly scene. Satan’ s being cast out of heaven to the earth is the result not of his contest with the Lord Himself, of which it is only an incident leading to a new phase, but of the appointed conflict with his faithful fellow-angels led on by the archangel Michael. The οἱἄγγελοιαὐτοῦ in both cases requires a nearer correspondence in the two chiefs than is found between Satan and the Son of God) and his angels to war τὸνΜ . καὶτοὺςἀγγ . αὐτοῦπολεμῆσαι (in which case the τοῦ depends on the ἐγένετο , as in ref.) and ὁΜ . καὶοἱἄγγ . αὐτοῦἐπολέμησαν . In the next clause, it passes into this latter) with the dragon, and the dragon warred and his angels, and they prevailed not, nor was even (οὐδέ brings in a climax) their place found any more in heaven. And the great dragon was cast down, the ancient serpent , he who is called the devil and Satan, he who deceiveth the whole inhabited world, was cast to the earth, and his angels were cast with him (I would appeal in passing to the solemnity of the terms here used, and the particularity of the designation, and ask whether it is possible to understand this of the mere casting down of paganism from the throne of the Roman empire? whether the words themselves do not vindicate their plain literal sense, as further illustrated by the song of rejoicing which follows?). And I heard a great voice in heaven : but it is left uncertain) saying, Now is come (it is impossible in English to join to a particle of present time, such as ἄρτι , a verb in aoristic time. We are driven to the perfect in such cases) the salvation and the might and the kingdom of our God and the power of His Christ (i. e. the realization of all these: ἡσωτηρίατοῦθεοῦἡμῶν being, as so often, that salvation which belongs to God as its Author: see reff. and cf. Luke 3:6): because the accuser (the form κατήγωρ , instead of κατήγορος , is rabbinical, ק ט י ג ו ר . They had also a corresponding term, ס נ י ג ו ר , συνήγωρ , = συνήγορος , to designate Michael, the advocate of God’ s people. See Schö ttgen, vol. i. p. 1119 ff., where he accumulates extracts of some interest from the rabbinical books) of our brethren is cast down, who accuseth (the pres. part. of the usual habit, though that his office was now at an end) them before our God by day and by night (see, as above, the passage cited in Schö ttgen). And they conquered him on account of the blood of the Lamb (i. e. by virtue of that blood having been shed: not as in E. V., “ by the blood,” as if διὰ had been with the genitive. The meaning is far more significant; their victory over Satan was grounded in, was a consequence of, His having shed his precious blood: without that, the adversary’ s charges against them would have been unanswerable. It is remarkable, that the rabbinical books give a tradition that Satan accuses men all the days of the year, except on the Day of Atonement. Vajikra Rabba, § 21, fol. 164. 3, in Schö ttgen) and on account of the word of their testimony (the strict sense of διὰ with an accus. must again be kept. It is because they have given a faithful testimony, even unto death, that they are victorious: this is their part, their appropriation of and standing in the virtue of that blood of the Lamb. Without both these, victory would not have been theirs: both together form its ground): and they loved not their life unto death (i. e. they carried their not-love of their life even unto death: see reff.). For this cause (viz., because the dragon is cast down: as is shewn by the contrast below) rejoice, ye heavens and they that dwell (there is no sense of transitoriness in St. John’ s use of σκηνόω : rather, one of repose and tranquillity (reff.)) in them. Woe to the earth and the sea (the construction is a combination of the usual accus. in exclamations, with οὐαί , which takes a dative), because the devil is come down (see above on ἄρτιἐγένετο , ver. 10, on the impossibility of expressing the aor. in such connexions) to you (the earth and sea) having great wrath (the enmity, which was manifested as his natural state towards Christ, ver. 4, being now kindled into wrath), because he knoweth (so E. V., rightly, the participle carrying with it this ratiocinative force) that he hath but a short season (i. e. because the Lord cometh quickly, and then the period of his active hostility against the church and the race whom Christ has redeemed will be at an end: he will be bound and cast into the pit. Until then, he is carrying it on, in ways which the prophecy goes on to detail). And when the dragon saw that he was cast down to the earth, he persecuted the woman which brought forth the male child (the narrative at ver. 6 is again taken up and given more in detail. There, the reason of the woman’ s flight is matter of inference: here, it is plainly expressed, and the manner of the flight also is related. ἔτεκεν is not to be taken as pluperfect, still less as pointing to what was yet to take place; but is the simple historic tense, used for identification in again taking up the narrative). And there were given (in the usual apocalyptic sense of δοθῆναι , to be granted by God for His purposes) to the woman [the] two wings of the great eagle (the figure is taken from O. T. expressions used by God in reference to the flight of Israel from Egypt. The most remarkable of these is in ref. Exod., ἀνέλαβονὑμᾶςὡσεὶἐπὶπτερύγωνἀετῶνκαὶπροσηγαγόμηνὑμᾶςπρὸςἐμαυτόν . So also in ref. Deut. But the articles are not to be taken as identifying the eagle with the figure used in those places, which would be most unnatural: much less must they, with Ebrard, be supposed to identify this eagle with that in ch. 8:13, with which it has no connexion. The articles are simply generic, as in ὁκροκόδειλοςὁχερσαῖος , Leviticus 11:29. With these O. T. references before us, we can hardly be justified in pressing the figure of the eagle’ s wings to an interpretation in the fulfilment of the prophecy, or in making it mean that the flight took place under the protection of the Roman eagles, as some have done), that she might fly into the wilderness (the flight of Israel out of Egypt is still borne in mind) to her place , where she is nourished (there) (as God nourished Israel with manna in the wilderness, see Deuteronomy 8:3, Deuteronomy 8:16, where ψωμίζειν is used) a time and times and half a time (i. e. 3½ years = 42 months, ch. 11:2 = 1260 days, ver. 6 and ch. 11:3) from the face of the serpent . And the serpent cast out of his mouth after the woman water as a river, that he might make her to be borne away by the river. And the earth helped the woman, and the earth opened her mouth (reff.) and swallowed down the river which the dragon cast out of his mouth (in passing to the interpretation, we cannot help being struck with the continued analogy between this prophecy and the history of the Exodus. There we have the flight into the wilderness, there the feeding in the wilderness, as already remarked: there again the forty-two stations, corresponding to the forty-two months of the three years and half of this prophecy: there too the miraculous passage of the Red Sea, not indeed in strict correspondence with this last feature, but at least suggestive of it. These analogies themselves suggest caution in the application of the words of the prophecy; and in this direction. The church in the wilderness of old was not, as some expositors would represent this woman, the pure church of God: His veritable servants were hidden in the midst of that church, as much as that church itself was withdrawn from the enmity of Pharaoh. And, it is to be noted, it was that very church herself which afterwards, when seated at Jerusalem, forsook her Lord and Husband, and committed adultery with the kings of the earth, and became drunk with the blood of the saints. It would seem then that we must not understand the woman of the invisible spiritual church of Christ, nor her flight into the wilderness of the withdrawal of God’ s true servants from the eyes of the world. They indeed have been just as much withdrawn from the eyes of the world at all times, and will continue so till the great manifestation of the sons of God. I own that, considering the analogies and the language used, I am much more disposed to interpret the persecution of the woman by the dragon of the various persecutions by Jews which followed the Ascension, and her flight into the wilderness of the gradual withdrawal of the church and her agency from Jerusalem and Judæ a, finally consummated by the flight to the mountains on the approaching siege, commanded by our Lord Himself. And then the river which the dragon sent out of his mouth after the woman might be variously understood,— of the Roman armies which threatened to sweep away Christianity in the wreck of the Jewish nation,— or of the persecutions which followed the church into her retreats, but eventually became absorbed by the civil power turning Christian,— or of the Jewish nation itself, banded together against Christianity wherever it appeared, but eventually itself becoming powerless against it by its dispersion and ruin,— or again, of the influx of heretical opinions from the Pagan philosophies which tended to swamp the true faith. I confess that not one of these seems to me satisfactorily to answer the conditions: nor do we gain any thing by their combination. But any thing within reasonable regard for the analogies and symbolism of the text seems better than the now too commonly received historical interpretation, with its wild fancies and arbitrary assignment of words and figures. As to the time indicated by the 1260 days or 3½ years, the interpretations given have not been convincing, nor even specious. We may observe thus much in this place: that if we regard this prophecy as including long historic periods, we are driven to one of two resources with regard to these numbers: either we must adopt the year-day theory (that which reckons a day for a year, and consequently a month for thirty years,— and should reckon a year for 360 years), or we must believe the numbers to have merely a symbolical and mystical, not a chronological force. If (and this second alternative is best stated in an inverse form) we regard the periods mentioned as to be literally accepted, then the prophecy cannot refer to long historic periods, but must be limited to a succession of incidents concentrated in one place and lustrum either in the far past or in the far future. Of all prophecies about which these questions can be raised, the present is the one which least satisfactorily admits of such literal interpretation and its consequences. Its actors, the woman and the dragon, are beyond all controversy mystical personages: one of them is expressly interpreted for us to be the devil: respecting the other there can be little doubt that she is the Church of God: her seed being, as expressly interpreted to be, God’ s Christian people. The conflict then is that between Satan and the church. Its first great incident is the birth and triumph of the Son of God and of man. Is it likely that a few days or years will limit the duration of a prophecy confessedly of such wide import? I own it seems to me that this vision, even if it stood alone, is decisive against the literal acceptation of the stated periods. Rejecting that, how do we stand with regard to the other alternative in its two forms? Granting for the moment the year-day principle, will it help us here? If we take the flight into the wilderness as happening at any time between the Ascension, a.d. 30, and the destruction of Jerusalem, a.d. 70, 1260 years will bring us to some time between a.d. 1290 and 1330: a period during which no event can be pointed out as putting an end to the wilderness-state of the church. If again we enlarge our limit for the former event, and bring it down as late as Elliott does, i. e. to the period between the fourth and seventh centuries, we fall into all the difficulties which beset his most unsatisfactory explanation of the man-child and his being caught up to God’ s throne, and besides into this one: that if the occultation of true religion (= the condition of the invisible Church) was the beginning of the wilderness-state, then either the open establishment of the Protestant churches was the end of the wilderness-state of concealment, or those churches are no true churches: either of which alternatives would hardly be allowed by that author. And if on the other hand we desert the year day principle, and say that these defined and constantly recurring periods are not to be pressed, but indicate only long spaces of time thus pointed out mystically or analogically, we seem to incur danger of missing the prophetic sense, and leaving unfixed that which apparently the Spirit of God intended us to ascertain). And the dragon was wroth at the woman (on ἐπί with a dat. as applied to the object of mental affections, see ref. and note) and departed (from his pursuit of her) to make war with the rest of her seed, who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus (τὴνμαρτ . Ἰησοῦ as in ch. 6:9: see note there. Notice as important elements for the interpretation, 1) that the woman has seed besides the Man-child who was caught up to God’ s throne , who are not only distinct from herself, but who do not accompany her in her flight into the wilderness: 2) that those persons are described as being they who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus: 3) that during the woman’ s time of her being fed in the wilderness, the dragon is making war, not against her, but against this remnant of her seed: 4) that by the form of expression here, these present participles descriptive of habit, and occurring at the breaking off of the vision as regards the general description of the dragon’ s agency, it is almost necessarily implied, that the woman, while hidden in the wilderness from the dragon’ s wrath, goes on bringing forth sons and daughters thus described. If I mistake not, the above considerations are fatal to the view which makes the flight of the woman into the wilderness consist in the withdrawal of God’ s true servants from the world and from open recognition. For thus she must be identical with this remnant of her seed, and would herself be the object of the dragon’ s hostile warfare, at the very time when, by the terms of the prophecy, she is safely hidden from it. I own that I have been led by these circumstances to think whether after all the woman may represent, not the invisible church of God’ s true people which under all conditions of the world must be known only to Him, but the true visible Church: that Church which in its divinely prescribed form as existing at Jerusalem was the mother of our Lord according to the flesh, and which continued as established by our Lord and His Apostles, in unbroken unity during the first centuries, but which as time went on was broken up by evil men and evil doctrines, and has remained, unseen, unrealized, her unity an article of faith, not of sight, but still multiplying her seed, those who keep the commandments of God and have the testimony of Jesus, in various sects and distant countries, waiting the day for her comely order and oneness again to be manifested— the day when she shall “ come up out of the wilderness, leaning on her Beloved:” when our Lord’ s prayer for the unity of His being accomplished, the world shall believe that the Father has sent Him. If we are disposed to carry out this idea, we might see the great realization of the flight into the wilderness in the final severance of the Eastern and Western churches in the seventh century, and the flood cast after the woman by the dragon in the irruption of the Mahometan armies. But this, though not less satisfactory than the other interpretations, is as unsatisfactory. The latter part of the vision yet waits its clearing up). 12:18-13:10. The vision of the Beast that came up out of the sea. See Daniel 7:7, Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:19-27, to which continual reference will be made in the Commentary. And he (the dragon) stood upon the sand of the sea (see Daniel 7:2, where the four winds of heaven are striving upon the great sea); and I saw out of the sea a wild-beast coming up, having ten horns (now put first, because they are crowned. The ten horns are found also in the fourth beast of Dan 7:7) and seven heads, and upon his horns ten diadems, and upon his heads (notice the gen. ἐπὶτῶνκεράτων and the accus. ἐπὶτὰςκεφαλάς : the reason being probably, that the crowns are simply spoken of as in position on the horns, whereas the names were inscribed on the heads, and the preposition takes the tinge of motion belonging to the act of inscription) a name of blasphemy (whether (see digest) we read plural or singular, the meaning will be the same— on each head a name. The heads are (see for the interpretation ch. 17:9, 10, where it is given by the angel) Kings, in the widest acceptation of the word; Kings, as representing their kingdoms; not necessarily individual Kings (see as above):— the name or names of blasphemy, the divine titles given to those Kings, “ Lord of the whole earth,” and the like: in the Roman form, “ Deus” or “ Divus.” Hereafter, when the great harlot succeeds to the character and symbolic details of the beast, this is carried yet further). And the beast which I saw was like to a leopard, and its feet as of a bear, and its mouth as the mouth of a lion (thus uniting in itself the three previous kingdoms of Dan 7:4 ff., the first of which was like a lion, the second like a bear, the third like a leopard; and in consequence representing, not the Roman Empire merely, but the aggregate of the Empires of this world as opposed to Christ and His kingdom). And the dragon gave to it his might and his throne and great power (i. e. this beast, this earthly persecuting power, was the vicegerent and instrument of the devil, the prince of this world, and used by him for his purposes of hostility against the remnant of the seed of the woman). And (I saw) one from among his heads as it were wounded unto death (this seems to represent the Roman pagan Empire, which having long been a head of the beast, was crushed and to all appearance exterminated), and the stroke of its death was healed (in the establishment of the Christian Roman Empire. The period now treated of is the same, introduced here by anticipation, but hereafter to be described in detail, as that during which the woman sits on the beast and guides it. Very many Commentators have explained these seven heads as individual kings, and supposed the one who was wounded to death to be Nero, and these last words to allude to the idea that Nero would return from the dead and become antichrist. But this idea was certainly not prevalent in this form at the time when the Apocalypse was written. Tacitus merely relates, that there were many rumours about Nero’ s death, “ eoque pluribus vivere eum fingentibus credentibusque,” Hist. ii. 8, and that on the strength of this, a Pseudo-Nero arose in the East, Hist. 1. ii, “ mota etiam prope Parthorum arma falsi Neronis ludibrio.” See also the citations from the Sibylline oracles, Lactantius, and Sulpicius Severus, in Dü st.’ s note. The first who mentions the idea of Nero returning from the dead, is Augustine, Civ. Dei xx. 19. 3, vol. vii. p. 686, in explaining 2 Thessalonians 2:3 ff.: “ quidam putant hoc (ver. 7) de imperio dictum fuisse Romano— ut hoc quod dixit, jam enim mysterium iniquitatis operatur, Neronem voluerit intelligi, cujus jam facta velut Antichristi videbantur. Unde non-nulli ipsum resurrecturum et futurum Antichristum suspicantur.” But it is observable that does not connect the idea with the Apocalypse. This is first done by Sulp. Severus, and completed by Victorinus, whose very words betray the origin of the idea having been from this passage itself). And the whole earth wondered after (pregnant construction for wondered at, as they followed, or gazed, after) the beast, and worshipped the dragon, because he gave the (or, his) power to the beast, and worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like to the beast? And who is able to war with him (these words are a sort of parody, in their blasphemy, on ascriptions of praise to God: cf. besides reff., Psalms 112:5; Isaiah 40:18, Isaiah 40:25, 46:5; Jeremiah 29:20 (49:19); Micah 7:18: they represent to us the relapse into all the substantial blasphemies of paganism under the resuscitated Empire of Rome, and the retention of pagan titles and forms. I may remark, that nothing in those words finds any representative in the history of the times of the Pagan Empire)? And there was given to it a mouth speaking great and blasphemous things (so we read of the little horn in Daniel 7:8): and there was given to it power to work (more probably, as in former reff., than “ to spend” merely: this meaning is indeed found in latter reff., but the places in Daniel seem to decide for us) forty-two months (the well-known period of the agency of antichrist = 3½ years = 1260 days: see Prolegomena, § v. 29 f.), and he opened his mouth (spoken, see reff., of the commencement of a series of discourses. These vv. 6, 7, in fact expand into detail that which ver. 5 gave compendiously) for blasphemies against God, to blaspheme His name and His tabernacle, which dwell in heaven (the apposition is strange, but if the καί must be omitted, the meaning is to enhance the enormity of the blasphemy by bringing out the lofty nature of God’ s holy Name and dwelling-place. With the καί , the last clause would mean that he blasphemes them that dwell in heaven, i. e. the holy angels of God. To take this as still the meaning without the καί , is to introduce into the apocalyptic style an asyndeton which is not found in it). And there was given to it to make war with the saints (see Daniel 7:21) and to conquer them (see ch. 11:7, of which this is a wider statement): and there was given to it power over every tribe and people and tongue and nation (viz. universal empire). And all shall worship it (αὐτόν , though masculine, must be referred to the θηρίον , which has been now for some time spoken of as an agent, and not to an impersonation of it by a living king) who dwell upon the earth, (every one) whose (the change into the singular arises from resolving πάντες into its component individuals) name (οὗ … αὐτοῦ , the usual Hellenistic redundance: see reff.) is not written in the book of life of the Lamb which is slain from the foundation of the world (these last words are ambiguously placed. They may belong either to γέγραπται , or to ἐσφαγμένου . The former connexion is taken by Hammond, Bengel, Heinr., Ewald, Zü llig, De Wette, Hengstb., Dü sterd. But the other is far more obvious and natural: and had it not been for the apparent difficulty of the sense thus conveyed, the going so far back as to γέγραπται for a connexion would never have been thought of. See this remarkably shewn in the Catena: ὧνγέγραπται , ἀπὸκαταβολῆςκόσμουγέγραπται · οὕτωγὰρδεῖνοεῖν , οὐχὡςἡγραφὴἔχει · ὅτιμηδὲἀπὸκαταβολῆςκόσμουἡτοῦἀρνίουσφαγή . The difficulty however is but apparent: 1 Peter 1:19, 1 Peter 1:20 says more fully the same thing. That death of Christ which was foreordained from the foundation of the world, is said to have taken place in the counsels of Him with whom the end and the beginning are one. Ch. 17:8, which is cited by De W. as decisive for his view, is irrelevant. Of course where simply the writing in the book of life from the foundation of the world is expressed, no other element is to be introduced: but it does not therefore follow, that where, as here, other elements are by the construction introduced, that, and that alone is to be understood). 9, 10. These verses bear various meanings, according to the reading which we adopt. If the rec. be taken, they express a consolation to the persecuted saints in the form of a jus talionis: the judgment of God will overtake the persecutors, and in that form in which their persecution was exercised. If we take the reading in the text, they form a prophetic declaration how it shall fare with the saints in the day of persecution, and declare also that in holy suffering of captivity and death consists their faith and patience. The latter appears to me, both from critical and contextual considerations, by far the more eligible. Thus we have what is so frequent in this book, an O. T. citation (see below): and all falls into its place in connexion with the victorious war of the beast against the saints: whereas the other declaration is at least out of place in the context. If any man hath an ear, let him hear (see reff. This notice is given to bespeak solemn attention to what follows, as warning Christians of their fate in the days of the beast’ s persecution). If any one is for captivity, into captivity he goeth: if any to be slain with (see reff. and note on ch. 6:8) the sword, that (i. e. it is necessary that: δεῖ , as the other reading supplies) he should be slain with the sword (so ref. Jer., “ Such as are for death, to death: and such as are for the sword, to the sword: and such as are for the famine, to the famine: and such as are for captivity, to captivity:” cf. also Jeremiah 43:11 and Zechariah 11:9. As that was the order and process of God’ s anger in his judgments on his people of old, so shall the issue be with the saints in the war of persecution which the beast shall wage with them). Here is (reff., viz. in the endurance of these persecutions) the endurance and the faith of the saints. 11-18. The second wild-beast, the reviver and the upholder of the first. It may be well to premise a few remarks, tending to the right understanding of this portion of the prophecy. 1) These two beasts are identical as to genus: they are both θηρία , ravaging powers, hostile to God’ s flock and fold. 2) They are diverse in origin. The former came up out of the sea: that is, if we go back to the symbolism of Daniel, was an empire, rising up out of confusion into order and life: the latter comes out of the earth: i. e. we may not unreasonably say, arises out of human society and its progress: which as interpreted by the context, will import its origin and gradual development during the reign and progress of the secular empire denoted by the former beast. 3) The second beast is, in its zeal and action, entirely subsidiary to the first. It wields its authority, works miracles in its support, causes men to make and to worship its image; nay, itself is lost in the splendour and importance of the other. 4) An important distinction exists between the two beasts, in that this second one has two horns like a lamb. In other words, this second beast puts on a mild and lamb-like appearance, which the other did not. But it speaks as a dragon: its words, which carry its real character, are fierce and unrelenting: while it professes that which is gentle, its behests are cruel. And now I may appeal to the reader, whether all these requisites do not meet in that great wasting Power which arose, not out of anarchy and conquest, but out of men’ s daily life and habits, out of and in the presence of the last form of the secular power, which was the Empire of Pagan Rome; I mean, the sacerdotal persecuting power, which, gentle in its aspect and professions, was yet cruel in its actions; which did all the deeds of the Empire, in its presence, which kept up its image, its laws, its formulæ , its privileges; which, coming in as it did by a corrupt and ambitious priesthood, deceived by its miracles the dwellers on earth, and by them maintained the image of the despotic secular power? Surely it is this Latin Christianity, in its ecclesiastico-secular form, not identical with, but as preparing the way for, the great apostasy, helping, so to speak, to place the woman on the beast, as in ch. 17, that is here depicted before us. It is this which, owing its power in the main to imposture and unwarrantably assumed spiritual authority, deserves best the name of the false prophet, expressly given to this second beast in ch. 19:20. Nor would I limit the interpretation, as has generally been done, by dividing off Pagan from Christian. Primarily, this second beast plainly sets forth the Pagan sacerdotal power; this it was that made the image of the Emperors, that compelled Christians to worship that image, that wrought signs and wonders by its omens and magic. But as the first beast, still subsisting, has passed into a so-called Christian Roman Empire, so has the second beast into a so-called Christian priesthood, the veritable inheritor of pagan rites, images, and superstitions; actually the continuators, nomine mutato, of the same worship in the same places; that of the Virgin for that of Venus, Cosmas and Damian for Romulus and Remus, the image of Peter for that of Jupiter Tonans: lamb-like in profession, with the names and appearances of Christianity, but dragon-like in word and act. And this was surely never more strikingly shewn than at the time when I am writing (Jan. 1860), when the Papal priesthood is zealously combining in the suicidal act of upholding the temporal power as necessary to the spiritual pre-eminence of their “ Lord God the Pope.” So that I believe the interpretation of the second beast to be, the sacerdotal persecuting power, pagan and Christian, as the first is the secular persecuting power, pagan or Christian. I conceive the view which would limit it to the priesthood of Paganism (Hammond, Grot., Ewald, De Wette, Hengstb., Dü sterd.) quite insufficient for the importance of the prophecy; while that of Elliott, al., which would limit it to the priesthood of the Papacy, fails notably in giving a meaning to its acts as here described, the making an image to the beast and causing men to worship it. And I saw another beast coming up out of the earth (see the preceding note), and it had two horns like a Iamb (i. e. like the two horns of a lamb: see ref. It is quite true that the absence of the article before ἀρνίῳ forbids the idea that a direct comparison is intended between this lamb-like beast, and the Lamb on Mount Sion: but it does not follow from this that no reference is made to that Lamb in the choice of the animal to which this beast is compared. I believe the choice is made to set forth the hybrid character of this second beast: see more below. The number may perhaps be of no special import, but merely inserted to complete the similarity: it, as a lamb has, had two horns), and it spoke as a dragon (here again we cannot doubt that the term is chosen on account of the dragon which has been before mentioned. It is no objection to this, that we do not hear of that dragon speaking (Dü sterd.): the character of the animal explains what kind of speech is meant, and the acts of the dragon were of that kind. And as to this second beast, though its appearance and profession are sacerdotal, its words and acts are devilish. The whole description strongly recalls to our mind our Lord’ s προσέχετεἀπὸτῶνψευδοπροφητῶν , οἵτινεςἔρχονταιπρὸςὑμᾶςἐνἐνδύμασινπροβάτων , ἔσωθενδέεἰσινλύκοιἅρπαγες , Matthew 7:15). And it worketh all the power (performs all the acts of authority) of the first beast in his presence (while the first beast is subsisting and beholding; and as the expression seems to shew, being in a relation to it of serving and upholding), and maketh the earth and those that dwell in it to worship (construction, see reff.) the first beast, whose wound of death was healed (this was formerly, ver. 4, described as the reason why the world wondered after the former beast): and worketh great miracles, so that (ἵνα depends on μεγάλα : “ miracula magna, tam magna, ut” &c. So that ἵναποιῇ = ὥστεποιεῖν . See Winer, edn. 6, § 53. 6, who as well as Dü sterd. finds fault with Bengel for recognizing here a feature of St. John’ s style. But Bengel only remarks “ ἵνα frequens Johanni particula: in omnibus suis libris non nisi semel, John 3:16. ὥστε posuit:” and this is true and applicable to the case here in hand, where ὥστε would naturally have stood,— whatever may be the minute shade of difference between the force of ἵνα as connected with the previous words in various passages. We know that the Apocalypse is written in a laxer style and more faulty Greek than either the Gospel or the Epistles: what wonder, if the use of ἵνα epexegetic be carried further in it, and from its meaning of ideal purpose be extended to detail of matter of fact? Granting the two meanings to be even as far apart as Dü sterd. insists, may we not say that the Writer who so often uses the one is just the person who, when writing less strictly, was likely to use the other? As to the fact described, it is notorious enough that the great arm of support of the sacerdotal power, pagan and papal, has ever been the claim to work miracles) he even maketh fire to come down from the heaven to the earth in the sight of men (“ hæ c magi per angelos refugas et hodie faciunt,” says Victorinus, writing in the beginning of the fourth century, before yet the Empire professed Christianity. But it is probable that this special miracle is mentioned to recall the spirit and power of Elias, and shew how the false prophet shall counterfeit the true). And he deceiveth those who dwell on the earth on account of the miracles which it has been given to him to work in the presence of the beast, ordering those who dwell on the earth to make an image to the beast (dat. commodi) who hath the stroke of the sword and lived (this part of the prophecy seems to describe the acts of the pagan sacerdotal power then presently to follow. See more below). And it was given to him to give breath (or, spirit; by inference, life) to the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should even speak, and should cause (the regular subject to ποιήσῃ is the image, not the second beast) that as many as do not worship the image of the beast, shall be slain. The Seer is now describing facts which history substantiates to us in their literal fulfilment. The image of Cæ sar was every where that which men were made to worship: it was before this that the Christian martyrs were brought to the test, and put to death if they refused the act of adoration. The words of Pliny’ s letter to Trajan are express on the point: “ cum præ eunte me deos appellarent, et imagini tuæ , quam propter hoc jusseram cum simulacris numinum afferri, thure ac vino supplicarent, præ terea maledicerent Christo, quorum nihil cogi posse dicuntur qui sunt revera Christian, dimittendos esse putavi.” Above he had said, “ perseverantes duci jussi.” And if it be said as an objection to this, that it is not an image of the Emperor but of the beast itself which is spoken of, the answer is very simple, that as the Seer himself in ch. 17:11, does not hesitate to identify one of the ἑπτὰβασιλεῖς with the beast itself, so we may fairly assume that the image of the beast for the time being would be the image of the reigning Emperor. It is not so easy to assign a meaning to the giving life and speech to the image of the beast. Victorinus gives a curious explanation: “ faciet etiam ut imago aurea Antichristo in templo Hierosolymis ponatur, et intret angelus refuga et inde voces et sortes reddat.” The allusion probably is to some lying wonders permitted to the Pagan priests to try the faith of God’ s people. We cannot help, as we read, thinking of the moving images, and winking and speaking pictures, so often employed for purposes of imposture by their far less excusable Papal successors. And he (i. e. the second beast, more naturally than the image) maketh all men, the small and the great, and the rich and the poor, and the free and the bond, that they should give them (i. e. stamp on them. The subject to δῶσιν is left uncertain: it will naturally be understood to be, those whose office it is: see reff. It evidently is not as Dü sterd., “ that they impress on themselves:” nor does this at all follow from ch. 14:9, 11, 16:2, 19:20, 20:4, which he quotes to support it, but merely that they may refuse to receive it, and by receiving it become apostates from God) a mark on their right hand (στίγματάἐστιτῶνστρατευομένωνἐνταῖςχερσίν , Æ lian. in Grot.) or upon (before, the fact of the mark being visible on the hand was prominent, and the gen. was used: now, that of the act of impression is, and the accus. is used) their forehead , [and] that no one should be able to buy or to sell, except he who has the mark, the name of the beast, or the number of his name (τὸὄνομακ .τ .λ . is in apposition with τὸχάραγμα : it is in this that the mark consists: either in the name stamped in letters, or in the number of the name thus stamped, i. e. the number which those letters make when added together according to their numerical value. The practice of thus calculating the numerical value of the letters in names was widely prevalent: see the instances collected by Mr. Elliott, vol. iii. pp. 220 ff.: and more below. This particular in the prophetic description seems to point to the commercial and spiritual interdicts which have, both by Pagan and by Papal persecutors, been laid on nonconformity: from even before the interdict of Diocletian mentioned by in his hymn on Justin Martyr (“ non illis emendi quidquam, Aut vendendi copia: nec ipsam haurire aquam Dabatur licentia, antequam sacrificarent Detestandis idolis.” Mede, p. 511) through those of the middle ages , down to the last remaining civil disabilities imposed on nonconformity in modern Papal or Protestant countries. For these last have their share in the enormities of the first and second beast in as far as they adopt or continue their practices. With regard to the circumstance of the imposition of the mark, I conceive that with the latitude here given, that it may be the name or the number, and having regard to the analogy of the mark inscribed on the saints (ch. 7:1 ff.: cf. ch. 13:1), we need not be anxious to find other than a general and figurative interpretation. As it is clear that in the case of the servants of God no actual visible mark is intended, so it may well be inferred here that the mark signifies rather conformity and addiction to the behests of the beast, than any actual stigma impressed. Certainly we fail to recognize any adequate exposition of such stigma in the sign of the Cross as propounded by Mr. Elliott (iii. 236), or in the monogram on the labarum as succeeded by the Papal cross-keys of Bp. Wordsworth (Apocalypse, Appendix G: see also his note in loc.)). Here is wisdom (these words serve to direct attention to the challenge which follows: see ver. 10, where ὧδέἐστιν is similarly used): let him who hath understanding calculate the number of the beast (the terms of the challenge serve at once to shew that the feat proposed is possible, and that it is difficult. Irenæ us’ s view, that if St. John had meant the number to be known he would have declared it, and that of Andreas, ὁχρόνοςἀποκαλύψει , are, it seems to me, excluded by these considerations. The number may be calculated: and is intended to be known): for (gives a reason why the calculation may be made) it is the number of a man (i. e. is counted as men generally count: not, as Bede, Grot., al., and recently Hofmann, Schriftb. ii. 637, the number belonging to an individual man: see against this the reff. which are decisive as to usage), and the number of it (the beast) is six hundred sixty-six (of all the hundreds of attempts which have been made in answer to the challenge, there is but one which seems to approach near enough to an adequate solution to require serious consideration. And that one is the word mentioned, though not adopted, by Irenæ us, v. 30. 3, p. 330 (the passage cited in the Prolegg. § i. par. 7), viz. λατεῖνος (the diphthong ει being, as all critical students of the Greek text know, not only an allowable way, but the usual way, of writing the long i by the Greeks of the time): (λ = 30) + (α = 1) + (τ = 300) + (ε = 5) + (ι = 10) + (ν = 50) + (ο =70) + (ς = 200) = 666. This name describes the common character of the rulers of the former Pagan Roman Empire,— “ Latini sunt qui nunc regnant,” Iren.: and, which Irenæ us could not foresee, unites under itself the character of the latter Papal Roman Empire also, as revived and kept up by the agency of its false prophet the priesthood. The Latin Empire, the Latin Church, Latin Christianity, have ever been its commonly current appellations: its language, civil and ecclesiastical, has ever been Latin: its public services, in defiance of the most obvious requisite for public worship, have ever been throughout the world conducted in Latin: there is no one word which could so completely describe its character, and at the same time unite the ancient and modern attributes of the two beasts, as this. Short of saying absolutely that this was the word in St. John’ s mind, I have the strongest persuasion that no other can be found approaching so near to a complete solution. See however the remarks on this subject in the Prolegomena, § v. par. 32, where I have after all thought it best to leave the matter in doubt). 12:18-13:10. The vision of the Beast that came up out of the sea. See Daniel 7:7, Daniel 7:8, Daniel 7:19-27, to which continual reference will be made in the Commentary. And he (the dragon) stood upon the sand of the sea (see Daniel 7:2, where the four winds of heaven are striving upon the great sea); and I saw out of the sea a wild-beast coming up, having ten horns (now put first, because they are crowned. The ten horns are found also in the fourth beast of Dan 7:7) and seven heads, and upon his horns ten diadems, and upon his heads (notice the gen. ἐπὶτῶνκεράτων and the accus. ἐπὶτὰςκεφαλάς : the reason being probably, that the crowns are simply spoken of as in position on the horns, whereas the names were inscribed on the heads, and the preposition takes the tinge of motion belonging to the act of inscription) a name of blasphemy (whether (see digest) we read plural or singular, the meaning will be the same— on each head a name. The heads are (see for the interpretation ch. 17:9, 10, where it is given by the angel) Kings, in the widest acceptation of the word; Kings, as representing their kingdoms; not necessarily individual Kings (see as above):— the name or names of blasphemy, the divine titles given to those Kings, “ Lord of the whole earth,” and the like: in the Roman form, “ Deus” or “ Divus.” Hereafter, when the great harlot succeeds to the character and symbolic details of the beast, this is carried yet further). And the beast which I saw was like to a leopard, and its feet as of a bear, and its mouth as the mouth of a lion (thus uniting in itself the three previous kingdoms of Dan 7:4 ff., the first of which was like a lion, the second like a bear, the third like a leopard; and in consequence representing, not the Roman Empire merely, but the aggregate of the Empires of this world as opposed to Christ and His kingdom). And the dragon gave to it his might and his throne and great power (i. e. this beast, this earthly persecuting power, was the vicegerent and instrument of the devil, the prince of this world, and used by him for his purposes of hostility against the remnant of the seed of the woman). And (I saw) one from among his heads as it were wounded unto death (this seems to represent the Roman pagan Empire, which having long been a head of the beast, was crushed and to all appearance exterminated), and the stroke of its death was healed (in the establishment of the Christian Roman Empire. The period now treated of is the same, introduced here by anticipation, but hereafter to be described in detail, as that during which the woman sits on the beast and guides it. Very many Commentators have explained these seven heads as individual kings, and supposed the one who was wounded to death to be Nero, and these last words to allude to the idea that Nero would return from the dead and become antichrist. But this idea was certainly not prevalent in this form at the time when the Apocalypse was written. Tacitus merely relates, that there were many rumours about Nero’ s death, “ eoque pluribus vivere eum fingentibus credentibusque,” Hist. ii. 8, and that on the strength of this, a Pseudo-Nero arose in the East, Hist. 1. ii, “ mota etiam prope Parthorum arma falsi Neronis ludibrio.” See also the citations from the Sibylline oracles, Lactantius, and Sulpicius Severus, in Dü st.’ s note. The first who mentions the idea of Nero returning from the dead, is Augustine, Civ. Dei xx. 19. 3, vol. vii. p. 686, in explaining 2 Thessalonians 2:3 ff.: “ quidam putant hoc (ver. 7) de imperio dictum fuisse Romano— ut hoc quod dixit, jam enim mysterium iniquitatis operatur, Neronem voluerit intelligi, cujus jam facta velut Antichristi videbantur. Unde non-nulli ipsum resurrecturum et futurum Antichristum suspicantur.” But it is observable that does not connect the idea with the Apocalypse. This is first done by Sulp. Severus, and completed by Victorinus, whose very words betray the origin of the idea having been from this passage itself). And the whole earth wondered after (pregnant construction for wondered at, as they followed, or gazed, after) the beast, and worshipped the dragon, because he gave the (or, his) power to the beast, and worshipped the beast, saying, Who is like to the beast? And who is able to war with him (these words are a sort of parody, in their blasphemy, on ascriptions of praise to God: cf. besides reff., Psalms 112:5; Isaiah 40:18, Isaiah 40:25, 46:5; Jeremiah 29:20 (49:19); Micah 7:18: they represent to us the relapse into all the substantial blasphemies of paganism under the resuscitated Empire of Rome, and the retention of pagan titles and forms. I may remark, that nothing in those words finds any representative in the history of the times of the Pagan Empire)? And there was given to it a mouth speaking great and blasphemous things (so we read of the little horn in Daniel 7:8): and there was given to it power to work (more probably, as in former reff., than “ to spend” merely: this meaning is indeed found in latter reff., but the places in Daniel seem to decide for us) forty-two months (the well-known period of the agency of antichrist = 3½ years = 1260 days: see Prolegomena, § v. 29 f.), and he opened his mouth (spoken, see reff., of the commencement of a series of discourses. These vv. 6, 7, in fact expand into detail that which ver. 5 gave compendiously) for blasphemies against God, to blaspheme His name and His tabernacle, which dwell in heaven (the apposition is strange, but if the καί must be omitted, the meaning is to enhance the enormity of the blasphemy by bringing out the lofty nature of God’ s holy Name and dwelling-place. With the καί , the last clause would mean that he blasphemes them that dwell in heaven, i. e. the holy angels of God. To take this as still the meaning without the καί , is to introduce into the apocalyptic style an asyndeton which is not found in it). And there was given to it to make war with the saints (see Daniel 7:21) and to conquer them (see ch. 11:7, of which this is a wider statement): and there was given to it power over every tribe and people and tongue and nation (viz. universal empire). And all shall worship it (αὐτόν , though masculine, must be referred to the θηρίον , which has been now for some time spoken of as an agent, and not to an impersonation of it by a living king) who dwell upon the earth, (every one) whose (the change into the singular arises from resolving πάντες into its component individuals) name (οὗ … αὐτοῦ , the usual Hellenistic redundance: see reff.) is not written in the book of life of the Lamb which is slain from the foundation of the world (these last words are ambiguously placed. They may belong either to γέγραπται , or to ἐσφαγμένου . The former connexion is taken by Hammond, Bengel, Heinr., Ewald, Zü llig, De Wette, Hengstb., Dü sterd. But the other is far more obvious and natural: and had it not been for the apparent difficulty of the sense thus conveyed, the going so far back as to γέγραπται for a connexion would never have been thought of. See this remarkably shewn in the Catena: ὧνγέγραπται , ἀπὸκαταβολῆςκόσμουγέγραπται · οὕτωγὰρδεῖνοεῖν , οὐχὡςἡγραφὴἔχει · ὅτιμηδὲἀπὸκαταβολῆςκόσμουἡτοῦἀρνίουσφαγή . The difficulty however is but apparent: 1 Peter 1:19, 1 Peter 1:20 says more fully the same thing. That death of Christ which was foreordained from the foundation of the world, is said to have taken place in the counsels of Him with whom the end and the beginning are one. Ch. 17:8, which is cited by De W. as decisive for his view, is irrelevant. Of course where simply the writing in the book of life from the foundation of the world is expressed, no other element is to be introduced: but it does not therefore follow, that where, as here, other elements are by the construction introduced, that, and that alone is to be understood). 9, 10. These verses bear various meanings, according to the reading which we adopt. If the rec. be taken, they express a consolation to the persecuted saints in the form of a jus talionis: the judgment of God will overtake the persecutors, and in that form in which their persecution was exercised. If we take the reading in the text, they form a prophetic declaration how it shall fare with the saints in the day of persecution, and declare also that in holy suffering of captivity and death consists their faith and patience. The latter appears to me, both from critical and contextual considerations, by far the more eligible. Thus we have what is so frequent in this book, an O. T. citation (see below): and all falls into its place in connexion with the victorious war of the beast against the saints: whereas the other declaration is at least out of place in the context. If any man hath an ear, let him hear (see reff. This notice is given to bespeak solemn attention to what follows, as warning Christians of their fate in the days of the beast’ s persecution). If any one is for captivity, into captivity he goeth: if any to be slain with (see reff. and note on ch. 6:8) the sword, that (i. e. it is necessary that: δεῖ , as the other reading supplies) he should be slain with the sword (so ref. Jer., “ Such as are for death, to death: and such as are for the sword, to the sword: and such as are for the famine, to the famine: and such as are for captivity, to captivity:” cf. also Jeremiah 43:11 and Zechariah 11:9. As that was the order and process of God’ s anger in his judgments on his people of old, so shall the issue be with the saints in the war of persecution which the beast shall wage with them). Here is (reff., viz. in the endurance of these persecutions) the endurance and the faith of the saints. 11-18. The second wild-beast, the reviver and the upholder of the first. It may be well to premise a few remarks, tending to the right understanding of this portion of the prophecy. 1) These two beasts are identical as to genus: they are both θηρία , ravaging powers, hostile to God’ s flock and fold. 2) They are diverse in origin. The former came up out of the sea: that is, if we go back to the symbolism of Daniel, was an empire, rising up out of confusion into order and life: the latter comes out of the earth: i. e. we may not unreasonably say, arises out of human society and its progress: which as interpreted by the context, will import its origin and gradual development during the reign and progress of the secular empire denoted by the former beast. 3) The second beast is, in its zeal and action, entirely subsidiary to the first. It wields its authority, works miracles in its support, causes men to make and to worship its image; nay, itself is lost in the splendour and importance of the other. 4) An important distinction exists between the two beasts, in that this second one has two horns like a lamb. In other words, this second beast puts on a mild and lamb-like appearance, which the other did not. But it speaks as a dragon: its words, which carry its real character, are fierce and unrelenting: while it professes that which is gentle, its behests are cruel. And now I may appeal to the reader, whether all these requisites do not meet in that great wasting Power which arose, not out of anarchy and conquest, but out of men’ s daily life and habits, out of and in the presence of the last form of the secular power, which was the Empire of Pagan Rome; I mean, the sacerdotal persecuting power, which, gentle in its aspect and professions, was yet cruel in its actions; which did all the deeds of the Empire, in its presence, which kept up its image, its laws, its formulæ , its privileges; which, coming in as it did by a corrupt and ambitious priesthood, deceived by its miracles the dwellers on earth, and by them maintained the image of the despotic secular power? Surely it is this Latin Christianity, in its ecclesiastico-secular form, not identical with, but as preparing the way for, the great apostasy, helping, so to speak, to place the woman on the beast, as in ch. 17, that is here depicted before us. It is this which, owing its power in the main to imposture and unwarrantably assumed spiritual authority, deserves best the name of the false prophet, expressly given to this second beast in ch. 19:20. Nor would I limit the interpretation, as has generally been done, by dividing off Pagan from Christian. Primarily, this second beast plainly sets forth the Pagan sacerdotal power; this it was that made the image of the Emperors, that compelled Christians to worship that image, that wrought signs and wonders by its omens and magic. But as the first beast, still subsisting, has passed into a so-called Christian Roman Empire, so has the second beast into a so-called Christian priesthood, the veritable inheritor of pagan rites, images, and superstitions; actually the continuators, nomine mutato, of the same worship in the same places; that of the Virgin for that of Venus, Cosmas and Damian for Romulus and Remus, the image of Peter for that of Jupiter Tonans: lamb-like in profession, with the names and appearances of Christianity, but dragon-like in word and act. And this was surely never more strikingly shewn than at the time when I am writing (Jan. 1860), when the Papal priesthood is zealously combining in the suicidal act of upholding the temporal power as necessary to the spiritual pre-eminence of their “ Lord God the Pope.” So that I believe the interpretation of the second beast to be, the sacerdotal persecuting power, pagan and Christian, as the first is the secular persecuting power, pagan or Christian. I conceive the view which would limit it to the priesthood of Paganism (Hammond, Grot., Ewald, De Wette, Hengstb., Dü sterd.) quite insufficient for the importance of the prophecy; while that of Elliott, al., which would limit it to the priesthood of the Papacy, fails notably in giving a meaning to its acts as here described, the making an image to the beast and causing men to worship it. And I saw another beast coming up out of the earth (see the preceding note), and it had two horns like a Iamb (i. e. like the two horns of a lamb: see ref. It is quite true that the absence of the article before ἀρνίῳ forbids the idea that a direct comparison is intended between this lamb-like beast, and the Lamb on Mount Sion: but it does not follow from this that no reference is made to that Lamb in the choice of the animal to which this beast is compared. I believe the choice is made to set forth the hybrid character of this second beast: see more below. The number may perhaps be of no special import, but merely inserted to complete the similarity: it, as a lamb has, had two horns), and it spoke as a dragon (here again we cannot doubt that the term is chosen on account of the dragon which has been before mentioned. It is no objection to this, that we do not hear of that dragon speaking (Dü sterd.): the character of the animal explains what kind of speech is meant, and the acts of the dragon were of that kind. And as to this second beast, though its appearance and profession are sacerdotal, its words and acts are devilish. The whole description strongly recalls to our mind our Lord’ s προσέχετεἀπὸτῶνψευδοπροφητῶν , οἵτινεςἔρχονταιπρὸςὑμᾶςἐνἐνδύμασινπροβάτων , ἔσωθενδέεἰσινλύκοιἅρπαγες , Matthew 7:15). And it worketh all the power (performs all the acts of authority) of the first beast in his presence (while the first beast is subsisting and beholding; and as the expression seems to shew, being in a relation to it of serving and upholding), and maketh the earth and those that dwell in it to worship (construction, see reff.) the first beast, whose wound of death was healed (this was formerly, ver. 4, described as the reason why the world wondered after the former beast): and worketh great miracles, so that (ἵνα depends on μεγάλα : “ miracula magna, tam magna, ut” &c. So that ἵναποιῇ = ὥστεποιεῖν . See Winer, edn. 6, § 53. 6, who as well as Dü sterd. finds fault with Bengel for recognizing here a feature of St. John’ s style. But Bengel only remarks “ ἵνα frequens Johanni particula: in omnibus suis libris non nisi semel, John 3:16. ὥστε posuit:” and this is true and applicable to the case here in hand, where ὥστε would naturally have stood,— whatever may be the minute shade of difference between the force of ἵνα as connected with the previous words in various passages. We know that the Apocalypse is written in a laxer style and more faulty Greek than either the Gospel or the Epistles: what wonder, if the use of ἵνα epexegetic be carried further in it, and from its meaning of ideal purpose be extended to detail of matter of fact? Granting the two meanings to be even as far apart as Dü sterd. insists, may we not say that the Writer who so often uses the one is just the person who, when writing less strictly, was likely to use the other? As to the fact described, it is notorious enough that the great arm of support of the sacerdotal power, pagan and papal, has ever been the claim to work miracles) he even maketh fire to come down from the heaven to the earth in the sight of men (“ hæ c magi per angelos refugas et hodie faciunt,” says Victorinus, writing in the beginning of the fourth century, before yet the Empire professed Christianity. But it is probable that this special miracle is mentioned to recall the spirit and power of Elias, and shew how the false prophet shall counterfeit the true). And he deceiveth those who dwell on the earth on account of the miracles which it has been given to him to work in the presence of the beast, ordering those who dwell on the earth to make an image to the beast (dat. commodi) who hath the stroke of the sword and lived (this part of the prophecy seems to describe the acts of the pagan sacerdotal power then presently to follow. See more below). And it was given to him to give breath (or, spirit; by inference, life) to the image of the beast, that the image of the beast should even speak, and should cause (the regular subject to ποιήσῃ is the image, not the second beast) that as many as do not worship the image of the beast, shall be slain. The Seer is now describing facts which history substantiates to us in their literal fulfilment. The image of Cæ sar was every where that which men were made to worship: it was before this that the Christian martyrs were brought to the test, and put to death if they refused the act of adoration. The words of Pliny’ s letter to Trajan are express on the point: “ cum præ eunte me deos appellarent, et imagini tuæ , quam propter hoc jusseram cum simulacris numinum afferri, thure ac vino supplicarent, præ terea maledicerent Christo, quorum nihil cogi posse dicuntur qui sunt revera Christian, dimittendos esse putavi.” Above he had said, “ perseverantes duci jussi.” And if it be said as an objection to this, that it is not an image of the Emperor but of the beast itself which is spoken of, the answer is very simple, that as the Seer himself in ch. 17:11, does not hesitate to identify one of the ἑπτὰβασιλεῖς with the beast itself, so we may fairly assume that the image of the beast for the time being would be the image of the reigning Emperor. It is not so easy to assign a meaning to the giving life and speech to the image of the beast. Victorinus gives a curious explanation: “ faciet etiam ut imago aurea Antichristo in templo Hierosolymis ponatur, et intret angelus refuga et inde voces et sortes reddat.” The allusion probably is to some lying wonders permitted to the Pagan priests to try the faith of God’ s people. We cannot help, as we read, thinking of the moving images, and winking and speaking pictures, so often employed for purposes of imposture by their far less excusable Papal successors. And he (i. e. the second beast, more naturally than the image) maketh all men, the small and the great, and the rich and the poor, and the free and the bond, that they should give them (i. e. stamp on them. The subject to δῶσιν is left uncertain: it will naturally be understood to be, those whose office it is: see reff. It evidently is not as Dü sterd., “ that they impress on themselves:” nor does this at all follow from ch. 14:9, 11, 16:2, 19:20, 20:4, which he quotes to support it, but merely that they may refuse to receive it, and by receiving it become apostates from God) a mark on their right hand (στίγματάἐστιτῶνστρατευομένωνἐνταῖςχερσίν , Æ lian. in Grot.) or upon (before, the fact of the mark being visible on the hand was prominent, and the gen. was used: now, that of the act of impression is, and the accus. is used) their forehead , [and] that no one should be able to buy or to sell, except he who has the mark, the name of the beast, or the number of his name (τὸὄνομακ .τ .λ . is in apposition with τὸχάραγμα : it is in this that the mark consists: either in the name stamped in letters, or in the number of the name thus stamped, i. e. the number which those letters make when added together according to their numerical value. The practice of thus calculating the numerical value of the letters in names was widely prevalent: see the instances collected by Mr. Elliott, vol. iii. pp. 220 ff.: and more below. This particular in the prophetic description seems to point to the commercial and spiritual interdicts which have, both by Pagan and by Papal persecutors, been laid on nonconformity: from even before the interdict of Diocletian mentioned by in his hymn on Justin Martyr (“ non illis emendi quidquam, Aut vendendi copia: nec ipsam haurire aquam Dabatur licentia, antequam sacrificarent Detestandis idolis.” Mede, p. 511) through those of the middle ages , down to the last remaining civil disabilities imposed on nonconformity in modern Papal or Protestant countries. For these last have their share in the enormities of the first and second beast in as far as they adopt or continue their practices. With regard to the circumstance of the imposition of the mark, I conceive that with the latitude here given, that it may be the name or the number, and having regard to the analogy of the mark inscribed on the saints (ch. 7:1 ff.: cf. ch. 13:1), we need not be anxious to find other than a general and figurative interpretation. As it is clear that in the case of the servants of God no actual visible mark is intended, so it may well be inferred here that the mark signifies rather conformity and addiction to the behests of the beast, than any actual stigma impressed. Certainly we fail to recognize any adequate exposition of such stigma in the sign of the Cross as propounded by Mr. Elliott (iii. 236), or in the monogram on the labarum as succeeded by the Papal cross-keys of Bp. Wordsworth (Apocalypse, Appendix G: see also his note in loc.)). Here is wisdom (these words serve to direct attention to the challenge which follows: see ver. 10, where ὧδέἐστιν is similarly used): let him who hath understanding calculate the number of the beast (the terms of the challenge serve at once to shew that the feat proposed is possible, and that it is difficult. Irenæ us’ s view, that if St. John had meant the number to be known he would have declared it, and that of Andreas, ὁχρόνοςἀποκαλύψει , are, it seems to me, excluded by these considerations. The number may be calculated: and is intended to be known): for (gives a reason why the calculation may be made) it is the number of a man (i. e. is counted as men generally count: not, as Bede, Grot., al., and recently Hofmann, Schriftb. ii. 637, the number belonging to an individual man: see against this the reff. which are decisive as to usage), and the number of it (the beast) is six hundred sixty-six (of all the hundreds of attempts which have been made in answer to the challenge, there is but one which seems to approach near enough to an adequate solution to require serious consideration. And that one is the word mentioned, though not adopted, by Irenæ us, v. 30. 3, p. 330 (the passage cited in the Prolegg. § i. par. 7), viz. λατεῖνος (the diphthong ει being, as all critical students of the Greek text know, not only an allowable way, but the usual way, of writing the long i by the Greeks of the time): (λ = 30) + (α = 1) + (τ = 300) + (ε = 5) + (ι = 10) + (ν = 50) + (ο =70) + (ς = 200) = 666. This name describes the common character of the rulers of the former Pagan Roman Empire,— “ Latini sunt qui nunc regnant,” Iren.: and, which Irenæ us could not foresee, unites under itself the character of the latter Papal Roman Empire also, as revived and kept up by the agency of its false prophet the priesthood. The Latin Empire, the Latin Church, Latin Christianity, have ever been its commonly current appellations: its language, civil and ecclesiastical, has ever been Latin: its public services, in defiance of the most obvious requisite for public worship, have ever been throughout the world conducted in Latin: there is no one word which could so completely describe its character, and at the same time unite the ancient and modern attributes of the two beasts, as this. Short of saying absolutely that this was the word in St. John’ s mind, I have the strongest persuasion that no other can be found approaching so near to a complete solution. See however the remarks on this subject in the Prolegomena, § v. par. 32, where I have after all thought it best to leave the matter in doubt). Ch. 14:1-20. The contrast: the blessedness, and the counter-agency of the saints of God. The harvest and the vintage of the earth. This is not entirely another vision, but an introduction of a new element, one of comfort and joy, upon the scene of the last. And thus it must be viewed: with reference to the persecution by the beast which is alluded to in its course, vv. 9 ff. It is also anticipatory, first containing reference to the mystic Babylon, hereafter to become the subject of prophecy in detail; and to the consummation of punishment and reward, also to be treated in detail hereafter. It is general in its character, reaching forward close to the time of the end, treating compendiously of the torment of the apostates and the blessedness of the holy dead, and leading, by its concluding section, which treats of the harvest and the vintage of the earth, to the vision of the seven last vials, now immediately to follow. It naturally divides itself into three sections: of which the first is, 1-5. The Lamb on Mount Sion, and his hundred and forty-four thousand. And I saw, and beheld the Lamb (viz., the same which before was seen in the midst of the throne, ch. 5:6 al.) standing upon (see on this accus., when the super-position is first mentioned, note, ch. 4:2) the mount Sion (as in ch. 11, the holy city is introduced as the seat of God’ s true Church and worship, so by a similar figure (not the same, for thus Mount Sion would be outside the ναός , and thus given to the Gentiles) the holy mountain Sion is now chosen for the site of the display of God’ s chosen ones with Christ, the Son of David, whose city Sion was), and with Him an hundred and forty-four thousand, having His name and the name of His Father (observe the tacit assumption that all understand Who is imported by the Lamb) written on their foreheads (first observe the contrast: the nations of the earth, constrained to receive the mark of the beast on their forehead and hand, and the Lamb’ s elect, marked with His name and that of His Father. The question next meets us, Are these 144,000 identical with the same number in ch. 7:4? This question clearly must not be answered merely by the absence of a defining article here, to identify these χιλιάδες as those there spoken of. For it might well be, that the reader should be meant to identify the two in his mind, by recognizing the marks common to the two, without the note of identification being expressly set in the text. The presumption certainly is that the same number occurring here, representing as there the elect and first-fruits of the church, here as there also inscribed on their foreheads with the seal of God in the one case, and His Name in the other, must be descriptive of the same body of persons. And this view, if acquiesced in here, will reflect back considerable light on that former vision of the sealing in ch. 7. Those, as these, will represent the first-fruits or choice ones among God’ s people, as indeed we have treated them in this commentary, and not the totality of those who shall form the great multitude which no man can number. These, as those, are taken to represent the people of God: their introduction serves to place before us the church on the holy hill of Sion, where God has placed His King, as an introduction to the description of her agency in preaching the everlasting Gospel, and her faithfulness amidst persecutions). And I heard a voice out of heaven as a voice of many waters (reff.), and as a voice of great thunder (ch. 6:1): and the voice which I heard (was) as of harpers harping with (the ἐν of investiture, cf. ch. 6:8, 9:19 and notes) their harps. And they sing [as it were] a new song (i. e. if the ὡς be retained, they sing what sounded like a melody unheard before. The subject to ᾄδουσιν is of course not the 144,000, but the heavenly harpers. On the subject of their song, see below) before the throne and before the four living-beings and the elders (the whole heavenly symbolism remaining as before, while the visions regarding God’ s temple and Mount Sion and the holy city are going forward. I would call the attention of the reader to the fact, essential to the right understanding of the vision, that the harpers and the song are in heaven, the 144,000 on earth): and no one was able to learn the song (to apprehend its melody and meaning, so as to accompany it and bear a part in the chorus) except the hundred and forty-four thousands who (the gender is πρὸςτὸσημαινόμενον , see ref.) were purchased (reff. and ver. 4) from the earth (the song has regard to matters of trial and triumph, of deep joy and heavenly purity of heart, which none other among men but these pure and holy ones are capable of apprehending. The sweetest and most skilful harmonies convey no pleasure to, nor are they appreciated by an uneducated ear: whereas the experienced musician finds in every chord the most exquisite enjoyment. The unskilled ear, even though naturally distinctive of musical sounds, could not learn nor reproduce them: but both these can be done by those who have ears to hear them. Even so this heavenly song speaks only to the virgin heart, and can be learnt only by those who accompany the Lamb whithersoever He goeth). These are they who were not (the aor. shews that their course is ended and looked back on as a thing past: and serves to confute all interpretations which regard them as representing saints while in the midst of their earthly conflict and trial) defiled with women (see below); for they are (always were and have kept themselves till the time present) virgins (there are two ways of understanding these words. Either they may be figurative, merely implying that these pure ones lived in all chastity, whether in single or in married life, and incurred no pollution (ref. 2 Cor.): or they may be meant literally, that these purest ones had lived in that state of which St. Paul says 1 Corinthians 7:1, καλὸνἀνθρώπῳγυναικὸςμὴἅπτεσθαι . And as between these two meanings I conceive that the somewhat emphatic position of μετὰγυναικῶν goes some way to decide. It is not ἐμολύνθησαν , the fact of impurity in allowed intercourse, but μετὰγυναικῶν , that is put forward, the fact of commerce with women. I would therefore believe that in the description of these who are the first-fruits from the earth, the feature of virginity is to be taken in its literal meaning. Nor need any difficulty be found in this. It is on all hands granted that he who is married in the Lord enters into holy relations of which the single have no experience, and goes through blessed and elevating degrees of self-sacrifice, and loving allowance, and preferring others before himself. And as every step of grace assured is a step of glory secured, there is no doubt that the holy married servants of God shall have a peculiar entrance into the fulness of that future Kingdom’ s employ, which will not be the lot of the single: seeing that in this matter also, the childhood of this state will be the father of the manhood of that one. But neither on the other hand can it be denied that the state of holy virginity has also its peculiar blessings and exemptions. Of these, the Apostle himself speaks of that absence of distraction from the Lord’ s work, which is apt to beset the married, busy as they are with the cares of a household and with pleasing one another. And another and primary blessing is, that in them that fountain of carnal desire has never been opened, which is so apt to be a channel for unholy thoughts and an access for the tempter. The virgins may thus have missed the victory over the lusts of the flesh: but they have also in great part escaped the conflict. Theirs is not the triumph of the toil-worn and stained soldier, but the calm and the unspottedness of those who have kept from the strife. We are perhaps more like that which the Lord intended us to be: but they are more like the Lord Himself. And if He is to have round Him a peculiar and closer band, standing with Him on Mount Sion, none will surely grudge this place to those who were not defiled with women. Among these will be not only those who have lived and served Him in holy virginity, but also the dear children whom He has claimed from us for Himself, the youths and maidens who were gathered to His side before the strife began: before their tongues had learned the language of social falsehood, or their good names been tarnished with the breath of inevitable calumny. There is one meaning which these words will not bear, and which it is surprising that any Commentator should ever have attached to them; viz. that μετὰγυναικῶν refers to the woman mentioned below, ch. 17. So Bp. Wordsworth, Lectures, p. 284: “ They have not been defiled with women. What women? it may be asked. If we proceed, we read of the woman seated on the Beast, and of the harlotry of the woman, with whom the Kings of the earth commit fornication. And soon we see her displayed in all her meretricious splendour. There then is the reply.” Similarly in his notes ad loc. The fact, that an indefinite plural sometimes points to a singular, is, as in all other figures of speech, substantiated by the undoubted requirements of the particular context: whereas here the whole context is against it: the following παρθένοιγάρεἰσιν carrying its decisive condemnation): these (are) they that follow the Lamb wheresoever (for this use of ὅπου , see reff.) he goeth , Bengel, De Wette, Hengstb., Ebrard: but this exposition is surely out of place here, where not their life of conflict, but their state of glory is described. The words, as (in a beautiful passage, De sancta Virginitate, c. 27, vol. vi. p. 410 f., in which however he rhetorically mingles both meanings), Andreas, Zü llig, Stern, Dü sterd., are used of special privilege of nearness to the Person of the Lamb in glory): these were purchased from men as a first-fruit to God and to the Lamb (all have been thus purchased: but these specially as and for the purpose of being a first-fruit. The ref. James treats of a different matter, the purchase of all the redeemed as the first-fruits of creation. But these are a first-fruit among the purchased themselves), and in their mouth was not found falsehood: they are blameless (the Apostle has before him the words of Psa 14:1 ff., so strikingly similar: τίςκατασκηνώσειἐντῷὄρειτῷἁγίῳσου ; πορευόμενοςἄμωμος , … λαλῶνἀλήθειανἐνκαρδίᾳαὐτοῦ , ὃςοὐκἐδόλωσενἐνγλώσσῃαὐτοῦ . These stand on Mount Sion, with Him who eminently fulfilled this character, and being in all things like Him). 6-13. Three Angels appear in midheaven, announcing three details of the period of the coming prophecy. A proclamation of the blessedness of the holy dead. These four announcements form the text and the compendium of the rest of the book: see Prolegg. § v. parr. 57 ff. And I saw an[other] angel (besides those already mentioned) flying in mid-heaven (see ch. 8:13), having the everlasting gospel (such and no other is the meaning of εὐαγγέλιοναἰώνιον , notwithstanding that it is anarthrous. From this latter circumstance no argument can be derived in the case of a word which had become so technical an one: even in Romans 1:1, we have ἀφωρισμένοςεἰςεὐαγγέλιονθεοῦ : and in no place in the N. T. does the word occur in any other than the technical sense of “ the Gospel.” Besides which, the epithet αἰώνιος here, if nothing else, fixes it to this meaning. Dü sterd., wishing to evade the prophetic sense, would render it, a message of good tidings (viz. regarding the Lord’ s coming) determined by God from everlasting. And so Grot. , Ewald, Zü llig, Hengstb., al. I should have thought such a rendering only needed mentioning to be repudiated. Ch. 10:7, which is adduced to justify it, is quite beside the purpose. See there. The epithet αἰώνιος , here only applied to the Gospel, belongs to it as from everlasting to everlasting, like Him whose word it is: in contrast to the enemies of God whose destruction is in view) to preach (see reff.) to (“ over,” throughout the extent of, and thus “ upon.” Or we may justify it as in reff., by the signification “ with reference to,” “ towards.” Ch. 10:11, which is referred to by Dü sterd., is not to the point) those that sit (reff.) upon the earth, and to every nation and tribe and tongue and people , saying with a loud voice, Fear God and give Him glory (the message of repentance ever accompanies the hearing of the Gospel among the nations; cf. the first preaching of our Lord and of His Forerunner, Matthew 4:17, Matthew 3:2, and St. Paul’ s message to the Thessalonians, 1 Thessalonians 1:9), because the season of His judgment is come (see the citation from Mat_24 above: the time of the end is close at hand when this great era of Christian missions is inaugurated: see below): and worship Him who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and fountains of waters (i. e. turn from idols and vanities to serve the living and true God. The division of the waters into the sea and the fountains is one kept up through this prophecy: cf. ch. 8:8-11, 16:3, 4). And another second angel followed (“ Quot res nunciandæ , totidem nuncii,” of Grot., is not strictly correct, the last being announced merely by a voice in heaven. But it belongs to the solemnity of this series of proclamations that a separate place and marked distinction should dignify each of them) saying, Babylon the great is fallen, [is fallen] (aor. of that which is past; only to be expressed in English by a perfect), which hath given all the nations to drink of the wine of the wrath of her fornication (two things are mingled: 1) the wine of her fornication, of which all nations have drunk, ch. 17:2; and 2) the wine of the wrath of God which He shall give her to drink, ver. 10, and ch. 16:19. The latter is the retribution for the former: the former turns into the latter: they are treated as one and the same. Grot. and Ewald would render θυμός venenum; and Ewald and Zü llig understand by οἴνουτοῦθυμοῦ , vini fervidi, neither of which the words will bear. The whole is from Jer_51 (28):7, 8, where Babylon is a cup in the Lord’ s hand of which the nations are made to drink. This is the first mention of Babylon, hereafter to be so much spoken of. I reserve treatment of the interpretation till ch. 17: only mentioning by anticipation that Rome, pagan and papal, but principally papal, is intended). And another third angel followed them saying with a loud voice, If any one worshippeth the beast and his image (see above, ch. 13:15), and receiveth the mark on his forehead or upon his hand (ch. 13:16), he also (καί either 1) may be quasi-redundant, introducing the apodosis merely as an addition to the protasis, or 2) may mean, as well as Babylon. The former sense seems to me the more probable) shall drink (we have the second person πίεσαι of the same future form in Luke 17:8: see also Psalms 74:8, cited below) of the wine of the wrath of God, which is mingled (i. e. as E.V. poured into the cup. From the almost universal custom of mixing wine with water, the common term for preparing wine, putting it into the cup, came to be κεράννυμι . Hence the apparent contradiction in terms here, τοῦκεκερασμένουἀκράτου (and in Psalms 74:8 below). On Od. ε . 93, κέρασσεδὲνέκταρἐρυθρόν , Eustathius says, οὐδηλοῖκρᾶμάτι , ἀλλ ʼ ἀντὶτοῦἐνέχεικεῖται . See Wetst., who gives several citations in which κεράννυμι itself is derived from κέρας , a drinking-horn) pure (unmixed: cf. Galen in Wetst., οἶνονἄκρατονεἶναιλέγομεν , ᾧμὴμέμικταιτὸὕδωρ , ἢπαντάπασινὀλίγονμέμικται . The figure of the cup of the Lord’ s wrath is found in ref. Ps., ποτήριονἐνχειρὶκυρίου , οἴνουἀκράτουπλῆρεςκεράσματος .… πίονταιπάντεςοἱἁμαρτωλοὶτῆςγῆς , from which this is evidently taken) in the cup of His anger, and shall be tormented with fire and brimstone in the presence of the angels and in the presence of the Lamb (see ch. 20:10, and ref. Isa. from which the imagery comes. De Wette is certainly wrong in interpreting ἐνώπιον “ nach dem Urtheile,” “ in the judgment of.” It is literal, and the meaning as in Luke 16:23 ff., that the torments are visible to the angels and the Lamb). And the smoke of their torment goeth up to ages of ages (see ref. Isa., and Genesis 19:28, which doubtless is the fountain-head: also ch. 19:3): and they have not rest (from torment) day and night who worship the beast and his image; and whoever (from speaking collectively the solemn declaration becomes even more solemn by individualizing) receives the mark of his name. Here (viz. in the inference to be drawn from the certainty of everlasting torment to all who worship the beast or receive his mark: that all the saints of God must refuse to do either) is the endurance of the saints, who keep (the independent nom. construction, see reff.) the commandments of God and the faith of Jesus (gen. objective, which has Him for its object: compare ref. Mark). And I heard a voice out of heaven (whose, is not told us, and it is in vain to speculate: certainly not, as Hengstb., from the spirits of the just themselves. The γράψον would rather point to the angel who reveals the visions to the Seer, ch. 1:1, and compare ch. 4:1, and 19:9), saying, Write, Blessed are the dead who die in the Lord henceforth (the connexion is not difficult. The mention of the endurance of the saints brings with it the certainty of persecution unto death. The present proclamation declares the blessedness of all who die not only in persecution, but in any manner, in the Lord, in the faith and obedience of Christ. And the special command to write this, conveys special comfort to those in all ages of the church who should read it. But it is not so easy to assign a fit meaning to ἀπ ʼ ἄρτι . That it belongs to the former sentence, not to the following one, is I conceive plain: few will be found to join with Lambert Bos, Exercitt. p. 209, in connecting it to ναί , and making it = ἀπηρτισμένως , absoluté . And, thus joined with the former sentence, it must express some reason why this blessedness is to be more completely realized from this time when it a proclaimed, than it was before. Now this reason will quickly appear, if we consider the particular time, in connexion with which the proclamation is made. The harvest of the earth is about to be reaped; the vintage of the earth to be gathered. At this time it is, that the complete blessedness of the holy dead commences: when the garner is filled and the chaff cast out. And that not on account of their deliverance from any purgatorial fire, but because of the completion of this number of their brethren, and the full capacities of bliss brought in by the resurrection. Nor can it legitimately be objected to this, that the pres. part. ἀποθνήσκοντες requires a continuance of that which is imported by it: that the deaths implied must follow after the proclamation. For no doubt this would be so, the proclamation itself being anticipatory, and the harvest not yet actually come: but on the other hand so much must hardly be built upon the pres. part., which is so often used to designate a class only, not to fix a time). Yea, saith the Spirit (the utterance of the voice from heaven still continues. The affirmation of the Spirit (reff.) ratifies the blessedness proclaimed, and assigns a reason for it), that they shall rest (the ἵνα gives the ground of the μακάριοι , and the construction with an indic. fut. is a mixed one compounded of “ that they may,” and “ in that they shall.” The future ἀναπαήσονται from ἀναπαύω is formed as κατακαήσομαι from κατακαύω . It seems not to be elsewhere found) from their labours: for their works follow with them . 14-20. The vision of the harvest and the vintage. 14-16. The harvest. And I saw, and behold a white cloud, and upon the cloud (ἐπί with accus. on first mention, see ch. 4:2 note), one sitting like to the Son of man (i. e. to Christ, see ch. 1:13 note. This clearly is our Lord Himself, as there), having upon his head a golden crown (in token of His victory being finally gained: see ch. 19:12) and in His hand a sharp sickle. And another angel (besides the three angels before mentioned: no inference can be drawn from this that the Sitter on the cloud is a mere angel) came out of the temple, crying out in a loud voice to him that sat upon the cloud, Put forth (send = ἀποστέλλειν , ref. Mark. De W.’ s objection, that the sitter on the cloud cannot be Christ Himself, because He would not be introduced receiving a command from an angel, may be well answered, as Dü sterd., that the angel is only the messenger of the will of God. And I may add what to me makes this reply undoubtedly valid, that the command is one regarding the times and seasons, which the Father hath kept in his own power) thy sickle (the whole is a remembrance of our Lord’ s own saying in ref. Mark: see below) and reap: because the time to reap is come, because the harvest of the earth (θερισμός for that which is to be reaped: as in the first ref.) is dried , and Pope Gregory X. does not seem really to exist. The passage of Hermas, book iii. sim. 3, 4; Luke 23:31; John 15:6, do not apply; trees, and not grain, being there spoken of). And he that sat upon the cloud put in (reff.) his sickle upon (into, from above) the earth, and the earth was reaped (to what does this harvest refer? Is it the ingathering of the wicked, or of the saints, or of both together? Each of these has examples in Scripture symbolism. The first, in Jeremiah 51:33, where it is said of Babylon, “ It is time to thresh her, yet a little while and the time of her harvest is come:” and as appears, Joe 3:13, though the reference seems rather there to be to the vintage, and the LXX render ק ָ צ ִ י ר τρυγητός : the second, in Matthew 9:37, Matthew 9:38; Mark 4:29; Luke 10:2; John 4:35: the third, in Matthew 13:30, Matthew 13:39. The verdict of Commentators is very much divided. There are circumstances in the context which tell both ways. The parallelism with the vintage, which follows, seems to favour a harvest of the wicked: but then on the other hand, if so, what is the distinction between the two ingatherings? And why do we read of the casting into the winepress of God’ s wrath in the second case, and of no corresponding feature in the other? Again, why is the agency so different— the Son of man on the white cloud with the golden crown in the one case, the mere angel in the other? Besides, the two gatherings seem quite distinct. The former is over before the other begins. On the whole then, though I would not pronounce decidedly, I must incline to think that the harvest is the ingathering of the saints, God’ s harvest, reaped from the earth: described here thus generally, before the vintage of wrath which follows. And thus we have at least these two visions in harmony with the character of this section, which contains the mingled agency and fortunes of the Church and of its enemies; thus this harvest answers to the great preaching of the everlasting gospel above, vv. 6, 7, while the following vintage fulfils the denunciations of wrath on those who worship the image or receive the mark of the beast, vv. 8, 11. And thus too we bring this description into harmony with our Lord’ s important parable in Mark 4:29, where the very words are used of the agency of Christ Himself when the work of grace is ripe, whether in the individual or in the church. But while thus inclined, I will not deny that the other view, and that which unites both, have very much to be said for them). 17-20. The vintage of wrath. And another angel (the ἄλλος may perhaps refer to the three angels who have already appeared in this vision: or, which is more probable, referring to the last-mentioned Agent, may be a general term, not necessarily implying that He was a mere angel) came out from the temple which was in heaven (from which come forth God’ s judgments: see ch. 11:19), having himself also (as well as that other: but the καὶαὐτός rather raises a distinction between the two personages than sets them on an equality: there is some slight degree of strangeness, after what has gone before, in this angel having a sickle) a sharp sickle. And another angel came out from the altar (viz. that elsewhere several times mentioned, ch. 6:9, 8:3, 16:7, in connexion with the fulfilment of God’ s judgments in answer to the prayers of His saints), he who hath power over the fire (viz. that on the altar; the same angel who is introduced ch. 8:3-5 as presenting the prayers of the saints, and casting some of the fire of the altar to the earth as introductory to the judgments of the trumpets), and he cried with a great cry to him who had the sharp sickle (it is to be observed that the whole description of this angel, coming from the altar of vengeance, differs widely from any thing in the former part of the vision, and favours the idea that this vintage is of a different nature from that harvest), saying, Put in thy sharp sickle, and gather the bunches of the vine of the earth, because her grapes are ripe. And the angel (no such expression is used above, ver. 16. There it is ὁκαθήμενοςἐπὶτῆςνεφέλης . All these signs of difference are worthy of notice) put in (reff.) his sickle into the earth, and gathered the vine of the earth, and cast (viz. what he had gathered) into the great winepress of the wrath of God (the curious combination, τὴνληνὸν … τὸνμέγαν , is only to be accounted for by an uncertainty in the gender of the substantive (it is masc. Genesis 30:38, Genesis 30:41 ed. Rom. See Winer, edn. 6, § 59. 4, b), and perhaps a tendency, when emphatically subjoining an epithet describing greatness, to substitute the worthier gender. Any thing corresponding to this feature is entirely wanting in the previous description of the harvest. See on it, ch. 19:15, and the prophetic passages in reff. especially Isa. from which the symbolism comes). And the winepress was trodden (reff.) outside the city (see below), and blood (so Isaiah 63:3) came forth from the winepress as far as to the bits of the horses, to the distance (ref.) of a thousand six hundred stadii (it is exceedingly difficult to say what the meaning is, further than that the idea of a tremendous final act of vengeance is denoted. The city evidently = ἡπόλιςἡἔξωθεν of ch. 11:2 (not that of ib. 8, see note there), viz. Jerusalem, where the scene has been tacitly laid, with occasional express allusions such as that in our ver. 1. The blood coming forth from the treading of the winepress is in accordance with the O. T. prophecy alluded to, Isaiah 63:3. It is in the depth, and the distance indicated, that the principal difficulty lies. The number of stadii is supposed by some to be the length of the Holy Land as given by Jerome (Ep. (cxxix.) ad Dard., 4, vol. i. p. 971) at 160 Roman miles. But the great objection to this is, that 160 miles = 1280, not 1600 stadii. Another view has been, that 1600 has been chosen as a square number, = 40 × 40, or 4 × 400, or 4 × 4 × 100. Victorinus explains it “ per omnes mundi quatuor partes: quaternitas enim est conquaternata, sicut in quatuor faciebus et quadriformibus et rotis quadratis.” He gives a very curious interpretation of the depth,— “ usque ad principes populorum.” We may fairly say, either that the number is assigned simply to signify completeness and magnitude (in which case some other apocalyptic numbers which have been much insisted on will fall perhaps under the same canon of interpretation), or else this is one of the riddles of the Apocalypse to which not even a proximate solution has ever yet been given). Ch. 15, 16 The seven vials. And herein, 15:1-8. Prefatory: the description of the vision, ver. 1: the song of triumph of the saints victorious over the beast, vv. 2-4: the coming forth of the seven angels and delivering to them of the seven vials, vv. 5-8. And I saw another sign in heaven great and marvellous, seven angels having seven plagues which are the last (plagues), because in them is completed the wrath of God (I have adopted an unusual arrangement to throw the ὅτι into connexion with ἐσχάτας , for which epithet it renders a reason. It is to be observed 1) that this verse is evidently only a compendious description of the following vision: for the angels themselves are not seen till ver. 6, and do not receive the vials containing the plagues till after they are seen: 2) that the whole of God’ s wrath in final judgment is not exhausted by these vials, but only the whole of His wrath in sending plagues on the earth previous to the judgment. After these there are no more plagues: they are concluded with the destruction of Babylon. Then the Lord Himself appears, ch. 19:11 ff.). And I saw as it were a sea of glass mingled with fire (see ch. 4:6 and note: not merely glassy: the ὡς indicates the likeness: it was as it were made of glass. The addition μεμιγμένηνπυρί is probably made as bringing into the previous celestial imagery an element belonging to this portion of the prophecy, of which judgment is the prevailing complexion. The fact, that the personages of the former heavenly vision are still present, ver. 7, seems to remove all doubt of this being the same sea of glass as that before described ch. 4:6, in immediate connexion with which the four living-beings were mentioned), and the conquerors (the pres. part. has the force of simple designation, as so often in this book) of the beast and of his image and of the number of his name (i. e. of the temptation to worship his image and to receive the mark consisting of the number of his name, ch. 13:17, 18), standing on (does ἐπί import actually “ upon,” so that they stood on the surface of the sea, or merely on the shore of? On every account the latter seems the more probable: as better suiting the heavenly imagery of ch. 4, and as according with the situation of the children of Israel when they sung the song to which allusion is presently made. The sense may be constructionally justified by ch. 3:20, and 8:3: the fact of ἐπί having a genitive in the latter place not setting it aside as a precedent) the sea of glass, having harps of God (sacred harps, part of the instruments of heaven used solely for the praise of God. We have had them before mentioned in ch. 5:8, 14:2). And they sing the song of Moses the servant of God (i. e. a song similar to that song of triumph which Moses and the children of Israel sung when delivered from the Red Sea and from the Egyptians, Exo_15. In Exodus 14:31, Moses is called, as here, the servant (θεράποντι , LXX, as also in Hebrews 3:5) of God ): and this song is formed on the model of parts of that one: see below) and the song of the Lamb (it is not meant that there are two distinct songs: the song is one and the same; and the expression which characterizes it betokens, as do so many other notices and symbols in this book, the unity of the Old and New Test. churches. Their songs of triumph have become ours: the song of Moses is the song of the Lamb. In this great victory all the triumphs of God’ s people are included, and find their fulfilment), saying (the song is a reproduction of several portions of the O. T. songs of praise), Great and wonderful are thy works (Psalms 110:2, 138:14, LXX), Lord God Almighty: just and true are thy ways (Ps. 144:17; Deuteronomy 32:4 in Moses’ song), thou King of the nations (or, of the ages (see 1 Timothy 1:17 reff. and note). The confusion has apparently arisen from the similarity of ΑΙΘΝΩΝ and ΑΙΩΝΩΝ : but which was the original, it is impossible, in the conflict of authorities, to decide): who can but fear (Thee), O Lord (these two clauses are from Jeremiah 10:7, but not in the LXX []. The title “ King of nations” is especially appropriate, as it is God’ s judgments on the nations, and their effects on them, which are the theme of the Church’ s praise), and shall glorify thy Name? because Thou only art holy (ὅσιος is only used of God here and ch. 16:5: hence the var. ἅγιος . Dü sterd. quotes from the Schol. in Eurip. Hec. 788, τὸπρὸςθεοὺςἐξἀνθρώπωνγενόμενονδίκαιονὅσιονκαλοῦμεν . This first ὅτι grounds the τίςοὐμή in the attributes of God): because all the nations shall come and worship before thee (so it is declared in reff. LXX. This second ὅτι grounds the τίςοὐμή in matter of fact): because Thy righteous acts (= Thy judgments: thy deeds of righteousness acted out towards the nations, both in the publication of the Gospel and in the destruction of Thine enemies) have been made manifest (the aor. as so often lately, looking back over the past and regarding it as matter of history, simply as the past. This third ὅτι grounds the πάντατὰἔθνηἥξ . in its immediately exciting cause— the manifestation of God’ s judgments). And after these things I saw, and there was opened the temple of the tabernacle of witness in heaven (see on ch. 11:19, 16:17. The ναός is the holy place of the tabernacle, to which latter the appellation τοῦμαρτυρίου is here peculiarly appropriate, seeing that the witness and covenant of God are about to receive their great fulfilment): and there came forth the seven angels (viz. who were before mentioned: the οἱ does not point out any particular seven, such as the archangels. On the other hand, if we omit the second οἱ , we must not violate the force of the anarthrous participle by saying “ the seven angels who had,” οἱἔχοντες . The E.V. here is strictly correct) which had (or, “ having.” This was their office: but they had them not yet) the seven plagues out of the temple (cf. ch. 14:15, 17), clad in linen (the remarkable reading λίθον can hardly be genuine, though strongly attested: see digest. There is a precedent for λίθονἐνδεδυμένοι in Ezekiel 28:13) pure (and) glistening (the well-known clothing of angels and heavenly beings, see Acts 10:30 (1:10), ch. 19:8; Matthew 17:2 , 28:3), and girt round their breasts with golden girdles (being in this like our Lord Himself as seen in vision, ch. 1:13). And one from among the four living-beings (appropriately to the symbolic meaning of these ζῶα as the representatives of creation, see notes on ch. 4:7, 11, inasmuch as the coming plagues are to be inflicted on the objects of creation) gave to the seven angels seven golden vials (the φιάλη was a shallow bowl or cup, usually without a stand or foot, in which they drew out of the κρητήρ or goblet: so Plato, Crito p. 120 a, χρυσαῖςφιάλαιςἐκτοῦκρητῆροςἀρυττόμενοι . The Schol. on II. ψ . 270 explains it οὐτὸπαρ ʼ ἡμῖνποτήριον , ἀλλὰγένοςτιλέβητοςἐκπέταλονἐκπαντὸςμέρουςδυνάμενονἔχειν . Cf. Eurip. Ion 1181 ff.; Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 7), full of the wrath of God who liveth for ever and ever (this addition serves, as in ch. 1:8, to give solemnity to the fact related). And the temple was filled with smoke from (arising from) the glory of God and from His might (i. e. from His presence, in which His glory and His might were displayed. The description calls to mind similar ones in the O. T., e. g. Psalms 18:8 f.; Isaiah 65:5. See also below), and no one was able to enter into the temple (cf. 1 Kings 8:10, 1 Kings 8:11; Exodus 40:34, Exodus 40:35) until the seven plagues of the seven angels should be finished (the passages above referred to give the reason: because of the unapproachableness of God, when immediately present and working, by any created being. See Exodus 19:21. When these judgments should be completed, then the wrathful presence and agency of God being withdrawn, He might again be approached. Many other meanings more or less far-fetched have been given, but where Scripture analogy is so plain, the simplest is the best). Ch. 16:1-21. The seven vials. See the general remarks on ch. 8:1 for all questions common to the three great series of visions. The following special particulars are here to be noticed: 1) In the description, ch. 15:1, which first introduces these plagues, they are plainly called τὰςἑπτὰπληγὰςτὰςἐσχάτας . There can then be no doubt here, not only that the series, reaches on to the time of the end, but that the whole of it is to be placed close to the same time. And this is borne out by the particulars evolved in the course of the visions themselves For we find that they do not in point of time go back, but at once take up the events of the former visions, and occur during the times of the sounding of the seventh trumpet, when the mystery of God should be finished. 2) As in the seals and in the trumpets, so here again, there is a marked distinction between the first four and the following three. As there, so here, the objects of the first four are the earth, the sea, the springs of waters, and the sun. After this the objects become more particularized: the throne of the beast, the river Euphrates, with the reservation of that peculiar and vague character for the seventh, which seems to belong to it in all the three series. 3) As before, so now, there is a compendious and anticipatory character about several of the vials, leading us to believe that those of which this is not so plain, partake of this character also. For example, under the third vial we find an acknowledgment of the divine justice in making those drink blood who shed the blood of saints and prophets. This, there can be little doubt, points on to the judgment on Babylon, in whom, ch. 18:24, was found the blood of saints and prophets, and of all that had been slain on the earth. Again, under the sixth we have the same great gathering to battle which is described in detail, ch. 19:17-21. And finally, under the seventh, we have a compendious anticipatory notice of the judgment of Babylon, hereafter, ch. 7, 8, to be described in detail,— and of the great day itself in ver. 20, also hereafter (ch. 20:11-15) to be resumed at more length. 4) As we might expect in the final plagues, we have no longer, as in the trumpets, a portion of each element affected, but the whole. 5) While in the first four vials the main features of the first four trumpets are reproduced, there is one notable distinction in the case of the fourth. While by the plague of the fourth trumpet, the sun, moon, and stars are partially darkened, by that of the fourth vial the power of the sun is increased, and the darkening of the Kingdom of the beast is reserved for the fifth. The minor special features will be noticed as we proceed. On the whole, the series of the vials seems to bear a less general character than the other two. It takes up a particular point in the prophecy, and deals with symbols and persons previously described. It belongs, by its very conditions, exclusively to the time of, or to days approaching very near to the time of, the end: including in itself the subsequent details as far as the end of ch. 20: without however noticing most important features and considerable prophetic periods. 1. Introductory. And I heard a great voice out of the temple (from the fact ch. 15:8, that the divine Presence is filling the temple, and that none might enter into it, this voice can be no other than the divine voice. The words ἐκτοῦναοῦ may have been erased (as in var. readd.) from the difficulty presented by τοῦθεοῦ below, none being able to enter during the pouring out of the vials) saying to the seven angels, Go and pour out the seven vials of the wrath of God into the earth (so, previous to the series of trumpets, the angel casts the fire from the altar into the earth, ch. 8:5). 2. And the first departed (each angel, as his turn comes, leaves the heavenly scene, and from the space between heaven and earth, empties his vial on the appointed object) and poured out his vial into the earth : and there came (took place: fell, as E. V.) an evil (κακόν , in itself) and painful (πονηρόν , to the sufferers, ἐπίπονον , Suidas. See reff.) sore upon the men that had the mark of the beast and that worshipped his image (see above ch. 13:15-17, 14:9, 10. The allegorical and historical interpretations have been very various: see them in Elliott, vol. iv. Notice the parallel with the sixth Egyptian plague, Exodus 9:8 ff. Cf. Deuteronomy 28:27, Deuteronomy 28:35). 3. And the second poured out his vial into the sea: and it (the sea, cf. ch. 8:8, 11: not, “ there was,” as De Wette: for the question would arise, where? the analogy of the Egyptian plague is surely decisive) became blood as of a dead man (blood as when a dead corpse lies in its blood: loathsome and corrupting): and every soul of life (living soul, ref. Gen.: ψυχή in its physical sense of animal soul) died, (all) the things in the sea . 4-7. And the third poured out his vial into the rivers and the fountains of the waters: and they became (it is quite impossible, in the lax construction of the Apocalyptic Greek, to maintain here a distinction, as Dü sterd. has done, from the previous ἐγένετο , and to render here, “ there came blood.” Analogy must be our guide: and the account to be given of the singular is either that it belongs to τὰὕδατα , or that the rivers and fountains are taken together, and regarded as neuter in sense though not in construction) blood (that the fact was so, is testified by what follows, in which it is assumed that the sources of ordinary drink have become blood). And I heard the angel of the waters (i. e. the angel who was set over the waters; see reff.: not as Grot., “ vocatur angelus aquarum quia in aquas immisit phialam.” Schö ttgen, h. l., p. 1131 f., gives examples of angels of the earth and of the sea: see also Wolf, h. l. This is more probable than Dü sterd.’ s idea that the analogy to be followed is that of the four living-beings, and that the angel symbolized the waters) saying, Thou art righteous who art and wast (as in ch. 11:17, the καὶὁἐρχόμενος is omitted. For the construction, see reff.) holy (I incline against Dü sterd., to the usual connexion, viz. the making ὅσιος belong to ὁὢνκ . ὁἦν , and not in apposition with δικαιος . And that which moves me to it is, 1) the extreme improbability of two epithets, δίκαιος and ὅσιος , both being predicated in such an acknowledgment of an act of justice: and 2) that as I have taken it, it best agrees with the ὅσιος in ch. 15:4, where it is predicated of God not as the result of any manifested acts of His, but as an essential attribute confined to Him alone), because Thou didst judge thus : because they shed the blood of saints and prophets, and Thou hast given them blood to drink : they are worthy (these words are made stronger by their asyndetous character). And I heard the altar saying (certainly the simplest understanding of these words is, that they involve a personification of the altar. On the altar are the prayers of the saints, offered before God: beneath the altar are the souls of the martyrs crying for vengeance: when therefore the altar speaks, it is the concentrated testimony of these which speaks by it), Even so, Lord God Almighty: true (reff.) and just are Thy judgments. 8, 9. And the fourth poured out his vial upon the sun: and it was given to it (the sun: not “ to him,” the angel, as, strangely enough, Bengel and Hengstb., and Elliott, iii. 361. The angels throughout this vision are simply the pourers out of the vials, not the executors of the plagues. Besides which, the verb καυματίζω , in a sentence where the sun is mentioned, can have but one reference: see reff.) to scorch men (the τούς is probably generic merely. If it is to be assigned a meaning, it may be, the men who have received the mark and number of the beast. But the other is more likely) with (the ἐν of investiture: the element in which the scorching takes place) fire (not, as Hengstb., understanding αὐτῷ of the angel, some fire other than the sun: but the glowing increased heat of the sun itself), and men were scorched with great heat (on the accus. after the passive verb which takes a double accus. in active, see reff., and Winer, edn. 6, § 32. 5), and blasphemed the name of God who hath power over these plagues, and did not repent to give Him glory (on the inf. epexegetic, see Winer, edn. 6, § 44.1). 10, 11. And the fifth poured out his vial upon the throne of the beast (given to it by the dragon, ch. 13:2. That is, on the spot where the power and presence of the beast had its proper residence): and his kingdom (those lands which owned his rule) became darkened (as in the ninth Egyptian plague, Exodus 10:21 ff., the darkness is specially sent over the land, not occasioned by any failure of the lights of heaven). And they (the inhabitants: the subjects of the beast. They are by and by identified with those who had received his mark) chewed their tongues (the word μασάομαι is confined to the comedians and later Gr. prose. ἡτῶνγλωσσῶνμάσησιςτὴνὑπερβολὴντῆςὀδύνηςδηλοῖ , says Andreas) from (ἐκ , of the source of the action: see reff.) their pain (viz. under which they were previously suffering: not, that occasioned by the darkness, which would not of itself occasion pain: see below), and blasphemed the God of heaven (see ch. 11:13) by reason of (ἐκ as above) their pains and their sores (these words bind on this judgment to that of the first and following vials, and shew that they are cumulative, not simply successive. The sores, and pains before mentioned, are still in force), and repented not of (see ch. 9:20, 21) their works. 12. And the sixth poured out his vial upon the great river Euphrates: and its water was dried up, that the way of the kings which come from the rising of the sun might be prepared (notice, but not to be blindly led by it, the analogy of the sixth trumpet, also having reference to the river Euphrates. In order to understand what we here read, we must carefully bear in mind the context. From what follows under this same vial, we learn that the kings of the whole earth are about to be gathered together to the great battle against God, in which He shall be victorious, and they shall utterly perish. The time is now come for this gathering and by the drying up of the Euphrates, the way of those kings who are to come to it from the East is made ready. This is the only understanding of these words which will suit the context, or the requirements of this series of prophecies. For to suppose the conversion of Eastern nations, or the gathering together of Christian princes, to be meant, or to regard the words as relating to any auspicious event, is to introduce a totally incongruous feature into the series of vials, which confessedly represent the “ seven last plagues.” Andreas explains it as above: and so Bleek, Ewald, De Wette, Dü sterd., al.). 13-16. And I saw out of the mouth of the dragon (who is still in the prophetic scene, giving his power to the beast, ch. 13:2) and out of the mouth of the beast and out of the mouth of the false prophet (viz. the second beast of ch. 13:11 ff. Cf. ch. 19:20, 20:10) three unclean spirits like frogs , for they are spirits of devils doing miracles (this is a plain declaration of the interpretation of these three, and by it the limits of interpretation are clearly set, and must not be overpassed. The explanation of these as any men, or sects of men, is therefore clearly wrong) which go forth over the kings of the whole earth (it is the uniform testimony of the prophetic Scriptures that the antichristian power shall work signs and wonders as means of deceiving mankind: see Matthew 24:24; 2 Thessalonians 2:9) to gather them together to the war of the great day of Almighty God (that day viz. which is explained in detail in the subsequent part of the prophecy, ch. 19:17 ff. This great gathering of the beast and the kings of the earth against God and the Lamb, is the signal for the immediate and glorious appearing of the Lord. And therefore follows an exhortation to be ready, and clad in the garments of righteousness, when He shall come). Behold, I come (the Seer speaks in the name of Christ) as a thief (that personal advent shall happen when many least expect it, when the world is secure in the ungodliness of ages): blessed is he that watcheth, and keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked and they (men) see his shame (the figure is that of one apprehending the thief’ s coming, and therefore keeping watch in his clothes, not undressing. In the spiritual sense, the garments are the robe of righteousness put on by faith in Him who is our Righteousness: and the walking naked is that destitution of these garments which will at that day bring shame before assembled men and angels). And they (the unclean spirits, as is evident from συνήγαγεν being merely a recital of the συναγαγεῖν before: not, the angel of the sixth vial, as Bengel; nor God, as Hengst. and Ebrard) gathered them together to the place which is called in Hebrew Harmagedon (it is evidently in the meaning of the Hebrew name of this place that its appropriate significance lies. For otherwise why should ἑβραϊστί be prefixed to it? When St. John does this in his Gospel, in the cases of Bethesda, 5:2, Gabbatha, 19:13, Golgotha, 19:7, and in this book in the case of Abaddon, ch. 9:11, it is each time not without such reference: see the notes in those places. But this circumstance does not deprive the name of geographical reality: and it is most probable on every account that such reality exists here. The words τὸντόποντὸνκαλούμενον would surely not be used except of a real place habitually so named, or by a name very like this. Nor need we search far for the place pointed out. ה ַ ר ־ מ ְ נ ד ּ ו ֹ , the mountain of Megiddo, designates at least the neighbourhood where the Canaanitish kings were overthrown by Barak, Judges 5:19; an occasion which gave rise to one of the two triumphal songs of Israel recorded in the O. T., and therefore one well worthy of symbolizing the great final overthrow of the Kings of the Earth leagued against Christ. That the name slightly differs from that given in the O. T. where it is the plain (2 Chronicles 35:22) or the waters (Judg. l, c) of Megiddo, is of slight consequence, and may be owing to a reason which I shall dwell on below. The LXX in both places adopt the form which we have here, Μαγεδώ -δών or -δδώ . Nor must it be forgotten, that Megiddo was connected with another overthrow and slaughter, viz. that of Josiah by Pharaoh-Necho (2 Kings 23:29; 2Ki_2 Chron. ubi supra), which though not analogous to this predicted battle in its issue, yet served to keep up the character of the place as one of overthrow and calamity: cf. also Zechariah 12:11, and the striking description, 2 Chronicles 35:25, of the ordinance of lamentation for Josiah. At Megiddo also another Jewish King, Ahaziah, died of the wounds received from Jehu, 2 Kings 9:27. The prefix Har, signifying “ mountain,” has its local propriety, see Stanley’ s description of the plain of Esdraelon, in the opening of his Sinai and Palestine, ch. 9. And to the fisherman of the lake of Galilee, who would know Megiddo as he saw its background of highland lit up by the morning or evening sun across the plain from his native hills, the name would doubtless be a familiar one. Still there may have been a deeper reason which led to, or at all events justified the prefix. As the name now stands, it has a meaning ominous of the great overthrow which is to take place on the spot. Drusius, believing the word to be merely a mystic one, explains it to be ח ר מ א ג ד ה ו ן , “ internecio exercitus eorum,” the overthrow of their army. But, conceding and maintaining the geographical reality, must not we suppose that such a name, with such a sound, so associated with the past, bore to a Hebrew ear, when used of the future, its ominous significance of overthrow? It is remarkable that in Zechariah 12:11, where the mourning for Josiah is alluded to, the LXX render not in the plain of Megiddo, but ἐνπεδίῳἐκκοπτομένου : and this agrees with the interpretation of Andreas here, who supposes the name equivalent to διακοπή ). 17-21. And the seventh poured out his vial upon the air (the consequences are presently seen), and there came forth a voice out of the temple from the throne saying, It is done (the limitation of the meaning of γέγονεν to “ that is done which was commanded,” viz. the outpouring of the seven vials, is in fact no limitation: for the plagues are the last plagues: if therefore they are done, all is done. But the declaration is of course proleptically made, and imports that the outpouring of the seventh vial had done that which should accomplish all and bring in the end. One who had fired a train would say, “ It is done,” though the explosion had not yet taken place). And there were lightnings and voices and thunders (the usual accompaniments of the close of each series of visions, see ch. 8:5, 11:19. But, as before remarked, these phæ nomena occur here in rather a different connexion from that in the other two places. Here, they are more the result of the outpouring of the last vial, and they do not conclude, but only begin its effects, which do not cease until the destruction of Babylon and the great overthrow of the antichristian hosts): and there was a great earthquake (this may perhaps be not without connexion with the pouring out of the vial into the air: in the descriptions of earthquakes we read of the darkened and lurid appearance of the air preceding the shock) such as was not from the time when there was a man (not, “ since man was:” the generic meaning would more probably be expressed by οἱἄνθρωποιἐγένοντο , as altered in rec.) upon the earth, such (on τηγικοῦτος , see note on ref. Heb.) an earthquake so great. And the great city (Rome: cf. ch. 11:8 and note, 14:8, 17:18, 18:10, 16, 18, &c., 21) became into (i. e. was divided or split, scil. by the earthquake) three parts (see ch. 11:13, where a similar judgment takes place at the end of the episode of the two witnesses. The three parts are supposed by Dü sterd. to refer to the three arch-enemies just now mentioned. But this is very uncertain: see on the tripartite division at ch. 8:7), and the cities of the nations fell (not only the greatest city, but other great capitals of nations fell, from the violence and extent of the earthquake. We have its further consequences presently): and Babylon the great (mentioned specially, although really the same (see the places referred to above) with ἡπόλιςἡμεγάλη , because of her special adulterous character to be hereafter described, The destruction of the material city of Rome is but the beginning of the execution of vengeance on the mystic Babylon) was remembered before God (reff.), to give her the cup of the wine of the fierceness of His wrath is the outbreak, ὀργή the temper of mind. See on Romans 2:8: and on the figure of the cup, ch. 14:8, note. The sense is, that all these material judgments were but prefatory; the divine intent, in the midst of them, being to make Babylon drink the cup of His wrath in her judgment which follows): and every island fled (the effects of the earthquake are resumed, the mention of Babylon coming into remembrance being parenthetical, and suggested by the great city having been split into three parts. On the sense, as belonging to the imagery of the great day, see ch. 6:14), and there were found no mountains were not found.” The expression is far stronger than this: amounting to that in ch. 6:14, that every mountain was removed out of its place and was looked for in vain), and a great hail (see reff. Egypt is again in view) as of a talent in weight (i. e. having each hailstone of that weight. Diod. Sic. xix. 45 speaks of hailstones of a mina each in weight as being enormous: καταῤῥαγόντωνἐξαίφνηςμεγάλωνὄμβρων , καὶχαλάζηςἀπίστουτὸμέγεθος , μνααῖαιγὰρἔπιπτον , ἔστιδ ʼ ὅτεκαὶμείζους , ὥστεπολλὰςμὲντῶνοἰκιῶνσυμπίπτεινδιὰτὸβάρος , οὐκὀλίγουςδὲκαὶτῶνἀνθρώπωνἀπόλλυσθαι : and the talent contained sixty minæ . Josephus, in reff., speaks of the stones which were thrown from the machines in the siege of Jerusalem as each of a talent weight) descendeth from heaven on men (τοὺςἀνθρ . must apparently be generic here: it can hardly mean the men; for the plague is universal. See above on ver. 9): and men blasphemed God by reason of the plague of the hail, because great is the plague of it exceedingly (i. e. mankind in general,— not those who were struck by the hailstones who would instantly die,— so far from repenting at this great and final judgment of God, blasphemed Him and were impenitent. The issue is different from that in ch. 11:13, where the remnant feared and gave glory to God). Ch. 17:1-19:10. The Judgment of Babylon. And herein, 17:1-6. The description of Babylon under the figure of a drunken harlot, riding on the beast. And there came one of the seven angels which had the seven vials (we are not told which of the seven, and it is idle to enquire. The seventh has been conjectured, because under the outpouring of his vial Babylon was remembered) and talked with me saying, Hither (see reff.), I will shew thee the judgment of the great harlot that sitteth upon [the] many waters, with whom the kings of the earth (have) committed fornication, and they who inhabit the earth have been made drunk from the wine (ἐκ , the wine having been the source of their drunkenness) of her fornication (the figure here used, of a harlot who has committed fornication with secular kings and peoples, is frequent in the prophets, and has one principal meaning and application, viz. to God’ s church and people that had forsaken Him and attached herself to others. In eighteen places out of twenty-one where the figure occurs, such is its import; viz. in Isaiah 1:21; Jeremiah 2:20, Jeremiah 2:3:1, Jeremiah 2:6, Jeremiah 2:8; Ezekiel 16:15, Ezekiel 16:16, Ezekiel 16:28, Ezekiel 16:31, Ezekiel 16:35, Ezekiel 16:41, Ezekiel 16:23:5, Ezekiel 16:19, Ezekiel 16:44; Hosea 2:5, Hosea 3:3, Hosea 4:15 (Micah 1:7). In three places only is the word applied to heathen cities: viz. in Isaiah 23:15, Isaiah 23:16 to Tyre, where, ver. 17, it is also said, “ she shall commit fornication with all the kingdoms of the world upon the face of the earth:” and in Nahum 3:4 to Nineveh, which is called the well-favoured harlot, the mistress of witchcrafts, that selleth nations through her whoredoms, and families through her witchcrafts. And there the threat is pronounced of a very similar ruin to that which befalls Babylon here. So that the Scripture analogy, while it points to unfaithfulness and treachery against God’ s covenant, also brings to mind extensive empire and wide-spread rule over the kingdoms of the earth. It is true, that as far as the image itself is concerned, pagan Rome as well fulfils its requirements as Tyre and Nineveh. It will depend on subsequent features in the description, whether we are to bound our view with her history and overthrow. Still, it will not be desirable to wait for the solution of this question till we arrive at the point where those features appear: for by so doing much of our intermediate exegesis will necessarily be obscured. The decisive test then which may at once be applied to solve the question, is derived from the prophecy of the destruction of Babylon in ch. 18:2. It is to be laid utterly waste, and to “ become the habitation of devils and the hold of every foul spirit, and a cage of every unclean and hateful bird.” Now no such destruction as this has yet befallen Rome, unless her transfer from pagan to papal rule be such a destruction, and the Pope and his ecclesiastics be described in the above terms. In an eloquent passage of Vitringa, he presses Bossuet with this dilemma. Again, it is said of this harlot, μεθ ʼ ἧςἐπόρνευσανοἱβασιλεῖςτῆςγῆς . But we may ask, if this be pagan Rome, who and what are these kings, and what is indicated by her having been the object of their lustful desires? In the days of Imperial Rome, there were no independent kings of the earth except in Parthia and Persia. Rome in her pagan state, as described for the purpose of identification in ver. 18, was not one who intrigued with the kings of the earth, but ἡἔχουσαβασιλείανἐπὶτῶνβασιλέωντῆςγῆς : she reigned over them with undisputed and crushing sway. I do not hesitate therefore, induced mainly by these considerations, which will be confirmed as we proceed step by step in the prophecy, to maintain that interpretation which regards papal and not pagan Rome as pointed out by the harlot of this vision. The subject has been amply discussed by many expositors. I would especially mention Vitringa, and Bp. Wordsworth. The “ sitting upon many waters” is said of Babylon in Jer. in reff., but has here a symbolical meaning; see below, ver. 15. On the ἐμεθύσθησαν see ch. 14:8. The same thing is said of Babylon in Jer. l. c. But there she herself is the cup in the Lord’ s hand). And he (the angel) carried me away to the wilderness (not, as Elliott, al., and even Dü sterd., “ a wilderness.” Such inferences from the absence of the art. in this later Greek, never secure, are more than ever unsafe when a preposition precedes: and the usage of the LXX should have prevented any such rendering here. In no fewer than twenty places (see Tromm.) they use the word ἔρημος anarthrously, where there can be no question that “ the wilderness” is the only rendering. In fact it may be questioned whether the expressly indefinite rendering, “ a wilderness,” is ever justifiable, except in case of predication, or junction with an adjective, without some further indication than the mere omission of the definite article after a preposition. Had it been intended here, we may safely say that εἰςτόπονἔρημον , or εἰςτόποντινὰἔρημον would have been used. The most natural way of accounting for the Seer being taken into the wilderness here, is that he was to be shewn Babylon, which was in the wilderness, and the overthrow of which, in the prophecy from which come the very words ἔπεσεν (πέπτωκεν , LXX) Βαβυλών (Isaiah 21:9), is headed τὸὅραματῆςἐρήμου . So that by the analogy of prophecy, the journey to witness the fall of Babylon would be εἰςἔρημον . The question of the identity of this woman with the woman in ch. 12 is not affected by that of the identity of this wilderness with that) in the spirit (see reff., and note on ch. 1:10): and I saw a woman sitting upon a scarlet beast , but as that is the redness of fire (see however ch. 6:4), so is this of blood, with which both the beast and its rider are dyed. It was the colour, see ref. Heb., of the wool to be used in sprinkling the blood of sacrifice. There may be an allusion to the Roman imperial purple: for the robe which was put on our Lord in mockery was κόκκινος , ref. Matt. But this is more probably conveyed by its own proper word in the next verse. By the woman sitting on the wild-beast, is signified that superintending and guiding power which the rider possesses over his beast: than which nothing could be chosen more apt to represent the superiority claimed and exercised by the See of Rome over the secular kingdoms of Christendom), full of names of blasphemy (for the construction with accus., see reff., and Winer, edn. 6, § 32. 5. The names of blasphemy, which were found before on the heads of the beast only, have now spread over its whole surface. As ridden and guided by the harlot, it is tenfold more blasphemous in its titles and assumptions than before. The heathen world had but its Divi in the Cæ sars, as in other deified men of note: but Christendom has its “ most Christian” and “ most faithful” Kings, such as Louis XIV. and Philip II.; its “ Defenders of the faith,” such as Charles II. and James II.; its society of unprincipled intriguers called after the sacred name of our Lord, and working Satan’ s work “ ad majorem Dei gloriam;” its “ holy office” of the Inquisition, with its dens of darkest cruelty; finally its “ patrimony of St. Peter,” and its “ holy Roman Empire;” all of them, and many more, new names of blasphemy, with which the woman has invested the beast. Go where we will and look where we will in Papal Christendom, names of blasphemy meet us. The taverns, the shops, the titles of men and of places, the very insurance badges on the houses, are full of them), having seven heads and ten horns (as in its former appearance, ch. 13:1; inherited from the dragon, ch. 12:3. These are presently interpreted: we now return to the description of the woman herself). And the woman was clothed in purple (St. John’ s own word, even to its peculiar form, see reff., for the mock-imperial robe placed on our Lord: and therefore bearing probably here the same signification; but not in mockery, as , “ fucus simulati regiminis:” for the empire is real) and scarlet (see above. This very colour is not without its significance: witness the Cardinals, at the same time the guiding council of the Church and princes of the State), [and] gilded with gold and with (the κεχρυσωμένη is zeugmatically carried on) precious stone and with pearls (this description needs no illustration for any who have witnessed, or even read of, the pomp of Papal Rome: which, found as it is every where, is concentrated in the city itself), holding a cup of gold in her hand full of abominations and of the impure things (the change of construction is remarkable: for such it must be accounted, and not, with Dü sterd., the accus. governed by ἔχουσα . It seems to be made, not to avoid an accumulation of genitives, as Hengstb., but to mark a difference between the more abstract designation of the contents of the cup as βδελύγματα , and the specification of them in the concrete as τὰἀκάθαρτακ .τ .λ .) of her fornication (this cup is best taken altogether symbolically, and not as the cup in the Mass, which, however degraded by her blasphemous fiction of transubstantiation, could hardly be called by this name, and moreover is not given, but denied by her to the nations of the earth. That she should have represented herself in her medals as holding forth this cup (with the remarkable inscription, “ sedet super universam;” see Elliott, vol. iv. p. 30, plate), is a judicial coincidence rather than a direct fulfilment), and (having) upon her forehead a name written , Mystery (is this word part of the name, or not? On the whole it seems more probable that it is. For though no such word would in the nature of things be attached to her forehead as part of her designation, so neither would the description which follows Βαβυλὼνἡμεγάλη , to which the word μυστήριον seems partly to refer. But whether part of the name or not, the meaning will be the same: viz. that the title following is to be taken in a spiritual and an enigmatical sense: compare ch. 1:20, and 2 Thessalonians 2:7), Babylon the great, the mother of the harlots and of the abominations of the earth (i. e. not only first and greatest of these, but herself the progenitress and origin of the rest. All spiritual fornication and corruption are owing to her, and to her example and teaching). And I saw the woman drunken with the blood of the saints and with the blood of the witnesses of Jesus . And I wondered, when I saw her, with great wonder (what was the ground of the Seer’ s astonishment? One doubtless might be assigned, which would at once account for any degree of such emotion. If this woman is the same as he before saw, who fled into the wilderness from the face of the dragon, “ the faithful city become an harlot” (Isaiah 1:21), he might well wonder. And certainly there is much in favour of such a supposition. It has been taken up by some considerable expositors, such as Auberlen (Der Prophet Daniel, pp. 278 ff.), who has argued earnestly but soberly for it. There is one objection to it, which has been made more of in this place than perhaps it deserves. It is, that in the Angel’ s replication to St. John’ s wonder, no allusion is made to this circumstance as its principal ground. But, it may well be replied, this would be just what we might expect, if the fact of identity were patent. The Seer, versed in the history of man’ s weakness and depravity, full of O. T. prophetic thoughts and sayings, would need no solution of the fact itself: this would lie at the ground of his wonder, and of the angel’ s explanation of the consequences which were to follow from it. Auberlen very properly lays stress on the fact, that the joint symbolism of the wilderness and the woman could not fail to call up in the mind of the Seer the last occasion when the two occurred together: and insists that this symbol must be continuous throughout. Without going so far as to pronounce the two identical, I think we cannot and ought not to lose sight of the identity of symbolism in the two cases. It is surely meant to lie beneath the surface, and to teach us an instructive lesson. We may see from it two prophetic truths: first, that the church on earth in the main will become apostate and faithless, cf. Luke 18:8: and secondly, that while this shall be so, the apostasy shall not embrace the whole church, so that the second woman in the apocalyptic vision should be absolutely identical with the first. The identity is, in the main, not to be questioned: in formal strictness, not to be pressed. This being so, I should rather regard St. John’ s astonishment as a compound feeling, occasioned partly by the enormity of the sight revealed to him, partly also by the identity of the symbolism with that which had been the vehicle of a former and altogether different vision). 7-18. Explanation by the angel of the mystery of the woman and of the beast. And first, 7-14. of the beast. And the angel said to me, Wherefore didst thou wonder? I will tell to thee the mystery (which, be it noted, is but one) of the woman and of the wild-beast that carrieth her, which hath the seven heads and the ten horns. The beast which thou sawest, was, and is not, and shall come up out of the abyss and goeth to perdition (these words have been a very battle-field for apocalyptic expositors, whose principal differing interpretations are far too long to be given at all intelligibly here, but will be seen best in their own works, and compendiously but fairly stated in the notices in Mr. Elliott’ s fourth volume. What is here required, is that I should give a consistent account of that solution which I have been myself led to adopt. 1) It will not be supposed, with the general view which I have taken of the beast as the secular persecuting power, that I am prepared to accede to that line of interpretation which makes the whole vision merely descriptive of the Seer’ s own time, and of the Roman emperors then past, present, and expected. Against such a view it seems to me the whole imagery and diction of the vision protest: and this it will be my endeavour to shew as each of their details comes under my notice. If, as universally acknowledged, our prophecy be a taking up and continuation of that of Daniel, then we are dealing with larger matters and on a wider scale than such a limited interpretation would imply. 2) Nor again, after the meaning assigned above to the harlot and her title, will it be expected that I should agree with those who take her as, according to the letter of our ver. 18, strictly confined in meaning to the material city of Rome. She is that city: but she is also μυστήριον . She is herself a harlot, an apostate and faithless church; but she is also a mother: from her spring, of her nature partake, with her shall be destroyed, all the fornications and abominations of the earth, though they be not in Rome, though they be not called by her name, though in outward semblance they quarrel with and oppose her. 3) The above remarks will lead their intelligent reader to expect, that the present words of our text, which are in the main reproductive of the imagery of ch. 13:1-4, will be interpreted as those were interpreted, not of mere passing events and persons, but of world-wide and world-long empires and changes. 4) Having thus indicated the line of interpretation which I shall follow, I reserve the details for ver. 10, where they necessarily come before us): and they shall wonder who dwell upon the earth, of whom the name is not written upon (the accus. as so often in this book) the book of life from the foundation of the world (these latter words, even in ordinary N. T. Greek, would belong to γέγραπται , and the art. τό would be wanted to connect them with τὸβιβλίοντῆςζωῆς . But it is by no means certain, in the loose Greek of the Apocalypse, whether these accuracies must be insisted on. Judging by the analogy of ch. 13:8 (see note there), ἀπὸκατ . κόσμου belongs to that which immediately precedes it: as indeed it does in every place where it occurs in which its connexion might be ambiguous. I prefer therefore to follow analogy, rather than to insist on philological accuracy in a book where its rules are manifestly not observed), seeing (the reader expects βλέποντες , to agree with οἱκατοικοῦντες : but instead, we have βλεπόντων , agreeing with ὧν by attraction) the beast that he was and is not and shall come again (see for full explanation, below on vv. 9, 10). Here (is) the mind that hath wisdom (by these words, as in ch. 13:18, attention is bespoken, and spiritual discernment challenged, for that which follows). The seven heads are seven mountains, where (= ἐφ ʼ ὧν , on which) the woman sitteth (upon them) (ἐπ ʼ αὐτῶν , the well-known Hebraistic redundancy of construction after ἐφ ʼ ὧν , here expressed by ὅπου . By these words, no less plainly than by ver. 18, Rome is pointed out. Propertius, iii. 11. 57, by a remarkable coincidence, unites both descriptions in one line: “ Septem urbs alta jugis, toto quæ præ sidet orbi.” The more remarkable out of the very many testimonies to Rome being thus known, are those of Horace, Carmen Seculare, 7, “ Di quibus septem placuere colles:” Virg. Æ n. vi. 782, “ Illa inclyta Roma Imperium terris, animos æ quabit Olympo, Septemque una sibi muro circumdabit arces:” where Servius annotates, “ alii dicunt breves septem colliculos a Romulo inclusos, qui tamen aliis nominibus appellabantur: alii volunt hos ipsos qui nunc sunt a Romulo inclusos, hoc est Palatinum, Quirinalem, Aventinum, Cœ lium, Viminalem, Æ squilinum, et Janicularem.” See also Georg. ii. 534: Cicero, ad Att. vi. 5, ἐξἄστεοςἑπταλόφου : Martial iv. 64, speaking of Julius Martial’ s gardens on the Janiculum, “ Hinc septem dominos videre montes, Et totam licet æ stimare Romam:” Varro de L. L. iv., “ Dies Septimontium nominatus ab his septem montibus in queis sita Roma est:” — and so Plutarch, Probl. Rom. p. 280 d, τὸΣεπτιμούντιονἄγουσινἐπὶτῷτὸνἕβδομονλόφοντῇπόλειπροσκατανεμηθῆναι , καὶτὴνῬώμηνἑπτάλοφονγενέσθαι . See very many more in Wetst., and a copious catena of citations in Bp. Wordsworth’ s Letters to M. Gondon on the Church of Rome, Let. xi. Also the coin of Vespasian figured in Elliott, vol. iv. p. 30): and they are seven kings (let us weigh well the significance of this indication furnished by the angel. The seven heads have a reference to the woman, who sits upon the beast to whom they belong: and, as far as this reference is concerned, they are hills, on which she sits. But they have also another reference— to the beast, of which they are the heads: and as far as this other reference is concerned, they are kings. Not, be it noticed, kings over the woman, nor kings of the city symbolized by her: but kings in a totally different relation, viz. that to the beast, of which they are heads. So that to interpret these kings as emperors of Rome, or as successive forms of government over Rome, is to miss the propriety of the symbolism and to introduce utter confusion. They belong to the beast, which is not Rome, nor the Roman Empire, but a general symbol of secular antichristian power. They are in substance the same seven crowned heads which we saw on the dragon in ch. 12:3: the same which we saw, with names of blasphemy on them, on the beast of ch. 13:1, to whom the dragon gave his power and his throne). The five (i. e. the first five out of the seven) fell (Angl., “ are fallen.” Of whom is this word used? Is it one likely to be chosen to describe the mere passing away of king after king in an empire more or less settled? One appropriate to Augustus and Tiberius, who died in their beds? Or again is it one which could well be predicated of the government by consuls, which had been absorbed into the imperial power, or of that by dictators, which had merely ceased ad tempus sumi, because it had become perpetual in the person of one man? Had Roman emperors been meant by the seven kings, or successive stages of government over Rome (even supposing these last made out, which they never have been), we should in vain have sought any precedent, or any appropriate meaning, for this ἔπεσαν : “ have passed away” would be its constrained and unexampled sense. But let the analogy of Scripture and of this book itself guide us, and our way will be clear enough. ἔπεσεν is the cry over Babylon herself. πίπτω is used in the LXX constantly, and by Theod. in ref. Dan., of the violent fall, the overthrow, either of kings or of kingdoms: it is a word belonging to domination overthrown, to glory ruined, to empire superseded. If I understand these five of individual successive kings, if I understand them of forms of government adopted and laid down on occasion, I can give no account of this verb: but if I understand them of forms of empire, one after another heading the antichristian secular power, one after another violently overthrown and done away, I have this verb in its right place and appropriate sense. Egypt is fallen, the first head of the beast that persecuted God’ s people, Ezek. 29, 30: Nineveh is fallen, the bloody city, Nahum 3:1-19: Babylon is fallen, the great enemy of Israel, Isaiah 21:9; Jer. 50, 51, al.: Persia is fallen, Daniel 10:13, Daniel 11:2: Græ cia is fallen, Daniel 11:3, Daniel 11:4. Thus, and as it seems to me thus only, can we do justice to the expression. Nor is any force done thus to βασιλεῖς , but on the contrary it is kept to its strict prophetic import, and to the analogy of that portion of prophecy which is here especially in view. For in Daniel 7:17 we read these great beasts which are four are four kings, מ ַ ל ְ כ י ן ; not βασιλεῖαι , as LXX and Theodotion), the one is (the Roman), the other (required to complete the seven) is not yet come (I agree with Auberlen, der Prophet Daniel, pp. 304 ff., in regarding this seventh as the Christian empire beginning with Constantine: during whose time the beast in his proper essence, in his fulness of opposition to God and His saints, ceases to be), and when he shall come he must remain a little time (certainly the impression we derive from these words is not as Dü sterd., al., that his empire is to be of very short continuance, but the ὀλίγον , as in ref. 1 Pet., gives the idea of some space not assigned, but vaguely thus stated as “ some little time.” The idea given is rather that of duration than of non-duration. Herodotus, iv. 81, says of the river Exampæ us, τοῦκαὶὀλίγοντιπρότεροντούτωνμνήμηνεἶχον , but it was twenty-nine chapters back. See for the usage of this book itself, ch. 2:14, 3:4; not 12:12, where the context decides ὀλίγον to be emphatic. Here, the stress is on δεῖμεῖναι , and not on ὀλίγον : on the fact of some endurance, not on its being but short). And the beast, which was and is not (as in ver. 8, whose peculiar power and essence seem suspended while the empire is Christian by profession. But observe, the seventh is for all that a veritable head, and like the others carries names of blasphemy. The beast is not actually put out of existence, but has only received a deadly wound which is again healed, see ch. 13:3, notes), he himself (or, this) also is the eighth, and is of the seven, and goeth unto perdition . And the ten horns which thou sawest, are ten kings (not necessarily personal kings: see on ver. 10 above: but kingdoms, regarded as summed up in their kings) which (οἵτινες , kings of that kind who) have not yet received a kingdom, but receive power as kings (the ὡςβασιλεῖς is somewhat enigmatical. Auberlen suggests, whether the kingly power itself may not have passed away from these realms in the days of antichristian misrule, and thus their power be only ὡςβασιλεῖς . But this seems inconsistent with their being called βασιλεῖς . Rather I would say the ὡς represents the reservation of their kingly rights in their alliance with the beast) one hour (i. e. during the space of one hour: just as ἡμίωρον in ch. 8:1 is during the space of half an hour. Some, e. g. Vitringa and Elliott, have upheld the meaning, for μίανὤρανμετά , of “ at one and the same time with.” From the use of ποίανὥραν in ch. 3:3, we might concede such usage to be within the bare limits of possibility; though even thus the μίανμετά , for “ one and the same with,” is a hard saying. But we are not to enquire in our exegesis, what may possibly be, but what probably is. And I venture to say that but for a preconceived opinion, no one would ever have thought of any other meaning for these words than the ordinary one, “ for the space of one hour.” And thus accordingly we will take them, as signifying some definite space, unknown to us, thus designated: analogous in position to the ὀλίγον above) together with (i. e. in conjunction with, allied with: their power will be associated with his power) the beast (who are these? The answer seems to be furnished us in Daniel 7:23 ff. They are ten kingdoms which shall arise out of the fourth great kingdom there: ten European powers, which in the last time, in concert with and subjection to the antichristian power, shall make war against Christ. In the precise number and form here indicated, they have not yet arisen. It would not be difficult to point out the elements and already consolidating shapes of most of them: but in precise number we have them not as yet. What changes in Europe may bring them into the required tale and form, it is not for us to say). These have (the present is used in describing them, though they have not yet arisen) one mind (one and the same view and intent and consent), and give their might and their power to the beast (becoming his allies and moving at his beck). These shall war with the Lamb (in concert with the beast, ch. 19:19), and the Lamb shall conquer them, because He is Lord of lords and King of kings, and they who are with Him (νικήσουσιναὐτούς also: the verb is implied in νικήσει above) called and chosen (all the called are not chosen, Matt. (20:16,) 22:14: but all that are chosen are first called, 2 Peter 1:10) and faithful (this way of taking this clause is far better than with Bengel to make κλ . κ . ἐκλ . κ . πιστοί into predicate, “ and they that are with him are called and chosen and faithful.” For 1) it can clearly be no co-ordinate reason with the other assigned for the Lamb’ s victory, that His followers are, &c., and 2) the arrangement of the sentence seems against this view, seeing that in the former case the predicate is put forward, and in this we should have expected it also: καὶκλ . κ . ἐκλεκτ . κ . πιστοὶοἱμετ ʼ αὐτοῦ ). 15-18. Explanation of various particulars regarding the harlot, and of the harlot herself. And he saith to me, The waters which thou sawest, where the harlot sitteth, are peoples and multitudes and nations and languages (so in Isaiah 8:7, the king of Assyria and his invading people are compared to the waters of the river, strong and many. There is also doubtless an impious parody intended in the position of the harlot to that of Him who sitteth above the water-flood and remaineth King for ever, Psalms 29:10). And the ten horns which thou sawest, and the beast (viz. in that compact and alliance just now mentioned), these shall hate the harlot (we now enter upon prophetic particulars other than those revealed in the vision, where the harlot was sitting on the beast. Previous to these things coming to pass, she must be cast down from her proud position), and shall make her deserted and naked (contrast to ver. 4. Her former lovers shall no longer frequent her nor answer to her call: her rich adornments shall be stripped off. She shall lose, at the hands of those whom she formerly seduced with her cup of fornication, both her spiritual power over them and her temporal power to adorn herself), and shall eat her flesh (batten upon her spoils; confiscate her possessions: or perhaps, as the same expression, Psalms 27:2; Micah 3:2 ff., where it is used to indicate the extreme vengeance of keen hostility. So Xen. Hell. iii. 3. 6, says of the hatred between the Helots, Periœ ci, &c., and the pure Spartans, ὅπουγὰρἐντούτοις (the Helots, &c.) τιςλόγοςγένοιτοπερὶΣπαρτιατῶν , οὐδέναδύνασθαικρύπτειντὸμὴοὐχἡδέωςἂνκαὶὠμῶνἐσθίειναὐτῶν ), and shall consume her with (or, in) fire (Dü sterd. remarks that in the former clause the figure of a woman is kept: in this latter the thing signified, a city. But this need not absolutely be; the woman may be here also intended: and all the more probably, because the very words ἐνπυρὶκατακαύσουσιν are quoted from the legal formula of the condemnation of those who had committed abominable fornications: cf. Leviticus 20:14, Leviticus 21:9. The burning of the city would be a signal fulfilment: but we cannot positively say that that, and nothing else, is intended). For God put it (reff.: the aor. is proleptic) into their hearts to do His mind, [and to make one mind (ποιῆσαι is in the same sense each time— to put in practice: this they do in regard both to God’ s mind and their own common mind, the two being the same. The identity is not asserted, which would require τὴνμίανγνώμηναὐτῶν , but implied),] and to give their kingdom (i. e., as above, the authority of their respective kingdoms) to the beast, until the words of God shall be fulfilled (the prophetic words or discourses,— not ῥήματα , but λόγοι ,— respecting the destruction of Babylon). And the woman whom thou sawest, is the great city, which hath kingdom over the kings of the earth (every thing here is plain. The “ septem urbs alta jugis toto quæ præ sidet orbi,” Propert., can be but one, and that one Rome. The pres. part., ἡἔχουσα , points to the time when the words were uttered, and to the dominion then subsisting. It has already been seen, that the prophecy regards Rome pagan and papal, but, from the figure of an harlot and the very nature of the predictions themselves, more the latter than the former. I may observe in passing, that the view maintained recently by Dü sterd., after many others, that the whole of these prophecies regard Pagan Rome only, receives no countenance from the words of this verse, which this school of Commentators are fond of appealing to as decisive for them. Rather may we say that this verse, taken in connexion with what has gone before, stultifies their view entirely. If the woman, as these Commentators insist, represents merely the stone-walls and houses of the city, what need is there for μυστήριον on her brow,— what appropriateness in the use of all the Scripture imagery, long familiar to God’ s people, of spiritual fornication? And if this were so, where is the contest with the Lamb,— where the fulfilment of any the least portion of the prophecy? If we understand it thus, nothing is left for us but to say, as indeed some of this school are not afraid to say, that only the Seer’ s wish dictated his words, and that history has not verified them. So that this view has one merit: it brings us at once face to face with the dilemma of accepting or rejecting the book: and thereby, for us, who accept it as the word of God, becomes impossible. For us, who believe the prophecy is to be fulfilled, what was Rome then, is Rome now. Her fornications and abominations, as well as her power and pride, are matter of history and of present fact: and we look for her destruction to come, as we believe it is rapidly coming, by the means and in the manner here foretold). Ch. 18:1-19:10. The destruction of Babylon. And herein, 18:1-3. Announcement of the destruction. The Seer does not see the act of destruction: it is prophesied to him in ch. 17, and now announced, as indeed it had been by anticipation before, ch. 14:8, as having taken place. After these things I saw another angel (another besides the one who shewed him the vision in the last chapter: or, perhaps, as it is natural to join the ἄλλον in some measure with the participle following,— another besides the last who came down from heaven, ch. 10:1) coming down out of heaven (the Seer is still on the earth) having great power (possibly, as Elliott suggests, as the executor of the judgment that he announced. If so, the announcement is still anticipatory, see ver. 21), and the earth was lighted up by his glory (ἐκ , as the source of the brightness): and he cried with (or, in) a mighty voice saying, Babylon the great is fallen [is fallen], and is become an habitation of dæ mons (see especially LXX, Isaiah 34:14 ff.), and a hold (a place of detention: as it were an appointed prison) of every unclean spirit, and a hold of every unclean and hated bird (see the prophecy respecting Babylon, Jeremiah 50:39): because by (out of, as source: or, according to the other reading, of) the wrath of her fornication all the nations have fallen (or, according to the other reading, drunk: see on ch. 14:8. The use of the θυμός is even more remarkable here: of (or, by) that wine of her fornication which has turned into wrath to herself), and the kings of the earth committed fornication with her, and the merchants of the earth became rich out of the quantity (δύναμις , copia, as Vitringa, who remarks, “ alluditur ad Hebræ am vocem ח י ל , cujus hæ c significationis vis est, Job 31:25, Ezekiel 28:4.” We have πλούτουμεγάλουδύναμιν in Jos. Antt. iii. 2. 4) of her luxury (στρῆνος , see reff. and note on 1 Tim., seems properly to mean the exuberance of strength, the flower of pride). 4-20. Warning to God’ s people to leave her, on account of the greatness of her crimes and coming judgments (4-8); lamentations over her on the part of those who were enriched by her (9-20). And I heard another voice out of heaven (not that of the Father nor of Christ, for in such a case, as has been well observed, the long poetical lamentation would be hardly according to prophetic decorum; but that of an angel speaking in the name of God, as we have μου ch. 11:3 also) saying, Come out of her, my people (in reff. Isa., the circumstances differed, in that being a joyful exodus, this a cautionary one: and thus the warning is brought nearer to that one which our Lord commands in Matthew 24:16, and the cognate warnings in the O. T., viz. that of Lot to come out of Sodom, Genesis 19:15-22, when her destruction impended, and that of the people of Israel to get them up from the tents of Dathan and Abiram, Numbers 16:23-26. In reff. Jer., we have the same circumstance of Babylon’ s impending destruction combined with the warning: and from those places probably, especially Jeremiah 51:45, the words here are taken. The inference has been justly made from them (Elliott iv. p, 40), that there shall be, even to the last, saints of God in the midst of Rome: and that there will be danger of their being, through a lingering fondness for her, partakers in her coming judgments), that ye partake not in her sins, and that ye receive not of her plagues (the fear, in case of God’ s servants remaining in her, would be twofold: 1) lest by over-persuasion or guilty conformity they should become accomplices in any of her crimes: 2) lest by being in and of her, they should, though the former may not have been the case (and even more if it have), share in her punishment. It was through lingering fondness that Lot’ s wife became a sharer in the destruction of Sodom): because her sins (not as De W. the cry of her sins: but the idea is of a heap: see below) have reached (κολλᾶσθαι is put here after the analogy of the Heb. ד ּ ָ ב ַ ק , which, see Gesen. Lex. p. 312, is used for assecutus est, proxime accessit ad, Genesis 19:19; Jeremiah 42:16, al. Gesenius compares hæ rere in terga hostium, Liv. 1:14; in tergis, Tacit. hist. iv. 19; Curt. iv. 15. Bengel gives it well, accumulata pervenerunt) as far as heaven, and God hath remembered her iniquities. Repay to her (the words are now addressed to the executioners of judgment) as she also repaid , and double [the] double according to her works (so in reff. Isa. and Jer.). In the cup (see above, ch. 17:4, also 14:8, and our ver. 3) which she mixed, mix for her double (see ch. 14:10: a double portion of the deadly wine of God’ s wrath): in proportion as (lit., in as many things as) she glorified her (self: possibly ruled into this form αὐτήν by the continual recurrence of the various cases of αὐτή in the context), and luxuriated (see above, ver. 3, and ref. 1 Tim. note), so much torment and grief give to her. Because in her heart she saith (that) I sit a queen (see ref. Isa., from which the sense and even the single words come, being there also said of Babylon. Similarly also Ezekiel 27:1 ff., of Tyre), and am not a widow (ref. as above), and shall never see sorrow (= οὐδὲγνώσομαιὀρφανίαν , Isa. l. c). For this cause in one day shall come her plagues, death and mourning and famine (from Isaiah 47:9, where however we have ἀτεκνίακαὶχηρεία . The judgments here are more fearful: death, for her scorn of the prospect of widowhood; mourning, for her inordinate revelling; famine, for her abundance): and with fire shall she be burnt (the punishment of the fornicatress; see ch. 17:16 note. Whether this is to be understood of the literal destruction of the city of Rome by fire, Elliott iv. 43, is surely doubtful, considering the mystical character of the whole prophecy): because strong is [the Lord] God who hath judged her (a warrant for the severity of the judgment which shall befall her). 9-20. The mourning over her: and first, 9, 10, by the kings of the earth. And there shall weep and mourn over her (when the catalogue of mourners has yet to begin, the fact of mourning is thrown forward by the verbs being placed first: but below, ver. 11, when we come to the second member, the persons, as the new feature, are put forward before the verbs. ἐπ ʼ αὐτήν , as the direction and converging of their lamentation) the kings of the earth, who committed fornication and luxuriated (see above, ver. 7) with her, when they see the smoke of her burning, standing afar off on account of their fear of her torment (this feature in the prophecy is an objection to the literal understanding of its details. It can hardly be imagined that the kings should bodily stand and look as described, seeing that no combination of events contemplated in the prophecy has brought them together as yet), saying, Woe, woe, the great city, Babylon the strong city, because in one hour has come thy judgment. 11-16. Lamentation of the merchants. And the merchants of the earth weep and lament (the construction passes into the graphic present, but resumes the future again below, ver. 15, in speaking of the same thing) over her, because no one any longer buys their cargo (reff.: so Eustath. in Wetst.: φόρτοςνηός , ὃκαὶγόμος . The description which follows is perhaps drawn, in its poetic and descriptive features, from the relation of Rome to the world which then was, rather than from its relation at the future time depicted in the prophecy. But it must not for a moment be denied, that the character of this lamentation throws a shade of obscurity over the interpretation, otherwise so plain from the explanation given in ch. 17 ult. The difficulty is however not confined to the application of the prophecy to Rome papal, but extends over the application of it to Rome at all, which last is determined for us by the solution given ch. 17 ult. For Rome never has been, and from its very position never could be, a great commercial city. I leave this difficulty unsolved, merely requesting the student to bear in mind its true limits, and not to charge it exclusively on that interpretation which only shares it with any other possible one. The main features of the description are taken from that of the destruction of and lamentation over Tyre in Eze_27, to which city they were strictly applicable. And possibly it may be said that they are also applicable to the church which has wedded herself to the pride of the earth and its luxuries. But certainly, as has been observed, the details of this mercantile lamentation far more nearly suit London, than Rome at any assignable period of her history), a cargo of gold, and of silver, and of precious stone, and of pearls, and of fine linen manufacture , and of purple, and of silken stuff and of scarlet stuff, and all citron wood (the wood of the θύον , θύα , or θυΐα , the citrus of the Romans (Plin. iii. 29), probably the cupressus thyioides, or the thyia articulata. Theophrastus, Hist. Plant. v. 5, thus describes it: τὸδὲθύϊον , οἱδὲθυΐανκαλοῦσι , παρ ʼ Ἀμμωνίδιγίνεται , καὶἐντῇΚυρηναίᾳ · τὴνμὲνμορφὴνὅμοιονκυπαρίττῳκαὶτοῖςκλάδοιςκαὶτοῖςφύλλοιςκαὶτῷστελέχεικαὶτῷκαρπῷ .… ἀσαπὶς .… ὅλωςτὸξύλον , οὐλότατονδὲτὴνῥίζανἐστί , καὶἐκταύτηςτὰσπουδαιόταταποιεῖταιτῶνἔργων . It was used for costly doors, with fittings of ivory, v. 205 b, 207 f, and for tables, Strabo iv. 310 a. It had a sweet smell, Plin. ut supra, “ Nota etiam Homero fuit; θύον Græ ce vocatur, ab aliis thya. Hanc igitur inter odores uri tradit in deliciis Circes … magno errore eorum qui odoramenta in eo vocabulo accipiunt, cum præ sertim eodem versu cedrum laricemque una tradat: in quo manifestum est de arboribus tantum locutum.” But Pliny is clearly wrong: for Homer’ s words are πῦρμὲνἐπ ʼ ἐσχαρόφινμέγακαίετο , τηλόθιδ ʼ ὀδμὴΚέδρουτ ʼ εὐκεάτοιοθύουτ ʼ ἀνὰνῆσονὀδώδειΔαιομένων , Od. ε . 60. See Wetst. for more illustrations, and Winer, Realw. art. Thinenholz), and every article of ivory, and every article of most costly wood, and of brass, and of iron, and of marble; and cinnamon (it is not certain, whether the κιννάμωμον or κίνναμον , ק ִ נ ּ ָ מ ו ֹ ן , of the ancients was the same as our cinnamon. Various accounts are given of its origin (see Winer, Realw. art. Zimmt, and Theophr. plant. ix. 4; Strabo xvi. p. 778; Diod. Sic. ii. 49, iii. 46), but Herodotus, who (iii. 111) ascribes it to the country where Dionysus was born, i. e. to India, seems to give the right statement, if at least it is the modern cinnamon, which comes from Ceylon. In ref. Exod. it is an ingredient in the holy oil for anointing: in Proverbs 7:17 it is one of the perfumes of the bed of the adulteress: in Son 4:14 it is one of the plants growing in the garden of the beloved) and amomum (a precious ointment made from an Asiatic shrub, and used for the hair: see the numerous citations from Ovid, Martial, &c., in Wetst., and Plin. H. N. xii. 13 (28)), and odours (for incense), and ointment, and frankincense, and wine, and oil, and fine meal (σεμίδαλις , the simila or similago of the Latins, the finest wheaten meal: see Wetst. and Palm and Rost sub voce), and wheat, and cattle and sheep, and of horses and of chariots and of bodies (i. e. slaves. The expression is blamed by the Atticists as not used by the ancients: so Pollux, iii. 78, σώματαἁπλῶςοὐκἂνεἴποις , ἀλλὰσώματαδοῦλα . And so Phrynichus, p. 378, σώματαἐπὶτῶνὠνίωνἀνδραπόδων , οἷονσώματαπωλεῖται , οὐχρῶνταιοἱἀρχαῖοι . Lobeck, in his note there, shews that Plato and Demosthenes use σώματα for any kind of men indefinitely (Plato, Legg. x. 114: Dem. p. 910), and it is the appropriating it to σώμ . δοῦλα alone which constitutes the later usage),— and (the accus. here comes in after genitives) persons of men (so the E. V. for נ ֶ פ ֶ ש ׁ א ָ ד ָ ם , ref. Ezek. which the LXX render as here, ψυχαῖςἀνθρώπων . But in Genesis 36:6, for כ ּ ָ ל ־ נ ַ פ ְ ש ׁ ו ֹ ת ב ּ ֵ י ת ו ֹ , they have πάντατὰσώματατοῦοἴκουαὐτοῦ , where also E. V. has persons. It seems vain to attempt to draw a distinction between the σώματα and ψυχὰςἀνθρώπων . If any is to be sought, the most obvious is that pointed out by Bengel, and adopted by Ewald, Hengstb, and Dü sterd., that the σωμάτων expresses such slaves as belong to the horses and chariots, and ψυχὰςἀνθρ . slaves in general). 14. This verse takes the form of a direct address, and then in the next the merchants are taken up again. From this some have thought that it is not in its right place: e. g. Beza and Vitringa fancied it should be inserted after ver. 23: others, as Ewald, that it was originally a marginal addition by the Writer. But irregular as is the insertion, it need not occasion any real difficulty. It takes up the κλαίουσινκ . πενθοῦσιν of ver. 11, as if αὐτῶν after those verbs had been ἡμῶν , which is not unnatural in a rhapsodical passage. And τούτων , ver. 15, refers very naturally back to πάντατὰλιπαρὰκ .τ .λ ., in this verse. And thy harvest of the desire of thy soul (i. e. the ingathering of the dainties and luxuries which thy soul lusted after. It seems better on account of the following genitives to take ὀπώρα thus, than to understand it in the concrete of the fruit itself, though it frequently has this latter sense: see Palm and Rost’ s Lex. and the reff. here) has departed from thee, and all (thy) fat things and [thy] splendid things have perished from thee, and they (men) shall never more at all find them. The next two verses describe, in strict analogy with vv. 9, 10, the attitude and the lamentation of these merchants. The merchants of these things (viz. of all those mentioned in vv. 12, 13, which have been just summed up as πάντατὰλιπαρὰκ .τ .λ .) who gained wealth from her, shall stand afar off by reason of their fear of her torment, weeping and mourning, saying, Woe, woe, the great city, which was lothed in stuff of fine linen and of purple and of scarlet, and bedecked (lit. gilded; the zeugmatic construction carrying on the word to the other substantives besides χρυσίῳ , which we cannot do in English) in (or, if ἐν be omitted, with) golden ornament and precious stone and pearl: because in one hour hath been desolated all that wealth. 17-19. The lamentation of the shipmasters, &c. And every pilot and every one who saileth any whither (the same expression, without the preposition, is found in Acts 27:2. The words here import, all sailors from place to place), and sailors and as many as make traffic of the sea (τ . θάλασσανἐργάζεσθαι , ‘ mare exercere,’ to live by seafaring, is abundantly illustrated by Wetst, from the classics and later writers), stood afar off, and cried out when they saw the smoke of her burning, saying, Who is like to the great city? And they cast [on] earth upon their heads (see besides ref. Ezekiel 27:30: also 1 Samuel 4:12; 2 Samuel 1:2, 2 Samuel 1:13:19, 2 Samuel 1:15:32; Job 2:12; Lamentations 2:10; and the numerous references in Winer, art. Trauer), and cried out weeping and mourning, saying, Woe, woe, the great city, in (ἐν is ambiguous at first appearance: but from what follows it cannot be merely local, as E. V. “ wherein,” but must be of the conditional element in which: “ whereby” would more nearly give it in our idiom) which all who have their ships in the sea became rich out of her costliness (her costly treasures: concrete meaning for the abstract term): for in one hour she hath been laid waste. 20. The angel concludes with calling on the heavens and God’ s holy ones to rejoice at her fall. Rejoice over her thou heaven, and ye saints and ye apostles and ye prophets, for God hath judged your judgment upon her (hath exacted from her that judgment of vengeance which is due to you: see reff.). 21-23. Symbolic proclamation by an angel of Babylon’ s ruin. And one (or a) strong angel took up a stone great as a millstone, and cast it into the sea, saying, Thus with a rush shall be thrown down Babylon the great city, and shall never be found any more. And the sound of harpers and musicians and flute-players and trumpeters shall never be heard in thee any more, and every artisan of every art shall never be found in thee any more, and the sound of the millstone (see Jeremiah 25:10, Heb. and E. V., not LXX, where the denunciation regards Jerusalem, and is to be performed by the King of Babylon) shall never be heard in thee any more, and the light of a lamp shall never shine in (or upon) thee any more (still from Jer. l. c.), and the voice of the bridegroom and the bride shall never be heard in thee any more: because thy merchants were the great men of the earth, because in thy sorcery see reff.) all the nations were deceived (see Isaiah 47:9-12). And in her (the angel drops the address to the fallen city, and speaks out this last great cause of her overthrow as a fact respecting her) the blood of prophets and of saints was found and of all who have been slain on the earth (i. e. naturally, of all slain for Christ’ s sake and His word. Compare the declaration of our Lord respecting Jerusalem, Matthew 23:35). Ch. 19:1-8. The Church’ s song of praise at the destruction of Babylon. As each of the great events and judgments in this book is celebrated by its song of praise in heaven, so this also: but more solemnly and formally than the others, seeing that this is the great accomplishment of God’ s judgment on the enemy of His Church. Cf. ch. 4:8 ff., introducing, the whole heavenly scenery: 5:9 ff., celebrating the worthiness of the Lamb to open the book: 7:10 ff.: 11:15 ff., on the close fulfilment of God’ s judgments at the sounding of the seventh trumpet: 15:3, on the introduction of the series of the vials: 16:5, on the retributive justice shewn in the pouring out of the third vial. After these things I heard as it were a great voice of much multitude in heaven, of people saying Hallelujah (the word so often found in the Psalter, ה ַ ל ְ ל ו ּ ־ י ָ ה , ‘ Praise ye Jah,’ i. e. Jehovah. Perhaps it is hardly justifiable to lay, as Elliott has done, a stress on this Hebrew formula of praise being now first used, and to infer thence that the Jews are indicated as bearing a prominent part in the following song. The formula must have passed, with the Psalter, into the Christian Church, being continually found in the LXX: and its use first here may be quite accounted for by the greatness and finality of this triumph), the salvation and the glory and the might belong to our God: because true and just are His judgments: because He judged (the aorr. as before are proleptic. In this case they can be rendered by the simple past in English) the great harlot, which corrupted (imperf.: whose habit it was to corrupt) the earth in (ἐν of the element of the corruption) her fornication; and He exacted in vengeance the blood of His servants from her hand . And a second time they said Hallelujah; and her smoke (of her burning, ch. 18:9 al.: not, as Ewald, because τῆςπυρώσεωςαὐτῆς is not added, of hell in general) goeth up to the ages of the ages (this addition gives a reason for the praise, parallel with those introduced by ὅτι before). And the twenty-four elders and the four living-beings fell down and worshipped God who sitteth upon the throne, saying Amen: Hallelujah (thereby confirming the general song of praise of the great multitude). And a voice came forth from the throne (ἀπό perhaps (De W.) gives more the direction than the actual source of the voice (ἐκ , as rec.). It is useless to conjecture whose voice it is: but we may say that it is not that of the Lamb, as Ew. and Hengstb. Our Lord never spoke thus: cf. John 20:17, note) saying, Give praise to our God, all His servants (cf. Psalms 134:1), [and] ye that fear Him, the small and the great (cf. Psalms 115:13). And I heard as it were the voice of much multitude (cf. ver. 1), and as it were the voice of many waters, and as it were the voice of strong thunders, saying (nom. see ref.], Hallelujah, because the Lord God Almighty reigneth (here is a case where we cannot approach the true sense of the aor. ἐβασίλευσεν but by an English present: “ reigned” would make the word apply to a past event limited in duration: “ hath reigned” would even more strongly imply that the reign was over. It is well to note such cases, to shew the inadequacy of our past tenses to reproduce the Greek ones). Let us rejoice and exult, and we will give the glory to Him: because the marriage of the Lamb is come (these words introduce to us transitionally a new series of visions respecting the final consummation of the union between Christ and His Church, which brings about the end, ch. 21:1 ff.: the solemn opening of which now immediately follows in vv. 11 ff. This series, properly speaking, includes in itself the overthrow of the kings of the earth, the binding of Satan, the thousand years’ reign, the loosing of Satan, the final overthrow of the enemy, and the general judgment: but is not consummated except in the entire union of Christ and His with which the book concludes. So that the aorr. ἦλθεν , ἡτοίμασεν , are in a measure proleptic. This figure, of a marriage between the Lord and His people, is too frequent and familiar to need explanation. Cf. in the O. T. Isaiah 54:1-8; Ezekiel 16:7 ff.; Hosea 2:19 f.: and in the N. T., Matthew 9:15 and note, 25:1 ff.; John 3:29; Ephesians 5:25 ff. Indeed it penetrates almost every where the thoughts and language used respecting Christ and the Church), and his wife hath made herself ready (is complete in her adornment, as in next verse). And it was given to her (have we in these words still the voice of the celestial chorus, or are they merely narrative, written in the person of the Seer himself? It seems to me that the latter alternative is rendered necessary by the fact of the explanation, τὸγὰρκ .τ .λ ., being subjoined. Dü sterd. makes the song end at λαμπρόν : but this seems harsh and disjointed. Moreover the ἐδόθη is the regular formula narrandi of the book) that (a construction of St. John’ s, see reff.) she should be clothed in fine linen raiment, bright (and) pure (“ Vides hic cultum gravem ut matronæ , non pompaticum qualis meretricis ante descriptus.” Grot.), for the fine linen raiment is (imports, see Matthew 26:26 reff.), the righteousness of the saints (i. e. their pure and holy state, attained, as in the parallel description ch. 7:14, is declared by the elder, by their having washed their robes and made them white in the blood of the Lamb. The plur. -ματα is probably distributive, implying not many δικαιώματα to each one, as if they were merely good deeds, but one δικαίωμα to each of the saints, enveloping him as in a pure white robe of righteousness. Observe that here and every where, the white robe is not Christ’ s righteousness imputed or put on, but the saints righteousness, by virtue of being washed in His blood. It is their own; inherent, not imputed; but their own by their part in and union to Him). 9, 10. The Bride in this blessed marriage being in fact the sum of the guests at its celebration, the discourse passes to their blessedness, and an assurance of the certainty of that which has been foretold respecting them. The Apostle, moved by these declarations, falls down to worship the angel, but is forbidden. And he saith (who? the only answer ready to our hand is, the angel of ch. 17:1. Some, as Ewald and Ebrard, suppose some one angel to have been constantly with St. John throughout the visions: but there seems no reason for this) to me, Write (cf. ch. 14:13) Blessed are they who are bidden (see reff.: and bear in mind, throughout, our Lord’ s parables on this matter: Matthew 22:1 ff., Matthew 25:1 ff. Our ch. 3:20 furnishes us with a link binding on the spiritual import to the figure) to the supper of the marriage of the Lamb. And he saith to me (the solemn repetition of this formula shews that what follows it is a new and important declaration), These sayings (cf. ch. 17:17. If we understand that the speaker is the angel of ch. 17:1, then οὗτοιοἱλόγοι will most naturally include the prophecies and revelations since then) are the true (we should hardly be justified, in a book where ἀληθινός has repeatedly occurred in a sense hardly distinguishable from ἀληθής , in pressing it here to its more proper meaning of “ genuine” (as Dü sterd.), which would very well suit the sense in this place) (sayings) of God (are the very truth of God, and shall veritably come to pass). And I fell down before his feet to worship him (out of an overweening reverence for one who had imparted to him such great things: see also ch. 22:8, where the same again takes place at the end of the whole revelation, and after a similar assurance. The angel who had thus guaranteed to him, in the name of God, the certainty of these great revelations, seems to him worthy of some of that reverence which belongs to God Himself. The reason given by Dü sterd., that in both cases John imagined the Lord Himself to be speaking to him, is sufficiently contradicted by the plain assertion, here in ch. 17:1, and there in ch. 22:8 itself, that it was not a divine Person, but simply an angel): and he saith to me, Take heed not (to do it): I am a fellow-servant of thine, and (a fellow-servant) of thy brethren who have the testimony of Jesus (as in reff.: on the former of which see note): worship God (both words are emphatic: let προσκύνησις be reserved for Him), for (these words following are those of the angel, not of the Apostle, as Dü sterd.: ver. 8, and ch. 5:8, where the Apostle gives explanations, are no rule for this place, where the explanation of necessity comes from the speaker, whose reason for prohibiting the offered homage it renders) the testimony of Jesus (the gen. Ἰησοῦ is, as before, objective: the testimony borne to Jesus by these σύνδουλοι , men and angels) is the spirit of prophecy (there is no real difficulty in this saying: no reason for destroying its force by making Ἰησοῦ subjective, and ἡμαρτ · Ἰης . to mean “ the witness which proceeds from Jesus” (Dü st.). What the angel says is this: Thou and I and our brethren are all ἔχοντεςτὴνμαρτυρίανἸησοῦ (= μάρτυρεςἸησοῦ , as uniformly in this book); and the way in which we bear this witness, the substance and essence of this testimony, is, the spirit of prophecy; ἓνπνεῦμαἐποτίσθημεν . This Spirit, given to me in that I shew thee these things, given to thee in that thou seest and art to write them, is the token that we are fellow-servants and brethren. Thus Vitringa: “ Idem ille Spiritus qui loquitur agitque per eos qui præ dicant testimonium Christo, quod agebant Apostoli, idem ipse est, qui per me loquitur, qui missus sum a Domino ut res venturi temporis tibi declararem. Tanta itaque tua quanta mea est dignitas, sumusque adeo conservi ad officia non disparia honoris et gradus a Domino appellati.” It does not follow that every one of those ἐχόντωντὴνμαρτυρίανἸησοῦ has, in the same distinguished degree, the Spirit of prophecy: but every such one has the same Spirit, and that one Spirit, and no other, is the Spirit of prophecy). 11-22:5. The End: beginning with the triumphal coming forth of the Lord and His saints to victory (vv. 11-16), then proceeding with the great defeat and destruction of the beast and false prophet and kings of the earth (vv. 17-21), the binding of Satan and the millennial reign (ch. 20:1-6), the unbinding of Satan and his destruction and that of the deceived nations (20:7-10), the great general judgment (20:11-15), and terminating with the vision of the new heavens and earth, and the glories of the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5). 11-16. The triumphal coming forth of the Lord and His hosts to victory. And I saw heaven opened, and behold a white horse (the same words, including the five following, as in ch. 6:2. It is wonderful that this striking identity, in a book where symbolism is so constant to itself, has not prevented the mistakes which have been made in interpreting that place. This horse and Rider are (symbolically) the same as there: the νικῶνκαὶἵνανικήσῃ is on the point of its completion: the other horses and their riders, dark forms in His great world-long procession to victory, will now for ever vanish, and war and famine and pestilence be known no more), and He that sitteth upon him [called] faithful and true (see ref.), and in righteousness He judgeth and warreth (both those acts being his concern in his present triumphant progress. Notice that the very construction with the participles καθήμενος and καλούμενος is the same as that in ch. 6:2). His eyes (the δέ , as often, is best given in English by an asyndeton, marking a break in the sense, passing from the subjective to the objective description) [were as] a flame of fire (ch. 1:14 verbatim, again beyond question identifying Him), and upon His head (accus.: see ch. 4:2, note) many diadems (probably as He is βασιλεὺςβασιλέων : so Ewald, De W., Hengstb. Certainly these are not the crowns of the ten kings, as Zü llig, al., for they are yet to be overthrown, ver. 19 ff. The στέφανος of ch. 6:2 has become multiplied in the course of the subjection of the world to Him): having [names written (if these words are genuine, probably the meaning is that the names were inscribed on the diadems, signifying the import of each), and] a name written (where, is not said. From this portion of the description regarding His head, probably on the Brow) which none knoweth except Himself (what name is indicated? Certainly not that given below, ver. 13; nor can these words mean that He Himself alone knows the mystery latent in that name (so Vitringa, al.). Nor again can we say that it is any of the names by which our blessed Lord is known to us already (so Ewald, al.). But it is the τὸὄνομάμουτὸκαινόν of ch. 3:12: some new and glorious name, indicative, as appears from the context there, of the completed union between Him and His people, and of His final triumph. This name the Apostle saw written, but knew not its import: that, like the contents of the sealed book, being reserved for the day when He shall reveal it): and clothed in a vesture dipped in blood (see Isaiah 63:2, Isaiah 63:3: which is clearly in contemplation here, from our ver. 15 b. This being so, it is better perhaps to avoid the idea of His own blood being in view): and His name is called, The Word of God (this title forms so plain a link between the Apocalypse and St. John’ s writings, where only it occurs, that various attempts have been made by those who reject his authorship, to deprive it of that significance. I have discussed these in the Prolegomena, § i. parr. 110, 111). And the armies which are in heaven followed Him upon white horses, clothed in fine linen [raiment] white, pure (this clothing also speaks for the saints being included in the triumphal procession: see ver. 8, and ch. 6:11). And out of His mouth goeth forth a sharp sword (see ch. 1:16, 2:12, 16), that with (ἐν , as invested in or with) it he may smite the nations; and He shall rule (see ch. 2:27, 12:5, and note) them (masc.; their component members being in the Writer’ s mind) with a rod of iron: and He (and none other, as we know from Isaiah 63:3) treadeth (it is His office to tread) the winepress of the wine of the fierceness of the wrath (of the outbreaking of the anger: see on ch. 16:19) of Almighty God. And He hath upon His vesture and upon His thigh a name written (i. e. most naturally, written at length, partly on the vesture, partly on the thigh itself; at the part where, in an equestrian figure, the robe drops from the thigh. The usual way of taking the words is to suppose the καί epexegetic or definitive of the former words, “ on His vesture,” and that on the part of it covering His thigh. So De W., Dü sterd., al. Others imagine (so Grot., al.) a sword, on the hilt of which the name is inscribed. But there is no trace of this in the text. Wetst. quotes Cicero, Verr. iv. 43, “ Signum Apollinis pulcherrimum, cujus in femore literulis minutis argenteis nomen Myronis erat inscriptum:” and Pausanias, Eliac. extr., ἀνάθημα … ἀνδρὸςεἰκὼν … ἐλεγεῖονδὲἐπ ʼ αὐτὸγεγραμμένονἐστὶνἐπὶτοῦμηροῦ , Ζῆνιθεῶνβασιλεῖμ ʼ ἀκροθίνιονἐνθάδ ʼ ἔθηκανΜενδαῖοι . See also Herod. ii. 106, where the inscription runs across the chest from shoulder to shoulder), King of Kings, and Lord of Lords (ch. 17:14). 17-21. Defeat and destruction of the beast and the false prophet and the kings of the earth: preceded by (17, 18) an angelic proclamation, indicating the vastness of the slaughter. And I saw an (one) angel standing in the sun (not only as the place of brightness and glory becoming the herald of so great a victory, but also as the central station in mid-heaven for those to whom the call was to be made): and he cried with a great voice, saying to all the birds which fly in mid-heaven, Come, be gathered together (see, on the whole of this proclamation, Ezekiel 39:17 ff., of which it is a close reproduction; also Matthew 24:28) to the great banquet of God, that ye may eat the flesh of kings, and the flesh of captains of thousands, and the flesh of strong men, and the flesh of horses, and of them that sit on them, and the flesh of all, free as well as bond, both small and great (this proclamation is evidently not to be pressed into a place in the prophecy, nor are its details to be sought in the interpretation, as has been done by Andreas and Primasius, who hold the birds to be angels, and Brightm., who holds them to be nations and churches. The insertion is made, as above, to shew the greatness and universality of the coming slaughter). And I saw the beast (ch. 13:1) and the kings of the earth and their armies gathered together (as above under the sixth vial, ch. 16:12 ff., on the field of Harmagedon) to make their war (viz. that predicted above, ch. 16:14, 17:14) with Him that sitteth upon the horse and with his army (στρατεύματος , sing. probably as being one, and having one Head, whereas they are many, and under various leaders). And the beast was taken (reff.), and those with him (to wit, the ψευδοπροφήτης , and οἱλοιποί , ver. 21: or, and with him the false prophet),— the false prophet who wrought the miracles in his presence (cf. ch. 13:11-17, by which it clearly appears that this false prophet is identical with that second beast), with which he deceived those who received a continued habit) the mark of the beast and those who worshipped his image (cf. ch. 13:14, 16): the two were cast alive into the lake of fire which burneth (the extraordinary concord, τοῦπυρὸςτῆςκαιομένης , appears to have been in the original text, and must be simply accepted as it stands) with brimstone (viz. into Gehenna, or hell properly so called, Matthew 5:22; where also, after the millennium, Satan himself is cast, ch. 20:10, and when their work is finally accomplished, Death and Hades, ib. 14 a. This lake of fire constitutes the second death, ib. 14 b, 21:8. These only, and not the Lord’ s human enemies yet, are cast into eternal punishment. The latter await the final Judgment, ch. 20:11 ff.). And the rest were slain with the sword of Him that sitteth on the horse, which (sword) goeth forth out of His mouth (see Isaiah 11:4; 2 Thessalonians 2:8. De Wette remarks, that it is a hint of the spiritual nature of this victory, that no battle seems actually to take place, but the Lord Himself, as in 2 Thess., destroys the adversaries with the sword out of his own mouth. But clearly, all must not be thus spiritualized. For if so, what is this gathering? what is indicated by the coming forth of the Lord in glory and majesty? Why is His personal presence wanted for the victory?): and all the birds were satiated with (out of, as the material of the satiety) their flesh. Ch. 20:1-10. The victory over Satan. The next enemy now remaining is the Arch-fiend himself, who had given his might and his throne and great power (ch. 13:2) to the beast: whose instruments the other enemies were. The blow given to him by their overthrow is followed by his binding and incarceration for 1000 years (vv. 1-3): during which period the Saints live and reign with Christ, and judge the world, and the first resurrection takes place (vv. 4-6). But his malice and his power are not yet at an end. One final effort is permitted him at the end of that time (ver. 7), and he once more succeeds in deceiving the nations (ver. 8), who come up against the camp of the saints, and are destroyed by fire from heaven (ver. 9). He is then cast into the lake of fire with the beast and false prophet, there to be tormented for ever (ver. 10). 1-3. The binding of the dragon. And I saw an angel coming down out of heaven (not Christ himself, as , , Calov., Vitr., Hengstb., al.: nor the Holy Spirit, as Joachim, Cocceius (al.?): but a veritable angel, as always before in this book) having the key of the abyss (of hell, the abode of the devil and his angels: see ch. 9:1. For this abyss apparently is distinct from the lake of fire, a further and more dreadful place of punishment: see on ver. 10. This key had been for the purposes of God’ s judgments given to Satan (= Abaddon, Apollyon), and by him the locusts were let forth, ch. 9:1-11. Now it is entrusted to other hands, and for another purpose), and a great chain in (so in English: Gr., resting on, hanging upon, as a chain naturally would be: see reff.) his hand. And he laid hold of the dragon (already well known from ch. 12:3 ff., 9; 13:2, 4; 16:13), the ancient serpent (for the expression and the construction, see reff.), who is the devil and Satan, and bound him a thousand years, and cast him into the abyss, and shut and sealed over him (shut the door or cover at the top, and sealed it down. Notice, that the same absolute use of σφραγίζω in the active is found in ref. John, and apparently there only: see Palm and Rost, sub voce), that he might deceive the nations no more (there does not appear to be the least ground for Dü sterd.’ s idea, that the reading πλανᾷ was adopted in order to suit the views of the later Fathers who regarded the millennium as present), until the thousand years shall be (shall have been. futurus exactus) accomplished: after that he must (the δεῖ of prophecy; must, according to the necessity of God’ s purposes) be loosed for a little time (see below, ver. 7). 4-6. The Millennial reign. And I saw thrones (combine the two passages in the reff.), and they sat upon them (who? the Apostles, as in ref. Matt.: the Saints, as in 1 Corinthians 6:2, 1 Corinthians 6:3,— οὐκοἴδατεὅτιοἱἅγιοιτὸνκόσμονκρινοῦσιν ; … οὐκοἴδατεὅτιἀγγέλουςκρινοῦμεν ; Notice well, that there is nothing to hinder this in the souls of the saints not being seen till the next clause: for there is no mark of temporal sequence connecting the two verses: nay, such an idea is precluded by the specification at the end of ver. 4, that those very souls of the saints are they who reigned with Christ, and were His assessors in reigning and judging, during this time), and judgment (κρῖμα , the act and decision of judgment) was given to them (so in ref. Daniel (Theod.), ἕωςοὗἦλθενὁπαλαιὸςἡμερῶν , καὶτὸκρῖμαἔδωκενἁγίοιςὑψίστου . That is, they were constituted judges). And I saw the souls of them who had been beheaded (the word πελεκίζω , to smite with the axe, is found in Polybius (i. 7. 12, xi. 30. 2), Strabo, Plutarch, and Diodorus Siculus, in the sense of beheading) on account of the testimony of Jesus and on account of the word of God (ref.), and (of those) the which did not worship (during life) the beast nor yet his image, and did not receive the mark (mentioned ch. 13:16) on their forehead and upon their hand: and they lived (i. e. “ lived again;” ἔζησαν = ἀνέζησαν , as in reff.: and, as the act is presently described as the first resurrection, with their bodies, perfect and complete) and reigned with Christ (took part in His Kingdom; see ch. 1:6; 2 Timothy 2:12: also 1 Corinthians 4:8 and note) a thousand years . The rest of the dead lived not (again, as above) until the thousand years be completed. This (αὕτη is not the subject, as De Wette, but the predicate, as in all such cases: the reduction of the proposition to the logical form requiring its inversion) is the first resurrection (remarks on the interpretation of this passage will be found in the Prolegomena, § v. par. 33. It will have been long ago anticipated by the readers of this Commentary, that I cannot consent to distort words from their plain sense and chronological place in the prophecy, on account of any considerations of difficulty, or any risk of abuses which the doctrine of the millennium may bring with it. Those who lived next to the Apostles, and the whole Church for 300 years, understood them in the plain literal sense: and it is a strange sight in these days to see expositors who are among the first in reverence of antiquity, complacently casting aside the most cogent instance of consensus which primitive antiquity presents. As regards the text itself, no legitimate treatment of it will extort what is known as the spiritual interpretation now in fashion. If, in a passage where two resurrections are mentioned, where certain ψυχαὶἔζησαν at the first, and the rest of the νεκροὶἔζησαν only at the end of a specified period after that first,— if in such a passage the first resurrection may be understood to mean spiritual rising with Christ, while the second means literal rising from the grave;— then there is an end of all significance in language, and Scripture is wiped out as a definite testimony to any thing. If the first resurrection is spiritual, then so is the second, which I suppose none will be hardy enough to maintain: but if the second is literal, then so is the first, which in common with the whole primitive Church and many of the best modern expositors, I do maintain, and receive as an article of faith and hope). Blessed (see ch. 14:13, 19:9) and holy is he that hath part in (ref., the expression is peculiar to St. John) the first resurrection: over such persons the second death (see reff.: and bear in mind what is said of our Lord Himself, Romans 6:9) hath not power, but they shall be priests of God and of Christ, and they [shall] reign with Him (Christ) a (or, the) thousand years. 7-10. Loosing of Satan at the end of the millennium: gathering together and destruction of the nations: final condemnation of Satan. And when the thousand years are completed, Satan shall be loosed out of his prison (see ver. 3. The prophetic future is here used: but in ver. 9 the historic form with aorists is resumed) and shall go forth to deceive the nations which are in the four corners of the earth (there will be nations on earth besides the saints reigning with Christ, who during the binding of Satan have been quiet and willing subjects of the Kingdom, but who on his being let loose are again subjected to his temptations, which stir them into rebellion against God), Gog and Magog (compare Eze_38 and 39 throughout. This which is here prophesied is the great final fulfilment of those chapters. And the names Gog and Magog, taken from there, had been used in the rabbinical books to signify the nations which should in the latter days come up to Jerusalem against the Messiah. So the Jerus. Targum on Numbers 11:27, in Wetst., “ In fine extremitatis dierum Gog et Magog et exercitus eorum adscendent Hierosolyma et per manus regis Messiæ ipsi cadent et vii. annos dierum ardebunt filii Israel ex armis eorum:” and Avoda sara, 1: “ quando videbunt bellum Gog et Magog, dicet ad eos Messias: ad quid huc venistis? Respondebunt, Adversus Dominum et adversus Christum ejus.” This name Magog occurs Genesis 10:2, as that of a son of Japhet, in company with brethren whose names mostly belong to northern and north-eastern nations: Gomer (Kimmerians), Madai (Medians), Meshech (Muscovites), &c. With these however are joined in Ezekiel 38:5, Persians, Ethiopians, Libyans. Josephus renders the word Σκύθαι (Antt. i. 6. 3), Μαγώγηςδὲτοὺςἀπ ʼ αὐτοῦΜαγώγαςὀνομασθένταςᾤκισε , Σκύθαςδὲὑπ ʼ αὐτῶνπροσαγορευομένους , and so Jerome: Suidas, “ Persians .” It seems to be a general name for the northern nations, and Gog, if at least we may follow the analogy of Eze 38:2, is their prince), to gather them together to the (well-known) war: of whom the number (of them) is as the sand of the sea. And they went up (the historical aor. is here resumed) upon the breadth of the earth (i. e. entirely overspread it; see ref.) and encompassed the camp of the saints, and the beloved city (by these two is probably meant one and the same thing, the καί being epexegetical; or at all events the camp must be conceived as surrounding and defending the city. The πόλιςἡἠγαπημένη is Jerusalem (reff.): not the new Jerusalem, but the earthly city of that name, which is destined yet to play so glorious a part in the latter days). And there came down fire out of heaven (so in reff. Ezek.), and devoured them: and the devil that deceiveth them (the pres. part. merely designates: the devil their deceiver) was cast into the lake of fire and brimstone, where also are the beast and the false prophet (ch. 19:20). And they shall be tormented by day and by night to the ages of the ages. 11-15. The general judgment. And I saw a great white throne (great, in distinction from the thrones before mentioned, ver. 4: white, as seen in purest light, and symbolizing the most blameless justice), and Him that sitteth on it (viz. God: the Father: see ch. 4:3, 21:5. It is necessary to keep to the well-known formula of the book in interpreting τὸνκαθήμενονἐπ ʼ αὐτοῦ , even though some expressions and sayings seem better to belong to the Son. Be it also remembered that it is the Father who giveth all judgment to the Son: and though He Himself judgeth no man, yet He is ever described as present in the judgment, and mankind as judged before Him. We need not find in this view any difficulty, or discrepancy with such passages as Matthew 25:31, seeing that our Lord Himself says in ch. 3:21, ἐγὼ .… ἐκάθισαμετὰτοῦπατρόςμουἐντῷθρόνῳαὐτοῦ . Nor need we be surprised at the sayings of our Lord, such as that in ch. 21:6 b, being uttered by Him that sitteth on the throne. That throne is now the throne of God and of the Lamb, ch. 22:1. Cf. also ch. 21:22), from whose face the earth and the heaven fled, and place was not found for them (these words again seem to indicate the presence of One who has not hitherto appeared: whereas Christ in glory has been long present on earth. This fleeing away of heaven and earth is elsewhere described as their consumption by fire, 2 Peter 3:10-12. Both descriptions indicate the passing away of their present corruptible state and change to a state glorious and incorruptible). And I saw the dead (viz. the λοιποὶτῶννεκρῶν of ver. 5: those who rose as described below, ver. 13), the great and the small, standing before the throne, and books were opened (see ref. Dan.), and another book was opened, which is (the book) of life (Dü sterd. remarks that the order of proceedings indicated seems to be that the contents of the books in which were written the works of men indicated whether they were to be found in the book of life. But this could hardly be: for in that case, what need for the book of life at all? Rather should we say that those books and the book of life bore independent witness to the fact of men being or not being among the saved: the one by inference from the works recorded: the other by inscription or non-inscription of the name in the list. So the ‘ books’ would be as it were the vouchers for the book of life): and the dead were judged out of the things written in the books according to their works (reff.: and 2 Corinthians 5:10). And the sea gave forth the dead that were in her (the citation in Wetst. from Achilles Tatius, v. p. 313 b, λέγουσιδὲτὰςἐνὕδασιψυχὰςἀνῃρημέναςμηδὲεἰςᾅδουκαταβαίνεινὅλως , ἀλλ ʼ αὐτοῦπερὶτὸὕδωρἔχειντὴνπλάνην , is no illustration of this passage, which simply imports that the dead contained in the sea shall rise), and Death and Hades (see ch. 1:18, 6:8) gave forth the dead which were in them (i. e. all the dead, buried and unburied, rose again), and they were judged each according to their (his) works. And Death and Hades were cast into the lake of fire (Death and Hades are regarded as two dæ mons, enemies of God. So in 1 Corinthians 15:26, ἔσχατοςἐχθρὸςκαταργεῖταιὁθάνατος : and in Isaiah 25:8, Heb. and E. V., not LXX, “ He will swallow up death in victory,” cf. 1 Corinthians 15:54. Hades, as in ch. 6:8, is Death’ s follower and the receiver of his prey. The punishment of sin is inflicted on both, because both are the offspring of and bound up with sin). This is the second death, the lake of fire (thus then our Lord’ s saying, ch. 2:11, and that of the Apostle in our ver. 6, are explained. As there is a second and higher life, so there is also a second and deeper death. And as after that life there is no more death (ch. 21:4), so after that death there is no more life, ver. 10; Matthew 25:41). And if any was not found written in the book of life, he was cast into the lake of fire (there was no intermediate state). Ch. 21:1-22:5. The new heavens and new earth: the glories of the heavenly Jerusalem. The whole of the things described in the remaining portion of the book are subsequent to the general judgment, and descriptive of the consummation of the triumph and bliss of Christ’ s people with Him in the eternal kingdom of God. This eternal kingdom is situated on the purified and renewed earth, become the blessed habitation of God with his glorified people. And I saw a new heaven and a new earth; for the first (i. e. old, see ref.) heaven and the first earth were departed: and the sea exists no longer (see on the whole, Isaiah 65:17. The vision does not necessarily suppose the annihilation of the old creation, but only its passing away as to its outward and recognizable form, and renewal to a fresh and more glorious one. And though not here stated on the surface, it is evident that the method of renewal is that described in 2 Peter 3:10 ff.; viz. a renovation by fire. This alone will account for the unexpected and interesting feature here introduced, viz. that the sea exists no longer. For this the words mean (see ver. 4), and not as Dü sterd., that the (former) sea, as well as the former heaven and earth, had passed away). And I saw the holy city, new Jerusalem (see especially ref. Gal., ἡἄνωἹερους ., and note), coming down out of heaven from God (Schö ttg. quotes from the remarkable Jewish book Sohar, Gen. f. 69, c. 271, “ R. Jeremias dixit, Deus S. B. innovabit mundum suum, et æ dificabit Hierosolymam, ut ipsam descendere faciat in medium sui de cœ lo, ita ut nunquam destruatur.” See Schö ttg.’ s dissertation “ de Hierosolyma cœ lesti,” in his vol. i. 1205 ff.), prepared as a bride adorned for her husband (as in our common discourse, so here with the Evangelist, the name of the material city stands for the community formed by its inhabitants. But it does not follow in his case, any more than in ours, that both material city and inhabitants have not a veritable existence: nor can we say that the glorious description of it, presently to follow, applies only to them. On the figure, see Isaiah 61:10-5). And I heard a great voice out of the throne saying, Behold, the tabernacle (i. e. dwelling: the allusion being to the tabernacle in the wilderness, in which God dwelt in symbol only) of God is with men, and He shall dwell (tabernacle) with them, and they shall be his people (plur., because, as in ver. 24, many nations shall now partake in the blessed fulfilment of the promise), and He shall be God with them (the name Emmanuel, μεθ ʼ ἡμῶνὁθεός , first then being realized in its full significance), their God (so the ancient promises are fulfilled, Exodus 29:45; Leviticus 26:11; Ezekiel 37:27): and [God] shall wipe away every tear from their eyes (reff.): and death shall exist no longer (ch. 20:14), and (Gr. nor) mourning (Isaiah 65:19) and (nor) crying and (nor) pain shall exist no longer: [because] the first (former state of) things are passed away. And He that sitteth on the throne (see note, ch. 20:11) said, Behold, I make all things new. And he (probably the angel, or voice from heaven, that gave the Seer similar commands before, ch. 14:13, 19:9. This seems probable on account of the change to the formula λέγει , as well as from the nature of the command: for we have εἶπένμοι resumed immediately with the ἐγώ , leaving no doubt Who speaks) saith, Write: because these words are faithful and true. And He said to me , [They are fulfilled .] I am (or, excluding the portions in brackets, I have become) the Alpha and the Omega (see above, ch. 1:8), the beginning and the end (“ the Unchangeable and Everlasting One, by Whom the old was and the new shall be, by Whom the old is fulfilled in the new, and with it all hope and all promise.” De Wette). I to him that thirsteth will give [to him] of the fountain of the water of life freely (cf. ch. 7:17, and reff. Isa. and John: cf. also Matthew 5:6). He that conquereth shall inherit these things (the glories to be shewn in the heavenly Jerusalem), and I will be to him (a) God, and he shall be to me a son (this will be the full performance to the sons of God of the promise in ref. 2 Kings: which being first made to Solomon, received its chief fulfilment in the great Son of David and of God (ref. Heb.), and now in Him to them that are His). But to the cowardly (the contrast to νικῶντες : the ὑποστελλόμενοι of Hebrews 10:38: those who shrink timidly from the conflict), and the unbelievers, and the polluted with abominations (those who have partaken of the βδελύγματα in ch. 17:4,— of idolatries, &c.), and murderers, and fornicators, and sorcerers (the form φαρμακός , found only in ref. in the N. T., is the common one in the LXX. See besides ref. and other places in Exodus, Deuteronomy 18:11; Daniel 2:2; Malachi 3:5. The form φαρμακεύς does not occur in the LXX), and idolaters, and all the false (i. e. all liars), their part (the construction is changed: instead of οὐκἔσταιμέροςἐνκ .τ .λ ., it proceeds in the affirmative, implying that negative and expressing more) (shall be) in the lake that burneth with fire and brimstone, which is the second death (reff.). 9-22:5. More particular description of the heavenly Jerusalem. And there came one of the seven angels which had the seven vials, which (namely the angels, however strange it may seem) were full of the seven last plagues (one of these angels had before shewn the Apostle the great harlot, ch. 17:1. The contrast to that vision is maintained throughout these opening verses), and he talked with me, saying, Hither, I will shew thee (hitherto verbatim as in ch. 17:1) the bride, the wife of the Lamb (here likewise note the contrast to the succeeding context in ch. 17:1,— in the faithfulness and purity implied in these words). And he carried me away in the spirit (ch. 17:3) to (ἐπί , as we say in some parts of England, on to, combining motion towards and position upon) a mountain great and high (so likewise when the vision of the heavenly city is vouchsafed to Ezekiel, Ezekiel 40:1, Ezekiel 40:2), and shewed me the holy city Jerusalem, coming down out of heaven from God (this vision had begun in ver. 2, but the Apostle is now carried to this “ specular mount” to have a nearer and fuller view of it. The city must not be conceived of as on or covering the mountain, but as seen descending to a spot close by it: so in Ezekiel 40:2, whether we read “ by” or “ upon” as in our margin), having the glory of God (i. e. not merely brightness of a divine and celestial kind, but the glorious presence of God Himself, the Shechinah, abiding in her: see ver. 23: also ch. 15:8): her brightness (henceforward the description goes on independent in construction of ἔδειξεν , and changes several times: so in ch. 1:15 ff. See Winer, edn. 6, § 59. 11. φωστήρ , from ver. 23, is the effect of the divine glory shining in her: see reff. Gen., where it is used of the heavenly bodies) (was) like to a stone most precious, as it were to a jasper stone, crystal clear (Wetst. quotes from Psellus, ἡἴασπιςφύσεικρυσταλλοειδής . See this “ crystallizing” jasper discussed in note on ch. 4:3. Ebrard thinks it is the diamond); having (on the construction, see above) a wall great and high, having (also) twelve gates (see Ezekiel 48:30 ff., where the same features are found in the description), and at the gates (dat. after ἐπί , of close juxtaposition, primarily of addition) twelve angels, and names inscribed (contrast to the ὀνόματαβλασφημίας , ch. 17:3), which are [the names] of the twelve tribes of the sons of Israel (it does not follow from this description either, 1. that the angels must necessarily be guardians, seeing that no foes remain to be guarded against: they are for the completeness and adornment of the city after the idea of a beautiful fortress, adopted to set it forth:— or, 2. that, as in the Jewish books (see De Wette here), each gate is to be imagined as used by each tribe: the twelve tribes of Israel represent the whole people of God, and the city the encampment of Israel: see below). From (on the side entering from) the sun-rising three gates (Joseph, Benjamin, Dan, in Ezekiel 48:32. In ch. 7:6, Manasseh is substituted for Dan, which is omitted. See there), from the north three gates (Reuben, Judah, Levi), from the south three gates (Simeon, Issachar, Zebulun), from the sun-setting three gates (Gad, Asher, Naphtali: Ezek. ibid. In Num_2, the order of encampment is thus set down: East,— Judah, Issachar, Zebulun: South,— Reuben, Simeon, Gad: West,— Ephraim, Manasseh, Benjamin: North,— Dan, Asher, Naphtali). And the wall of the city (the wall surrounding the city) having (had: for masc. of the part., see ch. 4:1 reff.) twelve foundation-stones (i. e. probably, each portion of the wall joining two gates had a conspicuous basement, of one vast stone. Four of these, as Dü sterd. observes, would be corner-stones, joining the third gate on one side to the first gate on the next), and upon them (gen. over them, perhaps extending all their length) twelve names of the twelve apostles of the Lamb (cf. Ephesians 2:20, where however the ruling idea is a different one, see the interpretation in the note. No inference can be drawn as has been drawn by some from this that the Writer was not himself an Apostle: see prolegg. § i. 84 ff.). 15-17. Its measurement: cf. Ezekiel 40:3-5. And he that spoke with me had as a measure a golden reed (reff.) that he might measure the city, and her gates and her wall. And the city lieth four-square (so E. V. well; is in shape tetragonal), and her length is as great as [also] her breadth (see below). And he measured the city with the reed to the length of stadii of the amount of twelve thousands (such appears to be the construction. On the ἐπί , ‘ over,’ of extent, see Winer, edn. 6, § 49, l. 3, a. We have it in the adverbial phrase ἐφ ʼ ὅσον , Romans 11:13. The 12,000 stadii are in all probability the whole circumference, 1000 to each space between the gates); the length and the breadth and the height of it are equal (the supposition of many expositors, that the city thus formed a monstrous cube, 3000 stadii in length, in breadth, and in height, really does not appear to be necessarily included in these words. Nay, it seems to be precluded by what next follows, where the angel measures the height of the wall. For Dü sterdieck’ s idea that the houses were 3000 stadii in height, while the wall was only 144 cubits, is too absurd to come at all into question. The words are open, this last consideration being taken into account, to two interpretations: 1) that the city, including the hill or rock on which it was placed, and which may be imagined as descending with it, formed such a cube as seems here described: or 2) that there is some looseness of use in the word ἴσα , and that we must understand that the length and breadth were equal to each other and the height equal all round: nearly so De Wette, al. Of these two I prefer the former, as doing no violence to the words, and as recalling somewhat the form of the earthly Jerusalem on its escarpment above the valley of the Kedron. Some such idea seems also to be pointed at in the rabbinical books, e. g. Bava Bathra, f. 75. 2, “ Dixit Rabba, R. Jochananem dixisse, Deum S. B. tempore futuro Hierosolyma evecturum in altitudinem xii. milliarium S. D. Zach. xiv. 10. Quid est ‘ in loco suo?’ talem esse futuram superne, qualis est infra. Rabba dixit, senex mihi narravit, se vidisse Hierosolymam priorem, quæ xii. milliarium erat. Dices, difficilem fore adscensum? sed scriptum est, Isaiah 60:8.” And in Schir R. vii. 5, “ Jerusalem tempore futuro dilatabitur ita ut pertingat usque ad portas Damasci, Zach. 9:1 … et exaltabitur ut pertingat usque ad thronum gloriæ , donec dicatur, locus mihi angustus est.” See more citations in Wetst,). And he measured the wall of it (i. e. the height of the wall of it), of an hundred and forty-four cubits, the measure of a man, which is that of an angel (meaning that in this matter of measure, men and angels use the same. The interpretation, that in this particular case, the angel used the measure current among men (De Wette, al.), is ungrammatical. As to the height thus given, it may be observed that the height of Solomon’ s porch, the highest part of his temple, was 120 cubits, 2 Chronicles 3:4, and the general height of his temple, 30 cubits, 1 Kings 6:2). 18-27. Material, and further description of the city. And the building-work (Jos. in ref. is speaking of the harbour of Cæ sarea, as built by Herod the Great: he describes it as being τῇδομήσειπερίβλεπτον , because the materials were costly and brought from a distance: and says, ἡδὲἐνδόμησιςὅσηνἐνεβάλετοκατὰτῆςθαλάττηςεἰςδιακοσίουςπόδας . This would be, as appears when he afterwards describes (as here) its materials, a mole or breastwork, against the sea. The word seems to be no where else found) of the wall of it (was) jasper (ch. 4:3, note), and the city (was) pure gold like to pure glass (i. e. ideal gold, transparent, such as no gold is here, but surpassing it in splendour). The foundation-stones of the wall of the city (see above, ver. 14) (were) adorned with every (cf. πᾶν , ch. 18:12) precious stone (not that the stones were merely set on the θεμέλιοι , but that the θεμ . themselves consisted of them: see below, and cf. Isaiah 54:12): the first foundation-stone (was) jasper (the material of the upper building of the wall, ver. 18), the second, sapphire (ס ַ פ ּ ִ י ר , reff. The stone described under this name by Pliny seems to be our lapis lazuli: he says, xxxvii. 39, “ Sapphirus et aureis punctis collucet. Cæ ruleæ et sapphiri, raroque cum purpura.” But the sapphire of the Scriptures seems more like the present hard sky-blue stone known by that name: see ref. Eze_1: and Winer, Realw., Edelstein, 5), the third, chalcedony (this name is unknown: corresponding perhasps to ש ׁ ְ ב ו ֹ , Exodus 28:19, Exodus 39:12 [36:18], which the LXX and Josephus render ἀχάτης , agate. There seems to have been an agate brought from Chalcedon. It is described as semi-opaque, sky-blue, with stripes of other colours: “ morientibus arboribus similes,” Plin. xxxvii. 30. See Winer, ut supra, 8, and 16), the fourth, emerald (note, ch. 4:3), the fifth, sardonyx (י ַ ה ֲ ל ו ֹ ם , Exodus 39:11; Ezekiel 28:13: Pliny, xxxvii. 24, says, “ Sardonyches olim ut ex nomine ipso apparet, intelligebantur candore in sarda, hoc est velut carnibus in ungue hominis imposito, et utroque translucido.” The ancient versions and Josephus call it onyx. See Winer, ut supra, 6), the sixth, sardius (ch. 4:3, note), the seventh, chrysolith (ת ּ ַ ר ִ ש ׁ ִ י ש ׁ : reff. al. and Josephus thus render it. The stone at present so called is pale green, transparent, and crystallized with shifting colours. But the ancient chrysoliths are described by Pliny as “ aureo fulgore translucentes,” and have been supposed the same as our topaz: or by some, as amber: see Winer, ut supra, 10), the eighth, beryl (ש ׁ ֹ ה ַ ם , ref. Exod.: rendered by the LXX in Genesis 2:12, λίθοςὁπράσινος , and variously in other places. Epiphanius in Wetst. says, βηρύλλιονγλαυκίζωνμένἐστιθαλασσοβαφής , ἔχωνεἶδοςκαὶτῆςὑδαρεστέραςὑακίνθου : and Pliny xxxvii. 20, “ viriditatem puri maris imitantur,” Winer, ut supra, 11), the ninth, topaz (פ ּ ִ ט ְ ד ָ ה , reff. and al. Strabo describes it as διαφανής , χρυσοειδὲςἀπολάμπωνφέγγος , xvi. p. 770, Wetst., where see more testimonies. But Plin. xxxvii. 32, says “ egregia etiamnum to-pazio gloria est, suo virenti genere:” whence some have supposed it our chrysolith: see above. Cf. Job 28:19: and Winer ut supra, 2), the tenth, chrysoprasus (this word is found only in Pliny, xxxvii. 20, “ vicinum genus huic (beryllo) est pallidius, et a quibusdam proprii generis existimatur, vocaturque chrysoprasus:” and 21, “ amethysti fulgens purpura” ), the eleventh, jacinth , the twelfth, amethyst (א ַ ח ְ ל ָ מ ָ ה reff. Pliny, xxxvii. 40, reckons the amethyst among the purple stones, and says of the best, the Indian, “ absolutum felicis purpuræ colorem habent … perlucent autem omnes violaceo colore.” So that it seems to be the stone now known by that name). And the twelve gates, twelve pearls (Isaiah 54:12, “ carbuncles.” Wetst. quotes from the Rabbinical Bava Bathra, f. 75. 1: “ Deus S. B. adducet gemmas et margaritas, triginta cubitos longas totidemque latas: easque excavabit in altitudinem xx cubitorum, et latitudinem x cubitorum, collocabitque eas in portis Hierosolymorum.” See many more in Wetst. and Schö ttgen), each one separately (reff.) of the gates was (made) out of one pearl. And the street (generic: the street-material, throughout) of the city (was) pure gold like transparent glass (see above on ver. 18). And a temple I saw not in it: for the Lord God Almighty is the temple of it, and the Lamb (i. e. the inhabitants need no place of worship or sacrifice, the object of all worship being present, and the great Sacrifice Himself being there). And the city hath not need of the sun nor yet of the moon, that they should shine on her (αὐτῇ , dat. commodi): for the glory of God (the brightness of His presence, the Shechinah: see above, ver. 11) lightened her, and her lamp was the Lamb (see Isaiah 60:19, Isaiah 60:20. No assignment of the members of the sentence must be thought of, such as that ἡδόξατ . θεοῦ is her Sun, and τὸἀρνίον her Moon: so Grot. and Ewald (not De Wette, as Dü sterd., who only thinks that φωτίζειν corresponds to the sun and λύχνος to the moon, but protests against applying these to the divine Persons separately)): and the nations shall walk by means of her light (i. e. she shall be so bright as to serve for light,— for sun and moon both,— to the world that then is, and her inhabitants. For such inhabitants are clearly supposed; see below, and ch. 22:2). And the kings of the earth (no longer hostile to Christ) bring (pres. of habit and certainty, as so often in this prophecy) their (the kings’ , not the nations’ , as ver. 26) glory (cf. Isaiah 60:3: all in which they glory) into her: and her gates shall never be shut by day (i. e. in meaning, shall never be shut, seeing it will always be day: shall never be shut, for if they were, they must be shut by day): for night shall not exist there. And they (men) shall bring the glory and the costliness of the nations into her (Isaiah 66:12. Among the mysteries of this new heaven and new earth this is set forth to us: that, besides the glorified church, there shall still be dwelling on the renewed earth nations, organized under kings, and (ch. 22:2) saved by means of the influences of the heavenly city). And there shall never enter into her, every thing unclean, and working abomination and falsehood, but only (lit. except) they that are written in the book of life of the Lamb (if then the kings of the earth, and the nations, bring their glory and their treasures into her, and if none shall ever enter into her that is not written in the book of life, it follows, that these kings, and these nations, are written in the book of life. And so perhaps some light may be thrown on one of the darkest mysteries of redemption. There may be,— I say it with all diffidence,— those who have been saved by Christ without ever forming a part of his visible organized Church). Ch. 22:1-5. The end of the description: the means of healing for the nations (1, 2): the blessedness, and eternal reign of the glorified servants of God (3-5). And he shewed me a river of water of life, bright as crystal, coming forth out of the throne of God and of the Lamb (which throne is one and the same: see ch. 3:21, and note on ch. 20:11. The O. T. passages in view are Genesis 2:10; Ezekiel 47:1 ff.). In the midst of the street of it (the city), and of the river, on one side and on the other (the gen. ποταμοῦ is governed by ἐνμέσῳ as Ewald and Dü sterd. al., not by ἐντεῦθενκ . ἐκεῖθεν , as De Wette: the meaning being that the trees were on each side in the middle of the space between the street and the river. See Ezekiel 47:7), (was) the tree of life (ch. 2:7; Ezek. ut supra ff., i. e. trees of the kind described: as in Ezek.), producing twelve fruits (kinds of fruit, Ezekiel 47:12), according to each month yielding its fruit (Ezek. ut supra): and the leaves of the tree (are) for healing of the nations for medicine.” On the sense of ἐθνῶν , the nations outside, see above, ch. 21 end). And every curse shall exist no longer (cf. ref. Zech. There shall no more be those accursed things which bar the residence of God among His people: see Joshua 7:12, which shews that these words are in close connexion with what follows): and the throne of God and of the Lamb shall be in her, and His servants shall serve Him (in ministration and holy service, see ch. 7:15), and they shall see His face (be close to Him, and know Him even as they are known, Matthew 5:8), and His name (shall be) on their foreheads (ref.). And night shall not be any more (ch. 21:25), and they shall have no need of the light of a lamp or (and) of the light of the sun (ch. 21:23), because the Lord God shall shine (shed light) upon them: and they shall reign (De Wette well remarks, in a higher sense than in ch. 20:4, 6) to the ages of the ages. 6-21. Concluding assurances and exhortations: and herein, 6, 7, assurance by the angel of the truth of what has been said, in the terms of ch. 1:1. And he (the angel) said to me, These sayings (the whole book, by what follows) are faithful and true (see on reff.): and the Lord (Jehovah) the God of the spirits of the prophets (i. e. of those spirits of theirs, which, informed by the Holy Spirit, have become the vehicles of prophecy) sent His angel to shew to His servants what things must come to pass shortly (on the whole of this see on ch. 1:1, from which place it is repeated at the close of the book of which that is the opening). And behold, I come quickly (the speech passes into the words of Christ Himself, reported by the angel: so in ver. 12, and in ch. 11:3): Blessed is he that keepeth the sayings of the prophecy of this book (the speech is a mixed one: in τοῦβιβλίουτούτου , the Writer has in view the roll of his book now lying all but completed before him: but the words are the saying of the angel: τῆςπροφητείαςταύτης would express it formally). And I John (was he) who heard and saw these things (pres. participles without temporal significance— was the hearer and seer of these things): and when I heard and saw, I fell down (as in ch. 19:10, where see notes) to worship before the feet of the angel who shewed me (pres. part. as above) these things. And he saith to me, Take heed not: I am a fellow-servant of thine, and (a fellow-servant) of thy brethren the prophets, and of those who keep the sayings of this book: worship God (the same feeling again prevailed over the Apostle as before, and is met with a similar rebuke. I hardly can with Dü sterd. see any real distinction implied, in the ἀδελφῶνσουτῶνπροφητῶν here, between the situation of the Seer then and now. D. thinks, the intention now is to exalt his prophetic office and character). And he saith to me, Seal not up the sayings of the prophecy of this book (cf. ch. 10:4, where the command is otherwise: also reff. Daniel): for the time is near (in Daniel 8:26, the reason for sealing up the vision is that the time shall be for many days). Let him that is unjust (pres. part. as above) commit injustice (aor. of acts, not of a state, which would be pres.) still: and let the filthy (reff.: morally polluted) pollute himself (in the constant middle sense of passive verbs when the act depends on a man’ s self) still: and let the righteous do righteousness still, and the holy sanctify himself still . Behold I come quickly, and my reward is with me (reff. Isa.) to render (this infin. may be either of purpose, dependent jointly on ἔρχομαι and ὁμισθ . κ .τ .λ ., or epexegetic of that which is wrapped up in the word μισθός itself. No very satisfactory account is given of this last construction in Winer, edn. 6, § 44. 1) to each as his work is (these words sound as if spoken by our Lord Himself: perhaps at the conclusion, the Apostle puts together, in prophetic shortness, many divine sayings of warning and consolation, with the replies to them). I am the Alpha and the Omega, the first and the last, the beginning and the end (these words have hitherto been said by the Father: see above, ch. 1:8, 21:6, and notes. And in all probability it is so here likewise, whether we assume the words to be spoken by Christ in God’ s name, or by the Eternal Father Himself). Blessed are they that wash their robes (see the digest. The vulg. addition “ in sanguine agni,” after ch. 7:14, is of course the right supplement), that they may have the power (licence) over the tree (to eat of the tree: ἐπί of the direction of their reaching for the fruit) of life, and may enter by the gates into the city. Outside are the dogs (impure persons, reff.), and the sorcerers, and the fornicators, and the murderers, and the idolaters, and every one loving and practising falsehood (see on these, ch. 21:8). I Jesus (our Lord now speaks directly in His own person) sent my angel to testify these things to you in (the ἐπί of addition by juxtaposition, see reff.) the churches. I am the root (reff.) and the race of David, the bright morning-star (that brings in the everlasting day). And the Spirit (in the churches, and in the prophets) and the Bride (the Church herself) say Come (see on ch. 6:1, &c.): and let him that heareth (the cry of the Spirit and Bride) say Come: and let him that thirsteth come; let him that will, take the water of life freely (this verse is best understood as a reply of the Apostle to our Lord’ s previous words). 18-20. Final solemn warning of the Apostle. I (emphatic) testify to every one (or, “ of every one,” by a very common N. T. construction: see reff. for both usages) who heareth the sayings of the prophecy of this book, If any one add (aor. = futurus exactus, shall have added) to them, God shall add to him (lay upon him, as he has laid his own additions upon them: the verb being from ref. Deut., where the plagues of Egypt are threatened to the Israelites in case of their disobedience) the plagues which are written in this book: and if any one shall take away from the sayings of the book of this prophecy, God shall take away his portion from the tree of life (strike out his portion from the aggregate of those of which the whole participation of that tree is made up), and [out of] the holy city, which are written in this book (see Deuteronomy 4:2; Deuteronomy 12:32. The adding and taking away are in the application and reception in the heart: and so it is not a mere formal threat to the copier of the book, as that cited from Irenæ us in H. E. v. 20, ὁρκίζωσετὸνμεταγραψάμενοντὸβιβλίοντοῦτο .… ἵναἀντιβάλῃςὃμετεγράψω , καὶκατορθώσῃς .… All must be received and realized. This is at least an awful warning both to those who despise and neglect this book, and to those who add to it by irrelevant and trifling interpretations). 20, 21. Final assurance of the Lord, and reply of the Apostle on behalf of the Church: and benediction. He who testifieth these things (the Lord Jesus) saith, Yea, I come quickly. Amen (the reply of the Apostle, not the conclusion of our Lord’ s saying), Come, Lord Jesus. The grace of the Lord Jesus be with the saints (i. e. with the church of God. This, the reading of the Codex Sinaiticus, is no where else found as a parting formula).